REPAIR MANUAL DACIA

REPAIR MANUAL
DACIA
RM 524-1 MECHANICS
ENGINE: E7J
GERBOX: JH3
TAPV: B41A, B41B, B41D
The reparation methods prescribed by the manufacturer in the present document are established subject to
technical specifications in force at the document issuing date.
These are subject to modifications brought by the manufacturer at the fabrication of different assemblies,
subassemblies or accessories of its vehicles.
All rights reserved to SC Automobile Dacia SA.
Reproduction or translating even partially of this present document is forbidden without the written
authorisation of AUTOMOBILE DACIA S.A.
Ref: 6001999441
APRIL 2004
vnx.su
English version
0
General poinds vehicle
01 SPECIFICATIONS
Engine – Clutch - Gearbox............................. 01-1
Vehicle identification.. ................................. 01-2
02 LIFTING
Mobile jack - Protection route;....................... 02-1
Elevator positioned under the carriage body... 02-3
03 TOWING
All types.......................................................... 03-1
04 LUBRICANTS CONSUMABLES
Condition....................................................... 04-1
05 DRAINING – FILLING
Engine............................................................ 05-1
Gearbox.......................................................... 05-2
07 VALUES AND SETTINGS
Dimensions..................................................... 07-1
Capacity - Qualities........................................ 07-2
Driving belts tightening and accesories.......... 07-3
Distribution belt tension................................. 07-4
Cylinder head tightening................................ 07-5
Wheeles and tyres........................................... 07-6
Brakes............................................................. 07-7
Dimensions under carriage body.................... 07-8
Checking values of the front axle angles........ 07-9
Checking values of the rear axle angles......... 07-10
1
Moteur et peripherics
10 ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
Ingredients...................................................... 10-1
Motor-propelling group.................................. 10-2
Separation - Dismantling................................ 10-7
Characteristics................................................ 10-10
Recovery engine.............................................10-17
Lowervcrankase..............................................10-37
Oil pump........................................................ 10-38
Tightening moments....................................... 10-39
11 UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
Distribution belt............................................. 11-1
Cylinder head fitting....................................... 11-3
12 FUEL MIXTURE
Characteristics................................................
Clapper body..................................................
Intake colector................................................
Exhaust collector............................................
12-1
12-4
12-5
12-6
13 PUMP SUPPLY
Breaking fuel supply .....................................
Injection pump...............................................
Petrol filter....................................................
Pupm flow......................................................
Supply pressure..............................................
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
14 ANTI-POLLUTION
Petrol vapours-aspiration ............................. 14-1
16 STARTING AND CHARGING
Alternator....................................................... 16-1
Starter............................................................. 16–7
17 IGNITION AND INJECTION
Ignition system.............................................. 17-1
Sparking plugs.............................................. 17-2
Peculiarities.................................. ................ 17-3
Placing of elements........................................ 17-4
Idling regime adjustment............................... 17-9
Adjustment of the fuel mixture enriching...... 17-11
Enriching adaptive correction....................... 17-12
Diagnosing-Introduction... ............................ 17-15
Diagnosing-Interpreting the defects.............. 17-17
Diagnosing-Conformity test........................... 17-49
Diagnosing-Interpreting the states................. 17-55
Diagnosing-breakdown localization
algorithm....................................................... 17–66
19 COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
Characteristics............................................... 19-1
Filling and draining ...................................... 19-2
Control.......................................................... 19-3
The schema.................................................... 19-4
Radiator dismounting and remounting.......... 19-5
Cooling fan replacement
for vehicles with air conditioning................. 19-6
Cooling fan diagnostic
for vehicles with air conditioning................. 19-7
Resistance cooling fan replacement
for vehicles with air conditioning................. 19-9
Cooling fan replacement
for vehicles without air conditioning............ 19-10
Cooling fan diagnostic
for vehicles with air conditioning.................. 19-11
Water pump.................................................. 19-12
Dismounting - remounting exhaust................ 19-14
Emptyng of tank............................................ 19-16
Tank fuel description..................................... 19-17
Tank fuel....................................................... 19-20
Electric petrol pump...................................... 19-21
20 CLUTCH
Identification................................................. 20-1
Diagnostic..................................................... 20-3
Clutch disc mechanism.................................. 20-9
vnx.su
SION
LL
NT
2
Transmission
21 MANUAL GEARBOX
Sections.......................................................... 21-1
Identification................................................. 21-2
Tightening moments...................................... 21-3
Ratios............................................................ 21-4
Capacity, lubricants....................................... 21-5
Particularities................................................. 21-6
Ingredients..................................................... 21-7
Parts of systematic replacement.................... 21-8
Special tools.................................................. 21-9
Gearbox dismounting ................................... 21-10
29 DRIVE SHAFTS
Front transversal transmission........................ 29-1
Bellows - Bearing assembly to
the gearbox.................................................... 29-4
Bellows to wheel........................................... 29-7
Bellows to gearbox....................................... 29-12
Bellows to wheel........................................... 29-15
30 GENERAL
General principle schedule
of the brake circuit........................................ 30-1
Tightening moments...................................... 30-2
Composition and dimensions
of the main braking system elements............ 30-6
Braking system diagnostic............................ 30-7
Brake connections and sewerage.................. 30-12
Brake fluid.................................................... 30-13
Braking circuit purging................................. 30-14
The influence of the front axle angles on
the road behaivior (vehicle comportment)
and on tyres wear........................................... 30-16
Preliminary checking..................................... 30-17
Checking of the front axles adjustment......... 30-19
3
Rear suspension............................................
Shock absorber.............................................
Spring...........................................................
Brake drum...................................................
Brake cylinder..............................................
Brake shoes..................................................
Bearing (25 x 52 x 37)................................
33-4
33-5
33-6
33-7
33-8
33-10
33-12
35 WHEELS AND TYRES
Characteristics.............................................. 35-1
Wheels balancing......................................... 35–4
36 STEERING ASSEMBLY
Axial ball joint.............................................
Steering box.................................................
Pusher...........................................................
Noise absorber bearing.................................
Bellows.........................................................
Deformable lower shaft................................
Steering weel position adjustment................
36-1
36-3
36-4
36-5
36-6
36-7
36-9
37 MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROLS
Brake pump..................................................
Servobrake...................................................
Air filter – servobrake retainer valve...........
Handbrake adjustment..................................
Handbrake control lever...............................
Handbrake secondary cable..........................
Brake flexible hoses.....................................
Brake pressure controller..............................
clutch hydraulic control................................
The gear control...........................................
Pedals support..............................................
Acceleration pedal.......................................
Acceleration control cable...........................
37-1
37-6
37-9
37-10
37-11
37-12
37-14
37-16
37-19
37-23
37-25
37-26
37-27
Chasis
31 FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
Characteristics... .......................................... 31-1
Suspension arm... .......................................... 31-2
Elastic bushings of suspension arm............... 31-4
Suspension ball joint..................................... 31-5
Brake gaskets................................................ 31-6
Brake caliper................................................. 31-7
Brake disk..................................................... 31-9
Steering knuckle............................................ 31-10
Steering knuckle bearing. .............................. 31-12
Front suspension............................................ 31-13
Shock absorber, Sprint. ................................. 31-14
Spring assembly shock absorber................... 31-15
Anti-roll bar................................................... 31-17
33 REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
Characteristics............................................... 33-1
Rear axle....................................................... 33-2
vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
01
ENGINE - CLUTCH - GEARBOX
Vehicle
type
DACIA
SupeRNova
Type
E7J-260
Engin
Cylinder
capacity (cm3 )
1390
01 - 1
vnx.su
Clutch type
Gearbox
type
215 CPOE 3500
JH3 – 050
SPECIFICATIONS
01
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
THE PLACE OF THE MANUFACTURER PLATE, IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN), LABEL WITH HOMOLOGATION MARKS
Identification number VIN
Manufacturer plate
MANUFACTURER PLATE
01 - 2
vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
01
a.. Manufacturer identification code;
b. Code of the vehicle;
c. Gearbox type code;
d. Engine type code and driving location ( according to VIN code structure);
e. Vehicle code;
f. Trailer maximum authorized weight without braking system;
g. Homologation number for the importer country;
h. VIS sign-one character for year model code + 7 characters for the chassis manufacturing number;
i. Maximum technical admissible weight of the loaded car;
j. Maximum admissible weight with trailer with braking system;
k. Maximum technical admissible weight on front axle;
l. Maximum technical admissible weight on rear axle.
LABEL TYPE OVAL PLATE
The self- adhesive label type oval plate is stuck on the right lateral side surface of the
dashboard. This enables the identification of the vehicle type and of its equipment, being exclusively
used for after-sale activity.
The reading of the codes marked on theoval platetype label
Caption:
Line 1
1.1 Cod type auto APV (after-sale):
1,1
2,1
4,1
2,2
4,2
B41A(EU96)
B41B(EU00)
B41D(15.04)
B = represents body type
A,B,D = represents engine type E7J, 1397 cmc, front wheel
drive type, mechanical gearbox.
Line 2
2.1 Level of equipping: E0, E1, E2, E3
2.2 Options equipping code:
Line 4
4.1 Technical definition code, driving place.
S2 : Left hand drive
4.2 Options equipment code:
A: Normal suspension
C: Temperate climate
E: Warm climate
F: Normal heating
G: Air conditioning
K: Without pre-filter
M: Steering mechanical system
R: Without variable shock absorber
T: Without plate corrector
V: Without wheels anti blocking (ABS)
Attention
Do not unstuck or damage the label from the lateral side surface of the dashboard. This
label represents the only way of vehicle identification needed to the after sale services, for a
period of 8 (eight) years from the purchasing date.
01 - 3
vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
01
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
VIN IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Position 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13
14 15
16
17
CODE U
U
1
R
5
2
3
1
5
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Position
Characters explanation
1–3
- manufacturer identification
UU1 - AUTOMOBILE DACIA SA, ROMÂNIA
*
4
- Vehicle type
R - vehicle for persons transportation
5
- engine-gearbox unit location
5 - transversal front engine and front drive
6
- chassis type
2 - hatch – bach
7
- payload location
3 - five places : 2 front places + 3 rear bench places
8
- gearbox type
1 - gearbox with 5 + 1 steps (JH3 050)
9
- engine code and vehicle driving location
- left hand drive
5 - RENAULT engine, 1400 cm3 engine, spark ignition (E7J - 260)
10
- year model code
y – 2000
1 – 2001
2 – 2002
11 - 17
- chassis manufacturing number
01 - 4
vnx.su
LIFTING
MOBILE JACK - PROTECTION ROUTES
02
Safetysign
(particularly cautionsto be observed in caseof an intervention)
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Protectionroute
Cha 280-02
Adjustingsocketon mobile jack
Cha 408-01 or
Cha 408-02
The use of a mobile jack impliesthe necessity of using protectionroutes.
It absolutelyforbiddenthe vehiclelifting using the front suspensionarms or the rear axle as
supportingpoints.
The following type of mobile jack isusing the sockets, the support Cha 408 – 01 or Cha
408 – 02 in order to place the route Cha 280 – 02.
In order to lift the front or rearpart of the vehicle,take as support the liftingpoints used also
for the vehicle jack.
LATERAL MOBILE JACK
Use the CHA 280 hold.
Place it on under the threshold at the front door level.
The floor closingplate shallbe positionedin the channel of the hold.
02 - 1
vnx.su
02
LIFTING
MOBILE JACK - PROTECTION ROUTES
PROTECTION ROUTES
In order to place the vehicleon the protectionroutes, theseare to be obligatory placed either
under the reinforcements provided for the liftingvehiclewith the vehiclejack,or under the supports
placed in behind the reinforcement.
The positioning of the protection routesin the vehicle rearareas is performsby laterallifting of
the vehicle.
02 - 2
vnx.su
LIFTING
ELEVATORPOSITIONED UNDER THE CARRIAGE BODY
02
Safety sign:
1. THE DISMOUNTING OF VEHICLE COMPONENTS CASE .
When there are not availablefour columns elevators, two columnselevators may be used, in
this case,lifting slidesshall be placed under the floor closingplate, at the supporting points level
of the vehiclejack.
2. THE PARTICULARLY CASE OF DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING OF THE
ENGINE-GEARBOX ASSEMBLY.
In this specific case, the vehicle carriage body shall be consolidatedwith the two columns
elevatorarms usingspecialslides.
Front
Rear
Thesemust be obligatory placed at the right of the supporting points of the vehiclejack and
must be locked in the holes/windowsmade in the floor closingplate.
02 - 3
vnx.su
TOWING
ALL TYPES
03
NEVER U SE AS TOWIN G POIN TS, THE TRANSMI SS ION AXLES
(PLANETARYSHAFTS)
The towing points, front, or rear,are to be used only for vehiclestowing on wheels.
These points cannot be anyhow used for drawing out the damaged vehicle from a trench
(hole), or for direct or indirect vehiclelifting on a transport platform.
Front (right)
Rear (left)
03 - 1
vnx.su
LUBRICANTS CONSUMABLES
CONDITIONS
Product
04
Place where it is used
OILING (GREASING)
MOLYKOTE ”BR2”
(LOCTITE 8103)
Front transmissionpinion grooves
Grease
ELF CARDREXA RNT2
Right transmission joint G.I
Transmissionjoint G.E.
Grease
MOLYKOTE 33M
Gearbox control protectionbellows
Grease
Li Ca Pb tip II cu MoS2
Steering rack, pinion,oil sealring( steering box)
SEALING
LOCTITE 518
LOCTITE 5900
(RHODORSEAL 5661)
Water pump
Support thermostat
Crankshaft half crankcase
Gearbox halfcrankcaseassembling
Thread of the reverse driving contact.
Crankshaft no.1 bearing cap
Engine lower crankcase
SOLDERING
LOCTITE 270
(FRENBLOC)
LOCTITE 549
(AUTOFORM)
Nut of primary shaft
Screw of secondary shaft
Speed V fix pinion grooves
Speed V hub grooves
Fly wheelseating surface on the crankshaft
CLEANING
LOCTITE METALLREINIGER
(DECAPJOINT)
Cylinder head gasketsurface cleaning
04 - 1
vnx.su
DRAINING--FILLING
FILLING
DRAINING
ENGINE
Special tools – wrench MOT 1018
DRAINING: plug (1)
FILLING: plug (2)
05 - 1
vnx.su
05
05
DRAINING - FILLING
GEAR BOX
Special tools – wrench MOT 1018
DRAINING: plug (1)
FILLING: plug (2)
05 - 2
vnx.su
VALUES AND SETTINGS
DIMENSIONS , WEIGHTS
DIMENSIONS (mm)
WEIGHTS (kg)
Total length (B)
4030
Total width (G)
1640
Total height (H)
* empty
* with lifted hatchback (H1)
1395
1940
Wheel base (A)
2475
Front wheel track width (E)
1410
Rear wheel track width (F)
1345
Ground clearance (K)
* loaded
134
Hatchback free height (Q)
925
Turning radius
* Between footways
* Between walls
07
4950
5000
07 - 1
vnx.su
Unloaded vehicle weight:
* on the front axle
* on the rear axle
* total
545
405
950
Maximum authorized load
* on the front axle
* on the rear axle
* total
715
670
1385
Authorized payload
425
Load with trailer with own brake
815
Load with trailer without own brake
450
07
VALUES AND SETTINGS
DENOMINATION
CAPACITY - QUALITIES
CHARACTERISTICS
CAPACITY (liters)
(approximate )*
Engine oil DACIA OIL EXTRA SAE 10 W 40; API SJ/CF
2,9*
Gearbox oil
DACIA OIL EXTRAGEAR
SAE 75 W 80 W; API GL 5
3,5
Breaking fluid
SAE J 1703; DOT 4
0,650
Cooling fluid
50% cooling fluid GLACEOL RX tip D
50% distilled water
6
Refrigerant (AC)
HFC – 134 a
0,590 kg
Compressor oil
PAG SP 10 sau SP 20
135 cm3
* To be adjusted at dipstick
07 - 2
vnx.su
VALUES AND SETTINGS
07
DRIVING BELTS TIGHTENING AND ACCESSORIES
SPECIAL TOOLS
MOT 1505 - TENSION CHECKING DEVICE
Compressor belt
Alternator belt
B
D
A
A
A - crankshaft
B - alternator
C - compressor
D - tightener
Control point of tension
Alternator belt tension: 263 Hz +/- 10 %
Compressor belt tension: 222 Hz +/- 10 %
07 - 3
vnx.su
C
07
VALUES AND SETTINGS
DISTRIBUTION BELT TENSION
NECESSARYSPECIAL TOOLS
MOT 1505 - belt tension checking device
MOT 1135 - 01 distribution belt tensioningdevice
DISTRIBUTION BELT TENSIONING
Cold engine (ambient temperature).
Mount the new belt, the distribution being at settingpoint (P.M.S.).
Place the tensioning cam and tighten the distribution belt by means of the MOT 1135-01
device.
Block the tensioning cam.
Place the reading head of the MOT 1505 device in the measuring area ( at a distance of 5…
10 mm from the belt); Any of the two captors may be used on the understandingthat not both of
them are simultaneously in front of the belt.
Make the distribution belt vibrating ( the measurement is validatedby a ”bip” of the device).
Tighten the belt, by acting upon the tensioningcam, until obtaining a value within the range
210…275 Hz.
Block the tightenerand tighten its nut at the required moment of 3 daNm.
Rotate 5 and a half turns the crankshaft.
Unscrew the cam nut.
Tighten again the belt until obtaining a value between145 and 185 Hz.
Obligatory tightenthe tensioningcam nut at 5 daNm.
NOTE
If the value is higher than 275 Hz, the distribution belt isto be replaced with a new one.
07 - 4
vnx.su
VALUES AND SETTINGS
CYLIDER HEAD TIGHTENING
07
CYLINDER HEAD TIGHTENING METHOD
1.Cylinder head pre-settling
Tighten all screws at the required moment of 2 daNm, than at 97 grd +/- 2 grd as per
sequenceshown in the drawing.
Wait 3 minutes, stabilization time.
2. Cylinder head tightening
Unscrew the screws 1 – 2 until total releasing.
Tighten the screws 1 – 1 at the required moment 2 daNm, than at 97 grd +/- 2 grd.
Repeat thetightening/unscrewing operationfor the groups of screws 3-4-5-6than 7 – 8 – 9 10.
The cylinder head cannot be re tightened.
07 - 5
vnx.su
07
VALUES AND SETTINGS
WHEELS ANDTYRES
VEHICLE
RIMS
TIRES
DACIA
SUPERNOVA
5,5B x13
5,5 Jx13H2
165 / 70 R 13
PRESSURE
(daN/cm2)
FRONT
1,9
Tightening moments of the wheels nuts 7.5 daNm.
Axial run out : max 1 mm
Radial run out : max 1 mm
07 - 6
vnx.su
REAR
2,0
VALUES AND SETTINGS
07
BRAKES
The width of brakedisk and drumsdiameter(mm)
Front
Vehicle
DACIA
SupeRNova
Rear
The maxim axial run out
of disk
Normal
Minim
Normal
Maxim
Front
Rear
20
19
228
229
0,1
-
The thicknessof gaskets(mm)
Front
Vehicle
DACIA
SupeRNova
Rear
Brake fluid
Normal
Minim
Normal
Minim
14
7
5
0,5mm
abovethe rivets
07 - 7
vnx.su
SAEJ 1703 DOT 4
07
VALUES AND SETTINGS
DIMENSIONS UNDER CARRIAGE BODY
DIMENSIONS UNDER CARRIAGE BODY CONDITIONING
ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS OF THE STEERING ANGLES
H5
H1, H4 - distance between the wheel center to the ground.
H2 - distance from the girder lower part at the ground to the front wheels axis level.
H5 - distancefrom the attachment screw axis of the rear axle arm, to the ground
07 - 8
vnx.su
VALUES AND SETTINGS
CHECKING VALUES OF THE FRONT AXLEANGLES
ANGLES
VALUES
07
POSITION OF ADJUSTMENTS
THEFRONTAXLE
CAMBERANGLES
CASTERANGLES
TRANSVERSAL BALL JOI
NT
ANGLE
2 0 +/- 30’
Maximum difference
between left wheel H5 - H2 = 20 mm
at half load
camber angle and
0
the right one = 1
Not adjustable
0 0 +/- 30’
Maximum difference
between left wheel H1 - H2 = 80 mm
- at half load
caster angle and the
0
right one = 1
Not adjustable
12045’ +/- 30’
Maximum difference H1 - H2 = 80 mm
- at half load
between left wheel
ball joint transversal
angle and the right
one = 1 0
PARALLELISM
Toe in 0 - 2 mm lat
half load or 1 +/- 1
mm
H1 - H2 = 80 mm
- at half load
TIGHTENING POSITION
OF
THEELASTICBUSHINGS
H1 - H2 = 80 mm
- at half load
07 - 9
vnx.su
Not adjustable
Adjustable by
rotating the tie
rod of the steering rod; one rotation 1 tur = 15’
(1,5 mm)
VALUES AND SETTINGS
07
CHECKING VALUES OF THE REAR AXLE ANGLES
ANGLES
VALUES
REAR AXLE
POSITION
ADJUSTMENTS
0 0 ... 00 30’
Release
Not adjustable
1 +/- 0,5 mm
Release
Not adjustable
CAMBER ( nega
tive)
PARALLELISM
( toe in )
TIGHTENING POSITION
OF THE ELASTIC
BUSHINGS
H4 - H5 = 20
For the values checking of the front axle angles, consequently the rear axle angles, the vehicle
must:
- to be placed with the wheels on the rotating plates ( of the bench ) being in horizontal plane;
- to ensure its braking;
- to check its suspension for vehicle setting at its free height;
- to compress its front axle at half loading ( by means of the compressing device DIR 500);
- to check its suspension for vehicle setting at its free position;
- steering brought at middle point and the steering box blocked in this position;
These operations are followed by the optical device attachment on the vehicle, observing the
instructions of the steering angles checking bench manufacturer.
07 - 10
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
10
INGREDIENTS
INGREDIENTS
TYPE
ORGANS
Engine oil DACIA OIL EXTRA
10 W40; APISJ/CF
Engine oiled
RHODORSEAL 5661
Lower casing, crankshaft bearing cap
Exhaust Pipe Paste
Crankshaft pulley screws, flywheel
screws
Exhaust pipe sealing
Loctite 518
Water-pump, thermostat stand, crankshaft closing end casing
Loctite AUTOFORM
Flywheel face for mounting on crankshaft
Decapjoint
Cylinder head gasket surface cleaning
Loctite FRENETANCH
IDENTIFICATION
Type /
Mark
Engine
Gearbox Cylinder Cylinder Stroke Volumetric Depollution
capacity Bore
(mm)
Ratio
Norm
(mm)
(cm3)
SupeRNova E7J -A-2/60 JH3 - 050
1390
75,8
77
9,5/1
EURO 3
E7J-260-MB
Identification is done by means of a plate located on the cylinder casing.
It includes:
A: type of engine
B: engine approval letter
D: identity RENAULT
E: index of engine
G: engine mounting plant
F: engine manufacturing serial number
A BD E
000 0 0 / 00
0 000000
G
EURO 2
F
10 - 1
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
MOTOR-PROPELLING GROUP
COUPLES FOR SCREW-FIXING (daNm)
Screws for fixing right-side stand on engine
6,2
Hydro-elastic buffer attachment nut
3,7
Screw-nut for left-side elastic buffer
6,2
Wheel screws
7,5
Screws for fixing motor-propelling group-battery stand
2,1
Screw-nut for fixing small connecting rod on steering traverse 6,2
Screw for fixing anti-swing connecting rod on gearbox case 10,5
Control bars attachment screw on gearbox connecting rods
2,7
Dismounting and re-mounting the motor-propelling group is done at the upper part of the
engine compartment by means of a moving lifting device.
DISMOUNTING
Car is placed on a lift-stand with two columns;
The following are taken down: battery, airfilter case, engine bonnet, front wheels;
Oxygen probe connector is taken off;
Dismantle: thermic protection screen, catalytic converter on the exhaust collector;
The following are evacuated:
-the coolingcircuitatthebottom part
oftheradiator;
-theoil in thegearbox;
-the oil in the engine,ifnecessary.
The following are taken down:
-engineshield;
-the screws thatfasten the catalytic
converter onthe stand;
-the pipe-collarbetweenthe catalytic
converterand the trigger;
-the catalyticconverter;
-the anti-swing auxiliary connecting
rod.
10 - 2
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
MOTOR-PROPELLING GROUP
Disconnect the wiring connector from the
reverse driving contact.
The right-side planetary transmission is uncoupled as follows:
-the brake-stirrup set is dismantled;
-disconnect the wire for the brake pads
wear indicator;
-the two screws for fixing the shockabsorber of the steering-swivel stand are taken
off;
10
The following are disconnected:
-connector 1 from the UCE injection
(pull flap 2, then disconnect);
2
1
-the front cabling of the engine;
-the connector of the shock-sensor;
-the ventilator connector;
-the mass wire on the gearbox.
The battery protection screen is dismantled.
The steering-swivel stand is tipped up and
the planetary transmission is taken out from
the planetary pinion of the gearbox;
The left-side planetary transmission is uncoupled as follows:
-the steering-swivel screw-nut is dismantled;
-the screws for fixing the planetary
transmission on the gearbox are taken off;
-the brake-stirrup set is dismantled;
-the electric wire of the wear-and-abrasion light-indicator is taken off;
-the two screws for fixing the shockabsorber of the steering-swivel stand are taken
off;
-the steering-swivel stand is tipped up
and the planetary transmission is taken out;
The fuse-box in the engine compartment
is dismantled.
The following are taken off:
-the linking pipes coming from the radiator, by using the pincers for elastic pipecollars MOT.1202-01B;
-the linking pipes coming from the degassing vessel, by using the pincers for elastic pipe-collars MOT.1202-01B;
-the pipes for air-conditioning coming
from the thermostat stand and the water-pipe;
10 - 3
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
MOTOR-PROPELLING GROUP
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
-the linking pipes coming from the carbon
canister and the canister-draining valve;
-the fuel supply pipes (both the going- and
the return one) from the injection ramp, by
using MOT.1311-06;
-the hydraulic command conduit of the
clutch; fastener 1 is taken out and supply pipe
2 is withdrawn in the direction shown by the
arrow.
The screw linking the gear-bar and the
auxiliary connecting rod to the gearbox is
dismantled.
The following are uncoupled:
-the end of acceleration cable 1 from
the command lever of the clapper; it is then
extracted off muff 2 in the stand;
-the mileage cable: the two clamps are
pressed, and the cable is extracted;
-the right-side headlight adjustment
cable, which is then positioned by the car
bodywork;
10 - 4
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
MOTOR-PROPELLING GROUP
10
The Motor-Propelling set is upheld by
the two handles, by means of a moving
lifting device (a mobile crane);
The four screws fixing the Motor-Propelling set battery stand are taken off, as well
as the screw-nut of the elastic buffer;
The Motor-Propelling set is taken out and
then placed on a stand.
The screw-nut of the hydro-elastic
buffer is taken off (right);
Re-Mounting
The steps are taken in the reverse order (see dismantling / taking apart).
To do:
-the filling-up and the drainage of the cooling circuit (see Chapter “Filling-up and
Draining”).
CAUTION!
USE ONLY TYPE D ANTIFREEZE.
- filling-up the engine and the gearbox with oil;
- filling-up and draining the clutch hydraulic command circuit (see Chapter “Draining
of the clutch hydraulic command circuit”);
The liquid to use is brake fluid type SAE J 1703, DOT 3, DOT 4.
The screws and the screw-nuts of the couple are fastened back.
When mounting, line up markings from hoses and related parts.
10 - 5
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
MOTOR-PROPELLING GROUP
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
ADDITIONAL DIRECTIONS FOR AIR-CONDITIONED CARS
DISMOUNTING
The Freon in the air-conditioning circuit is emptied.
The compressor-coming conduits are dismantled.
RE-M OUNTING
The dismantling (taking apart) operations are done in the reverse order.
The screw fixing the compressor conduits to the couple is fastened (1.2 daNm).
The air-conditioning circuit is filled (0,61 kg) with HFC 134 a refrigerating agent.
(see chap. Conditioned air).
10 - 6
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
SEPARATION - DISMANTLING
SEPARATION ENGINE - GEARBOX
Rotation sensor 2 is taken off;
The electric connections of the starter are undone;
The starter is taken off;
Electric connector 1 of the backwards motion contactor is taken off;
The engine cabling fastening to the gearbox is dismantled;
The screws and screw-nuts of the gearbox assembly are taken off;
RE-ASSEMBLY ENGINE - GEARBOX
The separation operations are executed in the reverse order;
The screws and screw-nuts are tightened onto the couple.
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Rotation sensor
Screws of the starter
Fixing the gearbox onto the engine:
- screw-nuts M 10
- screws M 10 - 90
- screws M 10 - 35
10 - 7
vnx.su
0,8
4,4
4,4
4,4
2,1
10
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
SEPARATION - DISMANTLING
ENGINE DISMMOUNTING
The following are taken off:
-the alternator and its belt;
-the induction coil and the plugs of the
sparks;
-the pipe of the oil-level indicator;
-the mechanism of the clutch disc.
The electric connectors are taken off and
the engine cabling is dismantled.
Then the following are taken off:
-the clapper body;
-the injection ramp;
-the intake collector;
-the thermic screen and the exhaust collector;
-the water intake pipe;
-the thermostat stand;
Pentru automobilele echipate cu instalaie
de aer conndiºionat se demomonteazã:
- rola de întindere, prin desfacerea
ºuruburilor F ºi G;
- cureaua compresorului;
- conectorul electric al compresorului;
- compresorul;
- suportul compresorului ºi suportul
intermediar.
10 - 8
vnx.su
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
SEPARATION - DISMANTLING
10
ENGINE MOUNTING
The dismantling (taking apart) operations are done in the reverse order;
The screws and screw-nuts are tightened to the couple.
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Fixing the alternator:
-M 10-125 screw
-M 10-35 screw
Clutch mechanism
Intake collector
Exhaust collector
Fixing the compressor
Compressor stand
Intermediate stand
Stretching spool
5
2,1
2
2,,5
2,5
4
4
2
2
IT IS COMPULSORY TO CHANGEALL THEDISMANTLED FITTINGS!
10 - 9
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
CHARASTERISTICS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
COMBUSTION HEAD
The combustion head is not restricted. Adjustment of rocker arms is done only in cool
mode, and only when there are engine interventions which have aninfluence on their play.
The adjustment values are:
-for intake: 0.10
-for exhaust: 0.25
Combustion head height
113 +/- 0,05 mm
Maximum distortion of the plane of the fitting
No rectification is authorized
0,05 mm
Volume chambers (with valves and spark plugs)
26,25 cm3+/-0,6
Couple of spark plug tightening
2,5 - 3 daNm
VALVES
Diameter of base
7 mm
Angle of sealing face
-intake
-exhaust
Diameter of platter
-intake
-exhaust
1200
900
37,5+/-0,1 mm
33,5+/-0,1 mm
10 - 10
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CHARASTERISTICS
10
VALVE STOOLS
Angle of sealing face (a)
-intake
-exhaust
1200
900
Length of sealing face (x)
-intake
1,7+/-0,1mm
-exhaust
1,7+/-0,1mm
Outer diameter (D)
-intake
-exhaust
38,5 mm
34,5 mm
VALVE GUIDES
The intake and the exhaust guides are equipped with oil-sealings, which have to be
replaced for every dismantling (taking apart) of the valves.
Inner diameter
7 mm
Outer diameter
12 mm
Position in relation to the side of the
spring placement on the combustion head:
-intake (A)
-exhaust (E)
12,34 mm
12,34 mm
Înclinarea faã de verticalã (b)
170
10 - 11
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
CHARASTERISTICS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
THE SPRING OF THE VALVES
They are identical for both intake and exhaust.
Length when free (mm)
44,93
Length under load at:
-27 daNm
- 53,6 daNm
- 65 daNm
37
27,6
Length of whirls - when joined together (mm)
26,01
Whirl diameter (mm)
4
Inner diameter (mm)
21,5
CAM SHAFT
Axial play (mm)
0,06 - 0,15
Number of bearings
5
Distribution diagram:
-advance of intake opening
-delay of intake closing
-advance of exhaust opening
-delay of exhaust closing
10 - 12
vnx.su
-50
350
410
-50
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CHARASTERISTICS
PISTONS
The bolt is steady in the connecting rod
and loose in the piston.
Direction of mounting: with the arrow towards the flywheel.
There are three classes of association with
the jacket.
Markings on the pistons:
1 - arrow towards the flywheel
2 - class of piston (A-B-C)
3 - line-up marks used by the supplier.
Piston
line-up
marks
A
Piston diameter (mm)
Jacket diameter (mm)
75,765 - 75,775*
75,8 - 75,75,81*
B
75,775 - 75,785*
75,81 - 75,82*
C
75,785 - 75,795
75,82 - 75,83
* - the respective values are not included in the classes
The piston diameter is measured for the
mark:
A = 46 mm.
10 - 13
vnx.su
10
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CHARASTERISTICS
BOLTS
Length (mm)
60
Outer diameter (mm)
19
Inner diameter (mm)
11
CYLINDER JACKETS
They are of the type: movable, wet.
The seal fitting is the type: rubber ring J.
Inner diameter (mm)
Jacket height(mm) H2
Centring diameter (mm) D
75,8 + 0,03
130
80,6
Extra height without a fitting (mm)
X
0,02-0,09
+ 0,035
Jacket height (mm) H1
91,5 + 0,005
Depth in the cylinder
crank-case K1
91,5 - 0,055
- 0,015
10 - 14
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CHARASTERISTICS
10
RINGS
Thickness (mm):
-compression ring
1,5
-sealing ring
1,75
- oiling ring (scraper)
3
CONNECTING RODS
The horizontal play of the connecting rod end: from 0.310 to 0.572
CAUTION!
Do not use numbering punchers because of the risk of creating the beginning of fissures. Use an indelible pen.
CRANKSHAFT
Number of bearings
5
Bearing diameter (mm)
- nominal: 54,795 +/- 0,01
- repair:
54,550 +/- 0,005
Crankpin diameter (mm)
- nominal:
43,98 -0,02
- repair:
0
43,73 -0,02
Axial play (mm)
0
- 0,045 - 0,852 cu uzurã
- 0,045 - 0,252 fãrã uzurã
In case a rectification is made, the
runner course must remain the same along
at least 140o out of the bearing and crankpin
circumference.
These areas are defined in sections A
and B as shown in the adjoined scheme.
10 - 15
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
CHARASTERISTICS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
OIL PUMP
The amount of oil to be introduced in the
engine is 2.7 liters - without replacing theoilfilter - or 2.9 liters, after replacing the filter.
* TO BE ADJUSTED TO THE GAUGE
The minimum oil pressure at 80o is:
-in the idle mode
1 bar
-at 4000 rot/min
3 bar
The oil pump belongs to the “gearwheel”
type.
Take off the cap and also the clapper of
the oil-pump.
* play B (mm):
- min. 0.02
- max. 0.86.
To check:
* play A (mm):
- min. 0.110
- max. 0.294
CAUTION!
Protect the distribution and alternator belt in order to avoid wateror cleaning substance projection on them.
10 - 16
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
DISMOUNTING AND RE-MOUNTING
THE CYLINDER HEAD
10 - 17
vnx.su
10
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CYLINDER HEAD
DISMOUNTING
The oil and the cooling fluid are empties.
To be taken off:
-the electric connections;
-the alternator and its belt;
-the pulley of the crankshaft (in order to do that, the flywheel is blocked with the
MOT 582 device)
-the protection cap of the distribution belt
10 - 18
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
The engine is brought to the tuning point, by aligning the line-up mark on the crankshaft
pinion L with the fixed marks M (the L mark is held with the cams upwards).
The screw-nut of the stretching runner is undone, then the belt is taken off.
(1) The stretching direction of the stretcher.
10 - 19
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CYLINDER HEAD
DISMOUNTING
The following are to take off:
-the cylinder head cap;
-the intake and exhaust collectors;
-the cylinder head screws, except the
screw where the centring jack is; this one
is only loosened;
-the cylinder head is revolved round
the screw which was left in place;
-the cylinder head is taken off;
-the jacket-maintaining device MOT.484 - is mounted.
-the oil-sealing of the cam-shaft;
-the flange of the cam-shaft;
-the pinion of the cam-shaft, which is
blocked with MOT 799 - 01;
-the cam-shaft;
-the stand of the thermostat;
-the sparking plugs;
-the springs of the valves;
-the valves;
-the oil-seals of the valves, by using the
MOT. 1335 pincers.
The cylinder head is cleaned of the fitting which is left stuck to it.
MOT. 484
.
To be mounted:
-the rocker arm ramp:
It is very important not to get the positionin g surface of the fittings
scratched.
Use Decapjoint to remove the remains
of fittings that are left stuck.
The above product is applied on the
cleaning area; wait ca. 10 minutes, then
clean by means of a wooden spatula.
10 - 20
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
CYLINDER HEAD
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Avoid introducing foreign bodies
into the oil grooves and tubes; you may
risk blocking up theholes of therocker
arms and rapidly deteriorating the
cams and the gliding parts of the
rocker-arms.
They must have the same line-up
marking (8) as the old ones in order
to avoid the destruction of the valve stool set.
The checking of the planeness of the
cylinder head is to be done with a ruler
and a set of thickness gauges
-the springs no. 5 are identical for
both intake and exhaust;
-caps no. 6;
Compress springs no. 5, then mount the
semi-cones no. 7, which are identical for
both intake and exhaust.
Maximumdistortion allowed: 0.05 mm.
No rectification of the combustion head
is authorized.
RE-M OUNTING
Oil all the parts.
Mount the valve oil-seal rings no. 2 by
means of a tubular-wrench of 11 size onto
the valve guides no. 3;
Mount in the following order:
-the washers no. 1 at the base of the
valve springs;
-the new valves no. 4.
10 - 21
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CYLINDER HEAD
RE-M OUNTING
Oil the cam-shaft.
Mount the cam-shaft and its flange.
Check the axial play, which has to be
within 0.06 mm and 0.15 mm; in case it
does not fit, check the flange or the camshaft.
-the thermostat stand.
For watertight sealing, use Loctite 518.
Girdle H must be 0.6mm up to 1 mm
thick; it is applied in keeping with the following schema:
To mount:
-camshaft annular oil seal by
means of the MOT 1127-01 device;
-the pinion of the cam-shaft is fixed
with the MOT 799-01 device, then the
thread and the end of the screw are oiled
and the screw is tightened at 4.5 daNm.
10 - 22
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
10 - 23
vnx.su
10
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
DISMOUNTING
The following are dismounting:
-the water conduit and the oil-levelgauge guide; their watertight sealing is
done with rubber rings which must be replaced for every dismantlement;
-the clutch;
-the engine flywheel, blocked by
means of MOT 582;
-the lower crankcase;
-the pinion of the crankshaft;
-the stretching runner/pulley;
-the water-pump;
To be taken off:
-the caps of the connecting rod and
the bushes;
-the jacket-maintaining device;
the jacket-piston-rod set;
-the bearing caps and their bushing;
-the shaft and the axial play bushes;
-the bushes on the block.
The axes of the pistons are taken apart.
The piston is placed on its stand, after
positioning the piston bolt (axis) with the
release hole (two lines T for position-finding the centre of the hole will make alignment easier).
The bolts are taken off in a pressingmachine by means of the E extraction
-the oil-pump
Perform connecting rods caps
identification in regards to connecting rod
body.
CAUTION!
Do not use punchers for lineup marking in order to avoid fissures; use an indelible pen.
10 - 24
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
Re-Mounting
Clean the crankcase, especially the
jacket-sealing part.
Preparation of the piston-and-jacket set
The parts supplied in the collection are
matched.
Do the line-up marking of the set, from
A to D, in order to keep theparts matched.
Remove completely the anti-rust film;
never erase the parts.
These engines are equipped with rubber rings for jacket watertight-sealing;
these rings ensure only watertight-sealing condition. The jackets lean directly
against the cylinder crankcase; extra
height X is achieved by the manufacturer.
The checking-up of the jacket extraheight is done in the following way:
-the jackets are place din the block
without their sealing-ring;
-extra-height X is checked by
means of the MOT.251 and MOT.252-01
devices.
10 - 25
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
RE-M OUNTING
The jacketsare positionedsuch a way as:
-the difference between two successive jackets should be max. 0.05 mm;
-the extra-height should be placed in
ascending order between cylinders 1 and 4.
In order to heat the connecting rods an
electric range of 1 500 W is used.
-the extra-height X must be within
0.02 mm and 0.09 mm;
-in case there is an erroneous extraheight, it is checked again by means of a
new set of jackets in order to see whether
the cause is the block or the jacket; if not,
check the theoretical values of both the
block and the jackets.
The A, B, C, D set is done over with
the correct extra-height obtained, then the
jackets, the bolts and the pistons are numbered from 1 to 4 (no. 1 towards the flywheel), so that the concordance with the
corresponding connecting rods is found.
The axes of the pistons are mounted by
means of the MOT 574-22 device.
The axes of the pistons are fixed in the
rod, and loose in the pistons.
Check if the axes of the pistons slide
freely in the new corresponding pistons.
The axis of piston E is mounted on the
mounting axis A.
The C centring device is screwed up to
the end and then unscrewed a quarter of a
rotation.
10 - 26
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
The arrow marked by the end of the
piston must be directed towards the
flywheel.
The connecting rods do not have a
mounting direction, but the spurs of the
semi-bushes will be positioned on the same
side.
For the assembly of the piston and the
connecting rod, the following directions
will be observed:
-jack B13 is set onto the stand and the piston (with the arrow pointing upwards) is
fixed on the jack;
-the centring device and the axis of
the piston are oiled with motor oil;
-the free sliding of the piston axis is
checked, as well as the positioning of the
piston.
When the base of the connecting rod
reaches the needed temperature (ca. 250o),
the speedy mounting of the piston axis
should be done in the following manner:
-the centring guide is introduced in
the piston;
-the rod is positioned in the piston;
-the piston axis is pressed up to the
end.
It should be checked if the piston axis
remains retracted as to the outer diameter
of the piston for any position of the connecting rod in the piston.
The rings are mounted:
-the oiling ring;
-the watertight-sealing ring (with the
“TOP” mark pointing upwards);
-the compression ring (with the “TOP”
mark pointing upwards).
The slits of the rings being adjusted, they
shall never be altered; they are oiled and the
rings are positioned; the slit of the oiling ring
willbe placed oppositea full part of its channel.
The “rod-piston-ring” sets are mounted
in the cylinder jackets by using the
mounting jack.
The watertight-sealing fittings are
mounted onto the cylinder jackets.
10 - 27
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
The set is mounted in the crankcase in the
previously established order, and it is made
sure that a 0.1 mm-long wedge passes
between the jackets
The jackets are blocked by means of
MOT.484 stand.
Identification of matching classes on
crankshaft is done by marking on the
counter-balance from number 5 bearing
liner.
Crankshaft marking example :
A
A
B
A
B
Mount connecting-rod bearings
(connecting rod bearings are identical).
The crankpins and the bearings are
oiled.
The bearing caps are mounted. On no.
1 cap (in the K area) a thin layer of
RHODORSEAL 5661 is applied.
MOT. 484
Take up the bearings of bearing on the housing
cylinders. Half-be aring liners that are to be
mounted on crankshaft bearing are provided with
oiling holes.
Be a ring liners a re ma tchning with the
crankshaft in two classes, as follows :
The screws are tightened at 2.5 daNm,
and then at an angle of 43o +/-6o .
The axial play of the crankshaft is
checked; it must be within:
* 0.045 and 0.852 with wear;
* 0.045 and 0.252 without wear.
Marking on bearing linersMarking on crankshaft
A
Red
Blue
B
10 - 28
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
THE CYLINDER CRANKCASE
-the front cap of the crankshaft; the
watertight-sealing is done with LOCTITE
518 (the girdle must be 0.6 - 1mm thick);
-the oil-seal ring on no. 1 bearing by means of MOT 1129 - 01.
The brim and the outer part of the oilseal ring are oiled.
The axial bushes can have: 2.80 mm,
2.85 mm, 2.90 mm, 2.95 mm.
The rod caps are mounted and tightened
at 4.2 daNm.
To check:
-the horizontal play of the rods;
-the rotation of the whole set.
To mount:
-the oil-pump (check the existence
of the centring jacks); the screws are tightened at 2.5 daNm;
-the pinion and the carrying chain of
the oil-pump;
-the oil-seal ring on the front cap
(which is oiled), by means of the MOT
550 device;
550
10 - 29
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
LOWER CASE
RE-MOUNTING
Mount the lower casing and tighten the screws at a moment of 1daNm.
The watertight-sealingis done with RHODORSEAL 5661; girdle D must be 3 mm thick.
Do not forget to replace the two crescent-shaped fittings (in the A area) with new
ones.
-the flywheel: beforehand oil the face for the placing of the flywheel on the crankshaft, using LOCTITE AUTOFORM; apply on the screws one drop of LOCTITE
FRENETANCH and tighten them at 5 - 5.5 daNm, after having blocked the flywheel
by means of the cogged sector MOT 582.
-the clutch (be cautious about the centring): screws are tightened at 2 daNm;
-the water-pump (the watertight-sealing is done with LOCTITE 518, the H girdle
must be of 0.6 - 1 mm). The screws are tightened at a couple of 1 - 2 daNm.
THIS OPERATION IS ALSO VALID IN CASE THE CRANKCASE IS REMOUNTED ON THE CAR (SEE PAGE 10-36)
10 - 30
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
CYLINDER HEAD RE-MOUNTING
.
The following are to be mounted:
-the jack for cylinder-head centring
on the block;
-the new cylinder-head fitting;
-the cylinder-head (after the stand
has been taken apart); the joining surface
cylinder crankcase- cylinder-head is carefully cleaned;
-the cylinder-head screws (whose
threads and screw-ends are oiled).
-the operation of loosening and
tightening is repeated for the screw groups
3-4-5-6-, then for 7-8-9-10.
The cylinder head is not restricted.
To be mounted subsequently:
-the rocker-arm ramp, by positioning marking no. 1 on the axis towards the
distribution;
THE METHOD OF TIGHTENINGT
THE CYLINDER-HEAD
1. Pre-compressing the fitting
-all the screws are tightened at 2
daNm, then at 97 o +/-2 o, in the order below:
-wait for 3
stabilization delay.
minutes - the
2. Combustion-head tightening
-screws 1 - 2 are loosened till they
are totally free;
-screws 1 -2 are tightened at 2
daNm, then at 97o +/-2o ;
Screws no. 2 are tightened at
2.3 daNm, but nor before oiling the
threads.
-the cylinder-head cap, without tightening it (in order to be able then to set/
tune the distribution);
-the pinion of the crankshaft.
10 - 31
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
DISTRIBUTION
10 - 32
vnx.su
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
DISTRIBUTION
On the back of the belt there is an arrow
indicatingthe direction of rotation, and two
tuning marks;
-the L line-up marks on the crankshaft pinion are aligned with the fixed mark M;
(the mark on the pinion of the cam-shaft in
down)
CAUTION!
The pinion of the cam-shaft
can have five line-up marks: it is only
the rectangular-shaped mark on the
face of a cog that represents the Upper Centre Point, all the others serving to adjust the rocker arms.
-the marks on the belt are aligned
with those on the pinions, observing the
direction of mounting and beginning from
the pinion of the crankshaft;
-the captor of the MOT 1505 apparatus is placed (held in the position indicated in the schema) at 5-10 mm to the
belt.
Any of the two captors can be used on
condition the two of them should not be
placed simultaneously in front of the belt.
The distribution belt is set in vibration (the
measurement is validatedby a beep of the apparatus).
-the belt is stretched by operating the
stretching runner/pulley, until a value within
210 and 275 Hz is obtained;
-the stretching device is blocked, an
d its
screw-nut is tightened at 3 daNm;
-the crankshaft is wound 5 1/2 rotations
(no. 2 cylinder in the position of rocker-arm
adjustment);
-the screw-nut of the runner/pulley is
stretched until a value between 145 and 185
Hz is obtained.
CAUTION!
If the value of 275 Hz is exceeded, the belt can no longer be used,
and it has to be changed.
-the 0 screw-nut of the runner/pulleyis tightened at 5 daNm.
If not, this may get dismounted, risking the
engine damaging.
GENERAL DIRECTIONS
The stretching of the belt should only be done
for the cold engine mode (i.e. ambient temperature);
-a belt which has been taken off must not be remounted - it will have to be replaced by anew one.
10 - 33
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
10
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
ADJUSTMENT OF ROCKER-ARMS
It is done only for the cold engine mode.
The adjustment values are:
-intake
0.10 mm
-exhaust
0.25 mm
1. Cam-Shaft pinion without line-up marks
a) The method called “in balance”
The cylinder rocker-arms are adjusted
The cylinder valves in balance (end of
exhaust; start of intake)
1
4
3
2
4
1
2
3
b) The method called “exhaust valve opened to the maximum”
The engine is wound (clockwise, as seen from the distribution) till the exhaust valve
of cylinder no. 1 reaches maximum opening, and the play is adjusted for the intake
valve of cylinder no. 3, and also for the exhaust valve of cylinder no. 4.
The same is done for the other cylinders, as in the chart:
Exhaust valve open to the
maximum
Intake valve to be adjusted
Exhaust valve to be adjusted
1
3
4
3
4
2
4
2
1
2
1
3
10 - 34
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
RECOVERY ENGINE
10
ADJUSTMENT OF ROCKER-ARMS
2. Cam-Shaft pinion with line-up marks:
The engine is wound until it reaches the Upper center point (cylinder no. 1 at
ignition), then further up to the first line-up mark.
-what is adjusted: exhaust 1
exhaust 3
-for the second mark:
-what is adjusted: intake 1
intake 3
-for the third mark:
-what is adjusted: exhaust 2
exhaust 4
-for the fourth mark:
-what is adjusted: intake 2
intake 4
10 - 35
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
RECOVERY ENGINE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
After the tuning of the distribution and the adjustment of the rocker-arms, the
following are further re-mounted:
-the cylinder-head cap, fitted with a new fitting; the screws are tightened at 1 daNm;
-the water-intake conduit and the oil-level gauge guide (with new watertightsealing rings);
-the cap of the distribution;
-the pulley of the crankshaft; the screw is first tightenedat 2 daNm, then at 68o+/-6 o.
CAUTION!
If the screw is not duly tightened, it can come undone, which can result in the oilpump not being operated and the distribution being disrupted, thus causing serious
damage to the engine.
-the intake and exhaust collectors: the screws are tightened at 2.5 daNm;
-the belt(s) of accessories: the same methodas that for the distribution belt isused.
The stretching values are:
* alternator belt
* Air-Comditioning (A.C) compressor belt
10 - 36
vnx.su
263+/-10Hz
222+/-10Hz.
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
LOWER CRANKCASE
10
LOWER CRANKCASE MOUNTED ON THE CAR
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Screws for fixing at front of motor-propelling frame
6.2
Screws for fixing at back of motor-propelling fram
10.2
Lower crankcase screws
1
Screws for fixing steering wheel lower axis
1.4
Screws of wheel
7.5
Screw of the ball-and-socket joint
5.5
Screw-nut of the steering ball-and-socket joint
3.5
Screw for fixing anti-swing auxiliary connecting rod (on frame) 6.2
Screw for fixing anti-swing auxiliary connecting rod (on gearbox) 10.5
DISMOUNTING
The car is placed on a lifting stand with
two columns;
The battery is disconnected;
The engine is emptied of oil;
The engine-shield is taken apart;
To take apart:
-front wheels;
-screw-nut for fixing the lower steering wheel axis on the pinion of the steering case;
-the steering ball-and-socket joints
and the arm ball-and-socket joints;
-side clearance devices;
-thermic protection screen;
-catalytic converter;
-front bumper bar;
-anti-swing auxiliary connecting rod.
The screws for fixing the motor-propelling
set frame are taken apart, and the frame is
lowered;
The lower crankcase is taken apart.
RE-M OUNTING
The lower crankcase is cleaned.
A ca. 3 mm-thick girdle of RHODERSEAL
5661 is applied, as in the adjoining drawing.
Do not forget to replace the two crescent-shaped fittings at the ends of the
crankcase.
Mind that the relative displacement between the lower crankcase and the cylinder crankcase, along the gearbox-assembly surface, should not exceed 0.3 mm.
10 - 37
vnx.su
10
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
OIL-PUMP
OIL-PUMP ON THE CAR
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Screws for fixing oil-pump
Screws for fixing oil-pump cap
2.5
1
DISMOUNTING
The oil in the engine is emptied.
The following are taken apart:
- Motor-Propelling set frame;
- lower crankcase.
The screws for fixing the oil-pump on the crankcase are taken apart;
The carrying chain is taken off the oil-pump pinion;
The cap of the oil-pump is taken apart.
The play of the pinions in the oil-pump is checked.
RE-M OUNTING
The dismantling operations are done in the reverse order.
Motor-oil filling-up is done.
The pressure of the oil at 80o is checked:
idle mode:
1 bar
4000 rot/minute
3 bar
10 - 38
vnx.su
ENGINE AND LOWER ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
TIGHTENING COUPLES
10
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Screws for fixing combustion-head cap
Screw-nut for stretching distribution belt runner/pulley
Screws and screw-nuts M 6 for water-pump
Screws and screw-nuts M 8 for water-pump
Screw of the crankshaft pulley
Screw of cam-shaft pin
Screws of rocker-arm ramp
Screws of flywheel
Screws of oil-pump
Screws of oil-pump cap
Screws of bearing caps
Screws of combustion-head
Screws of the exhaust gallery
Screws of the intake gallery
Sparking plugs
Screws of the oil-crankcase
Screws for rocker-arm adjustment
Emptying jack
Screws of the connecting rod caps
Oxygen probe
10 - 39
vnx.su
1
5
1
2.2
o
2+68 +/-6o
4.5
2.3
5 - 5.5
2.5
1
o
2.5+43 +/-6o
2+97o+/-2o
2.5
2.5
2.5 - 3
1
1.5
2
4.2
4.5
UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
DISTRIBUTION BELT
11
Tightening couples (daNm)
Screws of wheels
Screw of the crankshaft pulley
Screw-nut of stretching runner
Screws right-side stand
Screw-nut hydroelastic buffer
7.5
2+68 o+/-6o
5
6.2
3.7
DISMONTING
The car is placed on a lifting stand.
The fore part of the engine is propped
on the frame using the MOT.545 device.
-the alternator belt;
-the carrying belt of the compressor
(AC);
-the pulley of the crankshaft and its hub;
-the carrying pulley of the compressor;
-the distribution crankcases.
The following are taken apart:
-front right-side wheel;
-the right-side pendular suspension;
11 - 1
vnx.su
11
UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
DISTRIBUTION BELT
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
The engine is set at the tuning point (see Chapter 10, pages 10-19);
The screw-nut of the stretching runner is loosened;
The distribution belt is taken off.
RE-M OUNTING
A new distribution belt is mounted (see Chapter 10, pages 10-33);
The tension in the distribution belt is checked and adjusted, by means of MOT.1505
device, at the value of 145-185 Hz.
The operations are done in the reverse order of those in the dismantling process;
The screws are tightened at the couple;
It is compulsory to tighten the crankshaft pulley at a 2 daNm couple plus an angle of
68o+/-6o ;
The compressor pulley (AC) is re-mounted;
The belt of the alternator and that of the compressor are stretched, oberving the
values of the mounting tension:
Alternator:
263 Hz+/- 10%
Compressor:
222 Hz+/- 10%.
11 - 2
vnx.su
UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CYLINDER HEAD FITTING
11
SPECIAL TOOL-AND-CHECK SETS
MOT.1202-01
MOT.1505
MOT.484
-”CLIC” collar-pincers
-Device for measuring belt tension
-Device for jacket maintaining
-Wrench for angular tightening
-Pincers for elastic collar
TIGHTENING
COUPLES
(daNm )
Screw-nut of stretching runner/pulley
Screw of crankshaft pulley
Screws of pendular suspension stand
Screw-nut of hydro-elastic buffer
Wheel Screws
Combustion-head Screws
5
2+68o+/-6o
6.2
3.7
7.5
2+97o+/-2o
DISMOUNTING
The car is placed on a two-column lifting stand;
The battery is disconnected;
The cooling circuit is emptied at the
jack situated at the lower part of the radiator;
The distribution belt is taken apart (see
Chapter Distribution Belt);
The following are taken apart:
-air-filter;
-the connector of the clapper-position potentiometer (1);
-the acceleration cable;
-the connector of the atmospheric
pressure sensor (2);
-the connector of the step-by-step
engine (3);
-the connector of the air temperature
sensor (4) on the intake collector;
To take apart:
-the connector of the induction coil;
-the fuel hoses (the going- and return circuit);
-the connectors of the injectors;
-the plugs of the sparks;
-the induction coil.
11 - 3
vnx.su
11
UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
CYLINDER HEAD FITTING
The hoses of the thermostat stand are
disconnected;
To take apart:
-the thermic screen;
-the exhaust collector;
-the alternator;
-the guide of the oil-level gauge;
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
To take apart:
-the combustion-head screws, except the screw corresponding to A position, which is only loosened, then the
combustion-head is turned round the remaining screw;
-the cylinder-head;
The jacket-maintaining MOT.484
device is mounted.
Check the plane of the cylinder-head.
11 - 4
vnx.su
UPPER AND FRONT ENGINE UNITS
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CYLINDER HEAD FITTING
11
RE-M OUNTING
The plane of the fitting is cleaned and checked.
Mount the cylinder head with a new gasket.
The taking-apart operations are done in the reverse order.
The combustion-head is tightened (see Chapter 10, pages 10-31).
The distribution belt is mounted (see Chapter 10, pages 10-33);
It is mounted in the reverse order of the taking-apart process;
The filling-up and the airing of the cooling circuit is done (see Chapter “Filling-up
and draining”);
The rocker-arms are adjusted.
NOTE
At each operation requiring battery disconnection, when reconnecting, introduce
the radio code, which is written on the vehicle-buying invoice.
11 - 5
vnx.su
FUEL MIXTURE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
12
CHARACTERISTICS
ENGINE
Car
Gearbox
SupeRNova
JH3-050
Type
Index Cylinder Stroke Cylinder
bore length
volume
(mm) (mm)
(cm3)
E7J
A-2/60
75,8
77
1390
9,5/1
Check-ups in idle mood*
Motor
Emisii poluani
Fuel
Type
Index
Mode
CO(%) CO2(%)
(rot/min) (1)
E7J
A-2/60 750+/50
0,5
max
14,5
min
HC
ppm
Lambda
l
100
max
0,97....
....1,03
(minimum
octanic number)
Unleaded petrol
(CO95)
(1) at 2500 rot/min the CO value must be max. 0.30%;
* For water temperature over 80o C and after stabilizing at 2500 rot/min for 30
seconds; then turn back into idle mode and the level of fumes is measured.
The water-temperature and air-temperature sensors are type NTC (negative
temperature coefficient), and the variation of their resistance as to temperature
has the following evolution:
T ( 0C)
0
20
40
80
90
Air-T sensor
R (Ohm)
11970 - 7470
4045 - 3060
1600 - 1315
-
-
Engine T
sensor
R (Ohm)
8000 - 6700
3000 - 2600
1300 - 1100
300 - 270
215 -200
12 - 1
vnx.su
FUEL MIXTURE
12
CHARACTERISTICS
DENOMINATION
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
PARTICULARITIES
Computer
90-ways connector
Injection system
Multi-point sequential
Ignition
PINIS
R
W
Static with a double coil
Computer controlled ignition
RA-C
RB-C
RA-B
0,5 W
0,5 W
1W
7+/-1KW
7+/-1KW
R 2-3
Piezoelectric type SAGEM
Tightening moment = 2 daNm
ELECTRICFIL or SIEMENS
R = 200......270 W
EYQUEM - type RFN 58 LZ
CHAMPION - type RC 87 YCL
For EURO 96:
Attached under the vehicle in front of the fuel tank
Replacement on the occasion of the scheduled inspections
For EURO 00:
Into the fuel tank, attached on the fuel pump assembly.
It is not replaced separate.
Immersed in the fuel tank
For EURO 96: - Flow: 1,3 l/min
- Pressure: 3 bars at 12V tension
For EURO 00:
- Pressure: 3,5 bars at 12V tension
R 1-4
Detonation sensor
RPM SENSOR
Spark plugs
Fuel filter
Fuel pump
Pressure controller
Electric injectors
Step by step engine
For EURO 96:
Pressure controller attached on the injection ramp
Controlled pressure: - 3 +/- 0,2 bars at zero depression
- 2,5 +/- 0,2 bari at a depression of 500 mbars
For EURO 00:
Mounted into fuel tank on the fuel pump assembly
Controlled pressure: 3,5 bars
SIEMENS
R = 14,5 +/- 1 W la 200C
+ 12 V supply
RA-D = 52 +/- 5 W
RB-C = 52 +/- 5 W
12 - 2
vnx.su
FUEL MIXTURE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
DENOMINATION
PARTICULARITIES
idle
Valve potentiometer
Canister purging
valve
Oxygen sensor
Atmospheric
pressure sensor
12
CHARACTERISTICS
at maximum
acceleration
A-B
1300 W
1300 W
A-C
1500 W
2000 W
B-C
2000 W
1300 W
SAGEM
Supply tension= +12 V
R = 26 +/- 4W la 230 C
NGK
For EURO 96: an oxygen sensor attached on upstream of
catalyzer
Generated tension at 8500C:
- rich mixture 750 +/- 50mV
- salt mixture 150 +/- 50 mV
Heating resistance RA -B = 3 .......15 W
For EURO 00: two oxygen sensors attached one on
upstream and the othder one on downstream of catalyzer
DELCO ELECTRONICS
Stopped engine – shows an atmospheric pressure of
950...1050 mbar
Idle engine - 330 +/- 40 mbar
12 - 3
vnx.su
FUEL MIXTURE
12
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
CLAPPER BODY
DISMOUNTING
The battery is disconnected.
The air tube is taken off the battery-protecting screen.
The four screws (1) for air-filter fixing are taken off.
The hose connecting the combustion-head cap and the air-filter is disconnected.
The air-filter is taken apart
1
To disconnect:
-the acceleration cable (the end of the cable is uncoupled from the command lever
of the clapper, and then it is taken off the sleeve on the stand);
-the connectors:
I. of the step-by-step engine;
II. of the clapper potentiometer.
2
2
(no. 2 clamp is pulled upwards and the connector is taken off)
The command lever is uncoupled off the body of the clapper;
The clapper body is taken apart.
I
II
RE-M OUNTING
The fitting of the clapper body is replaced;
The same steps are taken as in the case of the dismantling, only in the reverse order.
12 - 4
vnx.su
FUEL MIXTURE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
INTAKE COLLECTOR
12
TIGHTENING COUPLE (daNm)
Screws and screw-nuts for intake collector 2.5
DISMOUNTING
The following are taken apart:
- air-filter;
- acceleration cable;
- injection ramp (see Chapter Injection ramp);
The electric connectors are uncoupled:
- atmospheric pressure sensor;
- air temperature sensor;
- step-by-step engine;
- clapper potentiometer.
The fuel supply conduits are taken apart (both going- and return);
The clapper command lever is uncoupled and the body of the clapper is taken off;
The screws and screw-nuts fixing the intake collector are taken apart.
RE-M OUNTING
The fittings of the intake collector are replaced;
The same steps are taken as in the case of the dismantling, only in the reverse order.
Tighten the inlet manifold screws and nuts at the required moment of 2.5 daNm.
12 - 5
vnx.su
12
FUEL MIXTURE
EXHAUST COLLECTOR
TIGHTENING
COUPLE
ENGINE E7J-A-2/60
(daNm)
Screws for collector fixing
2.5
DISMOUNTING
The thermic screen is taken apart;
The connection between the exhaust collector and the exhaust pipe is taken off;
The exhaust collector is taken apart
Re-mounting
The same steps are taken as in the case of the dismantling, only in the reverse order.
The screws are tightened at the couple.
12 - 6
vnx.su
PUMP SUPPLY
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
BREAKING FUEL SUPPLY
13
AIM:
To avoid accidental fires owing to fuel leaks, which can be caused by an accident.
FUNCTIONING :
The shock-sensor lies in the engine compartment: it is mounted on the left-side shockabsorber column.
During a shock, the ball of the sensor goes out of its slot, and thus achieves the breaking
of the electric circuit between the relay commanding the petrol-pump and the petrol-pump
itself.
PLACING
BACK THE SHOCK-SENSOR IN OPERATIONAL MODE
In order to resume the functioning of the shock-sensor it will suffice to press its top,
and thus replace the ball in its former position.
13 - 1
vnx.su
PUMP SUPPLY
13
INJECTION RAMP
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
CAUTION!
In order to take apart an injector,
withdraw clamp no. 5 and then pull the
injector.
When the fuel circuit is opened, any
petrol jet due to residue pressure must
be averted by means of a gauze.
DISMOUNTING
The battery is disconnected.
The air-filter is taken out.
To disconnect:
-no. 1 fuel supply tube;
-no. 3 return fuel tube;
-no. 4 pressure-regulator tube.
Injection ramp Screws no. 2 are taken off.
The ramp is taken apart.
RE-MOUNTING
Replace the torric fittings at the base of
the injectors (if the injector has been taken
apart as well as the fitting at the end of the
injector).
For the supply junctions and the return
petrol tubes to be correctly coupled a click
must be heard the moment the coupling is
done.
The rest of the operations are done in
the reverse order as that of the taking apart.
13 - 2
vnx.su
PUMP SUPPLY
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PETROL FILTER
13
LOCATION
The petrol filter is mounted under the car, in front of the petrol tank.
REPLACEMENT
The replacement of the petrol filter is recommended for any overhauling or for max.
20,000 kilometers.
CAUTION!
When the fuel circuit is opened, any petrol jet due to residue pressure
must be averted by means of a gauze.
DISMOUNTING
Before every taking-apart operation, prevent fuel from leaking.
Clamps no. 1 are pushed and the speedy junctions are disconnected.
Screw no. 3 is taken off and the petrol filter is taken apart.
RE-M OUNTING
Observe the flowing direction of the fuel (which is shown by an arrow inscribed on
the filter).
Connect the speedy junctions back, by hand-pushing.
A correct coupling of the speedy junctions is ensured when there is a click at the
moment of the coupling.
13 - 3
vnx.su
PUMP SUPPLY
13
PUMP FLOW
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PUMP-FLOW INSPECTION
SPECIAL
DEVICES
Tuning pincers “CLIC”
It is recommendable to do the inspection
of the fuel pump-flow through the return fuel
hose which is connected on the pump-level
transmitter set.
IMPORTANT !
During these operations it is compulsory:
-not to smoke or handle incandescent objects at the working place;
-to ensure protection from the petrol
projections due to residue pressure left in
the channeling during the taking-apart.
1
The return channeling no. 1 of the fuel
supply is disconnected.
A hose is connected on the junction
whose end is introduced in a graded vessel
(from 0 to 2000 ml)
Terminals 3 and 5 of H relay (lying in
the fuse-box of the motor-compartment) of
the petrol pump are shunted.
Within a minute, the flow of the pump
must be min. 1.3 liter at the voltage of 12
V.
If the flow is not correct, the supply
voltage of the pump is inspected (the flow
decreases by approx. 10% for a 1 V
voltage-decrease).
13 - 4
vnx.su
PUMP SUPPLY
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
13
SUPPLY PRESSURE
SUPPLY PRESSURE CONTROL
SPECIAL DEVICES
MOT 1311-01 Control Kit for
petrol pressure
MOT 1311-04 J Junction
MOT 1311-06 Junction-disconnect
ing device
MOT. 1311 -01
-04
CAUTION!
When the fuel circuit is opened, any
petrol jet due to residue pressure must be
averted by means of a gauze.
The air-filter is taken apart.
The fuel supply hose is disconnected.
The MOT 1311-04 derivation junction
is connected onto the ramp, then the fuelsupply channelling is re-connectedonto the
junction.
Terminals no. 3 and 5 of the H fuel-pump
relay (located in the engine fuse-box) are
shunted.
MOT. 1311 -06
The manometer 0-10 bar, as well as the
flexible hose MOT 1311-01 are mounted.
Pressure must be 3+/-0.2 bar.
By applying a 500 mbar depression on
the pressure-regulator, the pressure of the
fuel must be 2.5+/-0.2 bar.
13 - 5
vnx.su
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ANTI-POLLUTION
PETROL VAPOURS-ASPIRATION
FUNCTIONING SCHEMA
1. I NTAKE COLLECTOR
2. CARBON CANISTER
3. DRAINING VALVE
4. CLAPPER BODY
R. CHANNELING FROM THE TANK
14 - 1
vnx.su
14
14
ANTI-POLLUTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PETROL VAPOURS-ASPIRATION
RE-ASPIRATION CONDITIONS
The canister-purging valve is controlled by pin 4 of the UCE injection, when :
- water temperature > 50o C;
- air temperature > 15o C;
- the valve position outside idle position.
It is possible the reading of the RCO value ( opening cyclic ratio ) of the canister
purging valve, by means of the CLIP tester.
THE CHECKING OF THE CANISTER PURGING VALVE OPERATION
A non-operation of the petrol vapors re-aspiration system may lead to the fuel consumption increase and to a unstable idling.
It is necessary to check if the purging valve exit is correctly connected to the carbon
canister. Check also the piping condition between the canister and the fuel tank (sealing,
clogging on layout).
1. COLLECTEUR ADMISSION
2. SOUPAPE PURGE
3. CANISTER
4. RESERVOIR
14 - 2
vnx.su
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ANTI-POLLUTION
PETROL VAPOURS-ASPIRATION
14
Check at idling if there is a depression, by fitting a pressure gauge (-3…+ 3 bars) at the
purging valve exit (B) towards canister.
Is there any depression?
YES - Set off the contact . Using a vacuum pump, apply a 500 mbars depression at
the (C ) connection of the purging valve. The value of the read depression must not vary
more than 10 mbars within 30 seconds. If change is more than 10 mbars, then purging
valve is damaged and must be replaced. Valve cleaning of small active carbon particles
may be tried, by low-pressure compressed air blowing at the valve (B) connection
NO - When conditions of purging valve controlling are accomplished and this one
does not open, check its control electric circuit ( between UCE injection pin 4 and purging
valve), from continuity or short-circuit point of view.
The RCO value of the signal received by the purging valve from the computer, may be
read by means of the CLIP tester in PROL 23. The minimal value is of 0.7% (corresponding
to the closed position of the purging valve).
PLACING - DISMOUNTING
Both the carbon canister and the draining valve are mounted by means of a stand on the
lining of the right-side front wing of the car.
The channellings of the canister and the electric conector commanding the draining
valve are disconnected;
The sleeve for fixing the draining valve is taken off and the valve is taken apart.
The carbon canister is taken apart.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting operations.
14 - 3
vnx.su
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
16
IDENTIFICATION
ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
INTENSITY
E7J - A-2/60
VALEO A11 VI 87
75A
VALEO A13 VI 212
80A
INSPECTION
After 15 minutes’ warming under a 13.5 V voltage.
RATIO (rot/min)
ALTERNATOR 75 A
(A)
ALTERNATOR 80A
(A)
1000
46
54
2000
68
75
3000
71
80
4000
72
82
ENGINE REVOLUTION
FUNCTIONING AND DIAGNOSING
These cars are equipped with internal ventilation alternators, with in-built voltage regulator and on-board light indicator, which must work as follows:
-when the contact is on, the light is on;
-when the engine starts, the light goes out;
-if the light is on again as the engine is running, then it indicates a charging dysfunction.
SHOOT - FINDING
INCIDENTS
A.The light does not turn on when the contact is on.
To check:
-if the electric connections are done properly;
-if the light of the board indicator is working properly (when the circuit is set to the
mass, the light must turn on).
16 - 1
vnx.su
16
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
B.The light turns on when the engine is running
This indicates a charging fault, the cause of which may be:
- the carrying belt of the alternator is broken, the charging conductor is cut (+ continuous);
- a fault with the alternator (rotor, stator, diodes or brushes);
- a fault with the voltage regulator;
- a voltage surge (overvoltage).
C. The customer / user claims a fault with the charging, as the
on-board light works correctly.
If the regulated voltage is less than 13.5 V, the alternator is checked. The cause of the
defect may be:
- a burnt diode;
- disconnected or cut live wire;
- the coal powder or the wear of the collector.
CONTROL OF VOLTAGE
A voltmeter is connected across the terminals of the battery and the voltage value is
read.
The engine is run until the needle of the voltmeter settles at the regulated voltage. This
value should be within 13.5 and 14.8 V.
The maximum of consumer devices are connected: the voltage should remain between
13.5 and 14.5 V.
CAUTION!
In case electric arc welding is being done on the car, the battery and the voltage
regulator will be compulsorily disconnected (the alternator).
16 - 2
vnx.su
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
16
DIAGNOSING
Special device: Tester CLIP - SAGEM and accessories for physical measurements.
INSPECTION OF
CHARGING CIRCUIT
The CLIP - SAGEM tester allows the inspection of the alternator, by measuring the voltage and the current supplied with, and without electric consumers.
NOTE: The Ampere pincers are of the inductive type (0-1000 A). Its mounting
will be done without disconnecting the battery, thus allowing for the memorized
data and the adapting values in the injection calculator to be preserved.
Mount the ammeter clamps directly to the alternator exit, having the arrow oriented
towards this one .
The measurements are effected in three steps:
- measuring the battery voltage without contact on;
- measuring the regulated voltage and the current supplied without consumers;
- measuring the regulated voltage and the current supplied with a maximum of consumers.
The values obtained as a result of the measurements lead to the following interpretations:
-the voltage of the ‘empty’ battery < 12.3 V: so, the battery is flat;
With no consumers:
-regulated voltage > 14.8 V: so, the regulator is faulty;
-regulated voltage (‘empty’) < 13.2 V or charging current < 2 A: so, there is a defect
of charging.
With consumers:
-regulated voltage > 14.8 V: so, the regulator is faulty;
-regulated voltage (‘empty’) < 12.7 V:the alternator charging current in regard to its
characteristics must be checked.
INTENSITY (A)
ENGINE
Rated intensity
E7J
75
Minimal intensity, which has to be supplied by the
alternator to all working consumers
51
80
60
If the measured output is too little, the following will be checks:
-wear of alternator (collector brushes, etc.);
-battery connections;
-the mass braid of the engine;
-conformity of alternator;
-tension of carrying belt.
If the measured output is correct and the regulated voltage istoo little, the cause may be:
-the car has too many electric consumers;
-the battery is flat.
16 - 3
vnx.su
16
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
SPECIAL DEVICES
MOT 1505
BELT TENSION MEASURING DEVICE
DISMOUNTING
The car is set on a two-column lifting stand;
Disconnect the electric connections from the battery.
The fuel supply conduit is uncoupled;
The following are taken off:
- air filter;
- the oil-gauge tube;
- the top screw of the alternator;
- the alternator belt;
- the stretching flange of the alternator.
The car is suspended.
The electric connectors of the alternator are uncoupled;
Dismount the alternator lower attachment screw.
Lower the vehicle.
The alternator is taken out at the top.
RE-M OUNTING
The mounting operations are done in the reverse order;
The carrying belt of the alternator is stretched to get the recommended (263
Hz+/- 10%) mounting voltage;
16 - 4
vnx.su
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
16
The position of the alternator is blocked.
The engine is revolved three and a half crankshaft turns;
The reading end of the MOT. 1505 measuring device is placed in the measuring area;
The tension in the belt is measured;
It is checked whether this fits into the mounting tension tolerance; if not, the belt will
be stretched again until the recommended tension (263 Hz +/- 10%) is reached.
The inspection and the adjustment of the belt are done with the engine at ambient
temperature.
Tighten at the required moment, the alternator attachment screws :
- screw M10(lower attachment)-5 daNm
- screwM10 (upper attachment)-2.2 daNm.
Remark: Once dismounted, a belt is not to be remounted, but replaced.
MOT. 1505
MOT. 1505
16 - 5
vnx.su
16
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ALTERNATOR
DISMOUNTING
(in the air -conditioning variant)
The car is placed on a two-column lifting stand;
The electric connections are uncoupled from the battery;
The following are taken apart:
-the top screw of the alternator;
-the belt of the alternator;
The right-side front wheel of the car is taken apart;
The car is suspended;
The two screws fixing the shock-absorber on the steering swivel stand are taken off;
The steering swivel stand is lowered and the right-side planetary transmission is taken
off the planetary pinion of the gearbox;
The electric conductors of the alternator are disconnected;
The screw of the alternator is taken off;
The alternator is taken apart laterally past the right-side planetary transmission.
RE-M OUNTING
The taking-apart operations are done in the reverse order;
The carrying belt of the alternator is stretched to obtain the mounting tension recommended (263 Hz +/- 10%);
The position of the alternator is blocked;
The engine is revolved three and a half crankshaft turns;
The reading end of the MOT. 1505 measuring device is placed in the measuring area;
The tension in the belt is measured;
It is checked whether this fits into the mounting tension tolerance; if not, the belt will be
stretched again until the recommended tension (263 Hz +/- 10%) is reached.
The inspection and the adjustment of the belt are done with the engine at ambient
temperature.
Tighten at the required moment, the alternator attachment screws :
- screw M10 (lower attachment)-5 daNm
- screw M10 (upper attachment)-2.2 daNm.
Remark: Once dismounted, a belt is not to be remounted, but replaced.
16 - 6
vnx.su
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
STARTER
16
IDENTIFICATION
ENGINE
STARTER
E7J - A-2/60
D 907 - M00 2T 13581
DIAGNOSTICATION
Special device: CLIP - SAGEM-TECHNIC TESTER which measures the battery
voltage and the intensity absorbed by the starter.
ANOMALOUS FUNCTIONING THAT CAN BE SETTLED
-Battery failure –contact drop on the starter when starting the engine.
-Blocked starter (the absorbed current is very high);
Coupling relay defect (the current absorbed is very weak).
In order to do the measurements one must carry the engine in starter mode, thus preventing the engine to run.
To do that, the revolution sensor (located in the clutch crankcase) should be taken apart.
Remark: After doing these tests, erase the possible defects memorized
by the calculator with the tester.
16 - 7
vnx.su
16
STARTING AND CHARGING
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
STARTER
DISMOUNTING
The car is put on a two-column lifting stand;
The battery of storage cells is disconnected;
The screw-nuts fixing the degassing vessel are taken apart.
The degassing vessel is removed (without disconnecting the link conduits) to the fore
part of the car in order to facilitate access to the screws fixing the starter;
The screws fixing the command bar on the connecting rod of the gearbox are taken off
(the jack is retrieved);
The screws no. 1 fixing the starter are taken;
The car is suspended;
The electric connectors of the starter are disconnected;
The starter is taken out through the bottom of the engine compartment.
RE-M OUNTING
The taking-apart operations are done in the reverse order.
The screws are tightened at a 4.4 daNm couple.
16 - 8
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
IGNITION SYSTEM
STATIC IGNITION
THE COIL
The system contains a double coil, controlled by the calculator.
Coil no. 2 has an electric connector (1) with
four ways, which simultaneously produce
sparks at cylinders nos. 1 and 4, when it is
commanded by pin no. 32 of the injection calculator, and on cylinders no. 2 and 3 when it
is commanded by pin no. 1 of the same calculator.
PRESENTATION
The system is made up of:
- electronic control unit;
- double ignition coil;
- four sparking plugs;
- spark plugs.
ELECTRIC CONNECTOR
Pins
Function
A
Commands ignition at
cylinders nos. 1 and 4
B
Commands ignition at
cylinders nos. 2 and
C
Fuel supply (+DC)
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONING PRINCIPLE
According to the data received from
various sensors, but essentially according
to the revolution ratio and the load of the
engine, the electronic control unit will determine the ignition advance; it will also
identify the cylinders that are set at the
upper center point and, consequently, will
command the respective coil.
This causes the spark at the level of the
two cylinders that are at the upper center
point, thus interrupting the mass-setting of
the respective coil.
17 - 1
vnx.su
inter - pin
check
Rezistena
între pini
A-B
1 W
0,5 W
A-C
B-C
HT - HT
0,5 W
11 KW
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
SPARKING PLUGS
Engine
Make
Type
E7J - A-2/60
EYQUEM
CHAMPION
RFN 58 LZ
RC 10 PYC
Distance between electrodes:
0,9 mm
Tightening couple:
2,5 - 3 daNm
Plane stool with fitting
17 - 2
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PECULIARITIES
INJECTION SYSTEM
Peculiarities of the multi-point system
90-pin calculator made by SIEMENS.
Multi-point sequential injection. It commands an injector at a time, in turns.
Static ignition with double ignition coil.
Canister-draining valve controlled in a cyclical relation to the opening.
Correction of idle mode system in keeping with:
-air-conditioning (AC);
-battery voltage.
On-board injection light indicator;
Maximal load / regimen:
-6200 rot/min for gears: I, II, and III;
-6000 rot/min for gears: IV and V.
17 - 3
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
1
14
3
5 6
7
4 2 11
9
10
15
13
12
1.Canister-draining valve;
2. Air-filter;
3. Detonation sensor (tightening couple: 2.5 daNm);
4. Atmospheric air-pressure sensor;
5. Step-by-step idle mode-adjustment engine;
6. Clapper position potentiometer;
7. Air-temperature sensor;
8. Injection calculator;
9. Shock-sensor;
10. Fuse-and-relay box;
11. Revolution sensor;
12. Water-temperature sensor;
13. Oxygen sensor (tightening couple: 4.5 daNm);
14. Ignition coil;
15. Carbon canister.
17 - 4
vnx.su
8
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
10. Revolution sensor;
11. Water-temperature sensor.
8. Injection calculator;
9. Shock-sensor;
11
9
1
8
The following relays can be identified in the fuse-box;
B = Motor-ventilator group relay (with Air-Conditioning)
H = Fuel-pump relay
C = Motor-ventilator group relay (without AC).
17 - 5
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
The water - temperature sensor
This sensor (no.1) sends the information concerning the water temperature to the calculator, and other information is sent to the on-board indicator, which will display water
temperature.
In case of emergency regarding water temperature, the calculator will command the
lighting of the water-temperature alert indicator on the board.
In keeping with the water-temperature information received by the calculator, it will
command:
-the injection system;
-the relays for the command of the motor-ventilator engine cooling group.
When setting the contact on, the water temperature indicator, placed on the instrument
panel, shall be lighted for 3 seconds then it shall turn off.
1
So, after setting the contact off, during next 2 minutes from engine stopping, the water
temperature reaches the value of 102 C and the injection computer is then controlling the
cooling blower starting at low speed.
When the temperature is lowering at 96 C, the blower will be stopped ; its operation
must not be over 10 minutes after engine stopping.
17 - 6
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
17
INJECTION-DISRUPTION LIGHT INDICATOR
THE SYSTEM PARTICULARITIES ( ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR )
On setting the contact, the injection calculator receives from UCE DECODING DEVICE a code, which is then compared with the one previously memorized; if the two
codes are the same, then the starting of the engine is authorized.
After the setting of the contact, the anti-start light indicator, which until then was flashing on and off, will turn on for 3 seconds, and then it will turn off, thus confirming the
recognition of the key.
If the key is wrong, after it has been put in the contact the light will turn on and off
quicker, and the engine starting will be impossible.
Observation:
For details regarding the vehicle anti-starting system, see chapter « Anti-starting
System » from the Workshop manual SupeRNova – vol.2, ed.I)
17 - 7
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
PLACING OF ELEMENTS
THE ANTI-START FUNCTION
REPLACING UCE
INJECTION CALCULATOR
The UCE injectioncalculatoris delivered withouta code, but it is able to memorize a code.
When mounting a new calculator, it will have to memorize the code anti-start fuction
singularity of this car, then one has to check if the anti-start function is operational. In
order to do that, the following operations must be done:
-the contact is set for a few seconds, then it is taken out;
-after taking out the key, the anti-start function is actived.
INSPECTING THE ANTI - START
FUNCTION
Take the key out of the contact and after 10 seconds the anti-start light indicator on the
board must begin to flash on and off.
When setting the contact on, the anti-starting indicator must turn off.
THE INFLUENCE OF THE AIR-CONDITIONING
ON THE INJECTION SYSTEM
The air-conditioning installation (AC) uses a variable cylinder-volume compressor.
Therearethe following connections betweenthe air-conditioning and the petrol injection system:
-pin no. 46 of the injection calculator receives the information “solicit accelerated
idle mode” when the button for the air-conditioning installation is pressed and the pressure of the freon in the installation is above a limit.
-the information “absorbed power” does not influence the idle mode regime, but lets
the calculator know about the value of the couple taken by the compressor, and the calculator will operate the step-by-step engine, through pins nos. 12, 41, 42 and 72, in order to
compensate for the couple fall. With thetester it can read in the menu : « Parameters list «
the power absorbed by the compressor, wich will be between 300 and 5000 W. The value
that is read will be of minimum 300 W, irrespective of the coupled / uncoupled state of the
compressor.
-pin no. 10 of the injection calculator will command the E relay located in the fusebox of the engine compartment, which will couple the compressor.
The injection calculator can prohibit the coupling of the AC compressor:
-itdoes not allow the coupling of the compressor before 10 seconds afterthe starting of the engine;
-according to the couple required from the engine by the driver - and in certain
situations according to the power absorbed by the compressor - the calculator can forbid or
authorize the starting of the compressor;
-if the water temperature is higher than, or equal to 115oC, the thermic protection is operated, which will not authorize the starting of the compressor;
-the overload protection does not permit the coupling of the compressor when the
revolution ratio of the engine is over 5900 rot/min.
17 - 8
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
IDLING REGIME ADJUSTMENT
IDLING REGIME ADJUSTMENT DUE TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
The idle mode of the engine is influenced by the voltage of the battery with a view to
compensating the voltage fall caused by the coupling of the consumers when the battery is
poorly charged; this imposes an increase in the idle mode revolution ratio, so the ratio of
the alternator will be increased by increasing the charging voltage. The lower the voltage,
the more significant the correction applied, which begins under 12.7 V.
The idle mode regime can thus be increased up to 830 rot/min.
If the injection calculator receives the information “command AC coupling”, then the
idle mode revolution ratio will go up to 850 rot/min.
VALUES « IDLING RCO « AND « IDLING RCO ADAPTATION «
PRINCIPLE :
In order to use the information related to the parameters value “PR 021= RCO idling“
and “ PR 022= RCO idling”, the CLIP tester is to be used, which will be connected at the
diagnosis socket and at the vehicle battery ( or lighter socket).
Select on tester menu “COMPUTERS TEST”, then “PETROL INJECTION”. Find then
“FUNCTIONS TEST” and read here the progress ofthe PR 021 andPR 022 parameters.
In normal operation conditions, warm engine, the value RCO idling ( PR 022 ) is changing
between a maximal and a minimal value, so that nominal idling RPM is obtained. It is
possible that further to an operation dispersion ( running in, engine choking up,etc) the
value “RCO idling” to get closer to the minimal or maximal value.
The adaptivecorrection (PR 021 ) on “RCO idling” (PR 022) is allowing reaching at slow
variations of the engine air necessities, so that “RCO idling” is er -set on an average nominal
value. Theparameters PR 021 andPR 022 are progressing among the following limits :
(PR 006)
RCO idling
(PR 022)
RCO idling
(PR 021)
750 rot / min
5% £ X £ 12 %
-3 % .......+7 %
RATED IDLE MODE REGIME
17 - 9
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
IDLING REGIME ADJUSTMENT
In case of an excess (false air, non-conforming attachment of the valve body, etc) the
idling regime will increase and the value “RCO idling” will lower, returning so, at the
nominal idling regime.
The value of the (PR 021) parameter will decrease in order to realign idling RCO (PR
022) within the optimal range. In case of a lack of air ( choking up, etc) the reasoning is
conversely : RCO idling (PR 022) will increase, and the value is adjusting RCO idling (PR
022) on a average nominal value.
IMPORTANT
After battery disconnection/reconnection, it is obligatory engine starting and maintain
it for several minutes in order to perform a correct resetting of the adaptive correction
of the RCO idling.
17 - 10
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ADJUSTMENT OF THE FUEL
MIXTURE ENRICHING
17
The catalyst efficiency is maximal when the air excess value (l) is within the limits l =
0,97 ...1,03.
The injection computer is adopting the adjustment strategy of the fuel mixture enriching
in order to observe the a.m. condition. In order to inform the computer about the enriching
degree of the mixture, the oxygen sensor is used, which is sending an electric signal of a
value oscillating between 150 and 800 mV.
When the engine is warm and operating in the « closed loop « stage, the tension generated
by the oxygen sensor must quickly oscillate between 150 +/- 50 mV, corresponding to the
poor mixtureand 750+/- 50 mV correspondingto the enriched mixture. The maximal-minimal
range must be as large as possible (at least 500 mV), confirming the sensor good operation.
The correction of the mixture enriching may be seen by means of the CLIP tester, in the
menu “FUNCTIONS TEST”, sub-menu “ENRICHING ADJUSTMENT” by the parameter
PR 035= enriching correction value.
The correction value has as limits 0 and 255, the average value being placed at 128.
The interpretation of the parameter PRO 35 value, is the following :
- when it is greater than 128 the computer is requesting the mixture enriching- so, the
mixture has been poor.
- when it is smaller than 128, the computer is requesting the mixture penury- so, the
mixture has been rich.
The entrance in the enriching adjustment is effective after a timing, due to water
temperature greater than 10 C when the acceleration throttle is free ( idling engine) and the
oxygen sensor is enough warm ( over 350 C). Until the moment of entering in this stage,
the enriching correction value (PRO 53) will be 128.
In the enriching stage, the injection computer will not take into account the values
furnished by the oxygen sensor, in the following situations :
- acceleration pushed at maximum
- sudden acceleration
- at decelerating, with free acceleration pedal information.
- in case of a damaged oxygen sensor.
“DEGENERATED” OPERATION WAY IN CASE OF THE OXYGEN SENSOR
DAMAGE
When the tension furnished by the oxygen sensor is not correct ( is changing a little bit
or not at all ), during enriching adjustment, the computer will not pass to the »degenerated »
operation way unless the damage has been recognized as being present for at least 10
minutes. Only in this case, the damage will be memorized.
Whena damageat the oxygen sensor is detected and if the damage has been alreadymemorized,
then it willpass directly to the « open loop » operation (enrichingcorrection = 128).
17 - 11
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ENRICHING ADAPTIVE CORRECTION
ENRICHING ADAPTIVE CORRECTION
PRINCIPLE
In the “closed loop” stage, the enriching correction value (PR 035) is adjusting the
injection times in order to obtain a ratio as close as possible to the enriching value = 1.
The correction value is close to 128, having as limits 0 and 255; nevertheless, dispersions
of the injection system components may occur,that are giving the correction a displacement
towards 0 or 255, in order to obtain the enriching value 1.
The adaptive correction is allowing the injection chart displacement in order to refocus the enrichment adjustment (PR 035) on the 128 value.
The valuesof the adjustmentcorrection may be readby meansof the CLIP tester,as follows :
- connect the tester to the vehiclediagnosissocketand to the battery(or to the lighter socket).
- select “COMPUTERS TEST ” , then “PETROL INJECTION”
- in the menu “FUNCTIONS TEST” , access “ENRICHING ADJUSTMENT”, where
you can find parameters PR 030= enriching adapting in operation (the adaptive correction
for the partial and large charges area) and PR 031= enriching adapting at idling (adapting
correction at idling and in small charges area).
PARAMETER
FIELD
Enriching adapting in operation (PR 030)
80% £ X £ 176 %
Enriching adapting at idling (PR 031)
80% £ X £ 176 %
17 - 12
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ENRICHING ADAPTIVE CORRECTION
If values PR 030 and PR 031 are fixed on value 128 (after battery disconnecting/
reconnecting) then it is necessary to perform a specific road test, observing the following
conditions.
The adaptive corrections are active only when the engine is warm in the « closed loop »
stage (when PR 035 is variable) on an exactlyrange of the depression from the inlet manifold.
It is necessary that engine has been run in «closed loop » in more than one areas of the inlet
pressure, for which the adaptive corrections begin to progress in order to compensate the
enrichment from the engine operation.
ROAD TEST
This is performed in the following conditions :
- warm engine (water temperature greater than 750 C)
- engine RPM not greater than 4800 rot/minute
driving on road, for a normal drive, on 5… 10 km distance.
For this test, it is recommended to start from an engine low regime, in III-d or IV-th
gear, with a gradually acceleration so that desired pressure gets stabilized in the inlet
manifold for 10 seconds in each area, as per the following table :
Area 1
(mbar)
Area 2
(mbar)
Area 3
(mbar)
Area 4
(mbar)
Area 5
(mbar)
247----------- 351 --------------- 481 --------------- 611 --------------- 741 --------873
Average 255
Average 416
Average 546
Average 676 Average 807
Further to this road test, the corrections must become valid.
Read again the values of the PR 030 and PR 031 parameters. These, initially being at
128, have been changed after this road test. If not, perform again this operation, strictly
observing the test performing conditions.
17 - 13
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
ENRICHING ADAPTIVE CORRECTION
ROAD TEST RESULTS INTERPRETATION
In case of fuel lack (choking up injectors, pressure and fuel flow too small, etc) the
value of the PR 035 parameter shall increase, in order that an enrichment as close as
possible to 1 is obtained, and the values PR 031 and PR 030 shall increase so that PR 035
is reaching a value around 128.
For a correct operation it is recommendedchemical or ultrasonic cleaning of the injectors
each 30 000 km.
In case of a fuel excess (not sealed injectors or their needle is not properly closing ..) the
reasoning is conversely: the values of PR 035, PR 031 and PR 030 parameters shall decrease
to enable bringing the PR 035 to a value around 128.
OBSERVATION
The values read for PR 030 and PR 031 are offering an opinion about the air/petrol
mixture the engine is running with. In order to be useful at diagnosis, we can not conclude
unless the values are on maximum or on minimum and their displacement is in th same
direction. These values must be analyzed only in case of a client claiming an operation
defect and if they are on the maximum or minimum values, related with the PR 035 values,
greater than 175 or smaller than 80.
17 - 14
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTRODUCTION
17
INTRODUCTION
In order to achieve the communication between the injection calculator
and the diagnosing tester SAGEM CLIP, the following operations will be
performed:
- the glove compartment is opened and the plastic shield of the diagnosing plug, located at the top of the compartment, is taken off;
- the tester is connected at the diagnosing plug and across the terminals of the car battery;
- the type of the vehicle is selected on the tester;
- the option “Calculator test” is then selected;
- the menu “Injection” is selected.
CAUTION!
1. Connecting or disconnecting the injection calculator to the car cabling
will only be done when the engine is stopped and the car is off-contact.
2. If the contact is on or the engine is running, the terminals of the battery
will not be loosened or disconnected. Replacing the battery on the car is not
allowed if the engine is running or the contact is on.
3. Loose or oxidized contacts are not allowed at the terminals of the battery,
or imperfect connections at the injection system cabling.
4. Starting the engine with the battery connected to a starting robot is not
allowed.
5. Recharging the battery will only be done after disconnecting it from the
car cabling, and it will be done using a 12V charging-station.
17 - 15
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTRODUCTION
STEPS IN DIAGNOSING
INSPECTION OF DEFECTS
This stage is the indispensable starting-point before any intervention on the car. if the
defect is indicated by the tester, then remedy it; if no defect has been signalled by the
tester, a conformity inspection will have to be made, thus helping to spot the possible
causes.
To do that check on the following elements:
- the electric circuit corresponding to the defect which has been signalled;
- the electric connectors along the circuit (oxidized spots, deformed plugs, etc.);
- the electric resistance that is not in keeping with the element connected to that
electric circuit;
- the state of the plugs (cut or worn-out insulation, areas with traces of pressing, etc.).
CONFORMITY INSPECTION
Its aim is to check on the various states and parameters, to detect some anomaly when
the tester failed to find defects.
This phase allows:
- to diagnose a breakdown or failure without displaying the defect corresponding to
a deficient functioning of the parts or following complaints from the user.
- to check the good functioning of the injection system and to ensure no breakdown
or failure will appear immediately after the repair has been made.
So, this heading concerns a diagnosing of the various states and parameters, under
certain inspection conditions.
If a state is defective or a parameter is beyond tolerance, the corresponding diagnose
page will have to be consulted.
LOCALIZING A DEFECT AFTER USER’S COMPLAINT
If after the inspection of the injection system by means of the CLIP tester (inspection of
defects and inspection of conformity) the cause of the user’s complaint has not been eliminated, then the logical schema of finding out of the possible causes of the problem will be
used.
These schemas will only be used under the following circumstances:
- no defect has been shown by the tester;
- no anomaly has been signalled by the inspection of conformity;
- the car does not work properly.
17 - 16
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
17
DEFECTUL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Lack of communication with the calculator
Calculator
Supply
Circuit of command actuator relay
Circuit of command petrol-pump relay
Circuit of 1 cylinder injector
Circuit of 2 cylinder injector
Circuit of 3 cylinder injector
Circuit of 4 cylinder injector
Circuit of 1 and 4 ignition coil
Circuit of 2 and 3 ignition coil
Revolution ratio sensor information
Anti-start device
Failure to memorize the anti-start code
Circuit of atmospheric pressure sensor
Circuit of idle mode adjustment
Circuit of clapper potentiometer
Circuit of water-temperature sensor
Circuit of air-temperature sensor
Circuit of canister draining valve
Circuit of oxygen probe
Circuit of oxygen probe heating
Circuit of detonation probe
Car speed information
Circuit of command air-conditioning compressor relay
Water-temperature warning circuit
Circuit of command low-speed ventilator relay (air-conditioned car)
Circuit of command high-speed ventilator relay (air-conditioned car)
Circuit of command ventilator relay (air-conditioned car)
Functional failure of oxygen probe
Pollutant combustion misfire / Disruptive combustion misfire
Combustion misfire at cylinders 1, 2, 3 and 4
17 - 17
vnx.su
17-17
17-18
17-19
17-20
17-21
17-22
17-23
17-24
17-25
17-26
17-27
17-28
17-29
17-29
17-30
17-31
17-32
17-33
17-34
17-35
17-36
17-37
17-38
17-39
17-40
17-41
17-42
17-43
17-44
17-45
17-46
17-47
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
1. LACK OF
COMMUNICATION
LACK OF COMMUNICATION WITH THE CALCULATOR
SUGGESTIONS
Try the tester on a different car
Check:
- the connection between the tester and the diagnosing plug (state of the cable)
- the fuses S3 and S4 in the engine compartment, and S15 in the passenger cabin.
Remedy if necessary.
Check at the diagnosing plug the presence of +12V for pin 16 and the mass for pin 5.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the injection calculator and check the
insulation, the continuity and the absence of parasitic resistances along the following
circuits:
-pin 28 of calculator ♦ mass
-pin 33 of calculator ♦ mass
-pin 3 of calculator ♦ mass
-pin 56 of calculator ♦ pin 7 of diagnosing plug
-pin 28 of calculator ♦pin 15 of diagnosing plug
-pin 28 of calculator ♦fuse S3 in the engine compartment
-pin 28 of calculator ♦ fuse S4 in the engine compartment.
Remedy if necessary.
AFTER
REPAIR
17 - 18
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
2.
DEFECT
PRESENT
17
COMPUTER
1. Breakdown computer
2. Breakdown zones memory of protection
3. Breakdown zones memory antistarting up
SUGGESTIONS
1.
Non-conforming or faulty calculator
Change the calculator
2.
Do not immediately change the calculator
Perform the following procedure:
- set the contact and enter a dialogue with the calculator
- erase the defect memorized by the calculator
- take contact and wait till the dialogue with the calculator is lost
- set contact and enter a dialogue with the calculator.
If the defect is still there, redo this procedure.
If after the fifth attempt of erasing the “calculator” defect is still
there, change the injection calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase memorized defects.
17 - 19
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
3.
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENT
OR MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
1.
SUPPLY
1. Breakdown + 12V after the actuator relay 238 (D)
2. Breakdown + 12V after the contact (D.C)
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait till dialogue with the tester is lost
-put the contact and enter dialogue.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present.
Check the state of the battery and the connections to the mass.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the connecting and the state of the connector of 238 relay.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the presence of +12V at the pole 3 of 238 relay.
Remedy the circuit to fuse S1.
Take plug 5 out of the connector of 238 relay.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V at the pole 5 of
238 relay.
Change relay if necessary.
Check insulation and the continuity of the circuit:
pin 66 of calculator ® pole 5 of actuator relay 238.
Remedy if necessary.
Disconnect an element at a time (injector, canister draining valve, probe
O2) and check the presence of +12 V for each of them.
Change the faulty element.
2.
The defect is not active because it causes the loss of dialogue with the
tester
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
AFTER REPAIR Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 20
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
4.
DEFECT
PRESENT
SUGGESTIONS
17
CIRCUIT OF COMMAND ACTUATOR RELAY
1. Circuit of command or short-circuit to the mass of the circuit towards pin 39 of the calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12V along the circuit towards pin 39 of the calculator
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait till dialogue with the tester is lost
-put the contact and enter dialogue.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present.
REMARK: This defect has priority and should be dealt with before the following ones.
Check the state of the battery and the connections to the mass.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the connecting and the state of the connector of 238 relay.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the presence of +12V at the pole 1 of 238 relay.
Remedy the circuit to fuse S1 in the engine compartment.
Check the coil of the 238 actuator relay.
Change relay if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation and
the continuity along the circuit:
pin 39 of calculator ♦ pole 2 of actuator relay 238.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 21
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
5.
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENT
CIRCUIT OF COMMAND PETROL PUMP
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to the mass of the circuit towards pin
68 of the calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12V along the circuit towards pin 68of the calculator
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait till dialogue with the tester is lost
SUGGESTIONS
-put the contact and enter dialogue.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present.
REMARK: This defect has priority and should be dealt with before
the following ones.
Check the connection and the state of the 236 petrol pump connector.
Change connector if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V at the pole 1 of 236 petrol pump.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 68 of calculator ♦ pole 2 of the 236 petrol pump.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the coil of the 236 petrol pump.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 22
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
6.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
17
CYLINDER 1 - INJECTOR CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 59 of the calculator (injector command)
2. Short-circuit to the mass along the way to pin 59 of the calculator (injector command)
3. Open circuit along the way to the pin 59 of the calculator (injec
tor command)
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the engine is started
SUGGESTIONS Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the resistance of injector 1.
Change injector if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of 12V at the pin 1 of injector 1.
Remedy, if necessary, the circuit up to the 238 actuating relay.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 59 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of injector 1.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 23
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
7.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
CYLINDER 2 - INJECTOR CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 90 of the calculator
(injector command)
2. Short-circuit to the mass along the way to pin 90 of the calculator
(injector command)
3. Open circuit along the way to the pin 90 of the calculator (injector
command)
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the engine is started
SUGGESTIONS Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the resistance of injector 2.
Change injector if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of 12V at the pin 1 of injector 2.
Remedy, if necessary, the circuit up to the 238 actuating relay.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation and
the continuity along the circuit:
pin 90 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of injector 2.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 24
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
8.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
17
CYLINDER 3 - INJECTOR CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 60 of the calculator
(injector command)
2. Short-circuit to the mass along the way to pin 60 of the calculator
(injector command)
3. Open circuit along the way to the pin 60 of the calculator
(injector command)
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the engine is started
SUGGESTIONS Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the resistance of injector 3.
Change injector if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of 12V at the pin 1 of injector 3.
Remedy, if necessary, the circuit up to the 238 actuating relay.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation and
the continuity along the circuit:
pin 60 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of injector 3.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 25
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
9. DEFECT
PRESENT
OR
MEMORIZED
CYLINDER 4 - INJECTOR CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 89 of the calculator
(injector command)
2. Short-circuit to the mass along the way to pin 89 of the calculator
(injector command)
3. Open circuit along the way to the pin 89 of the calculator (injector
command)
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
SUGGESTIONS -the engine is started
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the resistance of injector 4.
Change injector if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of 12V at the pin 1 of injector 4.
Remedy, if necessary, the circuit up to the 238 actuating relay.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 89 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of injector 4.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects
17 - 26
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
17
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
CYLINDERS 1 AND 4 IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 32 of the
calculator (cylinders 1 and 4 coil command)
2. Open circuit or short-circuit to the mass along the way to
pin 32 of the calculator (cylinders 1 and 4 coil command).
SUGGESTIONS
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the engine is started or turned with the starter for 10 seconds
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present”
state.
10. DEFECT
Check the resistance of coil between the outlets for cylinders 1 and 4.
Change the coil if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V at the pole 1 of oil pump 236
relay.
Remedy it if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the injection calculator and check the
insulation and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 32 of calculator ♦ pinA ofignition coil.
Remedy if necessary.
Check:
-connection and state of the 236 oil-pump relay
-the presence of +12 V, after contact, at the 1 pole of the 236 relay
-the circuit between the 2 pole of the 236 relay and pin 68 of the injection calculator
-the coil of the 236 oil-pump relay.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 27
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
11.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
CYLINDERS 2 AND 3 IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to the pin 1 of the
calculator (cylinders 2 and 3 coil command)
2. Open circuit or short-circuit to the mass along the way to
pin 1 of the calculator (cylinders 2 and 3 coil command).
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the engine is started or turned with the starter for 10 seconds
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present”
state.
Check the resistance of coil between the outlets for cylinders 2 and 3.
Change the coil if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V at the pole 1 of oil pump 236
relay.
Remedy it if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the injection calculator and check the
insulation and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 1 of calculator ♦ pin B of ignition coil.
Remedy if necessary.
Check:
-connection and state of the 236 oil-pump relay
-the presence of +12 V, after contact, at the 1 pole of the 236 relay
-the circuit between the 2 pole of the 236 relay and pin 68 of the injection calculator
-the coil of the 236 oil-pump relay.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 28
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
12. DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
17
INFORMATION ROTATION SENSOR
1. Faulty cogs of the engine flywheel
2. Absence of flywheel signal.
In order to do this type of diagnosing, the sensor for atmospheric pressure
must not be faulty
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the contact is taken and the dialogue with the calculator is waited for to
SUGGESTIONS
be lost, then the dialogue with the calculator is re-entered and the memorized defects are erased
-operate the starter for 10 seconds or start the engine and keep it in idle
mode.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the state of the rotation sensor
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the resistance of rotation sensor.
Remedy rotation sensor if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation, the
continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 54 of calculator ♦ pin A of rotation sensor
pin 24 of calculator ♦ pin B of rotation sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the condition of the cogs of the engine flywheel.
Change the rotation sensor if the incident persists.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 29
vnx.su
17
13.
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENT
ANTI-STARTER
Electric problem along the line transmitting the anti-starter code.
SUGGESTIONS
Check the connection and the condition of the connectors along the circuit to pin 58 of
injection calculator
Change the faulty connector if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity of the circuit:
pin 58 of calculator ♦ pin A6 of UCE decoding device.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, refer to diagnosing anti-starter.
AFTER
REPAIR
14.
DEFECT
PRESENT
Erase defects memorized by the calculator.
Remedy other possible defects.
FAILURE TO MEMORIZE ANTI-STARTER CODE
SUGGESTIONS
This defect indicates the failure to memorize the anti-starter code by the injection
calculator or the intentional erasing of this code from the injection calculator.
If need be, refer to diagnosing the anti-starter system.
AFTER REPAIR
17 - 30
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
15.
DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
17
THE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
1. Pressure defect of the intake collector.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the contact is taken, wait for the dialogue with the calculator to be
SUGGESTIONS lost, then resume the dialogue with the calculator.
-run the engine and maintain it at a rotation ration greater than 600
rot/min for at least 10 seconds.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
If the defect is only present when the engine runs, check the correctness of the clapper
position parameters when the acceleration pedal is free, and when it is fully pressed.
Gently press the acceleration pedal (all the way) and check whether the position of the
clapper is constantly increasing.
If it is not so, the information is not correct. Treat the diagnose of the clapper potentiometer.
Check the atmospheric pressure sensor.
Remedy atmospheric pressure sensor if necessary.
Check the correct connecting and the condition of the linking tube between the sensor and
the intake gallery.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation, the
continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 16 of calculator ♦ pin B of the atmospheric pressure sensor
pin 15 of calculator ♦ pin A of the atmospheric pressure sensor
pin 78 of calculator ♦ pin C of the atmospheric pressure sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
Change the atmospheric pressure sensor if the incident persists.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 31
vnx.su
17
16.
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENT
IDLE MODE ADJUSTMENT CIRCUIT
Faulty idle mode adjustment
SUGGESTIONS
Check the connection and the condition of the engine step-by-step connector for idle
mode adjustment.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the resistance of the step-by-step engine.
Change it if necessary.
Check the insulation, the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the
circuits:
pin 12 of calculator ♦ pin B of step-by-step engine
pin 41 of calculator ♦ pin A of step-by-step engine
pin 42 of calculator ♦ pin C of step-by-step engine
pin 72 of calculator ♦ pin D of step-by-step engine.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
AFTER REPAIR Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 32
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
17. DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
17
CIRCUIT OF CLAPPER POTENTIOMETER
Breakdown of clapper position.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-the contact is set and kept like that for 10 seconds, without pressing the acceleration pedal
-determine a slow variation in the position of the clapper potentiometer, by slowly operating the acceleration pedal
-keep the pedal pushed to the end for 10 seconds.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present”
state.
Check the connection and the condition of the clapper potentiometer.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the resistance of clapper potentiometer (in case there is a certain defect, its value
will be 0 or “infinite”).
Check that the resistance of the clapper potentiometer is in accordance with its variation
curve, in keeping with the evolution of the clapper angle all through its operation range.
Check whether the clapper correctly drives the potentiometer.
Remedy or change the clapper potentiometer if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation, the
continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 75 of calculator ♦ pin A of clapper potentiometer
pin 74 of calculator ♦ pin B of clapper potentiometer
pin 73 of calculator ♦ pin C of clapper potentiometer.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
AFTER REPAIR Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 33
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
18. DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
SUGESTIONS
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Breakdown of water temperature sensor
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-set the contact
-if the defect is only memorized, start the engine and keep it run till
the first start of the cooling engine ventilator.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the state of the water temperature sensor
Change the connector if necessary.
Check that the resistance of the water temperature sensor is not 0 or “infinite” (i.e. certain
breakdown of the sensor).
Change the sensor if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 73 of calculator ♦ pin B1 of the water temperature sensor
pin 13 of calculator ♦ pin B2 of the water temperature sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
Check that the alteration of the resistance of the sensor for various temperatures is in
keeping with its variation curve.
Change the sensor if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
AFTER REPAIR Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 34
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
19. DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
17
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Breakdown of air temperature sensor
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-set the contact
-if the defect is only memorized, start the engine and keep it run till
the first start of the cooling engine ventilator.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is er corded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the air temperature sensor
Change the connector if necessary.
Check that its resistance is not 0 (i..e. certain breakdown).
Remedy the sensor if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 77 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of air temperature sensor
pin 49 of calculator ♦ pin 1 of air temperature sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
Check that the alteration of the resistance of the air temperature sensor for various temperatures is in keeping with its variation curve.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 35
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
20.
DEFECT
PRESENT
CANISTER DRAINING VALVE CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 4 of calculator
(draining valve command)
2. Short-circuit at mass along the way to pin 4 of calculator
(draining valve command)
3. Open circuit along the way to pin 4 of calculator (draining valve
command)
SUGGESTIONS
Check the connection and the condition of the canister draining valve connector
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the resistance of draining valve.
Change the valve if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V at pin 1 of the canister draining
valve.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation and
the continuity along the circuit:
pin 4 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of canister draining valve
Remedy if necessary.
Change canister draining valve
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 36
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
21.
17
OXYGEN PROBE CIRCUIT
DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
Breakdown of oxygen probe signal
SUGGESTIONS
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-set the contact
-start the engine and wait for the enrichment adjustment to be
active for at least 5 minutes.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the oxygen probe
Change the connector if necessary.
Check if there is any “false air” caused by cases of lack of watertightness along the
exhaust-probe circuit.
If the car has been running a lot out of town proceed to probe-cleaning
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12 V at pin A of the oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 45 of calculator ♦ pin C of oxygen probe
pin 80 of calculator ♦ pin D of oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
Change the oxygen probe if the incident persists
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 37
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
22.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
OXYGEN PROBE HEATING CIRCUIT
1. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 63 of calculator
(heating oxygen probe command)
2. Short-circuit at mass along the way to pin 63 of calculator
(heating oxygen probe command)
3. Open circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 63 of calculator
(heating oxygen probe command)
4. Breakdown of the probe fuse heating power.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-start the engine
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the oxygen probe connector
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the heating resistance of the oxygen probe.
Change the oxygen probe if necessary.
Check the presence of +12V at pin A of the oxygen probe.
Remedy the electric circuit up to the actuating relay 238 if necessary
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuit:
pin 63 of calculator −> pin B of the oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 38
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
23.
DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
SUGGESTIONS
17
DETONATION SENSOR CIRCUIT
Breakdown of detonation signal
Condition of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-do a route-test, with the engine heated and under high rotation
ratio.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the“present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the detonation sensor
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the mounting of the detonation sensor on the engine block.
Tighten to the couple the detonation sensor.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 20 of calculator -> pin 1 of detonation sensor
pin 79 of calculator -> pin 2 of detonation sensor
pin 79 of calculator -> detonation sensor screening.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, change the detonation sensor.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 39
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
24.
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
CAR SPEED INFORMATION
Car speed breakdown
SUGGESTIONS
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-do a route-test, watching the car speed
-continue the route-test running at constant speed
-continue the route-test, running up-hill with the engine in idle
mode.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the connectors along the way to the speed
translator.
Change the connectors if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuit:
pin 53 of calculator -> pin 1 of speed translator.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, change the speed translator and the mileage cable.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 40
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
25.
DEFECT
PRESENT
17
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR RELAY COMMAND CIRCUIT
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to mass of the way to pin 10 of the
calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 10 of the calculator
Condition of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact, and wait for the dialogue with the tester to be lost,
then set the contact and resume dialogue.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
SUGGESTIONS
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Note: The calculator will command the compressor relay only if the conditions are met which allow the good operational mode of the air-conditioning installation (pressure of refrigerating agent in installation, working electric circuit between calculator and A.C. start switch).
Refer to directions of A.C installation repairing.
Check the connection and the condition of the 584 compressor relay.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check the presence of +12 V at pole 3 of the 584 compressor relay.
Check fuse S6 in the engine compartment.
Remedy it if necessary.
Check the presence of mass at pole 2 of the584 compressor relay
Remedy if necessary.
Check that the insulation and the continuity of the circuit:
pin 10 calculator ♦ pole 2 of the 584 compressor relay.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the coil of the 584 relay.
Change relay if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 41
vnx.su
17
26.
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
DEFECT
PRESENTOR
MEMORIZED
WATER TEMPERATURE ALERT CIRCUIT
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to mass of the way to pin 9 of the
calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 9 of the calculator.
Condition of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-start the engine and keep it at over 1500 rot/min for at least 10 secSUGGESTIONS onds.
Conditions of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
-the defect has been memorized but is recorded in the “present” state.
Check the connection and the condition of the connectors along the circuit:
pin 9 of calculator -> water temperature alert light indicator (on board).
Change connectors if necessary.
Check the condition of water temperature alert light indicator on board. On setting the
contact, it must flash for 3 seconds, then it turns off.
Remedy if necessary.
Check if the electric bulb of the water temperature alert light indicator has 12 V, after
setting the contact.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 9 of calculator -> water temperature alert light indicator (on board)..
Remedy if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 42
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
27.
DEFECT
PRESENT
SUGGESTIONS
17
LOW SPEED VENTILATOR RELAY COMMAND CIRCUIT
(for A.C. cars)
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to mass of the way to pin 8 of the calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 8 of the calculator.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait for the dialogue with the tester to be lost
-set the contact and enter dialogue.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-defect is present
Note: this defect has to be correlated with the diagnosing of the water
temperature sensor circuit and the air-conditioning installation.
Check the connection and the condition of the low-speed 700 ventilator connector
Change the connector if necessary.
Check, after setting contact, the presence of +12 V at pole 1 of the 700 relay.
Remedy it if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 8 of calculator ♦ pole 2 of the low-speed 700 ventilator relay.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the coil of the low-speed 700 ventilator relay.
Change relay if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 43
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
28.
DEFECT
PRESENT
HIGH SPEED VENTILATOR RELAY COMMAND CIRCUIT
(for A.C. cars)
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to mass of the way to pin 38 of the
calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 38 of the calculator.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait for the dialogue with the tester to be lost
-set the contact and enter dialogue.
SUGGESTIONS
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
Note: this defect has to be correlated with the diagnosing of the water
temperature sensor circuit and the air-conditioning installation.
Check the connection and the condition of the high-speed 234 ventilator connector
Change the connector if necessary.
Check, after setting contact, the presence of +12 V at pole 1 of the 234 relay.
Remedy it if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 38 of calculator ® pole 2 of the low-speed 234 ventilator relay.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the coil of the low-speed 234 ventilator relay.
Change relay if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 44
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
29.
DEFECT
PRESENT
SUGGESTIONS
17
VENTILATOR RELAY COMMAND CIRCUIT
(for cars having no A.C.)
1. Open circuit or short-circuit to mass of the way to pin 8 of the
calculator
2. Short-circuit at 12 V along the way to pin 8 of the calculator.
Conditions of breakdown detection by the calculator:
-take the contact and wait for the dialogue with the tester to be lost
-set the contact and enter dialogue.
Condition of performing the diagnosing:
-the defect is present
Note: this defect has to be correlated with the diagnosing of the water
temperature sensor circuit.
Check the connection and the condition of the connector of the 234 cooling ventilator
relay.
Change the connector if necessary.
Check, after setting contact, the presence of +12 V at pole 1 of the 234 relay.
Remedy it if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation
and the continuity along the circuit:
pin 8 of calculator ♦ pole 2 of the 234 cooling ventilator relay.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the coil of the 234 cooling ventilator relay.
Change the relay if necessary.
The problem is not yet solved! Consequently, the injection calculator must be changed.
CAUTION! The destruction of the calculator has probably been caused by an
electric shock.
The cause of the destruction must be found before mounting a new
calculator.
AFTER
REPAIR
Erase defects memorized by the computer.
Perform the steps under “Suggestions” to confirm the repair.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 45
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
30. DEFECT
PRESENT OR
MEMORIZED
FUNCTIONAL BREAKDOWN OF THE OXYGEN PROBE
Lack of coherence of the information received from the oxygen probe.
SUGGESTIONS
Check that there is no “false air” caused by the lack of watertightness along the exhaust
circuit up to the oxygen probe
Remedy if necessary.
If the car has been running for a long while in town, clean the oxygen probe.
Check the connection and the condition of the oxygen probe connector.
Change connector if necessary.
Check the heating resistance of the oxygen probe.
Change oxygen probe if necessary.
Check, after setting the contact, the presence of +12V (after the actuating realy) at pin A
of the oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 45 of aclculator♦ pin C of oxygen probe
pin 80 of calculator ♦ pin D ofoxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
Connect the 90-way terminal-tester instead of the calculator and check the insulation,
the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuit:
pin 63 of calculator ® pin B of oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, replace the oxygen probe.
AFTER
REPAIR
Note down other functional defects.
Erase the defects memorized by the calculator.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 46
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
31.
DEFECT
PRESENT
SUGGESTIONS
17
POLLUTING COMBUSTION MISFIRE
DESTRUCTIVE COMBUSTION MISFIRE
1. Combustion misfire during the last running done
2. Confirmed combustion misfire.
Combustion misfire at cylinder 1
Combustion misfire at cylinder 2
Combustion misfire at cylinder 3
Combustion misfire at cylinder 4.
Furnishes information concerning the nature and location of breakdown.
Connect the tester and select “Test of ignition”.
Watch the indications and replace the necessary parts.
Connect the tester and select “Test of compression”.
Watch the indications and replace the necessary parts.
Connect the tester and check the cogs of the flywheel.
Remedy if necessary.
If no defect is found out, then there is a problem with the fuel-supply circuit. You must
check:
-petrol filter
-flow and pressure of fuel
-condition of petrol pump
-if there are impurities inside the tank
-condition of injectors.
Remedy the elements of the fuel-supply circuit that are faulty.
AFTER REPAIR
Note down other functional defects.
Erase the defects memorized by the calculator.
Remedy other possible defects.
17 - 47
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE DEFECTS
COMBUSTION MISFIRE AT CYLINDER 1
COMBUSTION MISFIRE AT CYLINDER 2
COMBUSTION MISFIRE AT CYLINDER 3
COMBUSTION MISFIRE AT CYLINDER 4
32.
SUGGESTION
It must be said that in infrequent cases the indication of the faulty cylinder is not exact; the calculator can declare cylinder 1 as not working,
while it is not faulty. So, you have to check this cylinder as a priority,
and if everything s correct, the other cylinders will be checked. These
indications will only be used if the polluting or destructive combustion
misfires are present.
CYLINDER 1 IS
DECLARED
FAULTY
In this case, the problem is probably caused by an element which acts
only on this cylinder:
-its injector
-the spark plug of this cylinder
-the plug of the spark for that cylinder.
CYLINDERS 1
AND 4 OR
CYLINDERS 2
AND 3 ARE
DECLARED
FAULTY
In this case, the problem is probably caused by an element which acts
only on this couple of cylinders (1 and 4 or 2 and 3):
-the high-tension part of the ignition coil for cylinders 1 and 4 or for
cylinder 2 and 3
-the command part of the ignition coil for cylinders 1 and 4 or for
cylinder 2 and 3.
FOUR
CYLINDERS
ARE
DECLARED
FAULTY
In this case, the problem is probably caused by an element which
acts on all the cylinders:
-the petrol filter
-the petrol pump
-the quality of the petrol.
17 - 48
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
17
Finally, the testing of the various states and parameters of the system will be done,
in the following situations:
A - With the stopped engine, and with contact set
B - With the hot engine, in idle mode, without consumers
C - During a route test.
A- With the stopped engine, and with contact set
SUGGESTIONS
LIST OF STATES
Nr.
Function
crt:
1.
Battery
voltage
2.
Injection
calculator
configuration
Visualizing and
Remarks
Characteristics
State: +After Contact to calculator
Parameter: Supply voltage of
injection calculator
Actuating relay command
State: Connection for AC
State: Configuration with antistarter
State: Connection with speed
translator
3. Anti-starter
4.
Confirmed state If further problems
11.8V<X<13.2V arise, refer to the
diagnosing of that
parameter
Confirmed state
if the car is
equipped with
AC
Confirmed state
Confirmed state
State: Anti-starter
Not confirmed
state
Acceleration pedal let free
State: position of clapper when the
acceleration pedal is raised
Parameter: position of clapper
Parameter: Memorized value for
the position when the pedal is raised
Acceleration pedal slightly pushed
State: position of clapper when acceleration pedal is raised
State: position of clapper when accelerat ion pedal is completel y
pushed
Acceleration pedal completely
pushed
State: position of clapper when accelerat ion pedal is completel y
pushed
Parameter: position of clapper
Confirmed state
17 - 49
vnx.su
Diagnosis
If further problems
arise, refer to the
diagnosing of those
states
If further problems
arise, refer to the
diagnosing of that
state
0<X<45
Not confirmed
state
Not confirmed
state
Confirmed state
200<X<240
If further problems
arise, refer to the
diagnosing of those
parameters
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
LIST OF PARAMETERS
Water tem- Parameter: water
perature sen- temperature
sor
temperature +/- 50C
If further problems
arise, refer to the diagnosing of that parameter
6. Air tempera- Parameter: air temperature
ture sensor
X= Temperature
under engine hood
+/- 50C
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing of
that parameter
7. Pressure sen- Parameter: collector
sor
pressure
Parameter: atmospheric
pressure
X= Atmospheric
pressure
X= Atmospheric
pressure
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing of
those parameters
Functioning of
petrol pump must
be heard
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing of
that command
5.
X= Engine
COMMAND OF ACTUATORS
8. Petrol pump
Command: relay of petrol
pump
Functioning of
low speed ventilator must be heard
Functioning of
Command: high speed cool- high speed ventiing ventilator
lator must be
heard
Put hand under the
Step-by-step
Command:
idle
mode
adjust10.
engine to feel its
engine
ment engine
functioning
9. Cooling
ventilator
11. Canister
draining
valve
Command: low speed cooling ventilator
Command: Canister draining Valve must be
valve
functional
Command: AC must be op12. Air conditioning (AC) erated through the board
switch
Compressor must
couple
13. Water tem- Command: Water temperaperature alert ture alert light indicator on
light indica- board
tor
17 - 50
vnx.su
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing of
that command
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing of
that command
If further problems arise,
refer to the diagnosing
for lack of conformity to
idle mode adjustment
If further problems
arise, refer to the diagnosing defects along the
draining valve circuit
If further problems
arise, refer to the diagnosing of the states of air
conditioning
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
SUGGESTIONS
B - With the hot engine, in idle mode, without consumers
LIST OF STÃTES
1.
Battery voltage
State: +After Contact to calculator
Parameter: Supply voltage of
calculator
If the parameter: Supply voltage of calculator
Then the parameter: Engine
rotation ratio
Confirmed state
13V<X<14.5V
X<12.7
750<X<850
rot/min
Petrol pump command
Command of actuators
State: Petrol pump relay command
Confirmed state
State: Command of actuators’
relay
Confirmed state
4.
Rotation signal
State: Rotation signal
5.
Recognition of the State: Recognition of the 1
1 cylinder
cylinder
Confirmed state
6.
Heating of oxygen State: Heating of oxygen
probe
probe
Confirmed state
7.
Clapper potentiometer
8.
Idle mode adjustment
2.
3.
Confirmed state
Confirmed state
State: Position of clapper of
acceleration pedal: free (raised)
State: Idle mode adjustment
Parameter: engine rotation
Parameter: Tolerance of idle
mode regimen
Parameter: Idle mode RCO
Parameter: Idle mode RCO
adaptation.
17 - 51
vnx.su
If further problems arise, refer
to the diagnosing
of that parameter
Confirmed state
If further problems arise, refer
to the diagnosing of the rotation signal information defect
If further
problems arise,
refer to the
“Diagnosing
Conditions”
If further
problems arise,
refer to the
diagnosing of
that parameter
If further prob725 < X < 7 5 rot/min
lems arise, refer
-25 < X < +25 ro
t/min
to the diagnosing of that state
5 % < X < 12 %
-3 % < X < 7 %
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
LIST OF PARAMETERS
9.
Pressure circuit
10. Anti-detonation
circuit
Parameter: Collector pressure
Parameter: Atmospheric
pressure
Parameter: Detonation signal
290 < X < 370 mbar I f further problems
arise, refer to the
X = A t m o s p h e r i c diagnosing of those
parameters
pressure
If further problems
30 < X < 70
arise, refer to the
diagnosing of that
parameter
LIST OF STÃTES
State: enrichment adjustment
Parameter: tension of oxygen
probe
Parameter: enrichment adjustment correction
12. Air-conditioning State: Air-conditioning requirement
(board-commanded AC)
11. Enrichment
adjustment
Confirmed state
20mV<X<840 mV
0<X<255
Average = 128
Confirmed state
Light indicator is on
when AC commands
coupling of compressor
State: Accelerated idle mode
State: AC compressor
Parameter: engine rotation ratio
Parameter: power absorbed
by AC compressor
State: Air-conditioning requirment
State: Accelerated idle mode
State: AC compressor
Parameter: engine rotation ratio
Parameter: power absorbed by
AC compressor
State: Low speed ventilator
If further problems
arise, refer to the
diagnosing of that
state
If further problems
Confirmed state
arise, refer to the
Light indicator is on
diagnosing of those
when accelerated idle
states
mode is active
Confirmed state
Light indicator is on
when injection authorizes coupling of compressor
750<X<850 rot/min
300<X<5000 W
Not confirmed state
Confirmed state
Not confirmed state
If the injection does
not authorize coupling
of compressor
750<X<850 rot/min
X<250 W
Confirmed state
Ventilator must have
low rotation ratio
17 - 52
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
State: canister draining valve
13. Canister
draining valve Parameter: canister draining
valve RCO
Confirmed state detonation
X < 0,7 %
Canister draining not allowed
Draining valve stays shut
14.
State: low speed ventilator
Parameter: water temperature
Not confirmed state
Ventilator must run when water
temperature is over 96oC
State: high speed ventilator
Parameter: water temperature
Confirmed state
Ventilator must run when water
temperature is over 102oC
G.M.V.
SUGGESTION
17
C - During a route test.
LIST OF STATES
1.
Canister drain- Parameter: canister draining valve Confirmed state
ing valve
Canister draining is authorized
Parameter: canister draining valve X > 0,7 % and has variations
RCO
LIST OF PARAMETERS
2.
3.
Speed
translator
Detonation
sensor
X = speed read on the gauge as
km/h
Parameter: Car speed
Car under load
Parameter: Detonation signal
Parameter: Anti-detonation correction
If further
problems
X is variable and different from 0
arise, refer to
0<X<7 oRAC
the diagnosing
of that parameter
17 - 53
vnx.su
If further
problems
arise, refer to
the diagnosing
of that
parameter
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
4.
5.
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-CONFORMITY TEST
Enrichment
adaptation
Polluting fumes
After memorization
Parameter: enrichment adaptation under load
Parameter: enrichment adaptation in idle mode
At 2500 rot/min after keeping for
30 seconds
In idle mode, after settling rotation
ratio
17 - 54
vnx.su
80 < X < 176
80 < X < 176
CO < 0,3 %
CO2 > 13,5 %
O2 < 0,8 %
HC < 100 ppm
0,97< l <1,03
CO < 0,5 %
HC < 100 ppm
0,97< l <1,03
If further
problems arise,
refer to the
diagnosing of
those parameters
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
STATE
SUGGESTIONS
17
CONNECTION SPEED TRANSLATOR
There should be no defect present or memorized
Change the injection calculator if the car is unable to run at more than 40 km/h.
If further problems arise, refer to the diagnosing of the car speed parameter.
AFTER REPAIR
STATE
SUGGESTIONS
Perform again the conformity test.
ANTI-STARTER
There should be no defect present or memorized.
Check if the anti-starter device is defect.
If the cause is the anti-starter device, remedy the defect before doing this diagnosing.
Check the insulation and the continuity of the cabling along the circuit from pin 58 calculator.
If the defect has not been eliminated, refer to the diagnosing of the anti-starter device.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 55
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
17
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
STATE
SUGGESTIONS
IDLE MODE ADJUSTMENT
There should be no defect present or memorized
Check the resistance of the step-by-step engine for the idle mode adjustment.
Change it if necessary.
Check the insulation and the continuity of the cabling along the circuits:
- pin 12 calculator ♦ pin B step-by-step engine
- pin 41 calculator ♦ pin A step-by-step engine
- pin 42 calculator ♦ pin C step-by-step engine
- pin 72 calculator ♦ pin D step-by-step engine
Remedy if necessary, and then go on with the diagnose, watching the tolerance value of
the idle mode rotation ratio.
The idle mode rotation
ratio< minimal limit.
The idle mode rotation ratio is too small.
-Check the functioning of the enrichment adjustment.
-Clean the air supply circuit (clapper body, step-by-step engine) as they seem to be dirty.
-Check the oil level of the engine (too high a level causes splash lubrication)
-Check the pressure of petrol (see if it is not too small)
-Check engine compression with the “CLIP TEHNIC” tester
-Check the adjustment of the rocker-arms and the settling of the distribution.
-Check the ignition system
-Check the injectors.
If all the above are correct, then the step-by-step engine will have to be replaced.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 56
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
The idle mode rotation
ratio > maximal limit.
The idle mode rotation ratio is too great.
- Check the oil level of the engine
- Check the good functioning of the atmospheric pressure sensor.
- Check the tubes connected to the admission collector.
-Check the fittings of the admission collector
- Check the watertightness fittings of the clapper body
- Check the watertightness of the power-brakes.
- Check the presence of the nozzles of the oil-vapour re-aspiration circuit
- Check petrol pressure.
- Check the adjustment of the rocker-arms and the settling of the distribution.
If all the above are correct, then the step-by-step engine will have to be replaced.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test
17 - 57
vnx.su
17
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
STATE
SUGGESTIONS
ENRICHMENT ADJUSTMENT
There should be no defect present or memorized.
Check the connection and the condition of the oxygen probe connector.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the presence of + 12V at pin A of oxygen probe after setting the contact.
Check insulation and continuity along the circuits:
pin 45 calculator ♦ pin C oxygen probe
pin 80 calculator ♦ pin D oxygen probe.
Remedy if necessary.
- Check the ignition system
- Check the watertightness of the connections to the canister draining valve and to the can
ister (lack of watertightness in these locations considerably perturbs enrichment).
- Check the watertightness of the exhaust (i.e. exhaust-pipe) circuit.
- Check the watertightness of the intake collector.
- If the car only runs in town, the probe can be clogged (try to do a loaded running)
- If the idle mode running is unstable, check the adjustment of the rocker-arms and the
settling of the distribution.
- Check petrol pressure
- Check the injectors (the petrol flow and the shape of the flow).
If necessary, replace the oxygen probe.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 58
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
STATE
17
AIR CONDITIONING AC COMPRESSOR REQUIREMENT
SUGGESTIONS
No defect should be present or memorized
The compressor
clutch does not
couple
Check the insulation and continuity along the circuit towards pin 10
injection calculator.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, refer to the diagnosing of he air-conditioning.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test
PARAMETER
SUGGESTIONS
CALCULATOR POWER VOLTAGE
No defect should be present or memorized.
No consumer should be turned on.
If the voltage < the minimal voltage, then the battery may be flat.
Check the charging circuit, in order to detect the cause of the problem.
The contact is set
If the voltage > the maximal voltage, then it is possible that the
battery may be overcharged.
Check the charging voltage to be correct, with and without consumers.
In idle mode
If the voltage < the minimal voltage, then the charging voltage is too
small.
Check the charging circuit, in order to detect the cause of the problem.
If the voltage > the maximal voltage, then the charge of the battery is
too high.
The voltage regulator is faulty.
Remedy this problem, and then check the level of the electrolyte in the
battery.
17 - 59
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
Remark:
The testing of the battery and the charging circuit can be done with “TECHNIC CLIP”
and does not require disconnecting the battery, so it allow the conservation of the calculator
memory.
AFTER REPAIR
PARAMETER
Perform again the conformity test.
CLAPPER POSITION
MEMORIZED VALUE FOR
FREE POSITION OF ACCELERATION PEDAL
SUGGESTIONS
No defect should be present or memorized.
The contact is set or the engine is started.
The value is
memorized at limit
or failure to detect
the free pedal
position, or failure to
detect the completely
pushed down
position
Check if the mechanic limitation of the potentiometer has been
altered.
Check the command of the acceleration (friction, obstacles).
Check the resistance of the clapper potentiometer.
Change potentiometer if necessary.
Check the insulation, the continuity and the absence of contact
resistance along the circuits:
pin 43 of calculator ♦ pin C of clapper potentiometer
pin 74 of calculator ♦ pin B of clapper potentiometer
pin 75 of calculator ♦ pin A of clapper potentiometer.
Remedy if necessary.
Check the resistance of the clapper potentiometer during the
operation of the clapper.
The position, of the
clapper is fixed
If the resistance varies, check the electric circuits connected to
the potentiometer.
If the resistance does not vary, check if the potentiometer is
mechanically coupled to the clapper.
Change the potentiometer if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 60
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
PARAMETER
WATER TEMPERATURE
SUGGESTIONS
No defect should be present or memorized
17
If the value read is not real, check if the sensor for water temperature correctly follows the
“standard curve of the resistance according to temperature”.
Replace sensor if there are deviations.
REMARK: a sensor displaying deviations regarding the normal evolution of its param
eters has previously undergone an electric shock.
Check the insulation, the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 13 of calculator ♦ pin B2 of water temperature sensor
pin 73 of calculator ♦ pin B1 of water temperature sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
PARAMETER
SUGGESTIONS
Perform again the conformity test.
AIR TEMPERATURE
No defect should be present or memorized
If the value read is not real, check if the sensor for air temperature correctly follows the
“standard curve of the resistance according to temperature”.
Replace sensor if there are deviations.
REMARK: a sensor displaying deviations regarding the normal evolution of its param
eters has previously undergone an electric shock.
Check the insulation, the continuity and the absence of contact resistance along the circuits:
pin 49 of calculator ♦ pin 1 of air temperature sensor
pin 73 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of air temperature sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 61
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
PARAMETER
SUGGESTIONS
Collector pressure not
re a l a fter se tting
contact.
Collector pressure <
Min. in idle mode.
Atmospheric pressure
not real
Collector pressure <
Max. in idle mode.
COLLECTOR PRESSURE
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
No defect should be present or memorized
Check the insulation, the continuity and the absence of contact
resistance along the circuits:
pin 15 of calculator ♦ pin A of atmospheric pressure sensor
pin 16 of calculator ♦ pin B of atmospheric pressure sensor
pin 78 of calculator ♦ pin C of atmospheric pressure sensor.
Remedy if necessary.
If all the above are correct, replace the atmospheric pressure
sensor
Check:
- watertightness of tube between the atmospheric pressure sensor
and the intake collector
- adjustment of rocker-arms
- canister draining valve, which should be closed in idle mood
- cylinder compression, controlled with “CLIP TEHNIC”
If all the above are correct, replace the atmospheric pressure sensor
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 62
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
PARAMETER
SUGGESTIONS
17
DETONATION SIGNAL
No defect should be present or memorized
The detonation sensor should generate a signal, the amplitude of which must differ from 0,
a proof of the fact that it perceives the mechanical vibrations of the engine.
If the signal = 0:
- check if the sensor is well fixed
- check the insulation and continuity of cabling along the circuits:
pin 20 of calculator ♦ pin 1 of detonation sensor
pin 79 of calculator ♦ pin 2 of detonation sensor
pin 19 of calculator ♦ pin 1 of detonation sensor screening.
Replace detonation sensor if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
PARAMETER
SUGGESTIONS
Perform again the conformity test
ADAPTATION OF ENRICHMENT WHILE RUNNING
ADAPTATION OF ENRICHMENT IN IDLE MODE
No defect should be present or memorized.
Do initialization.
Make sure the canister draining valve is watertight.
Erase memory of the injection calculator.
With the engine hot, in the stage of the idle mode adjustment, watch these parameters and
notice:
- if one of the parameters drifts to the MAX limit, then there is no enough petrol
- if one of the parameters drifts to the MIN limit, then there is too much petrol.
Ensure the cleanness and the good functioning of:
- petrol filter
- petrol pump
- petrol supply circuit
- petrol tank.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 63
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
COMMAND
SUGGESTIONS
PETROL TANK
No defect should be present or memorized
Check that the shock sensor has the inner contact shut.
Push in order to perform the closing of the shock sensor, if necessary.
Check, while the injection calculator commands the petrol pump, the presence of 12V at
pin 3 of the shock sensor.
If there is no 12V at pin 3 of the sensor, then remedy the circuit between pin 3 of sensor
and pole 5 of petrol pump relay.
Check the continuity between pin 1 and pin 3 of shock sensor.
If necessary, replace shock sensor.
Check the integrity of the cabling and the presence of mass at pin A1 of the connector on
the cap of the petrol tank.
Check the insulation and the continuity of the cabling along the supply circuit +12V:
-pin 1 shock sensor ♦ pin B1 petrol tank connector.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, replace petrol pump.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test
17 - 64
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-INTERPRETING THE STATES
COMMAND
SUGGESTIONS
The ventilator does
not turn at low speed
17
LOW SPEED VENTILATOR
HIGH SPEED VENTILATOR
No defect should be present or memorized
Check the insulation and the continuity of the cabling along the
circuit to pin 8 of calculator.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, check on the basis of the electrical schema:
- the supply of the ventilator (700) and of the GMV ventilator
- the connection to the mass of the GMV ventilator
- the state of the GMV (700) relay
- the state of the fuse (321) located between the relay 700 and the
GMV ventilator
- the state of the GMV ventilator.
Remedy if necessary.
The ventilator does
not turn at high speed
Check the insulation and the continuity of the cabling along the
circuit to pin 38 of calculator.
Remedy if necessary.
If the incident persists, check on the basis of the electrical schema:
-the supply of the ventilator (234) and of the GMV ventilator
-the connection to the mass of the GMV ventilator
-the state of the GMV (234) relay
-the state of the GMV ventilator.
Remedy if necessary.
AFTER REPAIR
Perform again the conformity test.
17 - 65
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-BREAKDOWN LOCALIZATION ALGORITHM
1.
SUGGESTIONS
STARTING PROBLEMS
Do not use this information before having done the complete check-up
with the tester!
♦
Check if there is petrol in the fuel tank (do not rely on the
on-board indices). Check if it is the fuel recommended by
the manufacturer.
♦
Check if there are no broken tubes.
Check the fuelsupply circuit
♦
Check the flow and the pressure of the fuel: the condition
of the petrol-pump, of the pressure regulator. Check the
injectors (flow, shape of jet)
Check the exhaust
system
♦
Check if the exhaust circuit is not strangled-up and the
catalyst is not stopped-up.
Check the ignition
♦
Check the state of the sparking plugs and the ignition coil.
♦
Disconnect the tube between the draining valve and the
intake collector and strangle it up. If the disturbances disappear, the cause was the draining valve.
Check the engine
compression
♦
Connect the “CLIP TEHNIC” device to do this test in accordance with the usual manner of work.
Check the
engine flywheel
♦
Connect the tester “CLIP” and do the test corresponding to
the check-up of the rotation signal.
Check the step-bystep engine
♦
Gently touch the step-by-step engine in order to possibly
unblock it.
Check the fuel
Check the tubes and
hoses
Check the canister
draining valve
17 - 66
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-BREAKDOWN LOCALIZATION ALGORITHM
2.
17
IDLE MODE PROBLEMS
SUGGESTIONS
Do not use this information before having done the complete checkup with the tester!
Check the fuel
♦
Check if there is petrol in the fuel tank (do not rely on the
on-board indices). Check if it is the fuel recommended by
the manufacturer.
Check the tubes and hoses.
♦
Check if there are no broken tubes.
Check the fuel-supply
circuit
♦
Check the flow and the pressure of the fuel: the condition
of the petrol-pump, of the pressure regulator. Check the
injectors (flow, shape of jet)
Check the exhaust system
♦
Check if the exhaust circuit is not strangled-up and the
catalyst is not stopped-up.
♦
Check the state of the sparking plugs and the ignition coil.
Check the engine oil level
♦
Check, on the oil gauge, if the level of the oil is not too high.
Check the engine flywheel
♦
Connect the tester “CLIP” and do the test corresponding
to the check-up of the rotation signal.
Check the step-by-step engine
♦
Gently touch the step-by-step engine in order to possibly
unblock it.
Check the intake collector
♦
Check the condition of the fittings.
♦
Check, after taking them apart, whether the injectors leak.
♦
Check if the clapper body is not clogged.
Check the ignition
Check the injectors
Check the body of the clapper
A
17 - 67
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-BREAKDOWN LOCALIZATION ALGORITHM
A
Check the power-brakes
♦
Check if there are cases of lack of watertightness (noise)
on the power-brakes.
Check the engine compression
♦
Connect the “CLIP TEHNIC” device to do this test in
accordance with the usual manner of work.
Check the canister
draining valve
♦
Disconnect the tube between the draining valve and the
intake collector and strangle it up. If the disturbances
disappear, the cause was the draining valve.
AFTER REPAIR
Erase the defects memorized. If there are no other problems,
erase the parameters memorized by the calculator.
17 - 68
vnx.su
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-BREAKDOWN LOCALIZATION ALGORITHM
RUNNING PROBLEMS
3.
SUGGESTIONS
17
Do not use this information before having done the complete
check-up with the tester!
♦
Check if the air filter is not deformed.
♦
Check if there are no broken tubes
♦
Check if there are no broken tubes
Check the fuel-supply circuit
♦
Check if there is petrol in the fuel tank (do not rely on the
on-board indices). Check if it is the fuel recommended by
the manufacturer. Check if there are no broken tubes.
Check the exhaust
system
♦
Check if the exhaust circuit is not strangled-up and the
catalyst is not stopped-up.
Check the ignition
♦
Check the state of the sparking plugs and the ignition coil.
Check the engine oil
level
♦
Check, on the oil gauge, if the level of the oil is not too high.
Check the intake
collector
♦
Check the condition of the fittings.
Check the exhaust
collector
♦
Check if the exhaust collector is watertight.
Check the air filter
Check the fuel
Check the tubes and
hoses.
Check the injectors
♦
Make sure that, after taking them off, the injectors do not leak.
A
17 - 69
vnx.su
17
IGNITION AND INJECTION
E7J-A-2/60 ENGINE
DIAGNOSING-BREAKDOWN LOCALIZATION ALGORITHM
A
Check the body of
the clapper
♦
Check the power-brakes
♦
Check if there are cases of lack of watertightness (noise)
on the power-brakes.
Check the engine
flywheel
♦
Connect the tester “CLIP” and do the test corresponding
to the check-up of the rotation signal.
Check the running
train
♦
Check if the spurs, the brake cylinders and the wheel ballrings are not seized-up.
Check the cooling
of the engine
♦
Check the canister
draining valve
♦
Disconnect the tube between the draining valve and the intake collector and strangle it up. If the disturbances disappear, the cause was the draining valve.
Check the engine
compression
♦
Connect the “CLIP TEHNIC” device to do this test in accordance with the usual manner of work.
AFTER REPAIR
Check if the clapper body is not clogged.
Check if there is enough engine cooling.
Erase the defects memorized. If there are no other problems,
erase the parameters memorized by the calculator.
17 - 70
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
19
CHARACTERISTICS
QUANTITY AND QUALITY OF COOLING LIQUID
TYPE ENGINE
E7J
QUANTITY (L)
6
CALITATE
PECULIARITIES
Anti-freeze type D
GLACEOL RX
Protection up to -400C
THERMOSTAT
TYPE ENGINE
START OF OPENING (0C)
END OF OPENING (0C)
E7J
89
101
19 - 1
vnx.su
DRIVE (MM )
7,5
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
FILLING AND DRAINING
FILLING AND DRAINING
The heating radiator does not have a tap.
The circulation of the cooling liquid is done continuosly within the heating radiator, which contributes to the heating of the engine.
FILLING
The tightening of the emptying stopper is checked.
The draining screw placed on the tube between the engine and the air-conditioning radiator is
taken off.
The circuit is filled through the hole of the de-gassing pot.
The draining screw is fastened when the liquid flows in a continuous jet.
The engine is set into motion (2500 rot/min).
The level is adjusted for approx. 4 minutes.
The stopper of the de-gassing pot is closed.
DRAINING
The engine is let to run for 10 minutes at 2500 rot/min until the motor-ventilator starts (i.e. the
time for the automatic de-gassing).
Check if thelevel of the liquid is close to “Max”.
Do not open the draining screw when the engine is running.
Fasten again the stopper of the de-gassing pot with the engine still hot.
19 - 02
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
CONTROL
1.
19
CHECKING WATERTIGHTNESS OF CIRCUIT
The MS 554-01 adapter is mounted instead of the valve of the de-gassing pot.
The MS 554-07 device is connected to the adapter.
The engine is heated, and then stopped.
the pump is used in order to put the circuit under pressure.
The pumping is stopped at a value 0.1 bar smaller than the tare value of the valve (1.2 bar).
The pressure must not go down; otherwise, the leak is looked for.
The junction of the device for cooling system decompression is progressively unscrewed,
then the apparatus is taken off and the valve of the de-gassing pot, equipped with a new fitting,
is mounted.
2.
CHECKING WATERTIGHTNESS OF CIRCUIT
The MS 554-06 device, then the pressure in the circuit is reestablished; this pressure must
become stable at the tare value of the valve with the control tolerance of +/-0.1 bar.
The tare value of the valve of the de-gassing pot: 1.2 bar.
19 - 03
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
THE SCHEMA
Thermostat
Water pump
Components:
1. Engine
2. Radiator
3. De-gassing pot
4. Air-warming device
5. Thermostat stand
6. Nipple ø 3
7. Draining screw
19 - 4
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
RADIATOR
19
SPECIAL TOOLS
MOT 1202 - 01
MOT 453
Pliers for elastic collars
Tubes’ plug
DISMONTING
The battery is disconnected.
The tubes of the radiator are stopped up with the MOT 453 devices.
Dismount the hoses from the radiator by means of the elastic collar pliers MOT 1202-01.
The two screws of the stand are taken off the upper traverse of the radiator and the radiator
is taken off.
The radiator is emptied and the cooling liquid is retrieved.
REMOUNTING
Check the existence of the supporting bushings.
The radiator is mounted.
The jacks for the fixing on the radiator are mounted, as well as the radiator stands, and the
fixing screws are fastened (0,57 daN).
The MOT 453 devices are taken off.
The tubes that have been taken off are mounted back and the collars are tightened.
Note : When mounting, line up the marks from the hoses and the related parts.
The battery is connected.
The filling and the draining of the cooling circuit is done.
Tightening moments:
- the screws for the radiator stands (M6- 2 pieces) - 0,57 daN.
19 - 5
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT
for vehicles with air conditioning
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the (-) plug of the battery.
Disconnect the cooling fan connector (5).
Disconnect the cooling fan resistance connector (1). Mark the mounting position identification of the two connectors.
Detach the wiring from clip (6).
Cut the clip attaching the wiring on the cooling fan assembly in point (7).
Dismount the four-attachementscrews (3) of the cooling fan on the radiator,recovering the
washers (2) and (4).
Remove the cooling fan assembly.
REMOUNTING
Check the condition of the fan propeller, cooling fan electric motor, washers.
Tighten the attachement screw (3) of the assembly.
Replace the clip from point (7).
Mount the wiring of the cooling fan assembly taking into the consideration the mounting position marked before dismounting. This is to be fixed by means of a clip in point (7)
and will pass trough the clip (6).
Connect the cooling fan resistance connector (1).
Connect the cooling fan connector (5). Observe the mounting position identification of
the two connectors.
Connect the battery plug (-). In case the vehicle is equipped with progammable radiocassettes, electronic clock, etc, these are to be reset before returning the vehicle to the client.
Check the cooling fan operation: start the vehicle engine and disconnect the water
temperature sensor. The cooling fan must start. Reconnect the water temperature sensor,
then by means of the CLIP tester, erase the memorized failure related to the water temperature sensor.
4
FAILURES
2
3
7
8
ERASING
5
6
1
19 - 6
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
COOLING FAN DIAGNOSTIC
for vehicles with air conditioning
19 - 7
vnx.su
19
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
COOLING FAN DIAGNOSTIC
for vehicles with air conditioning
19 - 8
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
RESISTANCE COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT
for vehicles with air conditioning
19
Description of the operation:
Disconnect the battery (-) terminal.
Disconnect the resistance connector.
Dismount the two attachment screws of the resistance.
Position the new resistance assembly.
Mount the two attachment screws of the resistance (tightening moment 4.5 Nm).
Connect the resistance connector.
Connect the battery (-) terminal. In case the vehicle is equipped with programmable
radio-cassettes player, electronic clock, etc, those are to be re-programmed before returning the vehicle to the client.
Check the engine motor fan operation.
19 - 9
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT
for vehicles without air conditioning
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the (-) plug of the battery.
Disconnect the cooling fan connector (7).
Dismount thethree-attachementscrews (6) of the cooling fan on the radiator,recovering the
attachement buffers (2), cross-pieces (3) and the washers (4) and (5).
Remove the cooling fan assembly (1).
REMOUNTING
Check the condition of the fan propeller,cooling fan electric motor, bushings and washers.
Tighten the attachement screw (6) of the assembly.
Connect the cooling fan connector (7).
Connect the battery plug (-). In case the vehicle is equipped with progammable radiocassettes, electronic clock, etc, these are to be reset before returning the vehicle to the
client.
Check the cooling fan operation: start the vehicle engine and disconnect the water temperature sensor. The cooling fan must start. Reconnect the water temperature sensor, then
by means of the CLIP tester, erase the memorized failure related to the water temperature
sensor.
FAILURES
1
7
2
3
ERASING
4
5
6
19 - 10
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
COOLING FAN DIAGNOSTIC
for vehicles without air conditioning
19 - 11
vnx.su
19
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
WATER PUMP
SPECIAL DEVICES
MOT. 1202-02
MOT. 1505
Pincers for elastic collars
Device for measuring the belt tension
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Screw-nut for extending pulley / runner
Screw for the crankshaft pulley
Screws for right-side pendular stand
Screw-nut for hydro-elastic buffer
Screws for water-pump
Screw-nuts for water-pump
Screws for wheels
5
2+68o+/-6o
6.2
4.4
2.2
1
7.5
DISMOUNTING
The car is set on a two-column lifting stand.
The battery is disconnected.
The cooling circuit is emptied at the filling stopper placed at the lower part of the radiator.
The following are taken apart.
- the distribution belt (see Chapter “Distribution belt”);
- the extending pulley / runner (1);
- the fixing screws of the water-pump.
The water-pump is taken out at the upper end of the engine compartment.
19 - 12
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
WATER PUMP
19
CLEANING
It is very important that the fitting surfaces of the aluminum parts should not be scratched.
Use Decapjoint to dissolve the particles of fitting that are left stuck to them.
The paste is applied onto the cleaning surface and then you wait for approx. 10 minutes,
then it is removed with a wooden spatula.
During this operation you should used protection gloves.
REMOUNTING
The watertightness of the water-pump is done with LOCTITE 518; the H cord has the
thickness of 0,6-1 mm and must be applied according with the chart below.
The distribution belt is re-mounted (see Chapter “Distribution belt”).
The cooling circuit is filled and drained (see Chapter “Filling and Draining”).
19 - 13
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
DISMOUNTING - REMOUNTING EXHAUST
The catalytic converter, when in operation, reaches high temperatures, and consequently must not co me in touch with flammable materials, which
would lead to self-combustion.
The catalytic converter will be kept out of mechanic shocks.
DISMOUNTING
In order to take apart the noise-damper system 1, the following operations are to be
performed:
The screw-nuts 2 of the fixing collar, between holder 3 and noise-damper 1, are
loosened;
The two elastic fixing stands of the damper are taken apart, at the back on the car
bodywork;
The noise-damper system is pulled and taken out.
In order to take apart the assembledholder 4, the followingoperationsare to be performed:
Collar 4 is taken off and the assembled holder is disconnected from the catalytic
converter;
The elastic stands of the assembled holder are taken off;
The screw-nuts of the fixing collar 2 are loosened and the assembled holder is
taken out by gently rotating, and pulling it towards the front.
In order to take apart the catalytic converter system 6, the following operations are to
be performed:
The engine shield is taken apart;
The two screw-nuts 7 for the fixation of the engine shield on the two stud-bolts on
the exhaust gallery flange;
The fixing screws of converter stand 5 are taken off;
The oxygen probe is taken apart;
Collar 4 is taken apart, and the catalytic converter assembled on the assembled
holder is disconnected;
The catalytic converter is taken out.
REMONTARE
The mounting operations are performed in the reverse order.
Make sure there perfect watertightness between the elements of the exhaust system,
by using the Wurth watertightening paste, along the (inner part of the) joining stretch,
between the gas expansion chamber and the catalytic converter (0.014 kg), and between
the noise-damper and the expansion chamber (0.013 kg);
The fittings of the oxygen probe will be replaced for each taking-apart operation;
The tightening couple between the damper and the holder: 3.5 daNm +/-0.5.
19 - 14
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
DISMOUNTING - REMOUNTING EXHAUST
19 - 15
vnx.su
19
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
EMPTYING OF TANK
IMPORTANT
During the interventions affecting the
petrol tank and the fuel supply circuit one
must not smoke or bring incandescent
parts near the work-place.
The emptying of the tank does not require
taking apart the tank. Ac cess is allowed
through the inside of the car (i.e. the boot).
To take apart:
-the carpet of the boot;
-the lid of the visiting mouth (by taking
off the four screws);
-the click-collar 1 is taken out by means
of the MOT 1202 device;
-a tube is adapted to the A outlet, which
should be long enough to be introduced into a
vessel outside the car.
The H relay of the petrol-pump is taken out of
the fuse box located in the engine compartment,
and terminals 3 and 5 of the relay connector are
shunted, thus ensuring the operation of the petrol
pump (12 V).
The operation of the pump will be stopped
when an intermittent leakage of the petrol is noticed.
The shunt is taken off.
The relay is mounted.
19 - 16
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
TANK FUEL DESCRIPTION
19
The fuel tank has a watertight stopper; the inlet for the filling with unleaded fuel has a
filling orifice incompatible with a classical filling gun (as lead has a negative effect on the
anti-pollution system, the oxygen probe and the catalyst).
THE ANTI - TILT VALVE
In case the car is tilted / overthrown, the valve gets blocked, thus avoiding petrol from spilling
towards the carbon canister or the filling inlet.
THE SECURITY VALVE
In case the petrol vapour recycling circuit is stopped up, the security valve avoids over-pressure or under-pressure in the tank.
It is mounted with the red-marked end towards the joining tube “T”, and with the white-marked
end towards the tube linking it to the filling inlet.
19 - 17
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
TANK FUEL DESCRIPTION
19 - 18
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
TANK FUEL DESCRIPTION
19 - 19
vnx.su
19
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
TANK FUEL
DISMOUNTING
In order to take apart the petrol tank from the car the following operations are in order:
The battery is disconnected;
The tank is emptied of fuel;
The carpet in the boot is taken out;
The cabling case of the fuel-level transmitter is taken off;
The collar fixing the airing conduit on the tank lid is taken off;
The junctures of the fuel-supply conduits (going- and return-) are taken off the tank lid;
The driving axis of the spare-wheel stand is taken off;
The car is suspended on an elevator;
The spare-wheel is taken out of its holder;
The screws fixing the protection screen of the tank, and then the tank itself, are taken
off;
The collars fixing the anti-tilt valve juncture are taken off.
REMOUNTING
It is done in the reverse order of the taking apart operations.
19 - 20
vnx.su
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
ELECTRIC PETROL PUMP
19
IMPORTANT
During the interventions affecting the petrol tank and the fuel supply circuit one
must not smoke or bring incandescent parts near the work-place.
TAKING APART
The taking apart of the petrol pump does not require the taking apart of the tank; access
is allowed through the inside (the boot) of the car.
To be taken apart:
-the carpet of the boot;
-the visiting inlet lid, by taking off the four screws 1;
2
4
1
3
3
Collar 2, which fixes the airing conduit on the lid of the tank, is taken apart;
Junctures 3 of the fuel-supply conduits (going- and return-) are taken apart from the lid
of the tank;
Electric connector 4 is disconnected from the lid of the petrol tank.
19 - 21
vnx.su
19
COOLING - EXHAUST - FUEL TANK
ELECTRIC PETROL PUMP
The lid of the tank is taken apart, together with the fitting.
The petrol pump is disentangled by unclamping off from the stand of the protecting
vessel.
RE-MOUNTING
It is done in the reverse order of the taking apart operations.
19 - 22
vnx.su
CLUTCH
IDENTIFICATION
20
It is a dry mono-disc clutch with hydraulic
command.
The clutch mec hanism has a diaphragm
spring.
The clutch disc has an elastic hub.
The supply of the hydraulic circuit is done
with liquid from the brake-liquid tank.
The principle of this command is the same
as that of a brake command.
The clutch pedal operates on the emitting
cylinder, which transmits the liquid under pressure to a concentric hydraulic receiver, the mobile part of which acts directly on thediaphragm
spring.
The hydraulic receiver is fixed on the clutch crankcase through the agency of two screws.
20 - 1
vnx.su
CLUTCH
20
TYPE OF
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
TYPE OF
ENGINE
MECHANISM
215 CP OE 3500
SupeRNova
DISC
E
E7J
26 groves
V = green
G = gray
20 - 2
vnx.su
M = violet
D = 215 mm
E = 7 mm
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
LEGEND / KEY
Incident
noticed
The pedal of the clutch
opposes no resistance
Is checked
Operations
performed
The state of the
hydraulic tubing is
checked
NON-CONFORMING
CONFORMING
The faulty parts
are replaced
The fixation of the
hydraulic receiver is
checked
NON-CONFORMING
The faulty parts
are replaced
20 - 3
vnx.su
CONFORMING
The state of the
clutch mechanism is checked
and it is replaced
if necessary
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
Clutch pedal is tough /
rigid

The axis of the clutch
pedal is lubricated
NON-CONFORMING
CONFORMING


The emitting cylinder
or the hydraulic receiver are seized up
The return of the
clutch pedal is
checked
NON-CONFORMING
CONFORMING
NON-CONFORMING



The faulty parts
are replaced
The sliding of the moving part of the hydraulic receiver is checked
20 - 4
vnx.su
The faulty parts
are replaced
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
Clutch skidding
The engine has the tendency to accelerate

The complete return
of the clutch pedal is
checked
NECONFORMING
CONFORMING


The state of the
pedal is checked
The state of the
hydraulic circuit is
checked
CONFORMING
CONFORMING


The state of the clutch
mechanism is checked,
and it is replaced if
necessary
The worn-out or oiled
clutch is checked
NON-CONFORMING

The faulty parts are
replaced
20 - 5
vnx.su

- The worn-out elements are
replaced
- The cause of the leakage is
eliminated.
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
The gearbox has a noise / rattle
The clutch pedal pushed to the fullest:
-stopped car
-engine not running.

The complete return of the
clutch pedal is checked
NON-CONFORMING

The state of the
pedal is checked
CONFORMING
NON-CONFORMING

The state of the hydraulic
circuit, that of the emitting
cylinder and of the hydraulic receiver, are checked
CONFORMING
NONCONFORMING
CONFORMING


The stroke of the
hydraulic receiver
is checked
The state of the
clutch is checked
CONFORMING

The faulty parts
are replaced

The defect is looked
for at the level of the
gearbox
NONCONFORMING

The state of the
clutch is checked
The state of the hydraulic
circuit is checked and the
circuit is drained
CONFORMING
NON-CONFORMING

The state of the
hydraulic receiver is
checked

The faulty parts
are replaced
20 - 6
vnx.su
CONFORMING
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
The gears cannot be coupled
-stopped car
-engine working

The operation of the
clutch is checked
CONFORMING
NON-

CONFORMING

The selection
steering is checked
Sticking clutch

NON-
The clutch is unstuck
CONFORMING

CONFORMING

The selection
steering is adjusted
The state of the steering
elements is checked
NONCONFORMING
CONFORMING


The faulty parts are
replaced
The gearbox is checked
20 - 7
vnx.su
CLUTCH
20
D I A G N O STIC
Trepidation
(the car starts “by fits”)

The state of the props
of the gearbox is checked
CONFORMING

NONCONFORMING
Oiled clutch, or clutch having a beat

The props are replaced and the tightening of the gearbox fixing spots on
the engine is checked, and also the
fixing of the engine

The faulty parts are replaced.
The origin of the beat is eliminated.
Clutch pedal has a “creak”

The axis of the clutch
pedal is oiled
NON-CONFORMING

Pedal axis worn-out

The faulty parts are replaced
20 - 8
vnx.su
CLUTCH
CLUTCH DISC MECHANISM
20
REPLACEMENT
This operation is done after taking apart the engine - gearbox ensemble and after
their separation.
SPECIAL DEVICES
MOT 582
Flywheel immobilizing sector
AMB 1518
Clutch centering device
TIGHTENING COUPLES (daNm)
Clutch mechanism screws
2
The stopping sector MOT 582 is mounted.
The screws fixing the mechanism are taken off.
The mechanism and the clutch disc are taken apart.
Visual inspection is done:
- wear of engine flywheel;
- condition of the starter crown;
- watertightness at the level of the crankshaft fitting;
- condition of the flywheel surface (it must not have scratches).
The faulty parts are replaced and the grooves of the clutch shaft are cleaned.
20 - 9
vnx.su
20
CLUTCH
CLUTCH DISC MECHANISM
The clutch disc is mounted with the A damping flange towards the gearbox
The clutch disc is centered with the AMB 1518 centering device
The clutch mechanism is mounted;
The fixing screws are progressively put on the thread of the mechanism, then they are tightened to the couple;
The MOT 582 flywheel-stopping sector is taken off.
20 - 10
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
SECTIONS
21 - 1
vnx.su
21
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
IDENTIFICATION
A
A - type of gearbox
B - index of gearbox
C - manufacturer’snumber
D - manufacturingfactory
000
0
D
21 - 2
vnx.su
B
000
000000
C
MANUAL GEARBOX
21
CV JH3 - 050
TIGHTENING MOMENTS
DESCRIPTION
Attachment screws of the mechanism crankcase on the clutch –
differential case
Secondary shaft screw
Primary shaft nut
Back cap fixing screws
Oil draining plug
Reverse driving contact
Screws for fixing the bellows – left transmission cap assembly
Screws for fixing gearbox on engine case (M10 – 90)
Screws for fixing gearbox on engine case (M10 – 35)
Screws for fixing gearbox on engine
LOCTOUfixing screw
Screws for fixing the RPM sensor on the clutch case
Screws for fixing the control axle assembly
Screws for fixing hydraulic receiver on clutch case
21 - 3
vnx.su
MOMENT
(daNm)
2,5
7
19
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
4,4
2,1
4,4
0,5
0,8
2
2,1
MANUAL GEARBOX
21
CV JH3 - 050
RATIOS
RATIOS
GB INDEX
VEHICLE
MAIN
TRANSMISSION
MILEAGE
GEARING
JH3-05
SupeRNova
15/56
21/19
GEARSTEP
I
II
III
IV
V
M.I.
NR.OF TEETH
41/11
43/21 39/28 35/34 31/39
39/11
RATIO
3.727
2.048 1.393 1.029 0.795
3.545
21 - 4
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
CAPACITY , LUBRICANTS
CAPACITY , LUBRICANTS
Oil used : 75 W – 80 W; API GL5.
The quantity of oil needed for the gearbox operation is 3.5 liters .
The oiling of the gearbox parts is done by splash lubrication.
Checking of the oil level is done through the filling plug A.
21 - 5
vnx.su
21
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
PARTICULARITIES
PARTICULARITIES
The gears grid is similar to that of the gearboxes previously mounted on the DACIA
SupeRNovavehicles,the only difference being the reverse driving, whichis locatedon the right
side and backwards.
The synchronizers are BORG – WARNER type.
The synchronizing hub – slidingcollar,and the synchronizinghub – shaft assembliesare composed of matchingparts .
The synchronizinghubs are freely mountedon the secondary shaft and aremaintainedaxially
through safety devicesof the ring type.
The cylindrical moment of the differential is not adjustable.
The differentialassembly is supported on the gearbox crankcases bymeansof the bearings.
The primary and secondary shafts support at the clutch side is done by means of roll – bearings, which get into direct contact with the shaft (the bearings do not have inner ring, its purpose
being taken over by the shafts).
The reverse drivingpinion is delivered mountedon the shaft.
21 - 6
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
INGREDIENTS
21
INGREDIENTS
TYPE
USE
Molykote “BR 2”
Grooves of the differential planetary pinion
Loctite 518
Crankcase assembling
Thread of reverse driving contact
Loctite FRENBLOC
Grooves of fixed pinion of 5 Th gear
Grooves of 5 Th gear hub
Primary shaft nut
Secondary shaft screw
21 - 7
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
PARTS OF SYSTEMATICREPLACEMENT
PARTS OF SYSTEMATICREPLACEMENT
The followingparts shallbe replaced,if theyhave been dismounted:
- oil sealrings;
- fastening rings;
- elasticpins;
- primary shaft nut
- the bushing under the pinion of the 5 – th step;
- the outer safety devices of the bearings of the primary and the secondary shafts;
- the gaskets.
21 - 8
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
SPECIAL TOOLS
21
NECESSARY SPECIAL TOOLS
C.V. 22-01
Bearings extractor body
C.V. 945
Chuck for mounting the right planetary pinion oil ring
C.V. 946
Chuck for safety mounting
C.V. 551
Device for mounting/dismounting bearings of mechanism casing
C.V. 949
Device for mounting and taking apart the elastic pins of the forks
C.V. 1000
Extractor for the fixed pinion of the 5 th step of the secondary shaft
C.V. 1059
Bushing kit for mounting/dismounting the differential bearings
C.V. 1170
Hub extractor of the 5 th step on the primary shaft
C.V. 1175
Screw for mounting the fixed pinion 5 th step
C.V. 552
Device for extracting the bearing of the secondary shaft on the
clutch – differential crankcase.
C.V. 31-01
Set of punches for elastic pins F 5
C.V. 1162
Chuck for replacing command axle bushings
C.V. 553
Device for dismounting – remounting the clutch shaft bearing
C.V. 554
Bushing for depressing the differential case assembly from the
differential crankcase.
21 - 9
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
OBSERVATION :
The dismounting and checking of the spare parts must be done on a surface coated
with rubber or soft plastic.
Before taking apart the gearbox from the vehicle, drain the oil from the gearbox.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount :
- hydraulic receivercylinder;
- the screws locateinside the crankcase.
Dismounting the cap attachment screws.
The back cap of the gearbox is extracted so that its setting surface should stay parallel to the
conjoined surface of the gearbox, because this cap contains an oiling groove situated in the cylinder
bore of the primary shaft.
21 - 10
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
Engage the1-St gear with the control lever and the reversedriving by operatingthe 5-th gear
fork on its axle.
Dismount the primary shaft nut and the secondary shaft screw.
Dismount the elastic pin of the 5 th step, by means of the C.V. 3 – 01 mandrel.
Dismount the fork and the slidingcollar of the 5 th step.
21 - 11
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
The hub of the 5 th step synchronizer is
extractedby means of theC.V. 1170 extractor.
C.V. 1170
The gearbox is set in the dead point, then
engage the 3-d step.
Dismount the external screws fixing the
crankcase of the mechanisms and blocking
pin of the reverse driving pinion axle.
Dismountthe reverse drivingcontact (B).
Dismount the synchronizer ring of the 5
step, the inner bushing of the pinion, the pinion
and its supporting washer.
Dismountthe fixed pinion of the 5 th gear
by means of the C.V. 1000 extractor and
the body extractor C.V. 22 -01.
C.V. 22 -01
C.V. 1000
21 - 12
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
In order to recover the balls and the locking
springs of the shafts, two magnets placed in the
C orifices are used.
Pull the control shaft towards exterior.
The crankcases are separated.
Rotate tothe left the shaft – reverse driving
pinion assemblyand dismount the control reverse
driving shaft velocity 5-th step.
Take out the fork pin 3-4 by meansof the
C.V. 949 device and dismount the axle and
3-4 fork assembly.
Simultaneously, dismount the primaryshaft
and secondary shaft assembly with the axle
and 1-2 fork.
C.V. 94 9
C.V. 1170
Easy lift the primary shaft and dismount the
shaft and reverse drivingpinion assembly.
Placeverticallythe secondary shaft, with
the pinion of the 1 step downwards, so that
the other pinions willnot fall.
Recover the locking pins (A) and (B) of
the command axles.
A
B
21 - 13
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
THE PRIMARY SHAFT
The primary shaft shallnot be repaired and is not adjustable.
The shaft has a spry nozzle (B) which cannot be dismounted.
Clean the oiling – groove of the 5 th step
The oil sealring in front of theshaft and the bearing camsarein direct contact withthe shaft.
Check the state of the shaft in the operation area (A) of the oil seal; ring, and if this shows
ridges or irregularities,it will be replaced.
REPLACING THE BEARINGS OF THE PRIMARY SHAFT
The bearings of the primary shaft are freely mounted on it.
There are two types of bearings:
- a cylindrical one with balls , pressedinto the crankcase of the mechanism;
- a cylindrical one with rolls , pressedintothe crankcaseof the clutch-differential,together
with the clutch shaftoil sealring.
The bearingsreplacementis performed only withidenticalbearingswiththe original ones.
21 - 14
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
BEARING DISMOUNTING OF THE MECHANISMS CRANKCASE
The safety ring of the bearing (the holding ring) is widened by means of a pair of safety
pincers, thenthe bearing is extracted from the crankcaseby hammering towards the insideof the
mechanisms crankcase, by means of the C.V. 551 device.
C.V. 551
BEARING REMOUNTING OF THE MECHANISMS CRANKCASE
Replacethe safety of the bearings with a new one, then it is introduced into its groove in the
mechanisms crankcase, so that it keeps its position as compared to the crankcase (the safety
shows a shoulder).
The bearing lying at the outside of the crankcase of the mechanism is pressed towards the
insideof it, until the safety fits into the groove carved on the outer ring of the bearing.
Mounting the bearing is performed by meansof the C.V. 551 device.
21 - 15
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
BEARING DISMOUNTING FROM THE CLUTCH – DIFFERENTIAL CRANKCASE
The roll bearing in the crankcase is dismounted in the opposite direction to the clutch, by
means of the C.V. 553 device.
Ensure that device is wellfixed upon depressingthe bearing.
BEARING REMOUNTING FROM THE CLUTCH – DIFFERENTIAL CRANKCASE
The remounting shallbe performed using the sameC.V. 553 device, the mounting directions
of the bearing being towards the clutch.
C.V. 553
21 - 16
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT DISMOUNTING
Dismounting of the secondary shaft is performed starting from the 4 th step.
Dismounttheelements,in the followingorder:
1. - the support washer
2. - gear IV pinion
3. - synchronizing ring
4. - synchronizerfor gear III and IV
5. - stoppingring
6. - grooved washer
7. - synchronizing ring
8. - pinion of gear III
9. - grooved washer
10. - stoppingring
11. - grooved washer
12. - step pinion II
13. - grooved washer
14. - stoppingring
15. - synchronizer ring
16. - synchronizer for steps I and II
17. - synchronizing ring
18. - step I pinion.
21 - 17
vnx.su
21
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
The stopping ringsare replacedafter each dismounting.
For mounting and dismounting the stopping rings, a pair of safety pincers to keep the ends
apart, and, on the oppositeside, a pairof flat tipped pincers to prevent the stopping ring breaking,
are to be used.
SECONDARY SHAFT REASSEMBLING
Before reassembling the secondary shaft, perform the parts checking, as follows:
- the pinions and claws tooth must not show chips or excessive wear;
- ensure that working surfacesof the shafts and the inner parts of the pinions do not show
tracesof gripping or abnormal wear.
Whenreassembling, clean the oilinggrooves made in thesecondary shaft and all its component
parts are pre – oiled.
Take into considerationthat synchroniser hubs are matchedwith the sliding.
It is recommended to mark the positionsof the sliding compared to the hubs.
The stoppingrings shallbe replaced after everydismounting.
Reassembling of the secondary shaft shall be performing the dismountingoperationsin the
reverse order.
21 - 18
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
REPLACEMENT OF THE SECONDARY SHAFT BEARINGS
The secondary shaft bearing from the mechanismscrankcaseis identicalto the one from the
primary shaft so that its dismounting and remounting are performed in the same way as for the
primaryshaft.
Bearing dismountingand mounting in the clutchcrankcaseis performed by meansof theC.V.
522 device.
C.V. 552
The bearing is crimped by means of a mandrel (puncher) in four equidistant points on a
55 mm diameter.
x = 0,9:- 1,3 mm
NOTE:
When dismounting the bearing from the clutch-differential crankcase, the deflector
located behind the bearing will be damaged, being necessary its replacement with a
new one ( this is ensuring the inner oiling of the secondary shaft).
21 - 19
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
DIFFERENTIAL
The differential of theJH3050 gearbox is the simple type (withtwo satellites and twoplanetary
wheels,one of which makinga common body with the tulip of the planetary transmission).
This differentialis supportedin the clutch– differential crankcaseby means of two cylindrical
bearings equipped with ballsof varioussizes.
The two bearings are pressed in the clutch – differentialcrankcase.
The crown of the main transmission is assembled by hooping, on the differential crankcase.
DIFFERENTIAL DISMOUNTING
This operation is performed after separating the crankcases.
The zeroring(1) is removed from theright planetaryshaft,then by means of a pins extractor
and a hammer,the sealinggasket (2) is gently hit with a hammer in order to make it pivoting.
The oil sealring is carefully pulled along the grooved part of the planetary pinion in order
not to deteriorate thegrooves.
21 - 20
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
The stopping safety device(A)is extracted,by means of a pincers from thedifferential crankcase
( press on clutch crankcase in order to release the safety ring).
The differential assembly is dismounted using a press,by meansof a bushing C.V. 554 ( the
bushingis pressingon the differentialcrankcase).
Dismount the spacer washer (5) and the elastic concave washer (6).
The crown of the speedometer(8) is dismountfrom the outsideof the differentialframe.
REMOUNTING THE DIFFERENTIAL
Remounting of the differential assemblyis performedin the reverse order of the dismounting
operations, only this time the spacerthat is mountedbetweenthe lateral surfaceof the crown and
the support bearing, shallbe positioned with the concave side towards the crown.
5
21 - 21
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
DIFFERENTIAL BEARINGS REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
In order to extract the big bearing (7), of the differentialfrom the clutch-differential crankcase,
a profiled metallic strap is used, which is pressed by means of an extension, at a press.
In order to dismountthe otherbearing (10), firstextract the safety (9), then presswith a press
on the bearing by meansof a sleevewith the outer diameterof 50 mm, towards the insideof the
clutch-differential crankcase.
7
DISMOUNTING
C.V. 1059
In caseof the bearing (7), its cage C must
be oriented towards the opposite side of the
differential crown.
In order to pressthis bearing into the clutch
crankcase, the C.V. 1059 device is used,
whichis pressingon theouter ringof the bearing.
When remounting the otherbearing (10),
its cage Cmust be oriented towards the oppositeside of the differentialcrown.
For pressing,the 65 mm diametersleeve
of the C.V.1059 device is used, which is
pressingon the outer ring of the bearing
Remount the bearing maintainingsafety.
21 - 22
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY MOUNTING IN THE CLUTCH CRANKCASE
The differential assembly is pressedinto the crankcase,then the stopping safety device (3) is
mounted on the planetary shaft by means of theC.V. 946 device.
Rotate the differential assembly and check the speedometerpinionrotation.
Remountingof the C planetaryoil sealring is performedafterthis has beenoiled,by means of
the C.V. 945 device and the A protector.
Mount the oiled protectorA, on the planetary pinion and positionthe oiled seal(C) by means
of the B device.
21 - 23
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
The internal controlaxlesmust not show any deformationsor wear on the millingfor locking
ball, and their slidingon bearings must be done make freely, withoutexcessiveclearance.
The contactsurfacesof the forkswith collar of the rocking must not show either deformationsor
wear.
Ensuring of the control forks axle is performed by meansof the ballsand springs located in
the holes made in the mechanismscrankcase.
The locking of the control axlesis done by meansof some cylindricalrolls mountedinsidethe
clutch–differential crankcase.
21 - 24
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
21
INTERNAL CONTROLS
CONTROL AXLE DISMOUNTING
This operation is to be performed after
crankcasesseparation.
The control axle is provided with a stopping
flap LOCTOU– (A) attachedon the crankcase.
The sealing is ensuredby means of the gasket(B).
Remove the elasticpin of the selectionfinger
(C), then dismountthe attachment screws, and
retrieve the control axle assembly.
In order to replacethe gallery bearing bushings of the control axle, the C.V. 1162 device,
or a tube with the outer diameter 16.5 mm are
to be used. Before mountingthe bushingsshall
be oiled.
CONTROL AXLE REMOUNTING
When remounting the control axle, replace the selection finger pin with a new one.
Remountingis done by performing the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order, after all
parts have been oiled with oil.
21 - 25
vnx.su
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
CRANCKASE ASSEMBLING
The assembling surfaces must be flat (small
imperfectionscan be eliminatedby meansof a thin
file).
Place the axle and 1-2 fork assembled on the 12 slidingcollar of the secondaryshaft.
The two shafts(primary and secondary) are taken
together with the fork and 1-2 axle and positioned
at the sametime into the clutch – differentialcrankcase.
The crown and the secondary shaft are rotated
until the end of the secondary shaft fitsinto the bearing.
Mounting the blocking roll of the shaft ˚ (A).
A
B
With the 1 – 2 axle in free position,the following
are mounted:
- synchronizing assembly 3 – 4 together axle
and 3 – 4 fork;
- mount the for pin 3 – 4 by means of the CV
949 device.
Mount the blocking roll of the5 th step axle (B).
21 - 26
vnx.su
CV JH3 - 050
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
Thanmount thefollowings:
- the control axle for the 5 gear and reverse
driving (A);
- the axle and the reverse driving pinion (B)
assembly, by easy liftingthe primaryshaft.
Ensure the correct positioning of the two
centering bushings and of the magnet
Mount the springs and thelocking balls1-2 and
3-4 in the mechanisms crankcase, then the false
axes A with a 13 mm diameterare introduced.
Check the positioning of the 5 th gear oiling
collectorand of the aerating connection.
Additionally, ensure (check) if the aerating tube is
not damaged or clogged.
Apply a layer of LOCTITE 518 on the gasket
surface between the clutch crankcase and the
mechanismcrankcase.
Engage the 3 -d gear step.
Mount the spring and the 5 th gear step locking
ball into the crankcaseof the mechanism.
Pressthe locking ball and mount the mechanisms
crankcase.
21 - 27
vnx.su
21
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
Mount the attachment screws and tighten them at a 2,5 daNm moment, after rotating the
primary shaft in order to ensure o correct bearings setting.
Retrieve the falseaxes.
Mount the locking pin of the reverse driving pinion (A).
REMARK :
The tightening at the required moment of all the screws must be done in no
more than 30 minutes after the mounting of the mechanisms crankcase, because of the
polymerization of LOCTITE 518.
21 - 28
vnx.su
MANUAL GEARBOX
CV JH3 - 050
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
Three drops of LOCTITE FRENBLOC
are applied on the grooves of the fixed pinion
for the5 th gear,then this is mounted by means
of the C.V. 1175 device on the secondary shaft.
Dismount the C.V. 1175 device and mount
the secondary shaft screw oiled with 3 drops of
LOCTITEFRENBLOC.
On the primary shaft remount the following
sequence:
- the support washers (with the larger side
towards the pinion )
- the bushing under the pinion;
- the free 5 th pinion equipped with its
synchroniser ring ;
- the 5-th gear step hub equipped with its
spring afterthe hub grooves have been oiled with
LOCTITEFRENBLOC;
- the fork together with the 5 th sliding
collar.
Engage the 1-st gear with the gear lever and
the 5 th gear by sliding the 5-th gear step fork
on its axle.
Apply 3 drops of LOCTITEFRENBLOC
on the primary shaft nut.
Mountthe nut and the screwand tighten them
at the requiredmoment:
- primary shaft nut :
19 daNm
- secondary shaft screw : 7 daNm
21 - 29
vnx.su
21
21
MANUAL GEARBOX
GEARBOX DISMOUNTING
Mount the pin of the5 th gear fork by means
the C.V. 31 01 device as for dismounting.
Observe the mounting direction, the pin slot
must be oriented towards the back cap.
Bring the gearbox in the freeposition.
Mount a new gasket to ensure the back cap
sealing.
Mount the back cap with the A groove in the
primary shaft, and the oiling collectorin the (B)
oil bringing groove, and tighten the screws at a
moment of 2,5 daNm .
Check the correct gears shifting.
Mount the reverse drivingconnector.
Mount theclutch controlreceiver cylinder and
tighten the screws at the required moment (2,1
daNm).
21 - 30
vnx.su
CV JH3 - 050
DRIVE SHAFTS
FRONT TRANSVERSAL TRANSMISSION
29
SPECIAL TOOLS
- RO 604-01 Hub immobilizing device
- PF 476
Ball joint extractor
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daN/m)
- Transmission nut
21
- Screw for fixing the bellows lid on the gearbox
2,5
- Wheels attachment screw
7,5
- Screws,nuts for fixing the steering knuckle on the shock absorber 7,5
- Screw for fixing the caliper on the steering knuckle
6,5
- Nut for steering ball joint
4
DISMOUNTING - THE SIDE TO WHEEL
Loosen the left wheel screws.
Lift the vehicle on an elevator with two columns.
Dismount the wheels.
Dismount the screws that attach the brake disk assembly on the steering knuckle.
Unscrew the transmission nut by means of the RO 604 – 01 device.
Dismount :
- the nut of the steering ball joint;
- steering ball joint from the steering knuckle, by means of the PF 476 extractor; the
attachment screws of the steering knuckle on the shock absorber end.
Push the transmission in the steering knuckle and incline the latter.
Dismount the transmission, the wheel side.
29 - 1
vnx.su
29
DRIVE SHAFTS
FRONT TRANSVERSAL TRANSMISSION
DISMOUNTING – THE SIDE TO THE GEARBOX
The right side
Due to the solution assumed by the manufacturer, the transmission joint (the tulip of the
transmission) with the transmission shaft of the gearbox shall be performed only by mea
the grooves.
The dismounting of the transmission, the side to the gearbox, shall be performed by
axial displacement - extract the transmission tulip from the transmission shaft.
The left side
Drain the oil of the gearbox.
Dismount :
- the three screws for fixing the bellows – lid assembly on the gearbox;
- the transmission, the side to the gearbox.
29 - 2
vnx.su
DRIVE SHAFTS
FRONT TRANSVERSAL TRANSMISSION
29
REMOUNTING – THE SIDE TO THE GEARBOX
The left side
Engage the transmission GI joint in the gearbox (the transmission positionas horizontally
as possible).
Mount the three attachment screws of the bellows lid on the gearbox.
The right side
Grease the tulip frame grooves (the grooves area) and the transmission shaft of the
gearbox with transmission oil.
Engage the transmission GI joint (the tulip) on the transmission shaft of the gearbox
(the transmission position must be as horizontally as possible).
REMOUNTING – THE SIDE TO THE WHEEL
For both sides
Engage the transmission in the steering knuckle, this one being necessary to freely enter,
so that threaded area of the steering knuckle is allowing to remounting the transmission nut.
Perform then the dismounting operations in the reverse order.
Observe the tightening moments.
Remount the brake disk assembly.
Refill the gearbox with oil.
Press several times the brake pedal to enable caliper piston coming in contact with the
brake pads.
29 - 3
vnx.su
DRIVE SHAFTS
29
Left
transmission
BELLOWS –BEARING ASSEMBLY
TO THE GEARBOX
THE JOINT TO THE GEARBOX - GI
SPECIAL TOOLS
Bearing mounting chuck on the shaft
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tripod assembled
Bellows
bearing
bellows attachment lid
deflector
blocking ring
transmission shaft
DISMOUNTING
It is forbidden to use thinner for
components parts cleaning.
Dismount the blocking ring from the
groove made on the transmission shaft, using
a special pincers for these types of rings.
29 - 04
vnx.su
PF 1331
Left
transmission
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS-BEARING ASSEMBLY
TO THE GEARBOX
29
Using a press, extract the assembled
tripod, sustained it on an extractor, FACOM
U 53 G type, protecting the tripod clogs.
Before extracting, mark the position of
the tripod compared to the transmission
shaft end.
Dismount the bellows - deflector bearing
in the same manner like tripod dismounting.
REMOUNTING
In order to be correctly positioned on the
shaft, the bearing must be pressed to achieve
the value L = 118 +/- 0.2 mm between the
backside of the bearing and the shaft
extremity. This value is obtained by means
of the PF 1331 device, when mounting, its
extremity is at the level of the shaft.
G
PF 1331
IMPORTANT
In order to avoid the deformation of the bearing, which includes a sealing gasket (annular
oil seal), the pressing effort must be constant (do not hammer).
29 - 05
vnx.su
29
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS-BEARING ASSEMBLY
TO THE GEARBOX
Left
transmission
Maintaining the transmission on the press, on both sides, shall be ensured on the G
groove made on shaft, by means of a device type FACOM U 53 G, ( the flat side towards
bellows) in order to avoid the deflector damages on the wheel side.
The pressing effort of the bearing on the transmission shaft ahas the value of = 100 –
700 daN.
Press again the assembled tripod on the transmission shaft observing the marks made
when depressing.
The press effort of the tripod assembly on the grooved area of the shaft end, shall be
between 60 – 600 daN.
Remount the blocking ring (Zeger lock) in the groove made on the transmission shaft.
G
29 - 6
vnx.su
DRIVE SHAFTS
Left
transmission
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
JOINT TOWARDS WHEEL
SPECIAL TOOLS
GE 86 joint bellows replacement device
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Steering knuckle casing ass.
Retainer star
Tripod to the wheel
Tulip shaft
Maintaining collars
Rubber protection bellow
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the two maintaining collars
off the bellows by means of two rods,
locally manufactured (see the drawing)
Cut and remove the damaged bellows.
Remove as much grease as possible.
Mark one of the groove routes of the shaft
subject to its working corresponding clog by
marking with a centre punch on casing outer
consequently on the shaft.
De tac h the c onne c tion be twe en the
transmission shaft and the steering knuckle
casing, lifting one by one the arms of the
retaining star from the three stamps performed
on the petals of the shaft tulip.
WHEN DISMOUNTING,
DO NOT DEFO
RM
THE ARMS OF THE RETAINING STAR
Retrieve the head and the spring from the
tripod to wheel.
29 - 7
vnx.su
PF 537-03
29
29
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
REMOUNTING
The mounting of the new bellows is to be
performed by means of the PF 573 – 03
device.
Catch the inclined transmission in a vice
with soft jaws in order to avoid the shaft
damaging.
Engage the PF 537 – 03 device over the
tulip of the transmission shaft.
Obturate the small extremity of the bellows
and, abundantly grease with automatic
transmission oil or ELF CARDREXA RNT
2 grease:
- the all outer surface of the PF 537 – 01
device
- the inner part of the bellows, especially
its smaller diameter part (this operation is
performed for slipping help).
29 - 8
vnx.su
Left
transmission
Left
transmission
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
Introduce the smaller diameter of the
bellows on the PF 537 – 03 device.
Cover a hand with clean gauze and
place it on the bellows in such a way as to
stretch the first fold.
Take support with the hip on the edge
of the vice (lateral side).
Place the other hand around the first one
and strongly pull it, taking care that first
fold is not huddled together.
Bring the bellows as close as possible
to the device cylindrical part and let it
release till half stroke.
It is recommended to perform many
times this operation (maximum 5 times).
When easy slipping is noticed, make so
that bellows is passing over the device
cylindrical part, the operation being
performed without stopping.
29 - 9
vnx.su
29
29
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
Catch thesteering knuckle casing in a vice
with soft jaws.
Put the spring and head in the tripod
groove.
Brings the clogs to the center.
Position the retaining star (s), and each of
its arms, being at the bisecting lines of the
angles formed by the tripod arms.
Introduce the transmission shaft in the
steering knuckle casing, positioning it, subject
to the marks (the three clogs penetrating in
the three rolling routes of the shaft).
Slide slowly the transmission shaft, in
order to engage one arm of the retaining star
in the marked point of the transmission shaft,
and press it for correct centering.
Placing the other retaining star two arms,
it will be made easy by a screwdriver, with its
end modified as per drawing:
A = 5 mm B = 3 mm
Ensure that retainingstar arms are correctly
positioned in the shaft marks.
Check by hand, the joint operation.
Must not exist any hard point.
Distribute in the bellows and in the steering
knuckle casing the grease prescribed dosage.
NOTE
It is obligatory to observe the quantityand
type of the prescribed grease, 2 l +1 cl, ELF
CARDREXA RNT 2.
29 - 10
vnx.su
Left
transmission
S
Left
transmission
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
29
Position the two bellows beads in the grooves of the steering knuckle casing,
consequently on the transmission shaft tube.
Place a non-cutting, round headed rod between the transmission shaft and the bellows
in order to dose the amount of air inside.
Mount the two collars, by means of the two rods used also at the dismounting operation.
29 - 11
vnx.su
DRIVE SHAFTS
29
BELLOWS TO GEARBOX
JOINT TOWARDS GEARBOX - GI
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tulip
Tripod
Blocking ring
Rubber bellows
Maintaining collars
DISMOUNTING
Cut the maintaining collar.
Cut by means of a saw the existent collar,
taking care not to scratch the tulip in the
mounting area with the bellows.
29 - 12
vnx.su
Right
transmission
Right
transmission
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO GEARBOX
Cut the bellows.
Remove maximum of grease.
NOTE :
The tulip not being equipped with a
hood having retainin g wings,
dismounting is to be performed without
forcing.
It is avoided the cams exit from the
trunnions (tripod arms) because the rollneedles and the cams are paired and must
be not reversed.
Never use thinner to wash the
component parts.
Dismount the blocking ring.
29 - 13
vnx.su
29
29
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO GEARBOX
Right
transmission
Using a press, extract the assembled tripod, sustain it on an extractor type FACOM U
53 G, protecting the clogs of the tripod.
R E M OU N TI N G
Grease the transmission shaft to help the protection bellows putting back (positioning
of the smallest diameter of the bellows on the transmission shaft).
The tripod is fixed and mounted in the position marked on dismounting.
Three points of crimping are made at 120 ° C by metal heading of the transmission
shaft grooves.
Distribute the greaseprescribed quantityin the bellows and in the tulip casing.
Correctly position the bellows in thetulip-casing place.
A non-cutting, round-headed rod is introduced between the bellows and the tulip casing
to dose the air amount contained inside the bellows.
Lengthen or compress the bellows until value A = 190 mm is obtained (the value
between the extremity of the bellows and the extremity of the tulip casing) then from this
position extract the rod and remount the collars.
29 - 14
vnx.su
DRIVE SHAFTS
BELLOWS TO WHEEL
29
JOINT TOWARDS THE WHEEL – GE
1. Steering knuckle casing assembled
2. Retaining star.
3. Tripod to wheel
4. Tulip shaft
5. Maintaining collars
6. Protection rubber bellows
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the two maintaining collars using two rod s locally produced (see the method
previously described for dismounting the joint GE, left transmission).
Cut and remove the damaged bellows.
Take out maximum of grease.
In order to replace the joint GE protection bellows, it is necessary to dismount/remount
the GI joint parts (see the method previously described).
REMOUNTING
Grease the rod of transmission shaft with grease.
Introduce the protection bellows of the GE joint.
Distribute the prescribed dosage of grease for GE joint.
Position the bellows beads in the grooves of the steering knuckle casing, consequently
on the transmission shaft tube and mount the collars (see the method described at mounting
GE joint bellows, left transmission).
29 - 15
vnx.su
GENERAL
GENERAL PRINCIPLE SCHEDULE OF THE BRAKE
CIRCUIT
30
NOTE :
The following schedule is a general principle schedule and it cannot be considered as
reference for the brake circuit failures and damages When replacing one of the vehicle
brake circuit element, the ducts must be identified before dismount them, in order to be
able to reconnect them obligatory in their initial positions.
BRAKE IN PARALLEL WITH BRAKE LIMITER
SCHEDULE OF HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM IN PARALLEL
WITH BY–PASS CIRCUIT
* front brake circuit:
* rear brake circuit
30 - 1
vnx.su
GENERAL
30
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
FRONT HALF AXLE
12
16
8,5
7,5
3,2
30 - 2
vnx.su
FRONT
AXLE
GENERAL
FRONT
AXLE
30
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
FRONT HALF AXLE
1,45
3,2
8
12
30 - 3
vnx.su
GENERAL
30
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
REAR AXLE
12
16
8,5
7,5
3,2
30 - 4
vnx.su
REAR
AXLE
REAR
AXLE
GENERAL
30
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
REAR AXLE
1,45
3,2
8
12
30 - 5
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
COMPOSITION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MAIN BRAKING
SYSTEM ELEMENTS
Front brake
Brake caliper bore diameter
Aerated brake disk diameter
The axial run out of the disk measured at Æ215
Brake disk maximum thickness
Brake disk minimum thickness
Braking pad thickness (support included)
Minimal brake pad thickness (support included)
F 54 mm
F 235 mm
0,1 mm
20 mm
19 mm
14 mm
7 mm
Rear brake
Wheel braking cylinder bore diameter
New drum diameter
Drum diameter after grinding
Shoe braking lining width
Braking lining thickness
Minimal accepted braking lining height above rivets
F 22 mm
F 228 mm
F 229 mm
40 mm
5 mm
0,5 mm
Master brake pump cylinder
Bore diameter
Pump maximum stroke
20,6 mm
32 mm
Without level alert sensor
Brake fluid reservoir
For parallel circuit
177,8 mm
Pressure limiter
Servobrake master vac 7”
30 - 6
vnx.su
GENERAL
BRAKING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
Rigid pedal: when braking,
an increased effort for a small
deceleration is performed
Is the connection
shaft between
the servobrake
forkand the pedal,
grabed?
I.
FAILURE : RIGID PEDAL
Yes
Replace: shaft, pedal or
servobrake fork.
Yes
Replace the servobrake
(broken membrane)
Yes
Replace the servobrake
(broken membrane)
30
No
Is the engine
regime
changing when
braking ?
No
The engine
pedal is rigid
from time to
time ?
No
At the servobrake
entrance is the
depression the
imposedone ?
No
Yes
1
30 - 7
vnx.su
Check:
- the integrity of the depression
pipe, consequently of the retaining valve;
- the sealingof thedepressionpipe
at the servobrake,consequently at
the vacuum pump (inletmanifold).
30
GENERAL
BRAKING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
I. FAILURE : RIGID PEDAL (ctd)
1
One of the
rigid brake
pipes is it
smashed ?
Yes
Replace the corresponding
rigid pipe.
No
Replace the defective parts
(with Genuine Spare Parts)
No
Dismount the brake caliper or
the brake cylinder?
Are the brake
caliper’s pistons
or the cylinders
ones correctly
gliding ?
Yes
Are the brake pads,
consequentlythe shoes
gasket in good
condition?
STOP
Replace the brake pads,
consequently the brake shoes
(see bellow situations).
The brake linings are to be replaced when
they are: -greasy
-shiny
-not in accordance with the
manufacturer’s prescriptions (genuine Spare
Parts have not been used).
No
30 - 8
vnx.su
GENERAL
BRAKING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
II.
30
FAILURE : LONG PEDAL
When braking, the brake pedal is slowly moving.
Perform a test with the stopped engine, after
previously performing five successive pushing on
the brake pedal(in order to vacuum the servobrake).
Is thebrake fluid
levellower
compared to the
required one?
Yes
No
Replace the brake pump, because the pressure gasket (sealing) between the primary circuit and the
secondary circuit is defective.
STOP
30 - 9
vnx.su
Locate and repair or replace the
item where a brake fluid leak is
established.
30
GENERAL
BRAKING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
I. CONSTANT EFFECT TO THE PEDAL
EFFECTS
Tough pedal:
High effort for small deceleration.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
- Assistance defect
- Brake linings:
- greasy
- stacking to the disk ( non-conform )
- heating, prolonged braking with constant
pedal press
- Stuck piston
- Rigid duct narrowed (flattening)
Elastic pedal
In order to diagnose, an incident where
the use was normal is to be analyzed and
two tests are to be performed:
1. While driving the vehicle :
Interpretation test: pedal stroke/
deceleration rate.
2. While vehicle is stopped, engine cut.
Additional test of brake pedal press:
Perform five consecutivepressings on the
brake pedal in order to vacuum the
servobrake, before taking into
consideration the test result.
Long pedal
The test is to be performed with stopped
vehicle and cut engine.
REMARK:
I t is neces sary to perform five
consecutive pressings on the brak e
pedal, in ord er to vacuum the
servobrake before takin g into
consideration the test result.
Floor pedal
The test is to be performed with stopped
vehicle and cut engine.
REMARK :
Perform five consecutive pressings on
the brake pedal, in order to vacuum the
servobrake before takin g into
consideration the test result.
- Air presence in the circuit: defective
purging
- Internal leak in the braking circuit.
- Leak of fluid from reservoir (external fluid
leak from braking circuit).
Automatic adjustment : hand brake cable too
tighten.
- Important and asymmetric wear of the
brake linings
- Stroke too ample between the servobrake
pushing rod and the brake pump
- Brake fluid having high temperature.
- Hydraulic leak (check the sealing of
the braking system components)
- Sealing gaskets defects of the two
brake pump circuits.
- Brake fluid having high temperature
30 - 10
vnx.su
GENERAL
BRAKING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
30
II. CONSTANT EFFECT AT BEHAVIOUR
EFFECTS
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Brakes not accomplishing the
required braking distance
- Non-un iform worn b rake lin ings
(backing off);
- Brake linings slightly greased;
- Springs with modified characteristics.
Vibrating brakes
- Brake disks with high wobbling;
- Inconstancy brake disks width;
- Particles abnormal deposit on brake disks
(oxidation between linings and disk).
When braking, the vehicle ( front
part) is left/right deviating
- Front axle suspension, steering (to be
checked);
- Stuck piston;
- Tires – wear, inflation pressure;
- Rigid duct narrowed (flattening).
Braking
- Stuck piston;
Automaticadjustment :hand brake cable very
tighten.
REMARK :
Automatic recovering is performed by
means of the brake pedal, if there is no abnormal tension in the hand brake cable
when released (hand brake released).
- Return spring.
Heating brakes
- Insufficient hydraulic stroke of the brake
pump, not allowing the return at rest of
the brake pump pistons ( brake pump
remaining under pressure);
- Stuck pistons or hardly returning;
- Rigid duct narrowed (flattening);
- Defective adjustment of the hand brake
control.
30 - 11
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
BRAKE CONNECTIONS AND SEWERAGE
The sewerage connection between the brake pump, brake calipers, pressure limiter is
performed by means of the threaded connections with METRIC PITCH.Therefore it is
important to use only original spare parts, recommended in the Spare Parts Catalogue,
specific for this type of vehicle.
Spare parts identification
The cupping shape of the steel ducts (A)
A
The shape of the threaded lengths on
parts (B)
B
C
Connections of ducts (C)
30 - 12
vnx.su
GENERAL
BRAKE FLUID
30
PERIODICITY OF THE BREAK FLUID CHANGE
The manufacturing conception of the brakes equipping the Dacia vehicles, especially
the disks brake type (F 54 inner empty pistons, low quantity of fluid in the cylinders,
sliding calipers avoiding existence of a fluid reserve in the less cooled area of the wheel)
enable the maximum rejection of fluid vaporization risk, even in case of intensive using of
brakes (mountain area).
The current brake fluids are subject in all cases to a slight degradation during the first
months of use by a slight humidity absorption series (see the Vehicle Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet, for brake fluid change)
LEVEL COMPLETION
The wear of brakes pads and shoes generate a gradually diminution of brake fluid level
in its reservoir. It is useless to compensate this diminution, because the level will be restored in the moment of next changing the brake pads and shoes. Obviously, in the meantime, the level of brake fluid in reservoir must not go down bellow the minimal mark.
HOMOLOGATED BRAKE FLUIDS
The mixture in the braking circuit of two non compatible brake fluids may leads to loss
important risks mainly due to gasket damage
In order to avoid such risks, it is obligatory to use brake fluids checked and approved by
our laboratories and which are according to Norm SAEJ 1703, DOT 4.
30 - 13
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
BRAKING CIRCUIT PURGING
AIR ELIMINATION FROM THE HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT (PURGING)
The air existence in the hydraulic circuit may be noticed by an elastic displacement of
the brake pedal, sometimes even, close to the floor. This fact is more evident with the
engine stopped.
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Always use for completion or total changing, thebrake fluid Norm SAE J 1703 , DOT 4.
In case of changing the brake fluid, it is necessary to wash the system with one liter of
industrial alcohol (diluted).
During the purging, the brake fluid from the reservoir must not go down bellow the
minimal level marked on the reservoir.
To perform the operation, one person will stay on the driver place, to push the brake
pedal and the other one will perform the purging (bleeding) at the wheels using a 500 ml
vessel, a transparent plastic tube and brake fluid for completion.
NOTE
The brake fluid resulted after performing the purging operation, IS NOT TO BE
RE-USED but only after 48 hours, in order to avoid air-bubbling generation on the
hydraulic circuit which shall have as effect an elastic brake pedal.
WORKING PROCEDURE
Place on the purging screw, a transparent tube with its end in a vessel with brake fluid
and proceed as follows:
- press the brake pedal slowly, dismount the purging screw, maintaining the full
stroke of the pedal, then tighten the screw and slowly release the brake pedal. Repeat the
same procedure until complete cease of air bubbles. Proceed in the same way also for the
other purging places.(take into consideration the existence all the time of the brake fluid in
the reservoir)
Observation:
Before beginning the purging procedure, dismount the I.C.P. indicator from the pump,
which shall be remounted at the end of the operation.
It is important to observe the following sequence of the purging places:
30 - 14
vnx.su
GENERAL
BRAKING CIRCUIT PURGING
30
PROCEDURE IN PARALLEL SYSTEM
1.,6. Main cylinder with I.C.P. incorporated
2. Left rear wheel brake cylinder
3. Right rear wheel brake cylinder
4. Caliper of front right wheel
5. Caliper of front left wheel
WORKING CONDITIONS
The vehicle is on wheels.
If the fuel tank is empty, place on the rear bench of the vehicle one or two persons to
enable the possibility of the circuit opening (the passing of a larger fluid flow through the
brake limiter).
CHECKING THE BRAKE SYSTEM SEALING
After purging the front and rear circuits, check if the level of brake fluid in reservoir is
within the minim and maxim range, than press the brake pedal, then during about 30
seconds, no pedal displacement must be noticed.
30 - 15
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
THE INFLUENCE OF THE FRONT AXLE ANGLES ON THE ROAD
BEHAVIOR (VEHICLE COMPORTMENT) AND ON TYRES WEAR
CAMBER ANGLE 00 +/- 30’
It is formed by the wheel plane with the vertical that crosses the wheel axis.
A difference higher that 1° between the two angles leads to :
- the deviation from the trajectorythat must be adjustedby means of the steeringwheel.
- abnormal wear of the tires and bearings.
The angle is not adjustable.
THE BALL JOINT ANGLE 120 45’ +/- 30’
It is formed in transversal plane between the axe connecting the attachment point of the
shock absorber with the ball joint center and the vertical passing through the wheel axis.
The ball joint angle is generating a negative offset, allowing the maintaining of the vehicle
route when the braking is unequal distributed.
The angle is not adjustable.
THE CASTER ANGLE 2030’
It is formedin longitudinalplane, betweenthe axis connectingthe attachment point of the shock
absorber with the suspension ball joint center and the verticalaxis passingthrough the wheelaxis.
A difference higher than 1° between the two angles leads to :
- the deviation from the trajectory that must be adjustedby means of the steering wheel.
- a normal wear of the tires.
The angle is not adjustable.
STEERING BOX POSITIONING
The steering box must be at a certainheight from the attachment points of the steering auxiliary
connecting rod ball joints.The positionof the steering box (choking) is influencingthe variation
of the parallelism.The steering box is mounted in the positionfor whichthe variationis minimal.
The modification of the parallelism between left side and right side leads to:
- the deviation of the vehicle, in one sense, upon accelerating;
- the deviation of the vehicle in the opposite side upon braking.
- the deviation of the trajectory on the hilly ground;
- the premature wear of the tires.
The horizontally of the steering box is ensured by the producer.
PARALLELISM
( TOE-IN OR ANGULAR SPREAD ANGLE )
It ismeasuredin horizontalplane as a differencebetween the front and rear partof the sameaxlewheels.
The wheels are divergent. The value of the opening is between 0 – 2 mm (1 +/- 1 mm).
ATTENTION:
A too much opening causes the wear of the tires on the inner part of the camelback.
A too much closing causes the wear of the tires on the exterior part of the camelback.
The parallelism is adjustable by rotating the tie bar of the steering connecting rod.
30 - 16
vnx.su
GENERAL
PRELIMINARY CHECKING
30
Before checking and adjustment of the front axle geometry, perform the followings
operations:
* The checking of tires concerning:
- dimensions
- air pressure
- the state of wear;
NOTE :
The tires must be of same type, with the same state of wear, air pressured at the
prescribed pressure.
*The check of joints:
- the wear of elastic bushings
- the steering ball joints clearance
- the wheels bearings clearance.
NOTE :
The axial clearance of the bearings must be in admissible limits.
ESTABLISHING OF THE STEERING CENTRAL POINT
In order to perform a front axle checking and adjustment, it is necessary to establish the
central point in order to avoid measurement errors.
To do that, bring the steering wheel so that device DIR 500 for steering box rack
blocking is entering in the orifice placed at its right upper part.
30 - 17
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
PRELIMINARY CHECKING
Due to the geometric conception of the front axle, the modification of one of oneside angles (castor, camber, ball joint) has no major impact on the value of other side
angles (the parallelism being the one directly influenced).
The modification of these angles does not occur during vehicle exploitation, but only as
a consequence of a vehicle accident.
It is important to observe the following sequence :
- placing the vehicle on rotating plates;
- braked vehicle
- suspension checking for placing the vehicle at its free height;
- establishing the steering central point and steering box blocking.
- attachment of the optical devices on the vehicle, observing the manufacturer
instructions.
REPARTITION CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT
Check the “X” dimension symmetry of
the connecting rods.
Reading of the “A” value on the scale.
30 - 18
vnx.su
GENERAL
CHECKING OF THE FRONT AXLE ADJUSTMENT
30
Case 1:
The symmetry dimension “X” is correct-the value “A” is equaled distributed.
Case 2:
The symmetry dimension “X” is incorrect-read the value “A” on each side, adds it, and
calculate the average value, establishing the value for each side.
Example:
Right side value : A = 16;
Left side value : A = 10;
16 + 10 = 26;
26 : 2 = 13;
Operating the steering rods tie bar, restore the same value for both sides A = 13.
In this position, lock the rotating plates at zero point.
Check in the following sequence:
- camber angle;
- caster angle;
- parallelism;
- ball joint angle.
PARALLELISM ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the lock nut (1) maintaining the tie
rod of steering connecting rod (2) in a fixed
position.
Act upon the tie rod of steering connecting
rod taking into account its rotation sense of
in order to obtain the convergence or
divergence and also the fact that one of its
complete rotation leads to an axial
displacement of 1,5 mm.
OBSERVATION
The opening between the wheel’s front
and rear is measured on a F=340 mm.
After obtaining the correct parallelism,
tighten the lock nut at the required moment
of 5 daNm.
30 - 19
vnx.su
30
GENERAL
CHECKING OF THE FRONT AXLE ADJUSTMENT
Three situations may appear:
PARALLELISM REPARTITION CORRECTION WHICH MUST PERFORMED
1. CORRECT
INCORRECT
Perform the same rotation number of the tie rod
connecting rod on left side and on the right side until
obtaining the same value ”A”.
2. INCORRECT
right
CORRECT
Adjust the parallelism at the same value for left and
side ensuring the same value “A” on both sides.
3. INCORRECT
INCORRECT
Perform firstthe repartition in order to balancethe value
“A”on eachside,than adjust the parallelism(seeCase2}.
30 - 20
vnx.su
GENERAL
CHECKING OF THE FRONT AXLE ADJUSTMENT
30
DIAGNOSIS
THE DEVIATION TO THE LEFT OR TO RIGHT AT STABLE SPEED
Perform the preliminary checking:
Wheels (front, rear) :
- pressure
- dimensions
- types
- balancing
Joints clearance:
- bushings
Checking points heights
- simetrie
A.m.
conditions
are respected
NO
YES
Correct the deficient
The deviation
persists
Checking finished
NO
YES
Check the front axle
steering geometry
The deviation
persists
Checking finished
NO
YES
Check the rear axle
parallelismand the alignment
30 - 21
vnx.su
A
30
GENERAL
CHECKING OF THE FRONT AXLE ADJUSTMENT
DIAGNOSIS
A
YES
The axle
adjustment
is correct
NO
Replacement of damaged
elements
Checking finished
Deviation persists
YES
Commute the wheels until
the deviationis balanced
CAPTION :
To check
Performed operations
30 - 22
vnx.su
NO
Checking finished
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
31
CHARACTERISTICS
The front axle is composedof two joint half axleswith independents wheels,designedfor the
suspensiontype Mc.Pherson.
The jointsof front half axle arm are done by meansof an elastic bearing (chassisside) and
by meansof a suspensionball joint (wheelside)
The transmission of the motion to the wheels isdone by meansof two planetary axles,not
equal, with homocinetictripodjoints.
The wheel hubis assembled in the steering knuckle by meansof a preset and sealed
bearing.
The brake disks are aerated.
Tightening moments (daNm)
Wheel attachmentscrew
Suspensionarm shaft nuts
Attachmentnut of the ball joint screw
The nut of the attachmentscrew of the steering
knuckle with the shock absorber
Transmission nut
Steering ball joint nut
The attachmentanti roll bar nut
The connectingstrap screw
The attachmentscrew of the suspensionball joint on the arm
The attachment screws of the disk on the hub
Aux.connectingrod- assembledconnectingrod end stop nut
Assembledconnectingrod end- rack joind body
31 - 1
vnx.su
7,5
7,5
5,5
7,5
21,0
4,0
2,5
2,7
7,5
2,5
5,0
5,0
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SUSPENSION ARM
Tightening moments (daNm)
Wheelsattachmentscrews
Suspensionarm shaft nuts
Attachmentnut of the ball joint screw
Anti – roll bar bearings nuts
Ball joint attachmentscrews nuts on the arm
Strap screw
7,5
7,5
5,5
2,5
7,5
2,7
NOTE
The dismounting-remounting operations are identical for both half axles.
DISMOUNTING
Lift the vehicleon an elevatorwith two columns.
Dismountthe two wheels.
Loosen the attachment nuts (1) of the anti roll bar on the suspensionarms.
Detach downward the anti roll bar.
Dismount :
- the suspension upper ball joint screw (2) and nut on the steering knuckle;
- the strap screw ;
- the nuts (3) and the arm attachment axles on the frame ;
- the arms.
31 - 2
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SUSPENSION ARM
31
RE MOUNTING
NOTE :
Ensure the presence of the protection plate (A) on the suspension ball joint axle.
Perform the operationsin followingsequence:
- positionthe arm to the chassiswithouttighteningthe axlesnuts (3) .
- mount the ball joint in the steering knuckle
- fix the attachmentscrew and tighten its nut at the required moment ;
Mount the wheelthe with the vehicleon wheelscontinue with:
- remounting the antiroll bar by tightening at the requiredmoment theattachment screws.
- tighteningof the shaft arm nuts and fixing the strap to the upper part..
The tightening to the required moment of the elastic bushings of the suspension arms is
performed observing the value H1 – H2 = 80 mm.
31 - 3
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
ELASTIC BUSHINGS OF THE SUSPENSION ARM
SPECIAL TOOLS
P.F. 601
Mounting bushings device
P.F. 602
Bushing extractor
REPLACEMENT
This operation impliesbushingsreplacementone by one, in order to maintaintheircentering
as to the arm shaft.
Dismount one of the bushings,by meansof the TF 602 device, using a 31-mm outsidediameter rod.
Mount the new bushing, observing the value A =239 +/- 0,5 mm.
Dismounttheotherbushing, proceeding in the sameshown way, in orderto maintain the value
A =.239 +/- 0,5 mm
Mounting of the elasticbushingsis performed by meansof the device TF 601.
31 - 4
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SUSPENSION BALL JOINT
31
DISMOUNTING
Perform the sameoperationslike dismountingthe suspensionarm.
Unscrew the two attachmentnuts (3) of the arm shafts, withoutdismountingthem.
4
DISMOUNT :
- the two ball joint attachment screws (4) on the arm;
- the ball joint.
REMOUNTING
NOTE :
Ensure the presence of the protection plate (A) on the suspension ball joint axle.
Mount the suspension ball joint on the arm, by means of the two attachment screws and
tighten theirnuts at the required moment.
Perform then, the sameoperationsas for suspensionarm remounting.
BELLOWS REPLACEMENT
Dismountthe damagedbellows.
Clean the ball joint in the areacovered by the
bellows( ball joint body and pin)
Fill the newbellows with approximate 3 g
MOS2 specialgrease
Mount the new bellowson the ball joint
Place on the bellows by meansof a resistant
thread, the fixing clip (B), then the fixingclip A
(F = 19).
31 - 5
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKE GASKETS
SPECIAL TOOLS
FR 500
Pushingpiston device
NOTE
NOTE
In order to maintain the brake efficiency,
the replacement of the brake pads shall be
made only in complete kit.
Never fit brake pads of different makes
and different qualities .
DISMOUNTING
Lift the vehicle by means of a two columns
elevator;
Dismountthe front wheel;
Disconnect the wear sensor wire;
Dismount : - the safety of the wedges (1);
- the wedges,by slidingthem.
Detach the caliper assembly from the fork
togetherwith the flexible hose;
Remove : - the elastic blades
- the brake pads
It is forbidden to push the brake pedal
after the calipers were dismounted from
the fork.
If the brake pads are not fully used but
on their friction surface, especially in the
middle pad channel, there are material
traces, it is recommended the cleaning of
these surfaces in order to avoid the noise
when braking.
REMOUNTING
Push the caliper piston by means of the
FR 500 specialtool.
FR 500
Remount :
- the brakepads theirplacesin the fork;
- the elastic blades;
- the caliper;
- the wedges and their locks.
Reconnectthe wear sensor wire.
Press several times the brake pedal.
Mount the wheels.
Get downthe vehiclefrom the elevator the
ground.
31 - 6
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKECALIPER
REPAIRING
TIGHTENINGMOMENTS(daNm)
Wheel nuts
Rigid duct on front flexible screw
Purging screw
Flexiblehose - caliper
31
7,5
1,5
1
2
DISMOUNTING
Lift the vehicleby means of a two columns
elevator.
Dismountthe wheel.
Disconnect the wear sensor wire
Drain the brake fluid from the reservoir
Remove the locks and the caliper wedges;
Unscrewthe rigid duct screwfromthe brake
flexible hose and detachthe caliperassembly.
Dismountthe protectiongasket.
Extract the piston using a wooden wedge and
a compressed air source.
Remove the sealinggasketfrom its seatin the
calipergroove by means of a steel blade.
Clean with alcohol the parts, replace the
damagedones, mountingbeingperformedin the
dismounting reverse order, after previously all
parts have been oiled with brake fluid.
NOTE
If it is necessary to dismount the
caliper fork, unscrew the two attachment
screws M 12.
When remounting the fork, replace the
Grower washers, tighten the screws at the
required moment of 6.5 daNm then seal
them with FIXAMED R 58.
NOTE
Before remounting to the wheel, check
the sealing of the caliper assembly.
31 - 7
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKECALIPER
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operationsin the reverse order plus the followingoperations:
- fill the caliperwith brake fluid in order to facilitatethe brake systempurging;
- purging the brakesystem.
BRAKE CALIPER SEALING CHECKING
Connect to the caliper, a pressure gauge attached to a compressed air source.
Place a wooden wedge in order to block the piston.
Create a 0,3 bars pressure in the caliper.
Dip the caliperinto a vesselwith alcohol.
Move the piston several times to remove the air from the sealing gasketseat.
Checkthe sealing of the brake caliper atvarious pressures,without exceeding the pressure of 2 bars.
If the brake showsair leaks by the piston, perform at its dismounting.
Replace thepiston, the gasket, or the caliper body, as the case stands.
Perform againthe sealingtest.
31 - 8
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKE DISK
31
The brake disks can be not rectified.
A bigger wear or an important mark on the brake disk brakingsurfacesimposeobligatory its
replacement.
- The minimalacceptedthickness: 19 mm
- The maximumaccepted axial deviation 0,1 mm on a diameterof F 215.
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
steering nuckle
Disk attachment screw on the hub
Front wheel steering knuckle nut
Wheel screws
6,5
2,5
21
7,5
DISMOUNTING
Lift the vehicle by means of a two columns elevator.
Dismount :
- the wheel;
- the twoattachmentscrewsM 12 ( B)
ofthe brake diskassemblyonthe steeringknuckle;
- the brake pads;
- the two sunk screws attaching the
disk on the hub.
REMOUNTING
Remount :
- the disk on the hub by meansof the two
sunk screwsM8 and tighten them to the required
moment;
- the brake disk assemblyon the steering
knuckle, tightening the M 12 screws at the
required moment.
Pressthe brake pedal several times, in order
to bringthe piston in contactwiththe brake pads.
Before remounting, check:
- the wear of the flexiblehose;
- the wear of the brake pads and
replacethem if necessary.
NOTE :
In case of replacing the brake disk it is absolutely necessary to replace the brake pads.
31 - 9
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
31
STEERING KNUCKLE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Hub disk extractor
Ball joint extractor
PF600
PF476
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Wheel attachmentscrew
7,5
Steering ball joint nut
3,5
Transmission nut
21
Attachmentforkscrew onsteeringknuckle 6,5
The screw nut of the steering knuckle
attachment withthe shock absorberleg 7,5
The attachmentscrew nut of the ball
joint with the steering knuckle
5,5
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Lift the vehicle by means of an elevator with
two column.
Dismount :
- the wheel
- the brake disk assembly together with
the flexibleconnection;.
- the transmissiongear nut.
- the brake disk assembly by means by
means of the PF 600 extractor.
Continue by dismounting the steering
knuckle,observing the operationssequence:
- dismountthe steering ball joint nut;
- depress the steering ball joint by
means of the PF 476 extractor;
- dismount the two screws that attach
the steering knuckle on the shock absorber;
- dismountthe attachment screws that
attachthesteering balljoint – steeringknuckle;
- detach the steering knuckle.
31 - 10
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
STEERING KNUCKLE
31
REMOUNTING
NOTE :
Before remounting check the wear of the bearing.
The bearing shall be replaced when the grease is flown.
Positionand pressthe steering knuckle togetherwith the “ hub – disk “assembly,performing
the operations in the reverse order,afterpreviouslyhaving greasedthe steering knuckle grooves.
31 - 11
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
STEERING KNUCKLE BEARING (35 x 65 x 35)
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the steering knuckle (see chapter
“Dismounting steering knuckle)
Remove the safety ring from the interior of
the steering knuckle;
Depress the bi-conical bearing, using aF 50 mm
outer diameter rod.
Place the steering rodusing abushing with inner
diameter F 67 mm.
The steering knuckle-bearing assembly
shallbe placedabove thehub – disk assembly
and after centering the supportwasher, press
the bearing on the hub, using a bushing with
the inner diameter of F 36 mm and an exterior
diameterof F 40 mm.
Continue withthemounting of the steering
knuckle assembly on the vehicle (see the
chapter“Remounting steeringknuckle”)
REMOUNTING
Introduce in the steering knuckle the bearing
support washer
Press the bearing in the steering knuckle, by
meansof a 63 mm diameterbushing.
Mount the safety ring in the steering knuckle
NOTE:
The operation shall be performed so that
bushing is not pressed on the bearing
support washer,in order to perform a correct
mounting and not to damage the bearing.
31 - 12
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
FRONT SUSPENSION
31
Helical springs, hydraulicshock absorber with double effect and anti-rollbar.
6 daNm
2 daNm
7,5 daNm
7,5 daNm
2,7 daNm
3,5 daNm
21 daNm
7,5 daNm
7,5 daNm
31 - 13
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SHOCK ABSORBER, SPRING
SHOCK ABSORBER
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Shock absorber rod nut
6
Shock absorber lower attachmentnut 7,5
Shockabsorberupper attachment screws 2
The shock absorbers are stored in the spare
parts warehouses/shopsin horizontal position.
In these conditions, it is possible that shock
absorbers working vertically, to get depressed.
Therefore, before mounting on the vehicle,it
is sufficient to perform the shock absorbers
pressing, by alternatively shifting the shock
absorber rod (upwards and downwards), the
shock absorber being in verticalposition.
1. Upper attachmentnut
2. Lower attachmentscrew
3. Upper catch
4. Upper plate
5. Shock buffer
6. Lower plate
7. Axial bearing
FRONT SPRING
Coil diameter (mm)
F 12,5
Length under load (mm)
194 +/- 10 / 330 daN
NOTE :
It is necessary that the springs of every axle have the same characteristics.
31 - 14
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SPRING ASSEMBLY AND SHOCK ABSORBER
31
DISMOUN TING SPRI NG-SHOCK ABSOR BER ASSEMBLY OFF THE
VEHICLE
2
Liftthe vehiclein the partwhereperforming
thedismounting.
Dismount:
- the wheel
- the two lower attachment screws of
the shock absorber leg (1).
- the two upper attachment screws of
the shock absorber on the carriage body (2).
Take out the assembly spring – shock
absorber, by pressing on the lower arm in
order to avoid the shock absorber came in
contactwith the transmissionbellows.
1
SEPARATE SPRING FROM SHOCK ABSORBER
2
Place the shock absorber on the shock
absorber support (4), of the base plate (3) of
the SUS 600 device.
Placethe compressionplate (7) on the spring
upper catch and position the rods grips (8) on
the spring lower lastbut one coil.
Compress the spring by alternatively
tightening the nuts(9) till releaseitfrom the lower
plate of the shock absorber.
Dismount the upper attachment nut of the shock
absorber by meansof the SUS 601 wrench.
Take out the spring.
Placethe spring on the SUS600 deviceshaft(2).
Put on the shaft the lock bushing (6), the spacer (5), and tighten to the required moment the
crank (1) till the lock bushing(6) comesinto contactwith the upper catch of the shock absorber.
Unscrew alternatively the nuts (9) and take out the plate (7) and the rods grips (8).
Releasethe spring by meansof the crank(1) and detach from the shaft (2), the upper catch of
the shock absorber, the upper plate, and the spring.
31 - 15
vnx.su
31
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
SPRING ASSEMBLY AND SHOCK ABSORBER
SPRING-SHOCK ABSORBER REMOUNTING ON THE VEHICLE
Place the spring on the SUS 600 device shaft (2).
Positionon the spring the upper plate and the upper catch of the shock absorber.
Put on the shaft the lock bushing (6) , the spacer (5).
Compress the spring by means of the crank (1).
Place the compression plate (7) on the upper catch and position the rods grips (8) on the
spring lastbut one coil.
Tighten the nuts (9) till the rods grips (2) came in contactwith the spring coil.
Release the crank (1) and detach the compressed spring from the shaft (2).
Place the shock absorber in the support (4).
Place on the shock absorber the axial bearing, the lower plate, the buffer, and the spring.
Mount the upper attachmentnut of the shockabsorber by meansof the SUS 601 wrench and
tighten at the required moment.
Unscrew the nuts (9) and take out the plate (7) with the rods grips (8).
Mount the spring-shock absorberassemblyon the vehicle in thereverseorder of dismounting.
31 - 16
vnx.su
FRONT BEARING ELEMENTS
31
ANTI-ROLL BAR
TIGHTENING MO
MENTS(daNm)
Screws for attaching the elastic bushings
clamps on longitudinal girder
2,5
Clamps screws for attaching bushings on arm2,5
FRONT ANTI-ROLL BAR
Diameter (mm)
Φ 24
DISMOUNTING
Unscrew :
- the screwsof the elasticbushingsattachmentclampson longitudinal girders;
- the attachment clamps screws on arm.
Dismountthe anti-roll bar.
Check the stateof the elastic bushingsand bushings.
Replacethem if necessary.
1. Bushing
2. Bushing attachment clamp
3.Elastic bushing attachment
clamp
4. Elastic bushing
1
2
4
3
REMOUNTING
Mount the bushingsand anti-rollbar attachmentelasticbushings.
Mount the anti-roll bar.
Press the front axle at half load.
Tighten at the required moment,the screws of bushing attachmentclamps on the arm and
those of the elastic bushings attachment on longitudinal girder ( the mounting position of the
elastic bushingsshallbe with the slot (A) towards the clamp attachmentscrew on frame).
A
1
31 - 17
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
CHARACTERISTICS
The rear axle is composed of an axle having a “U“ shaped torsion profile to which
arms are welded.
For the transversal stability and the resistance fatigue improvement of the cross- bar,
the axle is equipped with a F 21-mm diameter stabilizer bar. The bar is inserted by welding
on both ends in the axle side arms.
The connection of the axle with the chassis is realized by elastic bushings of the spiral
spring and the double effect telescopic shock absorber.
The drum and the hub constitute a common body, and are mounted on the steering
knuckle by means of a be-conical bearing, sealed and pre-set.
33 - 1
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
REAR AXLE
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Drum cover pliers
Hub extractor
Dismounting pliers for shoes
return spring
Shoes protectors
Pliers for maintaining brake
cylinders pistons
Dynamometric wrench
Comparing dial gauge
R0 441
PF 600
FR03
FR09
FR05A
MOT30
R054A
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Wheel attachment screw
Axle attachment nut
Shock absorber bottom attachment nut
Rear axle arm elastic bushing axle nut
Brake rigid piping connection screw
Purging screw
7.5
8.5
8.0
12.0
1.5
1.0
Dismount the lower attachment screws (A)
of the shock absorber with the rear axle.
Push upward the shock absorbers.
Dismount the springs.
DISMOUN TING
Lift the vehicle on two columns
elevator.
Dismount the two rear wheels.
Drain the braking system.
Dismount the brake drums.
Disconnect the two-connector screws of
thebrakerigidpiping of the brake cylinder.
Loosen the connections of the
secondary cable fromthe hand brake levers
and remove the cable from the brake plates.
Dismount the operating rod support of
the brake limiter from the right side axle
arm, after previouslyboth arms protectors
have been dismounted.
Dismount the connecting screws (B)
between the rear axle arms and the chassis.
Dismount completely the rear axle.
Check the elastic bushings condition.
33 - 2
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
REAR AXLE
33
REMOUNTING
Before remounting, grease with grease the attachment screws of the rear axle shock
absorber bottom and the chassis, consequently, the connecting screws rear axle-chassis.
Line up the arms bearings right to the chassis supports, mounting them without tightening at the moment, the nuts with the screws, assembling the axle to the chassis.
Remount the springs.
Compress the axle so that rear springs bear on the tray and set back the shock absorber
inner attachment screws.
Tighten at the prescribed moment the connecting screws.
Perform the dismounting operations in the reverse order.
Check the maximum allowed axial clearance of the bearing using a dial gauge and the
support RO541A.
Note
The maximum allowed axle clearance of the bearing is 0.05mm.
Mount the rear wheels, lower the vehicle on the ground.
Refill with fluid the brake assembly.
Purge the braking system.
Check and adjust the hand brake cable.
Adjust the clearance at the limiter operating rod (see chapter 37- Brake limiter
adjustment).
33 - 3
vnx.su
33
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
REAR SUSPENTION
Spiral spring and double effect shock absorber.
33 - 4
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
SHOCK ABSORBER
33
TIGHTENING MOMENTS
Shock absorber inner attachment nut
8
Shock absorber upper attachment nut 1,45+/-0,3
NOTE
The storage of the shock absorbers in the
spare parts shops is made in horizontal
position.
In these conditions, the shock absorbers,
which are vertically functioning, may destrike.
So, it is enough that before mounting on
the vehicle, to proceed on striking the shock
absorbers by alternative moving up and
down of the shock absorber rod in vertical
position.
1. Upper attachment nuts
2. Protector
3. Upper buffer
4. Inner attachment screw.
DISMOUNTING
Remove the shock absorber protector (2).
Dismount the upper attachment screws (1) (through the trunk).
Loosen the screws of the wheel.
Dismount the wheel.
Lift the vehicle by means of an elevator and dismount the inner attachment screw (4).
Dismount the shock absorber.
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismounting operations.
Remount:
- the shock absorber at the lower side;
- the shock absorber at the upper side.
Tighten the nuts at the required moment.
33 - 5
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
SPRING
REAR SPRING
Coil diameter (mm)
Length under load (mm)
F 14,3
230 +/- 10 / 330 daN
DISMOUNTING
Place the locking clamp of the SUS 600
device in order to maintain the spring
compressed.
Loosen the screws of the wheel on the side
where the dismounting is performed.
Dismount the wheel.
Dismount the shock absorber lower attachment nut and screw.
Push the axle and remove the spring.
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismounting operations.
NOTE
Make sure that springs of each axle have the same characteristics.
33 - 6
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
BRAKE DRUM
The two brake drums having the same diameter; the rectifying of one of them obligatory
implies the same operation for the other one.
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Plug extracting pliers
Drum extractor
RO441
PF600
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Wheel attachment screw
Steering knuckle nut
7.5
16
DISMOUNTING
Extract the plug out of the drum using the
extracting pliers RO441.
Release the hand brake, loosening the secondary cables in order to allow the hand brake
lever return.
Pass a screwdriver through the wheel attachment whole from the drum and operate
on the brake lever sector loosening the its
gearing with the hand brake lever.
Dismount:
- the steering knuckle nut and washer;
- the drum using PF600 extractor.
REMOUNTING
Clean the drum and the brake plate assembly by means of a cleaner (vacuum cleaner)
for brake.
Place back:
- the drum;
- the steering knuckle washer and nut tightening them at the required moment;
- the drum plug.
Adjust:
- the shoes by applying a repeated pressure to the brake pedal;
- hand brake (see chapter 37-“Controls”).
33 - 7
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
BRAKE CYLINDER
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Dismounting pliers for shoes return spring
Plug extractor pliers
FR03
RO441
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Wheel attachment screw
Rear wheel steering knuckle nut
Purging screw
Brake rigid piping connection screw
7.5
16
1
1.5
DISMOUNTING
With the vehicle placed on an elevator
with two columns, dismount:
- the wheel;
- the drum plug;
- brake drum;
- upper spring of shoes return, using
pliers FR03.
Space the brake shoes.
Check the condition of the shoes brake gaskets; if oil traces are present, replace them.
REMOUNTING
Unscrew:
- the rigid piping connection on the brake
cylinder by meansof an open-endwrench;
- the two attachment screws of the
brake cylinder on the brake plate, loosening the connection.
Clean the drums and the brake shoes assembly by means of a cleaner (vacuum
cleaner) for brake.
Perform in reverse order the dismounting
operations.
Purge the braking system (see chapter 38).
33 - 8
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKE CYLINDER
33
Adjust:
- the shoes, by applying a repeated pressure to the brake pedal;
- the rear axle bearing clearance.
Mount the wheel.
Lower the vehicle from the elevator.
Purge the braking system (see chapter 38).
Adjust the hand brake.
REPAIRING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the brake cylinder off the vehicle;
Dismount:
- the purging screw;
- the protection bellows;
- the Ö22 pistons assembled with the pressure gaskets.
Check the condition of the cylinder boring, any trace of wear, oxidation or scratches
implies the replacement of the assembled brake cylinder.
If the cylinder components are in a good condition, lubricate them with brake fluid and
mount them in the reverse order of dismounting.
Check the easy moving of the assembled pistons in the cylinder boring.
Mount the brake cylinder on the plate;
Mount the wheel brake drum.
Check the adjustment of the hand brake.
Purge the braking system.
33 - 9
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
BRAKE SHOES
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Plug extracting pliers
Dismounting pliers for shoes return spring
Pliers for maintaining brake cylinders pistons
RO441
FR03
FR05A
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Wheel screw
Rear wheel steering knuckle nut
7.5
16
DISMOUNTING
By means of the pliers FR05A the brake
cylinder pistons are immobilized.
Remove the return upper spring of the
shoes using the pliers FR03.
Release the end of the hand brake cable
off the hand brake lever.
The replacement of brake shoes must
be performed in complete set, never mount
the brake shoes equipped with brake
linings of different brands and qualities.
Dismount :
- the brake drum ( see the corresponding paragraph);
- the two maintenance springs (R)
of the shoes with a brake cylinder rod (T).
Swing the adjustment lever (C) up to the
moment it comes into contact with the rear
wheel steering knuckle.
Distance the shoes from the plate.
33 - 10
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
BRAKE SHOES
Dismount the auxiliary connecting rod (B)
connection from the adjustment lever (C).
33
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismounting
operations.
NOTE
The adjustment of the device for the
automatic clearance taking over, is
depending of the spring tensioning
caught between the rear shoe and the
auxiliary connecting rod.
C
Bring the adjustment lever in the initial
position.
Rotate the compression shoe with 90
degrees.
Dismount the lower spring.
Remove the (front) compression shoe, then
the tensioning one.
33 - 11
vnx.su
Measure the value H=1mm, betweenthe
auxiliary connectingrod and the front shoe.
If the value H is not correct, replace the
auxiliary connecting rod spring and the
shoes return springs.
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
33
BEARING (25 x 52 x 37)
SPECIAL TOOLS
DENOMINATION
CODE
Plug extracting pliers
Drum extractor
RO441
PF600
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Steering knuckle nut
Wheel attachment screw
16
7.5
CHECKING
Check by means of a comparing device attached on the drum, the axial clearance:
0 – 0.15 mm max after mounting and tightening at the moment of 16 daNm.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- the drum plug by means of the extracting pliers RO441;
- rear wheel steering knuckle nut;
- the drum (see the corresponding paragraph).
Dismount from the drum:
- the boring lock;
- the bearing by means of a tube F38mm.
If necessary, use the extractor CV28 A, in order to extract the bearing inner ring, remained
on the steering knuckle.
33 - 12
vnx.su
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
BEARING (25 x 52 x 37)
33
REMOUNTING
By means of a tube with the outer diameter Ö51mm and a press, mount the bearing up
to the connection with the drum support surface (carefully not to damage the sealing ring).
Set back:
- a new lock;
- the drum on the steering knuckle, previously greased with grease;
- a new nut M20 x 1.5 and tighten at the required moment;
- the drum plug.
Adjust:
- the shoes by applying a repeated pressure on the brake pedal;
- hand brake (see chapter 37-“Controls”).
33 - 13
vnx.su
33
REAR BEARING ELEMENTS
BEARING (25 x 52 x 37)
ELASTIC BUSHING REPLACEMENT
Dismount by means of a press, the worn bushing, using a sleeve with the outer diameter
D=39mm.
Press the new bushing.
When pressing, observe the value : A=30mm.
NOTE
For the elastic bushing mounting use the PS701 device, and for dismounting the
extractor PS700.
33 - 14
vnx.su
WHEELS AND TYRES
35
CARACTERISTICS
RIMS
The wheelsidentificationmarking is representedin two ways:
- engraved marking for steelrims
- castmarking foraluminum rims
The marking enablesacknowledgmentof the main wheelsdimensionscriteria.This marking
may be:
complete,
Example: 5 1/2 B 13 4 CH 46 ; 5 1/2 J 13 4 H2 46
or simplified,
Example: 5 1/2 B 13 ; 5 1/2 J 13 H2
A
Wheels
Width
type (in inches)
B
C
The rim
edge profile
Æ Nominal
rim (in inches)
D
E
F
Numberof
Tire
Offset
wholes under staffing profile (in mm)
the tire bead
51/2B13
4CH48
5 1/2
B
13
4
CH
46
51/2J13
4H2
5 1/2
J
13
4
H2
46
The wheel bolts (studs) are situatedon a diameter of 100 mm.
Maximumaxial runout : 1 mm measured on the rim edge ( in G ).
Maximumradial runout : 1 mm measured on the supporting side of the tires beads.
35 - 1
vnx.su
WHEELS AND TYRES
35
CARACTERISTICS
TIRES
Identificationmarking examples: 165 / 70 R 13 79 T
165
/
70
R
13
79
T
1
2
4
5
6
1 - 165 - Tire width in mm ( 1 )
2 - 70 - h / l height / width ratio;
4 -R
- Radial structure
5 - 13 - Inner diameterin inches(Æ) ;
this is corresponding with the rimdiameter
6 - 79 - Charging index
3 -T
- Speed index max. 190 km/ h
Symbolsspeed
Max speed
R
S
T
U
H
V
ZR
more than
170
180
190
200
210
240
240
Structure types :
Diagonal
Radial
Diagonally belted
No marking
R
B
35 - 2
vnx.su
3
WHEELS AND TYRES
35
CARACTERISTICS
RIMS – TIRES
Air filling pressure (barr) at cold
Vehicle
R52315
Rim
Tires
5,5 B13
165/70R13
5,5 J13
165/70R13
Front
Rear
1,9
2,0
The wheelsscrewstighteningmoment : 7,5 daNm.
The inflating pressure must be checked at cold.
The temperature raisingduring driving,leadsto a pressure increasefrom 0.2.
to 0.3 bars.
In case temperature checkingis done at warm, take into account this pressure increase and
never deflate it.
35 - 3
vnx.su
35
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS BALANCING
BALANCING WEIGHTS
Use exclusivelythe weightsdelivered as spare parts:
- fixed by meansof clampson steelrims ( clampsincluded in weights)
- fixed by meansof clamps(plate clamps) for aluminumrims
A = steelbalancingweightsfor steelrims
B = steelbalancing weights for aluminum alloyrims.
A
B
35 - 4
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
AXIAL BALL JOINT
36
The steering mechanism is rack - and - gear drive type, unattended.
The steering mechanismis composedof: steering wheel,steering column,steering box, and
steering auxiliaryconnecting rods.
The diameterof the maximum turning circle:
- betweenwalls: 10m
The steering wheelnumber of rotations:4.26
Of multiplication: 21:1.
36 - 1
vnx.su
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
AXIAL BALL JOINT
NOTE
The replacement or the dismounting- remounting of the steering box, requires
parallelism adjustment.
1. Noise absorber bearing
2. Assembled casebearing
3. Needle case
4. Annularoil ring
5. Safetyring
6. Assembled gear
7. Pusher
8. “0” ring
9. Pusherspring
10. Assembled threaded plug
36 - 2
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
STEERING BOX
36
DISMOUNTING
Loosen the screws of the wheel;
Lift the front part of the vehicle;
Dismountthe wheel;
Dismount the ball joints of the steering
auxiliaryconnectingrods.
Dismount the attachment screw of the
steering wheelshaft(1) from the steering box.
Dismount the steering box attachmentscrews (2) on the cross member.
Dismountthe steering box together with the steering auxiliary connecting rods.
NOTE
Do not ever dismount the axial ball joints from the rack, unless they need to be
replaced.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operationsin the reverse order:
Grease the jointswith special greasecontainingMoS2.
Check the condition and the attachmentof the protectionbellows.
Tighten at the required moment the nuts of the steering auxiliary connectingrod - in the case
of the dismounting of an auxiliaryconnectingrod.
Mount the steering box and the auxiliary connecting rods assembly, on the vehicle.
Check the parallelism.
36 - 3
vnx.su
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
PUSHER
PUSHER ADJUSTMENT
The pusher adjustment shallbe performed taking into consideration, the wear degree of the
rack and the pusher.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pusher
”0” ring
Pusherspring
Assembled threaded plug
When mounting distribute 23 + / - 5cmc
of grease II Li Ca Pb with MoS2 for: the
rack, the gear,the pusher and the spring, the
innersurface.
ADJUSTEMENT METHOD
The clearance adjustmentof the pusher is performed by tightening the threaded plug at the
required moment of 1+/-0,2 daNm and unscrewing it ˘ round.
The moment for the gear rotation will be
about0,15 daN.m (maximumaccepted0,25
daN.m ) on the whole length of the rack or
the rack gliding effort of 25 daN (maximum
accepted 40daNm ) withoutrigid points.
Securing of the unscrewingof the threaded
plug is performed by the distortion of the
securing element of the assembled threaded
plug towards the casing in two antipodal
points.
36 - 4
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
NOISE ABSORBER BEARING
36
DISMOUNTING
Loosen the screws of the wheel;
Lift the front part of the vehicle
Dismount the wheelon the oppositeside of the steering column;
Dismount :
-casingprotectionbellows;
-the steering auxiliary connectedrod.
Rotate the steering wheeluntil the rack is withdrawn.
Remove, by means of a screwdriver the noise absorber bearing.
REMOUNTING
Carefully clean the rack and the noise absorber bearing seat and grease with specialgrease
containingMoS2.
In the sameway as at the dismounting,place backthe noise absorber bearing paying attention
to fix the three pins (A) in their seats.
Rotate the steering wheelin the oppositedirection until the rack standsout the bearing.
Remount on the rack:
- the steering auxiliary connecting rod (mount a new safety washer);
- protectionbellows.
Check and adjustthe parallelism,if necessary.
36 - 5
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
36
BELLOWS
DISMOUNTING
Lift the front part of the vehicle.
Dismountthe wheel.
Loosen theattachmentnut (5) of the auxiliaryconnectingrod ball joint to the steering knuckle
support and depress the ball joint (4).
Remove the attachmentcollar (6) of the bellowson the steering casingbox.
Remove the bellows(7) from the steering casingbox.
Straighten the edges of the safety washer.
Unscrew the steering connectingrod from the rack, using the special wrench and remove it
out together with the safety washer (2) and the locking washer (1).
1
2
3
4
6
7
1. Lockingwasher
2. Safety washer
3. Assembled end of the auxiliary
connecting rod
4. Assembled auxiliary connectingrod
funnel
5. Attachment nut
6. Attachmentcollar of the bellows
7. Bellows
5
REMOUNTING
Fold the bellowstowards the connectingrod funnel.
Before assembling the rack with the steering auxiliary connecting rods (the threaded parts
being free from any traces of grease) apply a layer of FIXAMED R 58- C.S. 1/82 on the
threaded parts of the auxiliary connectingrods.
Place the safety washer and the locker washer (in this order) on the threaded shaft of the
steering auxiliary connectingrod, passingthe curved pin of the safety washerthrough the slot of
the lockingwasher.
Screw the steering auxiliary connecting rod in the rack.
Tightenthe joint body at the moment of 5 daNm by meansof the 6902-4105 specialwrench.
Bend the safety washer in the oppositepart to the pin in at least one of the cuts made on the
ball joint body.
Mount the bellows in its channel from the steering casing.
Mount the auxiliary connectingrod funnel in the steering knuckle support.
Check the tighteningof the nut (5) at a moment of 4daNm,on the vehicle.
36 - 6
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
36
DEFORMABLE LOWER SHAFT
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Attachmentscrewsof lowershaftconnection 1,4
I. DIAGNOSTIC OPERATION
A. Incidents occurring at the deformable lower shaft of the steering column:
a) Vibrations and steering wheel clearance (I1, I2, I3);
b) Noises in steering system operation (I2, I3);
c) Heavilyturning, blocking tendencies(I4)
B. Corrective measures which are imperative to resolve the defects:
Incident Incidents (failures) established
code
Clearance in one or both cardanic joints.
I1
I2
I3
I4
Corrective measures
Replacethe assembled
deformablelower shaft
Clearance in the splintedassembledareabetween Replace the assembled deformable
ass.intermediaryshaftand ass.intermediarypipe. lower shaft
Clearance between lower bushing and ass.
Replace the assembled deformable
intermediary shaft.
lower shaft
Tough points of the cardanic joint, blocking
Replace the assembled deformable
tendencies.
lower shaft
2
3
1
36 - 7
vnx.su
36
STEERING ASSEMBLY
DEFORMABLE LOWER SHAFT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Mark the steering wheelposition(straight line driving position).
Dismount the connectionscrew (1) betweenthe deformable lower shaft and the steering
wheelshaft.
Loosen the screws of the front left wheel.
Lift the vehicleby meansof a two-column elevator.
Dismountthe leftfront wheel.
Dismount the connectionscrew (2) betweenthe deformable lower shaft and the gear shaft
of the steering box.
Dismount the sealinggasket(3) from the cowl panel.
Extract the lower shaft.
REMOUNTING
Clean the steering box gear shaft and grease it with grease UM 185 Li2 or UM 180 Li2.
Perform thedismounting operations in the reverse order.Tighten the connection screwsbetween
the lower shaft and the steering box gear shaft, consequently between the lower shaft and the
steering wheel shaft to the required moment of 1.4 daNm.
ATTENTION!
It is forbidden the damaging of the lower shaft and of the connection parts from the
steering system (steering box gear, steeringwheelshaft) when dismounting/remounting
the lower shaft.
36 - 8
vnx.su
STEERING ASSEMBLY
STEERING WHEEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
36
The steering wheeladjustmenton vertical,is performedas follows:
- control downwards the adjustment handle ( 3 ) placed under the steering wheel lower
casing.
- bring the steering wheelin the desired positionand maintain it in this position
- control upwards the adjustmenthandle.
It is forbidden to perform this adjustment during driving.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Steering lower shaft
Lower bushing
Adjustmenthandle
Assembled steering support
Bearing
Lock for shaft
Steering wheelattachment nut
Steering upper shaft
36 - 9
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PUMP
37
BRAKE PUMP WITH PRESSURE DROP INDICATOR ( ICP ) INCLUDED
COMPONENTS
1. Assembled primary piston with gaskets
2. Assembledsecondary pistonwith gaskets
3. Primary piston pin.
4. Secondary piston pin.
5. Primary piston return spring
6. Secondary piston return spring.
7. Purging screw
8. ICP transducer
A –A ICP assembly section
OPERATION
A. BRAKING
THE FRONT BRAKE CIRCUIT
The primarypistonis controlled by the pushing rod. Apart ofthebrake fluid underpressure
willoperatetogetherwith thespringon thesecondary piston,andthe otherpartof thebrakefluid
shallpenetrate through theductstothe upper floortowardsboth exits leading to thefrontbrake
calipers.
THE REAR BRAKE CIRCUIT
The secondary pistonis continuing its movement, conducting the brakefluid under pressure,
throughtheducts,tothe upper floor, towards theexittothepressure-reducing valve.Duringall
this time,thelinings-pistonsassemblywillbebalancedduetothe twosidesprings.
37 - 1
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PUMP
B. DE-BRAKING
After effort ending, the two pistons resumetheir initialpositionunder the effectof the retainer
springs, whilethe fluid is coming back and the pressure is decreasingin both circuits.
PRIMARY CIRCUIT – PRESSURE LOOSING
Lack of pressure in the primary circuit leadsto the followingsituation:
The primary piston is advancing up to the pin, so is controlling mechanicallythe secondary
piston. The secondary piston reaches a fluid pressure that shall operate on the piston – linings
assembly moving it to the right, opening also the second exit of the rear circuit ( the by-pass
circuit) increasingthe pressure for this circuit.
In this moment, by meansof the transducer,the warning light on the instrument panel is on.
SECONDARY CIRCUIT – PRESSURE LOOSING
Both pump pistonsgo on. The calipercylinders of the front brake shallnormally operate.
The secondary piston reaches its respective pin, but the pressure will decrease (due to the
failure).
37 - 2
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PUMP
37
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Rigidpipeconnection
Nut attachmentP.C. with servobrake
I.C.P. (pressure drop indicator)
1,5
1,3
2
DISMOUNTING
Close the connectionpipe betweenthe brake fluid reservoir and clutch transmittercylinder
by means of the MOT 453 device.
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the brake fluidreservoir.
Disconnect the connection pipe betweenthe brake fluid reservoir and clutch transmitter
cylinder.
Dismountthe brake fluidreservoir off the brake pump (avoidingfluid leakage).
Dismount :
- the rigid pipe screws from the brake pump and mark their position;
- the two attachment nuts of the brake pump on the servobrake .
37 - 3
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PUMP
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin reverse order.
Check the length of the pushing rod , value X = 9 mm and correct if necessary.
Before remounting, check the servobrake pushing rod stroke ( min.30 mm ).
After assembling the brakewiththe fluidreservoir and filling with brake fluid, no leakagemust
occur in the surface of separation between the two elements.
IMPORTANT
The I.C.P. transducer is mounted after the braking system purging.
ICP sub-assembly is not reparable ( ICP – pressure-decreasing indicator)
37 - 4
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PUMP
37
BRAKE PUMP REPAIRING
The operation is performedafter dismountingthe central pump off the vehicle.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the brake fluid reservoir, recovering the two sealinggasketsof the brake fluidreservoir.
Dismount the transducer and the purging
screw.
Clamp a 3,5 mm drill in the vice.
Introduce the drill in the elasticpin
Rotate and draw the pump until the pin is extracted;
Extractthe secondary piston elasticpin, in the
sameway.
Removefrom the pump:
- the Pp primary piston assembled ;
- the primarypistonreturn spring;
- the Ps secondary piston assembled;
- the secondary piston return spring
Wash the parts with alcohol and blow them
with compressedair.
Check:
- the pump bore
- the pistonsgaskets
- the springs
The parts of the “ primary piston” Pp and those of the “ secondary piston” Ps,cannot be repaired.
In caseone of theseparts is damaged, replace the whole kit ” primary piston”and “secondary
piston”,primary piston return spring, secondary piston returnspring.
REMOUNTING
Before remounting, the parts and the pump bore willbe lubricatedwith brake fluid.
Mount the “ secondary piston”and “primary piston “ assembly.
Compressthe pistonsand introducethe elasticpins; the pins slot shallbe orientedtowards the
pump attachment flange.
Mount the purging screw;
Purge the brake circuit and remount the ICP transducer.
37 - 5
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
SERVOBRAKE
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Brake pump nut on servobrake
Servobrake attachmentnut on the cowl panel
1,3
2,0
MASTER VAC 7 SERVO MECHANISM
The ” Master-Vac 7” servobrake is a brake booster with the objectiveof reducing the driver
effort on the brake pedal.
OBSERVATION
In case one circuit is damaged, the pedal stroke shall be longer, the braking being
done only by the circuit still working.
ATTENTION
The servobrake cannot be repaired.
The only items of the servobrake which are to be replaced are the air filter and the retainer
valve.
DISMOUNTING
Close the pipe betweenthe brake fluidreservoir and the clutchtransmittercylinder by means
of the MOT 453 device.
Drain the liquid out of the reservoir.
Disconnectfrom the reservoir the feeding pipe of the clutch transmittercylinder.
37 - 6
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
SERVOBRAKE
Detachthe four rigid brakeducts from the
main brake pump.
Disconnectthe electrical contactfrom ICP
transducer.
Dismount the main pump from the
servobrake.
Disconnect the suction hose off the
servobrake.
37
REMOUNTING
Before remounting, check:
- the adjustment of the main cylinder
stroke, whichis obtained by actingon the pushing
rod nut in order to obtain value X= 9mm,
betweenthe pushingrod end and therest surface
of the main cylinder.
- the adjustment of the coupling fork on
the brake pedal side, which is obtained by
unscrewing the lock nut E and by acting on the
coupling fork in order to obtain the value L =
117 + 0,5 mm.
For remounting, perform the dismounting
operations in the reverse order.
Purge the brake circuit.
Mounting the I.C.P. transducer.
Mount the electric connectorat the I.C.P.
Dismount :
- the connectingshaft ( 1 ) betweenthe
coupling fork and the pedal ;
- the attachment nuts of the servobrake
on the cowl panel.
Dismount the servobrake .
37 - 7
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
SERVOBRAKE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Shutter
MOT 453
TIGHTNESS CHECKING
The tightness of the servobrake is checked on the vehicle, with the hydraulic
circuit under operation.
Connect the vacuum meter betweenthe servobrake and the inlet collectorby meansof a “ T
” type connector.
The connectinghose of the vacuum meter shallbe as long as possible.
Start the engine and let it idle run for 1min.
Block the air suction hose by means of the MOT 453 device.
Stop the engine.
If air suctionlowers with more than 33 mbar (25Hg) in a 15 secondsperiod, it meansthere
is a loss at the retainer valve (replace the valve) or at the servobrake membrane (replace the
servobrake)
Dismount the MOT 453 device
Dismountthevacuum hose
Reinstate the connection between the servobrake and the inlet collector by means of the
vacuum hose.
37 - 8
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
AIR FILTER – SERVOBRAKE RETAINER VALVE
AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT
37
SERVOBRAKE RETAINER VALVE
REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe servobrake off the vehicle.
Loosen the lock nut (E) and dismount:
- the couplingfork;
- the lock nut.
Remove the washerfilter F.
RE MOUNTING
Mount the new washerfilter
Mount:
- the lock nut;
- the coupling fork.
Adjust the value L = 117 + 0,5 mm.
Tighten the lock nut E on the coupling fork
Mount the servobrake on the vehicle.
Purge the brakingcircuit.
The operation is performed without
dismounting the servobrake off the vehicle.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the connectionof the air suction hose with the servobrake retainervalve.
Dismount the valve by rotating and then
pulling it.
Dismountthe retainervalve gasket.
RE MOUNTING
Checkthestateof the retainervalve gasket
and replaceit if necessary.
Mount the new retainervalve gasket.
Attachand mount the new retainervalve.
Connect the air suctionhose.
37 - 9
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
HAND BRAKE-ADJUSTMENT
The adjustment of the handbrake shall be perform with the vehicle lift on a two columns
elevator.
NOTE
The adjustment is obligatory performed anytime the shoes and secondary cables
have been replaced.
Release the control lever of the hand brake (releaseposition).
Unscrew the lock nut (2).
Tighten the nut (1) until the shoesgasketscome lightly into contactwith the brake drum.
The adjustment shall be performed so that is insuring a hand brake lever stroke of min.12
teeth until the blockingof the wheels.
Tighten the lock nut (2) at the required moment of 2 daNm.
Lower the vehiclefrom the elevator.
37 - 10
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
HAND BRAKE CONTROL LEVER
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Lift the vehicleby meansof a two columns elevator;
Release the hand brake control lever.
Detach the fork end rod by unscrew the lock nut (2).
Dismount:
- the hand brake ornament;
- the lever support with toothed part (3);
- the end shaft rod (4);
- the lever shaft (5);
- the claw shaft (6) ;
- the claw control rod (7).
Detachthe lever.
RE MOUNTING
Grease the shafts with UM 185 Li 2 grease.
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Check and adjustthe adjustment if necessary.
37 - 11
vnx.su
37
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
HAND BRAKE SECONDARYCABLE
HAND BRAKE SECONDARYCABLE
SPECIAL TOOLS
CODE
Wheel drum covertongs
Hub extractor
Dynamometer wrench
Ro 441
Fr. 600
Mot 30
DISMOUNTING
Release the hand brake control lever ( release position );
Dismountthe drum;
Release the secondary cable end from the hand brake control lever,dismount the sheathes
stops from the brake plate ;
Dismount the rudder bar shaft.
Remove the secondary cable.
37 - 12
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
HAND BRAKE SECONDARYCABLE
RE MOUNTING
Grease the cable with UM 185 Li 2.
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Adjust the hand brake control lever stroke.
37 - 13
vnx.su
37
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSES
The SUPER NOVA vehicles are equipped with flexiblehoses with copper gasketsin order
to ensure the sealing.
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
X (caliperflexible)
2,0
Y (the attachmentconnectionscrew of the rigid pipe on the flexible) 1,5
PRECAUTIONS IMPOSED TO BE RESPECTED WHEN
DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING A RECEIVER
OR A BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Due to security reasons, in order to avoid brake flexiblehose twisting and the risk to get in
contact with the suspension elements,it is necessary to observe the followingoperations sequence.
37 - 14
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSES
37
DISMOUNTING
Unscrew the connection (1) (wrench) of the rigid pipe on the flexible hose till the moment
when the spring (3) is relaxed, having releasingthe splintedarea (4) of the sustainingbed.
Unscrew the flexiblefrom the caliperand eventuallydismountthe caliper.
REMOUNTING
Assemble the caliperwith the caliperfork, mount the wedgesand then screw the flexiblein
the caliper,then tighten at the moment of 2 daNm.
The flexible must be mounted when thehalf axle is in the position:
- symmetric wheels(mounted suspension)
- train in line (straight wheels)
Positionthe femaleend of the flexibleon the sustaining bed (5) withouttwisting forcingand
check if the splintedarea ( 4 ) is freely coupling in the bed splints,then place back the spring (3)
and screwingthe rigid pipe on the flexible avoiding twisting.
Tighten the connectionscrew at a moment of 1,5 daNm.
Purge the brake circuit.
37 - 15
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PRESSURE CONTROLLER
Brake pressure controller,load sensitive,avoiding the rear wheelsblocking.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pressure controller body
Valve
Plug
Spring
Ball
Piston
OPERATIONPRINCIPLE
The brake pressure controller enables the rear circuit pressure “ modulation“ according to
two parameters:
- the pressure value in the front circuit
- the load on the rear axle
The pressurecontroller is operating on theprinciple of pressurecompensation in twoenclosures,
separated by means of a ball and spring valve.
The back pressure at the valve level is created by means of the force developed by the
continuosaction compensating spring and of the control spring acting in proportion as the rear
axle load is increasing.
The pushing rod is transmittingthe force of the lever spring to the pressure controller piston,
which is controllingthe valve ball being in the open normal position(positionP 1).
BRAKING MOMENT
In the sametime with pressure increasewhen entering in the pressure controller,this willact
upon the ball, forcing it to overcome the continuos acting spring force and by uncovering the
valve hole, to facilitate thereleasing of this pressure. In the braking moment, due to position
changing of the vehiclebody compared to therear axle, by means of theacting levers, the limiting
piston is movingtoward the interior, reducingthe fluidexistdiameter,leading to the obtaining in
this way of the pressure reduction in the rear circuit.
DE BRAKING MOMENT
In the moment of fluid inlet pressure restoring( by leg lifting from the brake pedal ), the piston
willcome back in the initialposition,gradually and quicklyallowingthesamediameterexistentat
the beginning of the brakingfor which the valve is open ( positionP1 ).
37 - 16
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PRESSURE CONTROLLER
37
NOTE
The brake pressure controller is not to be repaired.
TIGHTENING MOMENTS (daNm)
Pressure controller attachmentscrews on support
Pipe tighteningconnection screwsto the pressure controller
0,58 daNm
1,5 daNm
DISMOUNTING
Drain the circuit,recoverthe fluid;
Detachthe four connections(1) of the rigid pipes.
Dismount the two M6 attachmentscrews of the pressure controller support on the floor (2).
Remove the support together with the pressure controller from the fixing clips.
Dismount the pressure controller off the support.
REMOUNTING
Mount the pressure controller attachmentscrews on the support.
Attachthe support-pressure controller assembly on the floor.
Mount:
- control lever
- the four connectionscrews of the brake pipes
Purge the braking circuit and adjustthe pressure controller.
37 - 17
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
BRAKE PRESSURE CONTROLLER
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE PRESSURE CONTROLLER FOR
THE PARALLEL BRAKING SYSTEM
Conditions :
- the vehicleon wheels
- empty trunk
- one person on board
ADJUSTMENT
Mount the flexible connection of the FR501 device atthe purging screwof one rearwheel cylinder.
Purge the manometer.
Push the brake pedal to enable readingseveral timesthe limitingpressure obtained on the rear
wheelscylinders.
Unscrew the adjustment nut (A) to distance itfrom the pushing rod end (B).
Act upon the rod end (B):
- by unscrewing it towards the pushing rod(C)in order to increasethe pressurein the rearcircuit
- by screwing it towardsthe pushing rod ( C ) in order to decreasethe pressure in the rearcircuit.
Tighten at the required moment ( 0,35 daNm ) the adjustment nut( A ) next to the pushing
rod end ( B ) so that between the lever end and the lever ( D ) a clearance of L = 0,5 mm to be
ensured.
Check several times the limiting pressure obtained on the rear wheelscylinders : 30-+02 bar.
Dismountthe manometerand purge the brakingcircuit.
For the purging of the hydraulic circuit and the pressure control, the FR501 device is
to be used.
37 - 18
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC CONTROL
37
The working principleof this control is similar to the one of a brake control, having the same
working fluid : SAE J 1703 DOT 4.
TRANSMITTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the clutch controlhydraulic circuit ; for this purpose, open the purging connection and
connect to this a transparent hose for draining.
Dismount :
- dashboard lower part ;
- the feeding pipe 1 with brake fluidfrom the reservoir;
- the hydraulicpipe of the transmittercylinder 2.
Detachthe cylinder rod from the control pedal bolt (dismountingeffort : min 5 daNm).
Dismount the transmitter cylinder 3 as follows: by means of 24 mm wrench, rotate the
transmittercylinder from the right to the left aprox. 45 ° and extract the cylinder ( dismounting
moment : min 0.2 daNm ).
37 - 19
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
CLUTCHHYDRAULIC CONTROL
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order ;
- transmittercylinder mounting moment on the support – max 0.5 daNm
- cylinder rod mounting moment on the pedal bolt– max. 5.0 daN
Refill the brake fluid reservoir and purge the clutch control circuit by means of the purging
connection.
Adjustthe level in the brake fluid reservoir.
Attention
When remounting the feeding pipe at the brake fluid reservoir and at the
transmitter cylinder, observe the positioning markings.
37 - 20
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC CONTROL
37
HYDRAULIC RECEIVER REPLACEMENT
This operationshallbe performedafter dismounting of theengine-gearbox assemblyand after
disconnectingof the engine from the gearbox.
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe two attachmentscrews and dismountthe hydraulic receiver.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Tighten the screws at the required moment of 2.1 daNm.
PHYDRAULIC CIRCUIT PURGING
1. CIRCUIT REFILLING
Check if the clutch pedal is in the “up” position,maintainit by hand if necessary.
Fillthe reservoir with brake fluid.
Remove the protectioncap of the purging connection 1.
Connect a transparent hose at the purging connectionto recover the brake fluid.
Retrieve the clip 2 (do not definitelyremove it in order to limitthe movementof the feeding
pipe).
37 - 21
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
CLUTCHHYDRAULIC CONTROL
Retrieve the feeding pipe (towardsthe arrow)to enable the fluid passing through the connection 1.
Bleed a littlebit of fluid.
Close the purging connection(move the feeding pipe in reverse way).
2. FINAL PURGING OF THE CIRCUIT
a) Slowly push the clutch pedal to maximum position and keep it pushed.
Wait aprox. 10 secondsthen open the purging connection.
b) Close the purging connection, release the clutch pedal, and slowly lift it by hand to
the upper position ( if the pedal does not come back itself in this position ).
Repeat the operationsa and b till bubbles are not coming our through the purging.
connection,then repeat five more timestheseoperationsin order to be sure about a good circuit
purging.
These repeatedpurging allow“ the cleaning “ of the circuit from the air bubbles eventually
remainedin the circuit afterthe circuitfillingand purging.
An air bubble as littlemay be, remainedin the circuit,may lead to operatingdeficienciessuch
as: defectiveclutch pedal returnor gears change noise being able to lead to a wrong diagnosisor
an inopportune replacementof a part of the clutch circuit.
37 - 22
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
THE GEARS CONTROL
37
DISMOUNTING
The dismounting of the gears changing levershallbe performedafter dismounting the central
case .
Dismountunder the vehicle the controllever.
Dismount under the vehiclethe four attachmentscrews of the central case.
Dismount the assembly composedof control caseand gears control lever.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Tightenat the required moment :
- the control case attachment screws
1.2 daNm
- the control bar connectionscrew withthe GB connectingrod 2.7 daNm
- the connectionscrew of the control bar with the control lever 1.2 daNm
Greasethe partsof the joint composed of controlbar and GB connecting rodwith MOLYKOTE
33M grease.
Introduce in the protectionbellowsaprox. 10 ml of grease.
NOTE
The tightening of the connection screw of the control bar with the control
lever shall be performed after adjustment of the gearbox control.
37 - 23
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
THE GEARS CONTROL
SPECIAL TOOLS
CV 550
Linkage adjusting device
GEARS CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
This is to be performedafter mountingthe engine-gearbox assemblyand the assemblylevercontrol caseevery time when :
- dismounting of the engine-gearbox assembly, the control bar or the assembly levercontrol case;
- establishing of failures such as: gear change impossibilityor unexpected gear uncoupling,
gear blocking.
For the gear control adjustment the CV 550 device is to be used;
Mount the CV 550 device on the assembly lever- control case;
Attach the control bar to the control lever end;
Placethe gear lever in the device seatand fix it in this positionby meansof the device handle;
Tighten the attachmentscrew 1 of the bar to the lever at the required moment of 1.2 daNm;
Dismount the CV 550 device from the control box.
Check the gears coupling.
37 - 24
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
PEDALSSUPPORT
37
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the acceleration, clutch, and brake pedals.
Dismount the attachment nuts (4) and washers (5) of the pedals support on the cowl panel.
Remove the spacer (2) and the gasket (3).
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operationsin the reverseorder, by screwstighteningat a moment of
1,5 – 2,5 daNm.
37 - 25
vnx.su
37
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
ACCELERATIONPEDAL
DISMOUNTING
Release the acceleration pedal (3) from its attachment with the acceleration cable by
compressingthe two wingsof the attachmentclip (1).
Dismount the bearing attachmentscrew (2) and releasethe pedal(3).
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperations in thereverse order.The tightening moment of the bearing
attachment screw is of C = 0,45 daNm.
Check the 3,5 mm pedal stroke betweenthe pedal pressure controller (5) and the pedal (3)
by meansof thethreadedpin adjusting(4) subjectto valve maximumopening and cable tightening.
NOTE
The buffer ( 6 ) is attached to the support before cable mounting.
37 - 26
vnx.su
MECHANICAL ELEMENTS CONTROL
ACCELERATION CONTROL CABLE
37
DISMOUNTING
Act upon the cable attachmentclip of the acceleration control lever and for the cable release
(2) from its attachmenton the acceleration pedal, act upon the clip (1).
2
1
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
37 - 27
vnx.su
REPAIR MANUAL
DACIA
RM 524-2 BODY
ENGINE: E7J
GERBOX: JH3
TAPV: B41A, B41B, B41D
The reparation methods prescribed by the manufacturer in the present document are established subject to
technical specifications in force at the document issuing date.
These are subject to modifications brought by the manufacturer at the fabrication of different assemblies,
subassemblies or accessories of its vehicles.
All rights reserved to SC Automobile Dacia SA.
Reproduction or translating even partially of this present document is forbidden without the written
authorisation of AUTOMOBILE DACIA S.A.
Ref: 6001999443
APRIL 2004
vnx.su
English version
4
Body
40 GENERAL
Designation of parts (blow-up).....................
Openings clearance.......................................
Repairing general conditions........................
Welding types and parameters......................
Collision diagnosis........................................
Carriage body checking/ Straightening bench
CELETE type................................................
40-12
41 LOWER STRUCTURE
Front longitudinal girder assembly...............
Rear longitudinal girder................................
41-1
41-2
42 UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
Front wing.....................................................
Carriage body front part................................
Front wing lining...........................................
Radiator upper cross bar...............................
Headlamp support.........................................
Aeration grill.................................................
42-1
42-2
42-3
42-4
42-5
42-6
43 UPPER SIDE STRUCTURE
Front pillar lining..........................................
Front pillar.....................................................
Middle pillar..................................................
43-1
43-2
43-3
44 REAR UPPER STRUCTURE
Side panel......................................................
Inner rear wheel passage...............................
Rear panel.....................................................
44-1
44-2
44-3
45 TOP OF BODY
Roof..............................................................
45-1
47 LATERAL OPENINGS
Front/Rear door.. ..........................................
47-1
48 NON SIDE OPPENING ELEMENTS
Front bonnet..................................................
Hatchback.....................................................
48-1
48-2
5
40-1
40-4
40-5
40-6
40-8
52 NON SIDE OPPENING ELEMENTS
MECHANISMS
The composition of the front hood locking
system............................................................
Front hood locking system.............................
Hatchback locking system..............................
Hatchback balancing device...........................
52-1
52-2
52-3
52-5
54 WINDOWS
Windscreen and hatchback glass.................... 54-1
Hatchback glass replacement......................... 54-3
55 EXTERNAL PROTECTIONS
Front bumper.................................................. 55-1
Rear bumper................................................... 55-2
56 EXTERNAL ACCESSOIRES
Outside accesories.......................................... 56-1
Aileron........................................................... 56-2
Mechanisms and accesoires
51 SIDE OPPENING ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
Lock and front door lock cylinder................. 51-1
Lock and rear door lock cylinder.................. 51-3
Window and front door window regulator
(with cable)................................................... 51-5
Window and rear door window regulator
(with cable)................................................... 51-6
vnx.su
GENERAL
DESIGNATION OF PARTS (BLOW-UP)
LOWER STRUCTURE COMPOSING ELEMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Front cross member
Front longitudinal girder assembly
Upper front longitudinal girder
Longitudinal girder closing plate
Floor cross member
Floor side plate
Tank front cross member
Rear side cross member
Rear longitudinal girder assembly
Tank rear cross member
Rear extreme cross member
Rear floor
Middle floor
Tunnel lining
Middle cross member
40 - 1
vnx.su
40
40
GENERAL
DESIGNATION OF PARTS (BLOW-UP)
UPPER STRUCTURE COMPOSING ELEMENTS
17
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
16
15 14
1
2
3
12
13
4
5
6
Headlamp support
Upper radiator cross bar
Front grill
Front wing lining
Front pillar lining
Front pillar
Side frame lining
Middle pillar
Inner wheel passage
Side panel
Rear panel
Ceiling
Windscreen frame
Windscreen lower cross bar
Climate control box
Climate control box central part
Cowl panel
40 - 2
vnx.su
11
7
8
9
10
GENERAL
40
DESIGNATION OF PARTS (BLOW-UP)
CARRIAGE BODY REMOVABLE ELEMENTS
6
5
4
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front wing
Front door
Rear door
Hatchback
Aerating grill
Front bonnet
40 - 3
vnx.su
2
3
40
GENERAL
OPENINGS CLEARANCE
40 - 4
vnx.su
GENERAL
REPAIRING GENERAL CONDITIONS
40
The replacement (reparation) operations of the weldable elements described in this
chapter are specified subject to: cutting out of the parts to be replaced; the access to the
welded elements, tools and checking devices accessibility, etc.
In case the vehicle body has suffered important deformations it is recommended the
straightening of the damaged body elements, by means of some hydraulic presses, the
operation being performed slowly and at cold.
For this range of vehicles, the elements resistance structure which are affecting the
vehicle security, are not to be partially replaced ( not to be cut), but entirely.
After welding detaching, the body elements must remain straight, without breakage or
cracks, the possible holes being covered out with filling material or by tinning. The body
elements surfaces are to be pickled ( to eliminate possible oxidation marks) , dried and
initially applied a paint layer.
The electric welding detaching of the body elements, is performed as follows:
- with a well sharpen chisel, this method may lead to parts deformation or even
parts breaking.
- by using some extractors equipped with steel cutter type Brendeo or Pickvant
max. 6 mm, having the cutting head as per shape shown in pict.1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Centering point
Sharpen slope
Drill acting edges
Gap for catching the welding material
P = aprox. 0.4 mm
Whatever method is used, the remaining element must be in good order and to allow
performing of a good quality welding point.
The plates cutting it is recommended to be performed ( subject of importance and thickness ) using manual scissors or pneumatic portable tools for plates cutting.
During cutting or welding of the body elements it is necessary to protect the electric
wiring from the interior of the body structure.
The cutting, welding, or strengthening operation done on body welded elements, are to
be performed on body checking/ straightening bench type CELETTE .
IMPORTANT
When removing or straightening the body resistance elements it is forbidden the
total or partial heating, in order to avoid the mechanical resistance and metal elasticity
decreasing.
40 - 5
vnx.su
40
GENERAL
WELDING TYPES AND PARAMETERS
At the reparation of the welded body elements, three welding categories may be used:
protection gas welding (CO2), electric spot welding and filling materials welding
(autogenous).
At the autogenous welding, it is recommended that flame must be slightly inclined so
that arch can be seen and the flame extremity to be maintained at aprox. 5 mm from the
part to be welded.
1. Spot welding resistive parameters for steel plates with carbon content C < 0,15 %.
Plate thickness (mm) Welding current (KA) Welding time (per) Tightening force daNm.)
(
0,5
0,8
1,0
1,25
1,5
2,0
6,5
8,0
9,5
10,5
10,0
12,0
5
8
10
10
14
16
130
200
250
295
310
350
NOTE
1 period = 1/50 part of a second
2. Welding parameters for the welding in protector gas for carbon steel plates or lowalloyed steel.
plates welding
in tiers
end to end
welding
corner
welding
0-1,5mm
0-1,5mm
Horizontal welding position ( pict.1)
Plate thickness (mm)
Electrode diameter (mm)
Welding wire speed (m/min)
Welding current (A)
Welding speed (m/min)
Welding voltage (V)
Protection gas flow (1/min)
Electrode free length (mm)
0,6
0,6 0,8
2,5 1,9
35 35
0,25 0,25
17 17
1,0
1,5
0,8 1,0
0,8 1,0
3,2 2,4
4,4 3,8
55 80
80 120
0,35 0,33
0,33 0,50
18 18
19 19
12 - 17
6 - 12
40 - 6
vnx.su
2,0
0,8 1,0
5,7 4,4
100 130
0,45 0,45
20 20
GENERAL
WELDING TYPES AND PARAMETERS
40
NOTE
In case of using the Ar + CO2 mixture, the welding voltage will decrease with 2 V.
Vertical welding position ( obligatory from top to bottom) pict. 2
Plate thickness
Electrode diameter (mm)
Welding wire speed (m/min)
Welding current (A)
Welding speed (m/min)
Welding voltage (V)
Protection gas flow (1/min)
Electrode free length (mm)
0,6
12
0,6 0,8
0,8 1,0
2,5 1,9
3,3 3,2
35 35
70 100
0,25 0,25
0,38 0,48
17 17
18 18
12 - 17
6 - 12
40 - 7
vnx.su
2,0
0,8 1,0
5,7 4,4
100 130
0,50 0,50
20 20
40
GENERAL
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
During the vehicle exploitation, the carriage body may suffer different distortions, that
lead many times to the wheels setting angles change, body elements breakage, vibrations
or even mechanical parts wear.
In these conditions, before performing the vehicle body reparation, some checking is
necessary:
Visual checking - consisting in the examination of the mechanical elements attachments
and of the distortions occurring in the vehicle damaged areas.
Checking with the bar (control gauge) – consisting in comparing the measurements
done in symmetric points.
The geometry checking of the rolling transmissions – this checking is the only one
enabling to find out if the body damage was not affecting the vehicle road behavior.
IMPORTANT
This checking must be not ignored, except some border-line cases, the checking of
the rolling transmissions leading to the identification of the distortions occurred further
to an accident.
40 - 8
vnx.su
GENERAL
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
40
CENTRAL PART CHECKING
This checking is performed in the purpose to establish if one of the distortions is not
affecting this floor part, from where the checking starts.
Compare the followings lengths : EI = FJ; EJ = FI.
FRONT LONGITUDINAL GIRDERS CHECKING
Compare the followings lengths: CG = DH; CH = DG.
If the lengths (CH - DG) and the diagonals (CG - DH) are not identical, check again
the point (3).
If points (1) and (2) are good, the front axle angles may be checked.
40 - 9
vnx.su
40
GENERAL
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
REAR LONGITUDINAL GIRDERS CHECKING
Compare the following lengths: EK = FL; EL = FK.
REAR ARM CHECKING
Compare the following lengths: FM = EN.
If a difference is noticed when measuring the lengths ( FM – EN ), the rear arms are to
be replaced.
The checking operation of the rear arms is followed by a checking performed with the
gauge fixed on the arm and on the central longitudinal girder.
40 -10
vnx.su
GENERAL
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
FLOOR FRAME CHECKING
G.M.P. SUPPORT ASSEMBLY CHECKING
40 - 11
vnx.su
40
40
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING/ STRAIGHTENING
BENCH CELETTE TYPE
For checking, straightening or repairing the DACIA vehicles bodies, the use of the
CELLETTE bench is recommended.
The checking/straightening bench type CELETTE ( service code CAR500 ) is composedof:
- CAR 501 (1 mobile bench with four wheels, four parts for vehicle anchoring, one
traction arm of 10 t, type “CAIMAN“).
- CAR 502 - set modular cross bars
- CAR 503 - set of 22 towers MZ
- CAR 504 - set accessories for traction
- CAR 505 - set of specific supports for DACIA Bl, Bk
- CAR 506 - set of specific supports for DACIA 1304, 1307
- CAR 507 - set of specific supports for DACIA NOVA.
NOTE
The purchase of the checking / straightening bench - CELETTE type- is to be done
through Automobile Dacia S.A.
1. CAR 501
The mobile bench (1) is provided with four anchoring parts (2) - (fig 1), which can be
used when a carriage body straightening operation is performed.
2
1
(pict.1)
40 - 12
vnx.su
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRAIGHTENING BENCH
CELETTE TYPE
40
To straighten the vehicle body, CELETTE bench is provided with a traction arm of 10
tons, Caiman type, 250-mm stroke of the hydraulic cylinder, with rapid anchorage on any
side of the mobile bench ( pict. 2 ).
one....
two...
2. CROSS BARS MODULAR SET
and tree!
( pict. 2)
( CAR 502)
CELETTE bench has in its composition, five modular cross bars (pict.3), as follows:
- two front cross bars A and B (T shaped) which are always in the same position
(towards front of bench) - pict. 4 .
- two straight cross bars C1 and C2 and one D cross bar (U-shaped) which may be
placed in different positions subject to the vehicle type.
The marked figures (14……36) are engraved on the mobile bench, every mounting
being supplied with a drawing indicating the exact position of the modular crossbars subject
to the vehicle type.
A
A
B
B
C1
D
C2
( pict.3 )
(pict.4)
40 - 13
vnx.su
40
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRAIGHTENING
BENCH CELETTE TYPE
3.TRACTION ACCESSORIES SET ( CAR 504)
CELETTE bench is equipped with a traction accessories set CAR 504, which allows
the operator to achieve different anchoring when a body strengthening is performed (pict.5).
( pict. 5)
4. SET OF MZ TOWERS AND SPECIFIC SUPPORTS ( CAR 503 +CAR 507)
This kit represents a MZ system and consists of two elements:
- kit of 22 MZ towers, universal CAR 503 – ( see pict.6 )
- kit of specific supports CAR 507
Each MZ tower has an arrow, which settles
its orientation on the cross bar and a MZ
reference (pict.7)
Example – MZ 080, where:
MZ- measurement on OZ axle of the
vehicle.
080 – MZ tower height (in mm)
In the same way as for COMPACT
assembly, the arrow (1) marked on the specific
support must be oriented towards the bench
front part, as follows:
( pict. 6 )
- attachment on the right part of the
mobile bench
L
- attachment on the left part of the
mobile bench
NOTE
The MZ towers may be used also for the checking/ straightening of the carriage
bodies of other vehicles types, being then necessary the purchasing of the specific supports
for each type of vehicle.
40 - 14
vnx.su
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRENGTHENING
BENCH CELETTE TYPE
40
Each specific support is identified by
a number ( 2 ) marked at the lower part
and has one or two attachments holes in
the MZ tower ( in this case you should
take into consideration the specific
diagram from the assembly drawing
supplied together with the kit.
Symbols:
1 – wit h or without dism ounted
mechanical elements.
4 – with dismounted mechanical
elements.
( pict.7 )
NOTE :
Identification and mounting of the
towers on different modular cross bars
and of the specific supports in the MZ
towers (1…20), when repairing a Dacia
SupeRNova body, is to be performed as
per mounting drawing ( pict.8 and pict.9)
which is supplied together with this kit.
( pict.8 )
( pict.9 )
40 - 15
vnx.su
40
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRENGTHENING
BENCH CELETTE TYPE
REFERENCE POINTS ON VEHICLE
GMP frame fixing on the lower cross member
The specific supports (1) and (2) are used
in front straightening, front mechanic
elements dism ounted, enabling the
pos itioning of the lower cross member,
consequently the front fixing of the GMP
frame (pict. 10).
NOTE
These holes are for main reference for
the vehicle front part.
2
1
( pict. 10 )
Centering under front longitudinal girder
The specific supports (3) and (4) are used
for positioning, centering, and alignment of
the front longitudinal girders. They are to be
used for all reparation cases because they are
a main reference of vehicle setting on the
bench (pict. 11).
3
( pict. 11)
Upper fixing on front shock absorber( shock absorber column)
Specific supports (5) and (6) are used in
front strengthening, mechanical elements
dismounted, enabling the positioning of the
shock absorbers ends, consequently the front
linings positioning (pict.12).
5
6
( pict. 12 )
40 - 16
vnx.su
4
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRAIGHTENING BENCH
CELETTE TYPE
Their centering in the shock absorbers ends
is performed by means of the centering
washers (1)- (pict.13).
The centering washers are used when
straightening a body and also when replacing
the front wing lining or the body front part.
(pict.13)
GMP frame rear fixing on front longitudinal girder
The specific supports (7) and (8) are used
in the front straightening, enabling the
positioning of the front longitudinalgirder and
consequently the rear fixing of the GMP
frame.
In case of the rear straightening, these are
enabling the front alignment of the vehicle
on the bench. (pict.14).
7
8
( pict. 14 )
Centering under the central floor
The specific supports (9) and (10) have the
purpose of positioning, centering and
alignment of the front longitudinal
girders.These are to be used in all cases
because they are a setting reference of the
vehicle on the bench. (pict. 15).
9
10
( fig. 15)
( pict. 15 )
40 - 17
vnx.su
40
40
GENERAL
CARRIAGE BODY CHECKING / STRAIGHTENING
BENCH CELETTE TYPE
Rear axle arm fixing
13 14
The specific supports (11), (12 ), (13), (14),
(15) and (16) are enabling the positioning,
centering and rear alignment of the vehicle
on the bench in case of a straightening.
These are to be used in all cases, being a
main reference for vehicle setting on the
bench.
11 12
15 16
( pict. 16 )
Centering under rear longitudinal girder
The specific supports (17) and (18) are
enabling the positioning, centering, and
alignment of the rear longitudinal girders
(pict.17).
17 18
( fig. 17)
( pict. 17 )
Rear plate fixing
The specific supports (19) and (20) used in
the rear straiteghning,for rear plate positioning
is used in the same time for the vehicle
alignment in the front straiteghning when the
vehicle front part is replaced (pict. 18).
( fig. 18 )
19 20
( pict. 18 )
40 - 18
vnx.su
LOWER STRUCTURE
41
FRONT LONGITUDINALGIRDER ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT
This operation shallbe performed only on the repairbench.For the specific supports mounting on the bench, please see the 40 sub-chapter.
DISMOUNTING
In order to reduce the distortion risk of
the front longitudinalgirder, for the welding
4
points detachingit is recommended the use
6
2
of steelcutter.
Dismount the damaged elements, which
are in contactwith the front longitudinal girder.
Proceed to a straightening on the body
1
checking/straightening Celette type, until
5
bringing it, as closedas possible to the initial
3
shape.
Detachthe weldingpoints of the front longitudinalgirder which are in connection with :
- the front cross bar in the area (1);
- the front wing lining in the area (2);
- the central floor in the area (3);
- the central cross bar in the area (4);
- the upper longitudinalgirderclosingplate in the area (5).
Detachthe welding points of the cross bar with the floor closingplate and the central floor in
the area (6).
Remove the damaged element.
Straighten the areasresultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Perform an electric welding (by spotsand under gas protection)as follows:
- in the area (1) connecting the front longitudinal girder with the front cross bar;
- in thearea (2) connecting the front longitudinal girder with the front winglining;
- in the area (3) connecting the front longitudinalgirderwith the central floor;
- in the area (4) connecting the front longitudinal girder with the front cross bar;
- in the area (5) connecting the front longitudinal girderwith the upper girder closingplate;
- in the area (6) connectingthe front longitudinal girder with the cowl panel.
Protect the new element with a corrosion preventing and noise absorbent product.
41- 1
vnx.su
41
LOWER STRUCTURE
REAR LONGITUDINAL GIRDER
REPLACEMENT
This operationshallbe performedonly on the repair bench. For the specificsupports mounting
on the bench, please see the 40 chapter.
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe damaged elements,which are
in contactwith the rear longitudinal girder.
Proceed to a straightening on the body
checking/straightening Celettetype, until bringing
the vehicle as closed as possible to the initial
shape.
6
2
3
5
4
7
1
Detachthe weldingpoints of the rearlongitudinalgirder (1) which are in contact with:
- the central floor in the area (1);
- the rear floor in the area (2);
- the rear end floor in the area (3);
- the rear side cross bar in the area (4);
- the tank front cross bar in the area (5);
- the tank rear cross bar in the area (6);
- the inner wheel passage in the area (7);
Straighten the areasresultedafter dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedafterdismounting.
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element
Weld the rear longitudinalgirder followingthe assemblingoutlines1,2,3,4,5,6 and 7 (spots
and under gas protectionwelding)
Protect the new element with a corrosion preventing and noise absorbent product.
41 - 2
vnx.su
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
FRONT WING
42
DISMOUNTING
Dismountpartiallythe front bumper.
Dismount the side-signaling lamp from the
front wing.
Dismount the attachment screws (1) of
wheelpassage protection.
Dismount the attachmentscrews (2), (3),
(4) and (5) of the wing on the vehiclebody.
Dismountthe front wing.
FRONT WING PREPARATION
Apply by means of a brush a layer of thermo- weldableproduct cls. 33 b, cs 4603 – 202 on
the contactareas of front wing with:
- the contactarea with the front wing lining;
- the contactarea with the side frame lining on the wing upper edge;
- the contactarea with the wing fixing supportson the front pillar;
- the contactarea of the wing rear lower part with the side frame lining;
- the contactarea with the front part wing fixingsupport.
Apply also a sealant materi al layer type 223 in the contact area of the front wing with: the
front winglining, the side framelining and the front pillar.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
42 - 1
vnx.su
42
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
CARRIAGE BODY FRONT PART
REPLACEMENT
This operation shallbe performed only on the repairbench.For the specific supports mounting on the bench, please see the 40 chapter
DISMOUNTING
4
Dismount the damaged elements,which are
in contactwith the front part body.
2
Perform a straightening on the body checking/
repairing bench,until bringing the carriage body
almostat the initialshape.
Detachthe welding points from to front part
of carriage body (1) as follows :
- in (2)joining areaof the front longitudinal
1
7
girderswith the central floor;
- in (3) joining area of the front cross bar
with the central floor;
- in (4) joining area of the central cross barwith the floor closingplate;
- in (5) joining areaof the front wing linings with the cowl panel;
- in (6) joining area of the cross bar with floor closingplate;
- in (7) joining area of the front wing linings with the front pillar linings.
Straighten the areasresultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
3
6
3
REMOUNTING
Position and center the new elementon the repairing bench.
Check the correct positioningof the front part carriage body.
Weld the front part carriage body, followingthe assembling outlines 2,3,4,5,6 and 7 (spots
weldingunder gas protection).
Protect the weldingwith a corrosion-preventingproduct.
Apply noise absorbent producton the whole surface: front wingslinings,front pillar linings,
cowl panel and the central floor.
By means of a spraying gun, apply on the whole surfacecorrosionprotecting products through
the front cross bar and front longitudinalgirder holes.
Perform the sealingof the front PART carriage body.
Mount the front wings,the front grill, and the front bonnet.
42 - 2
vnx.su
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
FRONT WING LINING
42
REPLACEMENT
This operation shallbe performed only on the repairbench.For the specific supports mounting on the bench, please see the 40 sub-chapter.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the damaged elements, which
are in contact with the front wing lining.
Detachthewelding points from to the front
wing lining(1) which are in contactwith :
- the upper longitudinal girder in (2) area;
- the front cross bar in the area (3);
- the front grill in the area (4);
- the closing plate inthe area; (5) ;
- the floor in the area (6);
- the cowl panel in the area (7);
the climate control box in the area (8).
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correctpositioningof the front
wing lining.
Weldthefront wing lining (1)followingthe
assembling outlines 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Protect the new element with a corrosion
preventing and noise absorbent product.
42 - 3
vnx.su
1
42
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
RADIATOR UPPER CROSS BAR
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elements,which are in contact
with the radiator upper cross bar.
Detach the welding points of the radiator
upper cross bar (1) whichare in connectionwith:
- the front wing lining in the area (3);
- the headlampsupport in the area (4);
- the side wall in the area (5);
Straightenthe areas resultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
1
5
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioningof the radiator
upper cross bar.
Weldtheradiator upper cross bar(1) following
the weldingoutlines (3), (4) and (5).
Protect the weldswith a corrosion-preventing
product.
Mount theelements,which are in connection
with the radiator upper cross bar.
42 - 04
vnx.su
4
3
42
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
HEADLAMPSUPPORT
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elements,which are in contact
with the headlampsupport.
Detach the welding points of the headlamp
support (2) which are in connectionwith :
- the front wing lining in the area (6);
- the radiator upper cross bar in the area(7);
- the front cross bar in the area (8).
Straightenthe areas resultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
7
8
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioningof the headlampsupport.
Weld the headlampsupport (2) followingthe weldingoutlines(6), (7) and (8).
Protect the weldingwith a corrosion-preventingproduct.
Mount the elements,which are in connectionwith the headlampsupport.
42 - 05
vnx.su
6
42
UPPER FRONT STRUCTURE
AERATIONGRILL
DISMOUNTING
Take out the clips (1) from the front grill
grippers taking care to preventtheirdistortion
or damaging.
1
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
42 - 06
vnx.su
SIDE UPPER STRUCTURE
FRONT PILLAR LINING
43
FRONT PILLAR LINING
1. Front pillar
2. Front pillarlining
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elementsthat are in contact
with the front pillar lining.
Detachthe welding points of the front pillar
lining (2) which are in connection with :
- side frame lining in the area (8);
- windscreenlowercrossbarinthe area(5);
- front wing liningin the area(6);
- climate control box in the area (7) .
Straightenthe areasresultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Position and center the new element .
Check the correct positioningof the front pillar lining.
Weld the front pillar lining(2) followingthe assembling outlines(5), (6), (7) and (8).
Protect the new element with a corrosion preventing and noise absorbent product.
43 - 1
vnx.su
43
UPPER SIDE STRUCTURE
FRONT PILLAR
DISMOUNTING
Dismount theelements thatare in contact with
the frontpillar.
Detachthe welding points of the front pillar
(1) which are in connectionwith :
- side frame lining in the area (3) ;
- roof in the area (4).
Straightenthe areas resultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correctpositioning of the front pillar.
Weld the front pillar (1) following the
assembling outlines(3) and (4) .
Protect the new element with a corrosion
preventing and noise absorbent product.
43 - 2
vnx.su
UPPER SIDE STRUCTURE
MIDDLE PILLAR
43
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe damaged elements, which are
in contactwith the middlepillar.
Detachthe welding points of the middle
pillar (1) which are in connectionwith :
- side frame lining in the area (4);
- front lower panel in the area (3);
- roof belt in the area (2).
Straighten the areas resultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Fit temporary the middle pillar (1) .
Check the correctpillar positioningusing the door as geometric gauge.
Weld the middle pillarfollowingthe weldingoutlines (2), (3) and (4).
Perform a straighteninggas protectionweldingin the areas (2).
Protect the welding with a corrosion-protectionproduct.
Mount in the reverseorder the elements,which are in connectionwith the middle pillar.
43 - 3
vnx.su
REAR UPPER STRUCTURE
SIDE PANEL
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elements,which are in contact with the side panel.
Detachthewelding points of theside panel
(1) which are in connection with :
- side frame lining in the area (2);
- roof in the area (3);
- rear panel in the area (4);
- rear end cross bar in the area (5).
Straightenthe areasresultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Apply a layer of 5322 sizematerial on the
joint areasof theside panel withtheside frame
lining and the rearpanel.
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioning of the side
panel.
Weld the side panel (1) following the
weldingoutlines 2, 3, 4, and 5.
Protect the welding with a corrosionpreventive product.
Mount in the reverse order the elements
in connection with the side panel.
4
5
44 - 1
vnx.su
44
44
REAR UPPER STRUCTURE
INNER REAR WHEEL PASSAGE
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elements,which are in contact
with the inner rear wheelpassage.
Detach the welding points of the two rear
safety belt supports.
Detach the welding points of the rear wheel
passage (1) which are in connection with:
- side frame lining in the area (2);
- side panel in the area (3);
- rear longitudinal girder in the area (4).
Straightenthe areas resultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
1
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioning of the rear
wheelpassage.
Weld the rear wheel passage (1) following
the assembling outlines2,3 and 4.
Weld the rearsafety beltssupportson the rear
wheelpassage.
Protect the welding with a corrosionpreventing product.
Apply a layer of sealant ma terial
PLASTISOL 4, in the contact area (5) of the
rear wheelpassage withthe rear floor.
2
44 - 2
vnx.su
5
3
4
REAR UPPER STRUCTURE
REAR PANEL
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe elementsthat are in contact
with the rear panel.
Detachthe welding points of the rearpanel
(1) which are in connectionwith:
- side panel edgein the area (2);
- side panel ( rear lamps area) in the
area (3);
- side panel in the area (4);
- rear end cross bar in the area (5).
Straighten the areas resulted from
dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedfrom dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioning of the rear
panel.
Weld the rear panel (1) following the
weldingoutlines(2), (3) and (4)…;
Protect the welding with a corrosion
preventive product.
Mount in the reverse order the elements
that are in connectionwith the rear panel.
2
5
44 - 3
vnx.su
4
3
44
45
TOP OF BODY
ROOF
1. Roof
2 Roof belt
3. Windscreen frame
5
6
4
DISMOUNTING
1
Dismount the elements, which are in
contact with the roof (front/rear doors,
windscreen, rear glass, roof sealing of the
ceilingand windowsgaskets).
3
Detachthe welding points of roof (1) which are in connectionwith :
- roof belt in the area (4);
- side frame lining in the area (5);
- windscreen lower cross bar in the area (6);
- front pillar in the area(7).
Straighten the areasresultedby dismounting.
Grind the areas resultedby dismounting.
REMOUNTING
Positionand center the new element.
Check the correct positioningof the roof.
Weld the roof (1) followingthe weldingoutlines (4), (5), (6) and (7).
Mount in the reverse order the elements,which are in connectionwith the roof.
45 - 01
vnx.su
2
LATERAL OPENINGS
FRONT / REAR DOOR
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the elements, which are in
connectionwith the front/rear door.
Dismountthe attachmentscrew (1) of the
limitingmechanismof the front/reardoor.
Dismount the upper hinge (2) and lower
hinge axles(3) .
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
47 - 1
vnx.su
47
NON SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS
FRONT BONNET
DISMOUNTING
Dismount :
- the aerationgrill;
- thewindscreenwasherjets and hoses;
- the front bonnet locker (1);
- the safety hook (2);
- the attachment screws (3) of the
hinges;
- front bonet.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
48 - 1
vnx.su
48
48
NON SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS
HATCHBACK
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the elements that are in
connectionwith the hatchback.
Dismountthe hatchbackattachmentballshaped joints(1) and the attachment screws
of the hinges.
Dismountthe hatchback.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
48 - 2
vnx.su
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
LOCK AND FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
51
MECHANISM WITH ELECTRIC CONTROL FOR
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE OPENING
DISMOUNTING
For the dismountingof the front door assembledplate with electric control, dismount:
- the window liftingcrank, inneropening mechanism,by detaching from it, the controlrod
(8) of the front door opening, the rod which is fixed with the other end on the plate;
- the locking button(2) and the guiding case(3);
- the attachmentscrew (9) of the locking handle;
- the door panel.
Disconnect the actuator connector.(7)
Dismount the attachment screws (5) of the box (6) from the caisson of the door.
Remove theelectric controlassembledplate assemblythrough the technologicalopening from
the caisson of the door.
Dismount the attachmentscrews of the outsideopening mechanismon the external panel of
the door.
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismounting operations, taking into account thefollowing recommendation:
- for the lock control mounting, the lock rod (4) will be placed in the position where the
lock is blocked;
- forthe front door plate mounting, theconnecting fork(1) of the outside opening mechanism
willbe fixed on the existingball joint on the lock;
mount the button (2) by self-threading on the rod (4).
51 - 1
vnx.su
51
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
LOCK AND FRONT DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
FRONT DOOR LOCK AND OUTSIDE OPENING MECHANISM
DISMOUNTING
For the front door lock dismountingand the outsideopening mechanism,beforehand dismount:
- the window lifting crank;
- the arm rest;
- the insideopening mechanism (1);
- the door panel inner ornament;
- the door panel upper ornament, the locking button (5) and the guiding case (4);
- the door panel.
After theseoperations dismount:
- the lock attachment fork (6) and the lock (11) from the door;
- the front door lock attachment screws (9) on the door caisson;
- the door opening control rod(2) from the lock.
Remove the lockassembly through the technologicalopening from the door caisson.
Dismount the attachmentscrews (8) of the outsideopening mechanism (7) on the front door
outsidepanel.
11
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting operations,taking into account the following
mounting instructions:
- for the lock control mounting, the lock rod (3) will be placed in the position where the
lock is blocked;
- introduce the locking rod thought the caisson hole, in the panel guide, then fix it on the
lock by the attachmentelement;
- mount the button (5) by self-threading on the rod (3);
for the front door lock mounting, the connectingfork (6) of the outsideopeningmechanismwill
be fixed on the existingball joint on the lock.
51 - 2
vnx.su
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
LOCK AND REAR DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
51
MECHANISM WITH ELECTRIC CONTROL FOR
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE OPENING
DISMOUNTING
For the dismounting of the rear door plate with electric control and of the outside opening
mechanism, beforehand dismount:
- the window liftingcrank, inner opening mechanism;
- the locking button(8) and the guiding case(7);
- the attachment screw (9) of the locking handle (6);
- the door panel.
Disconnect the actuator connector (3).
Dismountthe attachmentscrews (1) of the box (2) on the caissonof the door, and thendetach
an end of the locking rod(4) from the existingball joint on the plate, and the other end from the
direction change device (5).
Dismountthe directionchange device (5) by dismountingthe assemblyattachment nut on the
caisson of the door.
Dismount the attachmentscrews of the outsideopening mechanismon the external panel of
the door.
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismountingoperations,taking into account the followingrecommendation:
- for the direction change device mounting (5), the lock rod willbe placed in the position
where the plate is blocked;
- the locking button(8) willbe mount by self-threading on the locking rod ;
tighten the screws (1) at the momentof 0,.4 da Nm.
51 - 3
vnx.su
51
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
LOCK AND REAR DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
REAR DOOR LOCK AND OUTSIDE
OPENING MECHANISM
DISMOUNTING
For the rear door lock dismounting and the outside opening mechanism, beforehand dismount: the ash tray box by detachingfrom clips, the window regulator crank, the arm rest, the
inner opening mechanism(5), the door panel lower and upper ornament, the lockingbutton(1),
the guiding case (2), the door panel.
Then dismount:
- the rear door lock attachmentscrews (2) on the door caisson,and then detach an end of
the locking control rod (6)from the existing ball-joint on the lock, and the other end from the
directionchange device;
- the directionchange device (4), by releasingthe nut and the attachment washerassembly
on the door’s caisson;
- the rear door opening rod (3) on the lock (8);
- the attachment screws (9) of the outside opening mechanism (10) on the rear door
outsidepanel.
8
10
7
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
REMOUNTING
Perform in reverse order the dismountingoperations,taking intoaccount the followingrecommendations:
- for the direction change device mounting(4), the lock rod willbe placed in the position
where the lock is blocked;
- move the assembly so that free arm will be introduced on the control rod (5), and then
the control rod willbe introduced through the caisson hole in the door panel guide;
mount the button(1) by self-threading on the rod.
51 - 4
vnx.su
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
WINDOW AND FRONT DOOR WINDOW
REGULATOR(WITH CABLE)
51
DISMOUNTING
For the dismounting of the window and the regulator window assembly, perform the following operations:
Remove the outsidewiper of the windowfrom its attachmentclips,using a common screwdriver.
Dismount the attachmentscrew (2) of the regulatorat the upper side and the attachmentnut
(3) at the lower side.
Lift the windowin the positionP= 85 mm.
Dismountthe attachmentscrews of the windowbase on the regulatorslide,then remove the
window(together with the windowbase).
Dismount the attachmentscrews (4) of the activationmechanism(1) and then the regulator.
REMOUNTING
Fix the window outside wiper by means of
the five attachmentclips.
Introduce the regulator in the caissonthrough
the technologicalopening (A) and fix it on the
caissonin theactivationmechanism area (1),by
nuts (4).
Fix the regulator guiding system on the upper side by screw (2) and by nut (3) on the lower
side.
Introduce the window where beforehand was
mountedthe windowbase and fix it on the slide
by two screws (5).
Check the regulator operation by rollingup
and down the window.
Mount the door panel by clipping.
Mount the regulator’scrank and the window
insidewiper.
51 - 5
vnx.su
3
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
51
WINDOW AND REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
(WITH CABLE)
DISMOUNTING
Forthe dismounting of the window and the regulator windowassembly, performthe followingoperations:
Remove theoutsidewiper of thewindow fromits attachment clips,using a common screwdriver.
Dismount the attachmentscrew (1) of the regulator at the upper side and the attachmentnut
(3) at the lower side.
Dismount the attachment screws (2) of the window base on the regulator slide and then
remove the window(together with the windowbase).
Dismountthe nuts (4) from the activationmechanismbolts(5) and then the regulator.
Dismountthe windowguiding (7) and the fix window(9).
10
9
8
7
6
5
1
2
4
3
REMOUNTING
For the remounting, perform the followingoperations:
Place on the window guide (7) the fixwindow (9)wherebeforehand wasmountedthe window gasket.
Fix the guide without tighteningat the lower side on the caisson by means of the screw (6),
and on the upper part, on the back door frame, by means of the screw (8) and the fast nut (10).
Fix the windowoutsidewiper in the attachmentclips.
Introduce the regulator in the caissonthrough the technological opening (A).
Fix the regulator by nuts (4) in the activationmechanismarea.
Mount the regulatorattachment screw(1) on the upperside andthe attachment nut (3)on the lowerside.
Introduce the windowin the caisson(where beforehand wasmounted the windowbase) and
fix it on the slide by screws (2).
Check the regulator operation by rolling up and down the window.
Mount the door panel by clipping, the regulator’scrank and the windowinsidewiper.
51 - 6
vnx.su
NON SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
THE COMPOSITION OF THE FRONT HOOD
LOCKING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Front hood lockingsystem
Screw M8-25
Front hood opening control
Sleeve stopper
Cable attachmentelement
Spring
Screw M6-20
Lock assembly
52 - 1
vnx.su
52
52
NON SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
FRONT HOOD LOCKING SYSTEM
DISMOUNTING
Dismount: the front hood opening control cable (3), the attachmentscrews (2) and the front
hood locking system(1).
1
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismountingoperations by tighteningthe screws (4) at the
moment of C=16Nm.
52 - 2
vnx.su
NON SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
HATCHBACKLOCKING SYSTEM
52
HATCHBACK LOCKING SYSTEM (old model)
DISMOUNTING
Loosen the screw for rod lengthadjustment (5) of the hatchback opening and detach the rod;
Remove the fork (2) and the gasket(4) releasingthe hatchbackopeningcontrol assembly (3)
Dismount the screws (1) and the specialaxle (6), releasingthe guiding case (7).
7
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismountingoperations,the opening rod length adjustment
being performed with the hatchback opened and the lock blocked, in order that after three
consecutivedrives,the rod mechanism control shallremainpermanently tensioned.
52 - 3
vnx.su
52
NON SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
HATCHBACKLOCKING SYSTEM
HATCHBACK LOCKING SYSTEM (after June 1st 2001)
DISMOUNTING
3
Dismount the hatchbackopening control
assembly (2) by removing the fork (1) and
the gasket (2).
Dismountthe specialscrew (6) and release
the assembledlock(5), whilebeforehandthe
rod (5) was released.
4
1
2
5
6
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
HATCHBACK BALANCING DEVICE
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the ball joint (2) of the balancing device fixing(3) on the hatchback(1).
Dismount thebalancing device attachment
on the hatchback frame (6), by removing the
locker (5) and the washer (4).
Releasethe balancingdevice.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
52 - 4
vnx.su
NON SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS MECHANISMS
HATCHBACK BALANCING DEVICE
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the ball joint (2) of the balancing device fixing(3) on the hatchback(1).
Dismount thebalancing device attachment
on the hatchback frame (6), by removing the
locker (5) and the washer (4).
Releasethe balancingdevice.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
52 - 5
vnx.su
52
WINDOWS
WINDSCREEN AND HATCHBACK GLASS
54
WINDSCREEN AND HATCHBACK GLASS REPLACEMENT
The replacement of these glasses is performed in case they are broken, when they are not
according to the required overall dimensionsor when they have manufacturing defects(image
distortions, cracks, etc).
DISMOUNTING OF A BROKEN
GLASS
If the glass or part of it did not fall, the
dismounting and the cleaning of the window
gaskets by the pieces of the broken glass
willbe easierto be made by stickinga sheet
of paper on each surface.
PREPARING FOR MOUNTING
Position the gasket (2)around the glass(1)
and place the assemblyon a protection plate.
Placein thegasketchannelall around the
gasket frame; a cotton cord ( 4 ) of 3 – 4
mm diameter, leaving at its free ends(3)
about20 cm of cord, and betweenthe ends,
the distance shall not be more than 10 cm.
MOUNTING OF THE WINDSCREEN
Mount on the carriage body, the windscreen – cord - glass gasket assembly, so that the cord
ends are placed towards the inside of carriage body.
From the insideof the vehicle, successively draw each end of the cord, the drawing direction
being parallelwith the glasssurface, towards the surface inner part, perpendicularon the frame,
beginning with the lower part,in this way the gasketedgeis lifted and then lowered on the frame.
At the outside,the gasketis seatedby slightlyand successivelypressingit on glass,so that the
tightening is uniform on the whole windscreen contour and frame.
54 - 1
vnx.su
54
WINDOWS
WINDSCREEN AND HATCHBACK GLASS
The cord must be always removed through the upper part of the windscreen.
Each time a windscreen is mounted, ensure the uniform settingof the whole assemblyon the
carriage body by tapping several times with a rubber hammer,on the edge of the glassframe.
NOTE
Do not tap the glass on corners and on the two vertical sides.
After the windscreen mounting check out carefullythe uniformity of the whole assemblyand
then its water-proofing by splashingwith a jet of water.
54 - 2
vnx.su
WINDOWS
HATCHBACKGLASS REPLACEMENT
Dismountthe luggage compartment table.
Disconnect the mass connection and the
hatchbackdefrosting supplyconnection.
Remove the glass together with the gasket,
by pushing it from the inside of the vehicle.
Clean the gasket and place the glass in its
new gasket.
The mounting of the hatchbackglass– gasket
assembly, is performed in the same way with
the windscreen mounting.
54 - 3
vnx.su
54
EXTERNAL PROTECTIONS
55
FRONT BUMPER
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the fog projectors.
Dismount:
-the attachment nut (1) of the front bumper (2) on the carriage body
-the attachment screws (3) and the cage nuts (5) of the bumper on the front cross bar.
-the lateral supports (4) are fixed by nuts on the iron coremounted in the front bumper.
1
5
4
1
2
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
55 - 1
vnx.su
3
55
EXTERNAL PROTECTIONS
REAR BUMPER
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe rear fog spotlights, from the rearwiring.
Dismount:
- the nuts (1) and the attachment screws (3) of the rear bumper (4) on the carriage body,
by means of lateral supports (2), respectivelyby the bumper ends on the rear wheels passage.
-the attachment nuts (7) of the counterblade (6) on the carriage body.
Detach the rear bumper (5).
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
55 - 2
vnx.su
EXTERNAL PROTECTIONS
55
REAR BUMPER
FRONT/REAR BUMPER PAINTING/REPAINTING PROCEDURE
The necessary materials for the repainting operation are the following:
-Abrasive paper gr
-Extraction petrol S27
-Gauze
-Primer P572-2
12
-Fuller P565-777
-Catalytic agentP850-1492
-Thinner
-Same color enamel
220; 4001sheet/4 bumpers;
-For opaque
0,05 kg./bumper;
-opaque enamel S 5505
0,05 mp./bumper;
- catalytic agent S 3538
10-15 gr./bumper;
-thinner S 4300
80 gr./ bumper ;
-For metallic paint
40 gr./bumper;
-metal enamel S 5901
15 gr./bumper;
-thinner S 5900
-catalytic agent S 493242
-lacquer thinner 362077
- Lacrit lacquer 228050
180gr./bumper
45gr./ bumper
35 gr./bumper
175 gr./bumper
35 gr./bumper
65 gr./bumper
35 gr./bumper
30 gr./bumper
WORKING PROCEDURE
Smooth the margins of the exfoliated area (dry abrasivepaper 220 grams;400) and slightly
depolishthe whole bumper.
Ungreasewith extraction petrol.
Usinga gun, sprayon exfoliatedareas,Primer (liabilityground)
Apply by spraying on the exfoliatedareas,fuller till equalization, thenspray on a thinlayer on
the whole bumper.
In case after 20 minutes of fuller layer exposing in the air, the appliedFuller film does not
presentspainting defects,spray using a gun two layers, wet +wet enamelin the vehiclecolor.
If the film presents painting defects, remove them by grinding and depolish the rest of the
surface. The operation will be performed after 6 hours of air drying, and after 20-30 minutes
when there is the possibilityof drying at 60gr. C.
NOTE
For this operation, the dismounting of the bumper is not necessary with the condition
that the areas, which might be exposed to the used materials, should be protected.
55 - 3
vnx.su
EXTERNAL ACCESSORIES
56
OUTSIDE ACCESSORIES
EXTERNAL REAR VIEW MIRROR
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the attachmentscrew (3) for the interior ornament(4) and releasethe ornament;
Dismount the cross piece (2) attachment screws (5) and the ornament (6), releasing so, the
outsiderear view mirror (7).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
AILERON
DISMOUNTING
Open the hatchback and disconnectthe lamp
supply connectors (2).
Dismount the attachment screws (3) of the
aileron (1) on the hatchback.
Releasethe aileron.
3
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
56 - 1
vnx.su
2
1
56
EXTERNAL ACCESSORIES
AILERON
DISMOUNTING
Open the hatchback and disconnectthe lamp
supply connectors (2).
Dismount the attachment screws (3) of the
aileron (1) on the hatchback.
Releasethe aileron.
REMOUNTING
3
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
56 - 2
vnx.su
2
1
REPAIR MANUAL
DACIA
RM 524-3 SEALING, ELECTRICITY
ENGINE: E7J
GEARBOX: JH3
TAPV: B41A, B41B, B41D
The reparation methods prescribed by the manufacturer in the present document are established subject to
technical specifications in force at the document issuing date.
These are subject to modifications brought by the manufacturer at the fabrication of different assemblies,
subassemblies or accessories of its vehicles.
All rights reserved to SC Automobile Dacia SA.
Reproduction or translating even partially of this present document is forbidden without the written
authorisation of AUTOMOBILE DACIA S.A.
Ref: 6001999442
APRIL 2004
vnx.su
English version
5
Carpets......................................................... 71-11
Cowl panel noise absorbent......................... 71-12
Mechanisms and accesoires
57 LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
Dashboard..................................................... 57-1
Dashboard upper part................................... 57-3
Central console............................................. 56-4
Documents compartment.............................. 57-5
Steering wheel axle half-cases...................... 57-6
Inside rear view mirror.................................. 57-7
Sun visors...................................................... 57-8
Turning handles............................................ 57-9
Handbrake case............................................. 57-10
59 SAFETY ELEMENTS
Front safety belts........................................... 59-1
Rear safety belts............................................ 59-2
6
Climatisation
61 HEATING
Climate control assembly..............................
Housing manifold..........................................
Heating radiator.............................................
Climate control blower..................................
Diagnosis.......................................................
61-1
61-2
61-3
61-4
61-5
62 AIR CONDITIONING
Generalities.................................................. 62-1
AC unit operating diagram........................... 62-4
Evaporator................................ .................... 62-5
Compressor................................................... 62-7
Condenser..................................................... 62-8
Pressure controller........................................ 62-9
Dryer filter tank............................................ 62-10
Unit piping.................................................... 62-11
Climate control unit...................................... 62-12
Diagnosis....................................................... 62-13
65 SEALING OPENING ELEMENTS
Carriage body sealing................................... 65-1
66 SEALING WINDOWS AND SCREENS
Glasses sealing............................................. 66-1
Inside wipers............................................... 66-2
Outside wipers.............................................. 66-3
7
72 SIDE OPENING ELEMENTS TRIM
Front door panel........................................... 72-1
Rear door panel............................................ 72-2
74 BACK SEAT TABLES AND PARCEL SHELVES
Upper back panel replacement...................... 74-1
75 FRONT SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
Front seats.................................................... 75-1
Front seat slides guides................................ 75-2
Front seat armature...................................... 75-3
76 REAR SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
Rear bench...................................................
Bench seats..................................................
76-1
76-2
77 FRONT SEAT TRIM
Seats upholstery dismounting......................
Back rest upholstery dismounting................
77-1
77-2
78 REAR SEAT TRIM
Seats upholstery dismounting......................
Back rest upholstery dismounting................
78-1
78-2
8
Electric equipment
80 BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
Battery.........................................................
Headlamp assembly.....................................
Fog lamps....................................................
Bulbs replacement.......................................
Headlamps adjustment.................................
80-1
80-4
80-5
80-6
80-7
81 REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
Bulbs replacement........................................
Bulbs............................................................
Diagnostic....................................................
Cockpit fuse box..........................................
81-1
81-2
81-3
81-6
Garnishing and tack room
71 INTERNAL BODY TRIM
Carriage body coverings.............................. 71-1
Front door threshold covering...................... 71-2
Upper front pillar covering........................... 71-3
Rear door threshold covering....................... 71-4
Middle pillar covering.................................. 71-5
Rear passage covering.................................. 71-6
Rear wheel passage covering........................ 71-7
Middle pillar lower covering........................ 71-8
Rear side panel covering............................... 71-9
Roof gasket.................................................... 71-10
82A HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Generalities.................................................. 82A-1
Key head replacement.................................. 82A-6
E.C.U. decoder replacement........................ 82A-7
Antistarting bushing replacement................ 82A-8
RF remote control for blocking/unlocking
the doors...................................................... 82A-9
Electric control unit injection replacement... 82A-10
Procedures.................................................... 82A-11
Diagnostic..................................................... 82A-17
vnx.su
82B HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Generalities.................................................. 82B-41
System functionning..................................... 82B-42
The pin code................................................. 82B-43
The system’s memory....................................82B-44
Functional checking of the system................82B-45
Table 1.......................................................... 82B-47
Table 2...........................................................82B-49
Dismounting - remounting of the
antiintrusion UCE......................................... 82B-51
Sirene dismounting - remounting.................. 82B-52
Dismounting - remounting of the
hood contact .................................................82B-53
Volume sensor
dismounting - remounting............................. 82B-54
83 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument panel (until 01.06.2001).............. 83-1
Connectors (until 01.06.2001)....................... 83-2
Instrument panel (after 01.06.2001).............. 83-3
Connectors (until 01.06.2001)....................... 83-4
Instrument panel replacement........................ 83-5
Dismounting/remounting speedometer
cable (flexible shaft)...................................... 82-7
Diagnostic...................................................... 83-9
Fuel level transmitter..................................... 83-10
84 CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
Anti theft mechanism....................................
Under wheel control module.........................
Fog lamps switch..........................................
Rear windows defrosting switch
(impulsional type).. ......................................
Hazard switch...............................................
Doors closing switch.....................................
AC starting buton..........................................
84-1
84-3
84-5
84-6
84-7
84-8
84-9
85 WINDSCREEN WIPERS
Windscreen wiper mechanism....................... 85-1
Diagnostic...................................................... 85-5
.
86 RADIO
General.......................................................... 86-1
Connectors..................................................... 86-4
87 ELECTRICAL ASSISANCE EQUIPEMENT
Windscreen washing....................................... 87-1
Location of electric coupling on
the vehicle................................................... 89A-16
Cockpit fuse box......................................... 89A-18
Fuse box from engine compartment............ 89A-22
Wires functions index in connectors and
couplings...................................................... 89A-24
Connectors and connections wires function.. 89A-27
Wires functions explanation......................... 89A-102
89B ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Functional diagrams list................................ 89B-1
Electric components index............................ 89B-3
Couplings list. Mass index............................ 89B-4
Location of electric coupling on the vehicle
Mass attachments on the vehicle................... 89B-5
Location of electric coupling on
the vehicle......................................................89B-6
Cockpit fuse box............................................89B-8
Fuse box from engine compartment..............89B-12
Wires functions index in connectors and
couplings....................................................... 89B-14
Connectors and connections wires function...89B-17
Wires functions explanation..........................89B-90
89C ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Functional diagrams list................................ 89C-1
Electric components index............................ 89C-3
Couplings list. Mass index............................ 89C-4
Location of electric coupling on the vehicle
Mass attachments on the vehicle................... 89C-5
Location of electric coupling on
the vehicle......................................................89C-6
Cockpit fuse box............................................89C-8
Fuse box from engine compartment..............89C-12
Wires functions index in connectors and
couplings...................................................... 89C-14
Connectors and connections wires function...89C-17
Wires functions explanation..........................89C-90
89D ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Generalites................................................... 89D-1
Functional diagrams list............................... 89D-6
Electric components index........................... 89D-8
Couplings list. Mass index........................... 89D-9
Location of electric coupling on the vehicle
Mass attachments on the vehicle.................. 89D-10
Location of electric coupling on
the vehicle.................................................... 89D-11
Cockpit fuse box........................................... 89D-13
Fuse box from engine compartment............. 89D-17
Wires functions index in connectors and
couplings...................................................... 89D-19
Connectors and connections wires function.. 89D-22
Wires functions explanation..........................89D-91
89A ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Generalites.................................................... 89A-1
Functional diagrams list................................89A-10
Electric components index............................ 89A-12
Couplings list. Mass index............................89A-14
Location of electric coupling on the vehicle
Mass attachments on the vehicle...................89A-15
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
DASHBOARD
57
DASHBOARD
The dismounting of the dashboard assembly is performed without the dismounting of the
windscreen, the assembly being composedof :
- the upper part (A)where there are: the aeration grillsof the windscreen (1); the aeration
grills of the lateral windows(2) ; the instrument panel; the lateral aerators and central aerator;
controland checking instruments;
- lower casing (B) containing :fuse box, front hood opening control(3), starter control
(choke) (4), the adjustmenthandle of the steering wheel(5);
- central console (D) where there aremounted: the controls:climatesystemcontrol(6), the
ash tray, the cigarette lighter,radio equipmentand speed changer lever protector (7);
- the documentscompartment (C).
57 - 1
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
57
DASHBOARD
DISMOUNTING
For the dismounting of the dashboard assembly, perform the followingoperations:
Disconnect the battery.
Dismount:
1. - the steering wheel and the steering wheel half-cases;
2. - dashboard visor;
3. - central consoleand the climate control assembly;
4. - dashboard lower casing;
5. - documentscompartment;
6. - upper dashboard.
1
6
2
7
3
4
5
DASHBOARD VISOR
Dismountby frontal withdrawaland detachment.
LOWER DASHBOARD CASING
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the front wiring connectors from the fuse box fixed by meansof four screws on
the door (4) of the lower casing (5) and disconnect the choke cable.
Dismount the screw and the cage nut, which fix the lower casing on the front hood opening
control support.
Loosen the three screws that fix the lower casing on the lower side of the dashboard.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
57 - 2
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
DASHBOARD UPPER PART
57
DASHBOARD UPPER PART
DISMOUNTING
Loosen from the central and the lateral aerators, the airflow pipes, mounted on the climate
control group.
Disconnect the instrument panel, the counters from the dashboard and detach the mileage
counter cable from the instrument panel.
Dismount the screws that are attaching the dashboard by means of the lateral attachment
supports, on the climatecontrol box.
Remove the four metalattachment screws of the dashboard on the windscreen lower cross
bar, after previously, the two windscreen defrosting grills,were detachedfrom the dashboard.
Remove the upper part of the dashboard. (1)
57 - 3
vnx.su
57
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
CENTRAL CONSOLE
DISMOUNTING
Remove from the central console the attachmentframe (13) of the gearbox lever bellowsby
detaching it from clips.
Loosen the attachmentscrews (8) of the central console(12) from the climatecontrol group.
Dismount the two metalscrews (14) and the fast nuts (15) of the central consoleattachment,
in the lower part, on the control box of the gearbox lever.
Loosen the screws (9) and the attachmentnuts (10) of the central console,on the upper side,
on the dashboard.
Dismountthe climatecontrol assemblyfrom the centralconsole.
Disconnectfrom the electric cigarette lighter,the wires from the dashboard wiring.
Disconnectthe radio equipment.
Remove the central console.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations,when mounting the central console,
engage the gearboxleverin differentgears.
57 - 4
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT
57
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe attachmentscrew of the documentscompartment(7) on theright support of the
dashboard upper part, the two screws and the fast nuts which attachthe hood on the dashboard.
Disconnectthe supply wires of the documents compartment lighting
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
57 - 5
vnx.su
57
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
STEERING WHEEL AXLE HALF-CASES
DISMOUNTING
Loosen the screws which fix the lower half-case (3) on the steering support and the attachment screws of the lower half-case on the upper half-case (2).
REMOUNTING
Fix the upper half-case (2) on the steering support.
Place the lower half-case (3) on the upper half-case and fix it by means of four screws.
Fix the lower half-case on the steering support by means of three screws.
57 - 6
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the rubber buffer (2); from the
rear view mirror rod (1).
Detachfrom clips the sunvisorsrods from
the insiderear view mirror support;
Dismount the protector support (3).
Dismountthe attachment screws(4) of the
rearwiev mirroron the windscreenframeand
releasethe mirror.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperations in the
reverse order.
57 - 7
vnx.su
57
4
3
2
1
57
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
SUN VISORS
DISMOUNTING
Detachthe sun visorsrods from the inside
rear view mirror support.
Dismounttheattachment screws(1) on the
windscreenframe and releasethe sun visors(2).
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperations in the
reverse order.
57 - 8
vnx.su
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
TURNING HANDLES
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe turning handles attachment
screws (1) from the roof stretcher.
Releasethe turning handles.(2)
57
2
1
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperations in the
reverse order.
57 - 9
vnx.su
57
LOWER INTERNAL ACCESSORIES
HANDBRAKE CASE
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the attachment screws (1) of the handbrake case (2) on the central floor.
Remove the handbrake case off the cockpit.
1
2
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
57 - 10
vnx.su
SAFETY ELEMENTS
59
FRONT SAFETY BELTS
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the protectors (1)of theattachments
front safety belts screws on the upper middle
pillar.
Dismount the attachments front safety belts
screws (6) on the lower middle pillar lining.
Dismount the attachment screws (4) of the
lock attachment (5) on thetunnel lining.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operations in the
reverse order.
4
5
6
59 - 1
vnx.su
3
SAFETY ELEMENTS
59
REAR SAFETYBELTS
DISMOUNTING
Fold the seats (5) and (6) and remove them from supports.
Dismountthe protectors (1) of the attachment rearsafety belt screws(2) on the rear side panels.
Dismountthe attachmentscrews (3) on the lining lateral frame.
Dismount the attachmentscrews (4) of the rear beltslock on central floor
1
2
4
3
5
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
The safety belts attachment screws are to be tighten at a moment of 2.7 daNm.
59 - 2
vnx.su
6
HEATING
CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
61
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe documentscompartment.
Dismount the attachment clip of the mixing flow flap control cable, (8) (from the climate
controlunit).
Remove the rightaeration grill (from the right side of the central console).
Dismountthe attachmentclip of the distribution flowflap controlcable,(7)(from the climate
controlunit).
Dismount the attachmentmetalscrews (5) of the climatecontrol assembly (6) on the central
console of the dashboard.
Remove the climatecontrol assemblyfrom its seat.
Disconnectthe connectionbox of the climatecontrol switch.
Disconnectthe connectionbox of the instrument panellighting.
Dismount the attachment clip of the recycling flow flapcontrolcable(9) and remove it from its seat.
Remove: the mixing flow flap control cable (8) from the heating control button (2) and the
distribution flow flap control cable (7) from the distribution control button (3), by releasingthe
clipsattachmentscrews.
Remove the climatecontrol switch (4) out of its seatby detachingfrom clips.
Dismountthe four lighting bulbs.
9
8
1
2
3
4
7
5
6
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting operations,taking into account the following
recommendations:
- the flow flaps control cablesare first fixed to the board with the jacket,in axial contact
with the limiting support and then pass the panel button and the similar flow flap on the
correspondingposition,then clamp the cable to the unit support;
- check if the levers from the climateunit and from the distributionbox, have the adequate
strokes to ensure the close-opening of the flow flaps;
- if yes, mount the assembly (6) on the central console,the documents compartment and
the aerationgrill;
- if not, set the sleeve length of each control cable to the mounting bracket of the climate
unit and the distribution box.
- the maximummoment for the full flowflaps opening is 1,9 Nm.
61 - 1
vnx.su
61
HEATING
HOUSING MANIFOLD
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the coolingsystem.
Dismount the attachmentcollar of the hoses
on the heating radiator.
Clog the hoses of the heating radiator by
means of the device MOT 453.
Dismountthe documentscompartment.
Dismountthe central console.
Dismountthe control climatecontrol.
Disconnectthe airflow pipes from the climate
controlunit.
Dismountthe nuts and the attachment screws
of the climate control unit from thecarriagebody.
Releasethe climatecontrol unit.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
61 - 2
vnx.su
HEATING
HEATING RADIATOR
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe climatecontrol unit.
Dismountthe attachment clipsand releasethe
left- right cases.
Releasethe heating radiator.
REMONTARE
Se efectueazãîn ordine inversã operaieide demontare.
În cazul deteriorãrii garniturilor, ele se vor înlocui.
61 - 3
vnx.su
61
61
HEATING
CLIMATECONTROL BLOWER
DISMOUNTING
Releasethe climatemaintenanceassemblyfrom under the dashboard, dismountingbeforehand
the central console,the documents compartment, the lower casing, the dashboard.
Unscrew the attachmentscrews of the turbine deflector.
Unscrew the attachmentscrews of the blower.
Disconnectthe blower from the blower wiring.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
61 - 4
vnx.su
HEATING
61
DIAGNOSIS
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER DOES NOT WORKING
Check fuse F 01.
F01 good. Check F09.
F01 blown. Replacethe fuse.
F09 good. Check blower supply.
The blower is not supplied.
Check R2 relay.
The blower is supplied.
Check the air conditioningswitch.
Relay R2 is damaged. The relay is not damaged. Good switch.
Replace the relay.
Broken or disconnected Mass wire
disconnected or broken.
relay switch wiring.
61 - 5
vnx.su
Damaged switch.
Replace the switch.
AIR CONDITIONING
GENERALITIES
62
GENERALITIES
The purpose of the air conditioning unit is to produce a decrease of the temperature in the
passengers compartment and to obtain a lower value temperature compared to the external
environment one, reducing in the sametime the air moisture.
MAINTENANCE
For a vehicleequipped with air conditioning,it is recommendeda frequent checking of the
refrigeratingagent level. During theyear it is recommended:
- the checkingof the refrigerant fluidfilling;
- the cleaningand the air-blowing of the condenser and the cooling radiator fins;
- the checking of the condensation removal pipe on order not to be clogged.
For important leakagerepair,for any components replacement(compressor,condenser,etc)
and if moisture was noticed in the air conditioningcircuit, the dryer filter tank is to be replaced
and the unit draining is to be performed. The same is valid also in case the conditioningcircuit
remainsopen withoutprotectioncovers more than 10 minutes.
IMPORTANT
During winter, it is recommended the frequent start of the system, in order to prolong the lifetime of the compressor and of the whole system.
The vehicle equipped with an air conditioning system shall be not exposed for more
than 20 minutes in painting cabin where there are temperatures higher than 80 °C.
It is obligatory the use of the refrigerating agent and compressor oil type prescribed
by the manufacturer.
It is absolutely forbidden to perform welding on the elements of the air condition
circuits.
The filling of the air conditioning system can be performed only by means of charging
units and observing the instructions of the manufacturer. For mechanical or body
operations it is recommended piping protection in order to avoid their disconnection
by accident.
Avoid the drip of the oil compressor on the painted vehicle body.
For component replacement implying the circuit draining, it is absolutely necessary
the use of new parts and of a special oil for compressor.
62 - 1
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
62
GENERALITIES
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
DISMOUNTING
Make the unit functioning for at least10 minutes(if the unit permits).
Drain the circuit at the fillingequipment.
Measure the quantity of recovered refrigerated fluid.
Release the access to the component that is needed to be changed.
Disconnectthe connections.
In order to avoid the moisture infiltration,protect with protectioncovers.
Dismountthe component.
REMOUNTING
Put specialcompressor oil on the new elementsthread and on the gaskets.
!
ATTENTION
The new components must be obligatory provided with protection covers.
Remove the protection covers, connect the new component on the free connection,
and tighten it by hand.
Place the component correctly.
Tighten it at couple.
Refill with refrigerant fluid and oil.
The filling up with oil for different repairs is to be performed as follows:add in the charging
equipmentcontainer,the recovered oil quantity, plus an oil quantity, as it follows:
- sudden damaged of one of the unit’s elementor leakage
- condenserreplacement
- evaporator replacement
- dryer filter replacement
- pipe replacement
100ml
30 ml
30 ml
15 ml
10 ml
For compressordismounting/remounting without replacementadd 120 ml.
If there are signsof moisture in the air conditioning circuit,replacethe dryer filter tank.
62 - 2
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
GENERALITIES
62
DRAINING /FILLING THE REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
DRAINING
Connect the chargingequipment piping to the filling-draining valves.
Perform the vacuuming of the aircondition unit with the recoveringof the oil and the refrigerantfluid.
Close the hoses valves.
Disconnectthe charging equipment piping and stopthe equipment.
FILLING
Attachthe draining – fillinghosesof the equipment to the airconditioningunit valves.
Put compressorspecific oil type SP 10 in the charging equipment vessel.
Set the quantity of the refrigerant fluid that must be charged (0,590kg).
Observe the filling instructions prescribed by the equipmentproducer.
62 - 3
vnx.su
62
AIR CONDITIONING
AC UNIT OPERATING DIAGRAM
62 - 4
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
EVAPORATOR
62
Basically, the air conditioning unit is formed of a closed circuit, composed by the following main
elements:
- evaporator
- compressor
- condenser
- thermostatic expansion valve
- connection pipes.
The evaporator is the component that extracts the heat from the passengers compartment and
is generally placed in the passengers compartment. In order to cool the passengers compartment
the hot air must be absorbed, the heat extracted and the “cooled” air redistributed. The hot air is
passing through the evaporator to who is giving part of the temperature reducing so, its own
temperature. The cooled air is so conveyed in the passengers compartment, progressively reducing
the temperature.
In the same time, the refrigerant fluid which goes into the evaporator, is absorbing the heat, from
air passing through the evaporator and at the same temperature, is transforming it from liquid into
vapors. At the evaporator exit, the refrigerant fluid is in vapor condition.
The evaporator is placed in the climate control unit and is protected by cases.
EVAPORATOR CASESASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the refrigerant circuit.
Dismountthe sealinggasketson the climatebox outliner.
Dismountthe thermostaticexpansionvalve.
Dismountthe climatecaselocking plate.
Disconnect the pipes evaporator – compressor and evaporator – tank filter.
Dismount the evaporatorcases attachmentnuts, on the right side.
Release the evaporator cases.
Replacethe assembly.
62 - 5
vnx.su
62
AIR CONDITIONING
EVAPORATOR
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Fillthe refrigerant circuit and check the good operation of the climatecontrol system.
NOTE
Ensure that evaporator finned plates are not deformed and they are not excessive
dirty.
The tighteningnuts for the climate and conditioningassembly, the connections for piping,
condenser and filtertank,must have the followingtighteningmoments:
- thread 3/4” – 16 pitch/l” – at the moment 18-20 Nm;
- thread 5/8” - 18 pitch/l” – at the moment 14-20 Nm.
The tighteningmoment of the compressorflange attachmentscrew -12+/-1,2 Nm.
The tighteningmoment of the thermostaticprobe attachmentscrew -5,7+/-0,5 Nm.
The tighteningmoment of the pressure capture - 20,7+/-2 Nm.
NOTE
After each operation that implies the disconnection of the battery, at its reconnection,
introduce the radio code that is written on the vehicle-selling invoice.
62 - 6
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR
62
The compressor is absorbing the vapors coming from the evaporator at low pressure and
temperature, is compressing them and convey the gas at high temperature and pressure.
The refrigerant fluid in high pressure and temperature vapor condition is entering in the second
heat exchanger, which by condensation is transmitting the heat to the external environmental.
At the exitfrom he
t condenser, the refrigera
nt fluid is in liquid condition, ata highpressure and tempera
ture.
Type of compressor: SD 7Y15
Compressor oil : PAG SP 10 or SP20, volume –135 cmc.
Refrigerant: HFC 134 a, quantity of refrigerant : 0.590 kg
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the refrigerant circuit.
Disconnect the compressor’sconnection.
Disconnect the pipes from the compressor.
Dismount the belt tensioningscrew and release the belt.
Dismount the compressorattachmentscrews.
Dismountthe compressor.
Replacethe compressor.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
Tension the belt and tighten at the required moment the tightening attachmentscrew.
Fillthe refrigerant circuit and check the good operation of the climatecontrol system.
62 - 7
vnx.su
62
AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER
THE CONDENSER
The condenser is placed on the cooling radiator,in the front part of the vehicle and is ensuring
the exhaustof the refrigerant heat accumulatedat compression.
In order to grant the optimum condenser operation, frequently checkif its outsidesurfacesare
alwaysclean and the air penetration is not stopped.Also,check the condenserpipes in order not
to show deformations.
CONDENSOR REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain thecooling circuit.
Dismount the pipes connectedto the condenser.
Dismountthe radiator-condenser assembly.
Separate the cooling radiator from the condenser.
ATTENTION:
Avoid the possible deformation of the ducts and finned plates.
Replacethe condenser.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
62 - 8
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
62
PRESSURECONTROLLER(low pressure, high pressure,mediumpressure, in accordance
with the specification) or pressure capture
- low pressure – disconnect when the pressure in the low pressure circuit is lower than
1,96 +/-0,2 bar , reestablishing at a higher pressure than 2,16 +/- 0,2 bar;
- higher pressure – disconnectwhen the pressure in the high pressure circuit is higher than
31,4 +/-2 bar , reestablishing at a higher pressure than 25,5 +/-2 bar;
- medium pressure - starts the blower on the second level speed, when the pressure is
higher than 17,7+/-1bar and stops the blower at a lower pressure 13,7+/- 1,2.
Thermostaticexpansionvalve allowsthe reductionof the refrigerant liquid pressure which is
coming from the condenser, passing through the tank filter and is continuously adjusting the
refrigerant flow from the evaporator,to reach the compressorin vapor condition.
The good operation of the air conditioning unit is ensured by a dryer filter tank that has the
purpose to protect the unit. The filter’s purpose is to absorb the eventuallysolid particles found
in the oil and refrigerantliquid circulation.
The interception is needed as they might block the operation of the thermostaticexpansion
valve or may produce the compressor mobile parts worn or gripping.
DETECTION OF REFRIGERANT FLUID LEAKAGE
In order to detect the refrigerant liquid leakage, it is used a detector, calibrated to detect
leakageof 9gr. /year.
62 - 9
vnx.su
62
AIR CONDITIONING
DRYER FILTER TANK
DRYER FILTER TANK
The dryer filtertank has a triple functionin the airconditioningunit:
- filtering the refrigerant fluid from the unit;
- absorbing the moisture from the unit;
- it is a buffer storage tank of refrigerant fluid.
DRYER FILTER TANK REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Drain the refrigerant circuit.
Dismount the pipingand protect the threads.
Disconnectthe connector of the air conditioning pressure controller.
Dismountthe receivertank filterfrom the collar support.
Replacethe tank filter.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
Fillthe refrigerant circuit, check the leakageand the good operation of the unit.
ATTENTION
Do not mount dryer filter tanks that do not have protection covers.
62 - 10
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
UNIT PIPING
62
The air conditioningunit piping is ensuring the refrigerant fluid circulationbetweenthe unit
components. Whenpiping is replaced, check the existenceof the protectivecovers,the lubrication
of the connectionsand gasketswith compressoroil as well as filling up with compressoroil.
The unit fillingand draining valvesareplaced on thecompressorpiping and they havedifferent
diameters, so that they can not be reversed.
NOTE
For tighteningor loosening the unit piping connectionswhere the refrigerant fluid is
passing through,wo
t specialwrenches are tobe used, in order tobalance the moments’ twist.
62 - 11
vnx.su
62
AIR CONDITIONING
CLIMATE CONTROLUNIT
CLIMATE CONTROLUNIT REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Releasethe lateral and central console.
Disconnectthe wires from the dashboard wiring.
Disconnectthe distribution flow flap controlcablesand the mixingflow flap from the control
lever and the recyclingflowflap cable from the climatecontrol panel.
Disconnect the air flow pipes.
Dismount the screwsfrom the front side of the climatebox.
Dismount the nuts from the weldedscrews in the backside of the climatebox.
Releasethe climatecontrol unit.
Replacethe climatecontrolunit.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
AIR INLET ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe sealinggasketson the climatebox outliner.
Dismountthe climatebox locking plate.
Dismountthe nuts from the right side of the climatebox.
Releasethe air inlet assembly.
Replacethe assembly.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
62 - 12
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
62
DIAGNOSIS
Defective cooling
Yes
No
Is climateblower working ?
Adequateair flow ?
Yes
Replacethem
Yes Check he
t blower fus
e and rel
ay.
Are they defective?
No
No
Check the airflow flaps
operation and the air ducts
integrity.
Change
blower.
No
Supply the blower motor
at (+12 V).
Does it works?
Yes
Replacethe climate control
switchor repairthe electric
circuit.
Compressorbelt tensioning is good?
No
Yes
Refacei tensiunea curelei
Any refrigeran
t fluid leakage
in the system?
Yes
Detect the refrigerant fluid
leakage cause . Performrefilling.
No
Is compressor clutch supplied with (+ 12 V)?
Yes
Yes
Clutchis coupling the
compressor?
Replaceit.
Check the electric circuit
for supplying and control.
No
Pressure controlleris working?
No
No
Replaceit.
Yes
Replace the thermostatic
expansion valve.
62 - 13
vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONING
62
DIAGNOSIS
CorrectAC systemfilling.
Compressor does not work.
Yes
Is + 12 V at pole E5 of E relay?
Check the clutch coil. Damaged,
short-circuit?
Yes
Is + 12 V at pole E3 of E relay?
Yes
No
Replacethe Restore the electric circuit
compressor. betweenE and clutch.
Is + 12 V at pole E3 of E relay?
The wiring betweeninjectioncomputer
and the pole E2 of E relay is broken ?
No
Restorethe wiringbetweenpole
E1 of E relay and pole D5 of D
relay.
Yes
No
Injectioncomputer does not receive
AC actuation?
Yes Check the pressure
controller electriccircuit.
No
Replacethe switch.
No
AC control switchis
working ?
Yes
Check the switchelectric circuit.
Pressure controlleris working?
Yes
No
Replacethe pressure controller.
No
Check fuse S6 from engine
compartment. Restore the
wiring betweenS6 and relayE.
Yes
Repair the wiring.
No
Check the pressure controller
electric circuit.
62 - 14
vnx.su
SEALING OPENING ELEMENTS
CARRIAGE BODY SEALING
65
DOOR FRAMES GASKETS
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe front and rearframesgasketsfollowing the doorsoutliners,by drawing towards
outsideof one of their ends.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
The mountingof the sealinggasketson framesis performed by tapping with a rubber hammer.
65 - 1
vnx.su
SEALING WINDOWS AND SCREENS
GLASSES SEALING
66
1. Windscreen gasket
2. Hatchbackgasket
3. Fix window gasket
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the windscreen glass (1), hatchback (2), or fix (3), together with the gasket by
pushingfrom the inside of the vehicle.
The glass gasket shall be cleanedis reused, or replacedwith a new one.
REMOUNTING
Positionthe gasket (2) around the glass (1) and place the assembly on a protectionplate.
Place the gasket (2) all around the glass (1) where a cotton cord of 3 – 4 mm diameter has
been previously introduced,leaving at the ends (3) about 20 mmof cord, and betweenthe ends,
the distance shallbe not more than 10 mm.
66 - 1
vnx.su
66
SEALING WINDOWS AND SCREENS
INSIDE WIPERS
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- opening handle
- windowregulator crank
- door opening mechanism
- door blocking button
- panel attachmentscrews
Detachthe panel.
Remove the inside wiper.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
66 - 2
vnx.su
SEALING WINDOWS AND SCREENS
OUTSIDE WIPERS
DISMOUNTING
Lowerthe window in the minimum position.
Dismount the outside wiper (1), by
detachingit from the clips(2).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
66 - 3
vnx.su
66
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
CARRIAGE BODY COVERINGS
1. Front door thresholdcovering
2. Rear door thresholdcovering
3. Upper front pillar covering
4. Middlepillarlower covering
5. Middlepillar covering
6. Rear passage covering
7. Rear side panel covering
8. Rear wheelpassage covering
72 - 1
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
FRONT DOOR THRESHOLD COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount :
- the attachment screw of front door
thresholdcovering on the front pillar;
- the screws (2) and plastic nuts (4);
- release the front door threshold covering.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 2
vnx.su
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
UPPER FRONT PILLAR COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- the attachment screw (1) of the upper
front pillar covering (2) on the roof lining
- detachfrom clips (3) the upper front pillar
covering and releaseit.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 3
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
REAR DOOR THRESHOLD COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Move the front seatin the most advanced positionand dismount:
- front/rear beltsattachmentscrews (1) of
rear door threshold covering on the middle pillar
lining, respectivelythelateral framelining;
- screws (2) and attachment clips (3) of
the rear door threshold covering on the lateral
framelining;
- releasethe rear door threshold covering (5).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 4
vnx.su
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
MIDDLE PILLAR COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- screw (2) and attachmentclips(3) of the
middle pillarcovering on the middle pillarlining;
- releasethe middle pillar covering.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 5
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
REAR PASSAGE COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Push the unlockingbuttons and swingout
the bench seat back.
Dismount the attachment screw(1) of the rear
passage covering (2) on the lateralframelining.
Remove the rear passage covering below
the rear side panel gasket.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
72 - 6
vnx.su
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
REAR WHEEL PASSAGE COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Detach from the two attachmentclips (1)
the rear wheelpassage covering.
Release therear wheelpassage covering.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
72 - 7
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
MIDDLE PILLAR LOWER COVERING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- the obturator (2);
- the attachmentscrews (1) of the middle
pillar lowercovering(3)fromtheupper and lower
area of the safety belt mounting.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 8
vnx.su
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
REAR SIDE PANELCOVERING
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:
- rear door frame gasket;
- hatchbackframe gasket;
- the attachment screws(1) and (2) of the
rearsidepanelcovering (3)on the panellining.
- the protecting and the attachment screw
of the rear safety belt on the rear side panel.
Detachfrom clips(4) and (5) and release.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
72 - 9
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
ROOFGASKET
DISMOUNTING
Dismount:the turn handles,front/rear safety
beltsattachmenton the upper area,ceiling lamps,
interior rear view mirror, sun visors, stop lamp,
volumetric sensors and the upper covering on
the roof outliner.
Dismount the roof gasket (1) by detaching
from the clips(2).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting
operations.
72 - 10
vnx.su
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
CARPETS
DISMOUNTING
Remove :
- the complete trunk carpet (1);
- the rear carpet (2) after dismounting
the left/rightrearcoverings;
- the front carpet (3) after the
dismountingof the left/right door thresholds
coverings.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
72 - 11
vnx.su
71
71
INTRENAL BODY TRIM
COWL PANEL NOISE ABSORBENT
DISMOUNTING
Detachthe attachment clips(1) of thenoise
absorbent pad (2) on the cowl panel.
Release the noise absorbent pad.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
72 - 12
vnx.su
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS TRIM
FRONT DOOR PANEL
72
DISMOUNTING
Front door panel replacement is performed without the dismounting of the door, and the
operationsthat must be performed are the following:
Dismountthe windowregulatorcrank (2) that is mountedby clips attachmenton the window
regulator axle.
Dismountthe inner opening mechanism (3),by dismountingthe screw (4) and detaching from
the inner openingmechanism, the frontdoor openingcontrolrod,this rod being fixed on the plate
with the other end.
Dismountthe locking handle(8).
Dismountthescrews(5) and remove the panel by clipsdetaching from the caissonof the door.
Dismount the guiding case(6) and the lockingbutton.(7).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting operations taking into account the following
recommendations:
- for the mounting of theinneropening mechanism, the openingcontrolrod willbe placed
in the positionwhere the assembled plate with electric control is unblocked.
- after mounting, check the operation of the inner opening mechanismand its alignment
with the front door panel.
NOTE
The window regulator crank must be placed in horizontal position with the button
oriented toward front, the window being closed.
72-1
vnx.su
72
SIDE OPENINGS ELEMENTS TRIM
REAR DOOR PANEL
DISMOUNTING
Rear door panel replacement is performed without the dismounting of the door, and the
followingoperationsare to be performed :
Dismountthe windowregulatorcrank (2) that is mountedby clips attachmenton the window
regulator axle.
Dismountthe inner opening mechanism (3),by dismountingthe screw (4) and detaching from
the inner opening mechanism,the reardoor opening control rod, whichis fixed on the plate with
the other end.
Dismountthe locking handle(5).
Dismount the screws (6) remove the panel by detachingit from the caisson of the door.
Dismount the guiding case(8) and the lockingbutton(7).
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismounting operations taking into account the following
recommendations:
- for the mounting of the outside opening mechanism, the opening control rod will be
placed in the positionwhere the assembled plate with electric control is unblocked.
- after mounting, check the operation of the internal opening mechanism and its alignment
with the rear door panel.
NOTE
The window regulator crank must be placed in horizontal position with the button
oriented toward front, the window being closed.
72-2
vnx.su
BACK SEAT TABLES AND PARCEL SHELVES
UPPER BACK PANELREPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Extract the panel (1).
Dismountthe attachment screws(3) of the
lateral supports (2) on the lateral frames
linings.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the
dismountingoperations.
74-1
vnx.su
74
FRONT SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
FRONT SEATS
75
CONTROL/ADJUSTMENT
The front seats, equippingDACIA NOVAvehicles,have two possibilitiesof adjustment:
- front or rear longitudinal movement,which can be performed by lever’soperation (1);
- seatback overturning up to the horizontalposition,by rotating the round button(2).
DISMOUNTING
For dismounting,the seatwill be placed in the middle position by lever’s(1) lifting and perform the following operations:
Remove the lateral cross bar protector (3) by dismountingthe metal screws (4).
Dismount screws (5), which are fixing the seaton the central and lateral cross bar.
Release the front seat.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
2
1
3
4
75-1
vnx.su
75
FRONT SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
FRONT SEATSLIDES GUIDES
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the attachment screws (4) of the
slides guides (1) and (2) on the front seat, by
acting upon the control lever (3) and move the
slideguides in one way or the other as required.
Releaseslidesguides from the front seat.
1
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse orderthe dismounting
operations.
75-2
vnx.su
3
2
4
FRONT SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
FRONT SEATARMATURE
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe front seatoff the vehicle.
Dismountslidesguides from theseat.
Remove the upholstery.
Detachthe quilt from the seatarmature.
Releasethe front seatarmature.
75
1
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse orderthe dismounting
operations.
75-3
vnx.su
REAR SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
REAR BENCH
76
The rear bench is composed of two separated swinging seats, unequal and two separated,
unequal, swingingback rests.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the seats, by swinging and by removing them from the welded supports on the
carriage body.
For the back restsdismountingperform the followingoperations:
- lift the unlocking buttons (1), and swingout the back rests ahead.
- dismountthe four screwsfor the attachment of hinges on the wheels’ passage.
- remove the back rests from the central hinge
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
76-1
vnx.su
76
REAR SEATS FRAMES AND RUNNERS
BENCH SEATS
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the bench seats and remove the upholstery from the seats quilts (3) and (4).
Dismount the bench’s backs rests and remove the upholstery from the back rests quilts (1)
and (2).
Releasethe reinforced quiltsof the bench.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
76-2
vnx.su
FRONT SEAT TRIM
77
SEATS UPHOLSTERY DISMOUNTING
Detachthe rods (3) from the attachmentclips(4) of the seatsupholstery (7) on the quilt(14).
Detach the rods (6) from the attachment clips (5) of the seats upholstery with front seat
reinforcement.
Remove the front seatupholstery from the seatquilt.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
1
8
9
10
11
12 13
5
6
4
2
7
3
77-1
vnx.su
14
77
FRONT SEAT TRIM
BACK REST UPHOLSTERY DISMOUNTING
1
8
9
10
11
12 13
5
6
4
2
3
7
14
Dismount the button control for backrest swinging (2), releasing the screw, the washer, the
plate, and the backing plate.
Remove the sleevesfor headrestsfrom the pipes weldedon the front seatreinforcement.
Detach the rods (9) also from the clips (8).
Detach at the second criss-cross arch level the rod (11) from the attachmentclips (10) of the
back rest upholstery (12) on the back restquilt (13) and remove the back rest upholstery.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
77-2
vnx.su
REAR SEAT TRIM
78
SEATUPHOLSTERY DISMOUNTING
Remove by swingingthe seats (1) and (4).
Detach the attachmentrods (16) and (11) of the seats upholstery (14) and (13) on the quilts
(8) and (7).
Detach theattachment rods (15) and (12) of the seats on the corresponding quilts and remove the upholsters (14) and (13) from the seatquilts.
Remove the front seatupholstery from the seatquilt.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
1
8
9
10
11
12 13
5
6
4
2
7
14
3
BACK REST UPHOSTERY DISMOUNTING
Dismount the backrest seats (2) and (3) from the central and lateral attachment screws.
Detachthe rods (19) and (20) of the attachmentback rests (2) and (3) of backrest upholstery
(8) and (9), the quilts (5), consequently(6).
Detach the rods (17) and (10) of the back rests upholstery on the corresponding quilts and
remove the upholstery (8) and (9) from the back rests quilts.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
78-1
vnx.su
78
REAR SEAT TRIM
BACK REST UPHOSTERY DISMOUNTING
1
8
9
10
11
12 13
5
6
4
2
3
7
14
Dismount the backrest seats (2) and (3) from the central and lateral attachment screws.
Detachthe rods (19) and (20) of the attachmentback rests (2) and (3) of backrest upholstery
(8) and (9), the quilts (5), consequently(6).
Detach the rods (17) and (10) of the back rests upholstery on the corresponding quilts and
remove the upholstery (8) and (9) from the back rests quilts.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverseorder the dismountingoperations.
78-2
vnx.su
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
BATTERY
80
PARTICULARITIES
CHECKING
It is recommendedto check the following:
- cracks or breaches of the battery box (case);
- the battery upper part cleanness;
- the plugs condition.
It is required to strictly check the following:
- lack of plugs sulfate composite;
- proceed, is necessary to their cleaningand greasing;
- checkthecorrectwiring plugs tightening at thebattery plugs.The existence of an imperfect
contactmay generate incidents at enginestarting or at battery charging, sparks producingrisk
being possibleto occur,which may causethe battery explosion;
- check the electrolyte level.
For the batteries provided with accessplugs, which may be dismounted,proceed as follows:
- remove the plugs;
- check the electrolyte level in each element;
- if necessary,refillthe level,usingonly distilled water, till maximum 1.5 cm above the plates.
ATTENTION
Never fill up with electrolyte, but only with distilled water.
PRECAUTIONS
It is important to know that:
- the battery containssulfuric acid which is a dangerous substance;
- during battery charging, oxygen and hydrogen are produced.The mixture of thesetwo
gases isforming a detonategas, which may lead to the explosionrisk.
1. DANGER = ACID
The sulfuric acid solutionis a very aggressive,toxic and corrosiveproduct. This is attacking
the skin, the clothes and may lead to the corrosion of most of the metals.
Also,itis very important,that, whenyou handle a battery, to consider the following precautions:
- protect the eyes by using protectiveglasses;
- wear anti-acid gloves and clothes.
80 - 1
vnx.su
80
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
BATTERY
ATTENTION
In case of acid slashes on body, abundantly wash with water all affected parts.
If eyes have been touched, urgently call for a doctor.
1. DANGER = EXPLOSION RISK
During battery charging,connected to a charger-rectifier,oxygen and hydrogen emissionsare
occurring. Thesegases emission is stronger when the battery has reached the complete charge
condition and the produced gas quantity is in direct connectionwith the charging current.
The oxygen and hydrogen are associatingin the free spaces,at the plates surface, forming a
detonate mixture,whichis very explosive. The littlestsparkis sufficient to generate an explosion,
followed by the battery case brooking and acid splashing in the proximate environment. The
persons, who are around, are in danger to be hurt by the exploded case chips or by the acid,
which may come in contactwith the eyes, hands, or face.
ATTENTION
Strictly observe the following recommendations:
- before connecting or reconnecting a battery, ensure that all consumers are
shouted off;
- during battery charging in a room, using a charger-rectifier, turn it off before
connecting or reconnecting the battery to this one;
- do not place metallic objects on the battery for not producing a short-circuit
between its plugs;
- never bring closer to a battery, an open flame, a welding lamp or another fire
source.
THE ELECTRICEQUIPMENT PROTECTION
In caseof an intervention on the vehicle,some measures must be taken, for the electric equipment protectionagainstdamagesor for avoiding a short-circuitthat maylead to vehicle firing. The
battery is to be allwithdisconnected by firstdisconnecting the negativeplug and thenthe positive
one. Connection is to be done by performing the disconnecting operations in the reverse order.
Before starter acting, check if the battery is correctlyconnected(thenegativeplug connected
to the ground), and if the plugs are clean and welltightened.Never disconnectthe battery when
the engine is running, in order not to damage the voltage regulator, the alternator or some
components of the vehicle checking electronic systems. The alternator, voltage regulator
disconnecting,and the interventions at their connections, are to be performed only when the
engine is stopped (the alternator is not turning) and the contactis taken off.
In casethe battery is connectedto a charger-rectifier,for charging (withoutdismountingthe
battery off the vehicle), it is obligatory to disconnect the wiring from the battery plugs.
80 - 2
vnx.su
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
BATTERY
80
BATTERYDISMOUNTING- REMOUNTING
DISMOUNTING
After identificationand eliminationof the real cause of the battery discharging, proceedas
follows:
Remove the plasticprotector from the plus plug of the battery.
Dismountthe attachmentnut of the ground wiring from the minus plug of the battery.
Dismountthe attachmentnut of the wiring from the plus plug of the battery.
Dismountthe battery attachmentclamp screw.
Carefully take off the battery.
REMOUNTING
Perform thedismountingoperations in thereverse order.Afterthat, resetthe radioby introducing
the radio code (if the vehicle is equipped with radio) and adjustthe dashboard clock.
80 - 3
vnx.su
80
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
HEADLAMPASSEMBLY
NOTE :
After headlamps dismounting, their adjustment must be performed.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe headlamp adjustmentcorrectioncontrol from the headlamp adjustmentdevice,
by detaching from clips.
Disconnect the connector (1).
Disconnectthe supply wires for the parking bulb and turning light bulb.
Dismountthe attachmentnuts (5) of the headlamp-turning lamp assembly.
Push ahead the headlampassembly.
REMOUNTING
Placethe headlampassemblyin its place and tighten the attachmentnuts (5).
Mount the headlampcorrection cable.
Reconnectthe connector (1) and the supply wires to the parking and turning bulbs.
Reconnectthe battery.
80 - 4
vnx.su
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
FOG LAMPS
DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING
Disconnectthe fog lamp(A) connectorsfrom the vehiclewiring.
Dismount the two fog lamp attachmentnuts (B and C) on the front bumper.
Remove the fog lamp off the bumper.
Positionin the bumper the new fog lamp.
Mount the two fog lamp attachmentnuts (B and C).
Connect the fog lamp (A) connectorsto the vehiclewiring.
Check the operation of the fog lamps.
NOTE:
After mounting the fog lamps, it is obligatory to perform their adjustment.
80 - 5
vnx.su
80
80
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
BULBS REPLACEMENT
HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the connector (1).
Disconnect the supply wires of the parking bulb and remove the parking bulb.
Remove the rubber protector (2).
Releasethe attachmentclamps (3) and remove the low-main beam bulb.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
NOTE:
In case the headlamp is equipped with a halogen bulb, do not touch its glass balloon
directly by hand.
FRONT TURNING BULB REPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe bulb supply wires
Rotate the holder (4) and remove it.
Remove the burnt bulb from the holder.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operations in the reverse order, with the checking of the correct
holder (4) positioningto avoid dust and humiditypenetrationin the headlampassembly.
The turning lamps are using orange color bulb; whenreplacingthe bulb, use the samebulb type.
80 - 6
vnx.su
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
HEADLAMPS ADJUSTMENT
80
MEETING LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT (LOW BEAM)
This is performedby acting upon the V screw
(verticallyplane adjustment)or H (horizontally
plane adjustment).By screwing, the lighting beam
is ”lowering” and by unscrewingis “ascending”.
Check if the lighted area is centered on the
verticalaxis and if the opticalseparation at15°
coincidewith the headlamp lighting. An error
of 1 cm is admissible.
A lighting beam displaced towards left has
the aspect shownin (pict.a) and a lightingbeam
displaced towards right has the aspect shown
in (pict.b).
pict.a
pict.b
ROAD LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT (LONG BEAM)
Check the position to coincide with the
adjustmentperformed for low beam and with
the lighting beam distributed betweenthe two
verticallineson the panel.
When checking the long beam, the lighting
center of the ellipse, must be located on the
cross marking the screen center.
If a major deviation compared with the low beam is noticed, it is recommended the bulb
replacement,this one being in most of the cases, responsiblefor such defect.
80 - 7
vnx.su
80
BATTERY - FRONT HEADLIGHTS
HEADLAMPS ADJUSTMENT
FOG LAMPS ADJUSTMENT
The fog lampsadjustmentis to be performed in the following conditions:
- the vehicleto be placed on a horizontalsurface;
- the vehiclehas not passengers insidethe cockpit or weightsin the trunk;
- the tires are pressurized at the manufacturer prescribed pressure.
G
E
Further on, proceed as follows:
Bring the vehicleat the working place.
Positionthe adjustmentdevice (headlamp adjustmentdevice –E) in front of an opticalcenter
of a fog lamp.
Switch on the fog lamps.
Rotate the adjustmentscrew of the fog lamp(D), so that an adjustmentof 2 % is obtained and
the separation betweenthe lightedarea and the dark one from the adjustment device is located
under the marked line(G).
This adjustmentis performed in the sameway as for the meetinglights adjustment.
Bring the adjustmentdevice in front of the opticalcenter of the second fog lamp.
Perform the fog lamp adjustment.
Switchoff the fog lamps.
80 - 8
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
BULBS REPLACEMENT
81
BULB REPLACEMENT OF THE REAR TURNING, PARKING AND BRAKE
STOP LIGHT
Disconnect the battery.
Push towards interior the two attachment clips (1), then extract the plastic cap(2).
Disconnect the connector (6).
Push upwards the attachmentclips(3) of the printed circuit plate (4), swingit and pull out the
plate from the attachmentshoulders (5).
For remounting perform the dismounting operationsin the reverse order.
FOG LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT
Dismount the attachment screws (1) of the
fog lamp glassand remove the glass;
Remove the burnt bulb and replaceit.
REPLACEMENT OF THE LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB
Dismountthe lamp attachmentscrews.
Replacethe burnt bulb.
For remounting, perform the dismounting operationsin the reverse order.
81 - 1
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
81
BULBS
Hugh/low beam lights
Headlamps
Parking lights
BULBS
Two phases bulb R2-12V-40/45 W
with flange holder P45t41
Bulb 12V-4W with holder BA 9s
Front turning lamp
Bulb 12V-21W(colored) with holder BAU 15s
Fog lamps
Halogen bulb H3, 12V-55W with holder Pk22s
Rear
lamps
Parking, stop lights
Bulb 12V-21/5W with holder BAY 15d
Turning and reverse driving
Bulb 12V-21W with holder BA15s
Rear fog lamps
Bulb 12V-21W with holder BA 15s
Lamps:side signaling, trunklighting
Bulb 12V-5W with holder W2,1x9,5
Licenseplate, ceiling, document compartment Bulb SOFIT 10 x 35 type AS02; 12V-5W
lamps
with holder Sv 8,5
Lamp STOP-S3 on the ceiling
Bulb 12V-21W type C21W with holder Sv 8,5
Instrumentpanel
Bulb 12V-1,2W holderW2 x 4,6d
81 - 2
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIAGNOSTIC
81
THE REAR DRIVING LAMPS NOT WORKING
Check the F 01 fuse.
Fuse F01 is burnt; replacethe fuse.
F 01 is good:
bridge across the contact plugs.
Lampsare working; replacethe contact.
Lampsare not working.
Check the contactsupply.
The contactis not supplied;
the contactsupply wire is disconnected
or broken.
81 - 3
vnx.su
The contactis supplied;
the lampssupplying wire is disconnected
or broken.
81
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIAGNOSTIC
FOG LAMPS NOT WORKING
Check the fuse F 10.
F 10 fuse is burnt; replace the fuse.
F 10 fuse is good.
Check the supply of the R1 relay.
The relay is supplied.
Check the lampssupply.
The relay is not supplied. Is there + 12 V
at pole 4 of the fog lamps contact ?
Yes
The relay is supplied.
Ground wire broken.
No
Disconnectedwires
or defect contact.
Lightsswitchdevice
defect or F05 fuse burnt.
Lamps are not supplied .Check the
fog lamps control relay.
Relay good. Lampssupplying
wire broken or disconnected.
Relay defect.
Replacethe relay.
81 - 4
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIAGNOSTIC
81
BRAKE STOP LIGHTS NOT WORKING
Check F 01 fuse.
Fuse is good.
Bridge across the brake stop contact.
F 01 fuse burnt ; replace it.
Stop lampsare not lighting.
Stop lampsare lighting.
Replacethe contact.
Check the contact supplying.
Wire is broken: replacethe wire.
Contact is supplied.Lampssupply
wire is disconnected or broken.
81 - 5
vnx.su
81
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
DISMOUNTING
1
4
Disconnect the (-) plug of the battery.
Turning the button (4) open, then carefully remove the access little door (1) to the fuse box,
placed under left side dashboard.
Dismount the attachingscrews (2) of the fuse box on back of the littledoor.
Rotate the fuse box in order to have accessat the connectors of its back then carefully disconnect the wiring connectors. If it is necessary the replacementof the module (3) attached on the
fuse box, for the fuses F11 – F16, first note the position of the wires connected tothese fuses,
then perform the wires disconnecting.
Remove the fuse box.
REMOUNTING
Connect the wiring connectors to the fuse box printed circuit. Observe the form correspondence of each connector with its drawing, marked on the printed circuit of the fuse box.
Connect the wirescorresponding to the fusesF11 – F16, if those have beenpreviouslydisconnected.
Position the wires appointed for the fuses F11- F16 and the module (3) of those fuses, then
attach the fuse box on the back of the access little door (1).
Carefully mount the fuse box accesslittle door, then closeit.
Connect the (-) battery plug.
Perform functionaltests,noticingthe correct operationof all consumers suppliedby meansof
the cockpit fuse box.
OBSERVATION
For vehicle equipped with radio-tape player, after battery reconnecting, the radio
code must be introduced, in order to make it again running.
81 - 6
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
81
A. FOR VEHICLES MANUFACTURED TILL 01.06.2001
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti intrusion
F04
7,5A
Turning and hazard lights
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, cigarette lighter, ashtray, radio
F06
15A
Cigarette lighter, instrument panel (anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti intrusion, anti intrusion indic
ator, diagnostic socket
F07
15A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch, windscreen wiper timer
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
Reverse driving contact
Left fog lamp
81 - 7
vnx.su
81
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
On the fuse box, 6 fusesmodules are attached,protectingthe followingconsumers:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left high beam
F12
10A
Right high beam, high beam indicator
F13
10A
Left low beam
F14
10A
Right low beam, low beam indicator
F15
15A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti starting bushing
F16
10A
Radio, windscreen wiper motor.
81 - 8
vnx.su
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
81
B. FOR VEHICLES MANUFACTUREDAFTER 01.06.2001
AND VEHICLES RESPECTING EURO 2000 POLLUTION NORM
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti intrusion.
F04
7,5A
Turning and hazard lights
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, cigarette lighter, ashtray, radio.
F06
15A
Cigarette lighter, clock, instrument panel (anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti intrusion, anti intrusion indicator, diagnostic socket.
F07
15A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti starting bushing
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
Reverse driving contact
Left fog lamp
81 - 9
vnx.su
81
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
Pe cutia de sigurane sunt fixate 6 module sigurane fuzibile ce protejeazã urmãtorii consumatori:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left high beam
F12
10A
Right high beam, high beam indicator
F13
10A
Left low beam
F14
10A
Right low beam, low beam indicator
F15
15A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch, windscreen wiper
timer
F16
10A
Radio, windscreen wiper motor.
81 - 10
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
GENERALITIES
82A
This typeof anti starting system is based on the key recognition, which has a special construction.
It may be separated in two elements which can be identified in the following way (pict.1): the key
head (pos.A.) made of plastic, which can be dismounted and the metal insertion (pos.B.), which is
fixed and ensured by clipping in the key head.
pict.1
In the key head, there is a coded independent electronic circuit, which is functioningwithout
battery. When settingthe contacton, the anti startingbushing, placed around the starting contact,
is enquiring and catchingthe codedsignalemittedby the key head,then sends it to the Electronic
ControlUnit (E.C.U.) decoder.This one is attachedon the front left pillar,under the lower casing
of the dashboard and has the function of receivingthe code sent from the bushing. If the decoder
recognisesthe key code then it willsenda coded signal to the injection computer,whichcompares
it with the previous memorised code and willauthorise or not the start of the engine.
We mention that the system with radio frequency remote control (RF) of the doors blocking
/unlocking,has no influence to the anti starting system.In this case, the key head has a different
construction, havingan activation buttonof the remote control and a red LED, whichis lighted in
the moment of blocking/unlocking the doors, by pushing the key button. Inside the key head
there is the coded electronic circuit forthe anti starting systemand an imprintedelectronic circuit,
supplied by a battery, for the RF remote control operation of blocking/unlocking the vehicle
doors.
The anti starting system is activatedafter approximate10 seconds from the breaking of the
contactand is visualised by the blinking of the anti starting indicatorplaced on the instrument
panel.
ATTENTION
If the battery is low charged, the tension drop on the starter, at starting,
may cause the activation of the anti starting system and the start of the engine is
impossible.
82A - 1
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
GENERALITIES
THE KEY HEADS
The key head has marked inside, a number of identification, formed by 8 alphanumeric
characters (letters and figures) and this one is mentionedon the vehicle’sinvoice.
If the replacement of the battery from the key head is necessary, this can be opened in the
following way :
- keep the key in horizontalposition,the half with the metalinsertion beingdownwards ;
- with a little screwdriver,positionedas in the picture (picture2), act upon the key head in
the direction indicatedby the arrow,in order to begin the dismounting.
- move carefully the upper side of the key in the directionindicatedby the arrow (picture3)
and then the two parts of the key willseparate.
pict.2
pict.3
Ifthe replacement of the metalinsertion ( the mechanicalpart)of the key is needed, proceedasfollows:
- open the key head according to the a.m. procedure ;
- unlockcarefully the maintainingclaw(picture4, pos.C) of the metalinsertion (B).
- remove the metalinsertion by slidingfrom the key head.
Introduce by sliding the new metal insertion until a « click » is heard, which confirms its
attachmenton the key head.
pict.4
ATTENTION
After dismounting the key head, it is forbidden to touch the electric circuit located
inside of it, as this can cause the further non-operation of the anti starting system and
impose a replacement of the key head.
82A - 2
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
GENERALITIES
82A
NOTE
In case both keys were lost, the code of the key head (8 characters) and the code of
the metal insertion (4 characters) can be red from the vehicle invoice. If also the invoice
was lost, the two mentioned codes can be found out based on the chassis series number
of that vehicle, accessing the database of the DACIA manufacturer, calling the TECH
LINE.
ANTI STARTING BUSHING
pict.5
The anti starting bushing (picture 5) is locatedaround the starting contactand is accessible
after the dismounting the steering wheel’scases. It catchesthe signalfrom the key headand then
sends a coded signal to the E.C.U. decoder.
The vehicles equipped with RF remote control keys for blocking/ unlocking the doors are
provided with another anti starting bushing whichtransmitsto the E.C.U. decoder also the signal
receivedfrom the RF remote control.
The recognition of the two types of decoding bushingsis realisedby meansof codes labelled
on their body, as follows :
- code 042264J
- for vehicleswithout RF remote control
- code 8200044257
- for vehicleswith RF remote control
E.C.U. DECODER
The E.C.U. decoder (picture 6) has the
pict.6
followingfunctions :
- decode the signalreceivedfrom the anti
starting bushing ;
- sendsa code to the injectioncomputer
in order to authorisethe engine starting.
- controls the anti starting indicator of the
instrument panel
- receivesthe coded signalfrom the anti
starting bearings, for the vehiclesequipped with RF remote control;
- commandsthe blocking/unlockingof the doors, if the vehicleis provided with RF remote
control keys;
- commandsthe dome ceilinglighting, for the vehiclesequippedwith this system.
82A - 3
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
GENERALITIES
The domeceilinglighting is activatedsubject to theposition of the switch(picture7, position1):
- positionA the ceilinglightspermanently
- positionB the ceilingturned off
- positionC dome ceilinglighting; this willlight for 5 seconds after a front door closingor
after the command of unlocking the doors with the RF remote control. This delay turnsout in the
moment of settingthe contact.
pict.7
NOTE :
The vehicles equipped with this anti starting system, have a type of decoder, and those
provided also with RF remote control for locking/ unlocking doors have another type
of decoder.
The identification of the two types of E.C.U. decoder is realised by the inscriptions on
the labels as follows:
- code P8200032783H and the inscription TRANS-PLAF for the vehicles without
RF remote control;
- code P8200032776H and the inscription TRF-TRANS-CAR for the vehicles
with RF remote control.
ANTI STARTING INDICATOR
It is locatedon the instrument panel (picture 8, positionA) and has the followingfunctions:
- signalsthe activationof the anti startingsystem
- signalsthe caseof non identifying the key head
- signals the entrance in the operation mode “resynchronisation” of the remote controls,
RF with E.C.U. decoder,for the vehicles which use the RF remote control.
pict.8
A
82A - 4
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
GENERALITIES
82A
When the contactis off and the anti starting system is activated, withoutany existingfailure,
the anti starting indicatormust blink slowly(a blink per second).
After settingthecontact on, theanti starting indicator must lightfor 3 seconds and thenturn off.
If after setting the contact on, the anti starting system doesn’t work properly, then the anti
starting indicatorwillblink rapidly(2 blinks per second).
82A - 5
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
KEY HEAD REPLACEMENT
After ordering a new key head based on the alphanumeric code mentionedon the invoice,
dismountthe old key headand remove the metalinsertion (mechanicalpart), then introducethe
old metal insertion in the new key head according to the previously mentionedprocedure. In
casethe key head is providedwith RF remote control for blocking/ unlocking the doors, afterits
replacement,perform the synchronising procedure of the RF remote control with the decoder,
subjectto the followingcases:
(a)- the vehicle has a key with RF remote control and one withoutRF remote control; in this
caseafter the replacementof the RF key, perform the “simplesynchronised procedure” in order
to bring into phase the RF remote control with the decoder.
( b)- the vehicle hastwo keys with RF remote control; after the replacement of one RF key,
perform the “specific synchronisedprocedure”;
(c)- the vehiclehas two keys with RF remote control; if both keys are replaced,perform the
“simplesynchronised procedure for the firs key and the “specific synchronised procedure” for
the second one.
If a key was lost, a new key head and a metal insertion will be ordered.
82A - 6
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
E.C.U. DECODER REPLACEMENT
82A
All the new decoders, are not coded. After the mounting on the vehicle it is necessary the
memorisation of the key head code by the decoder in order to be operational. If only the
decoder is replaced,no intervention is necessary to the injectioncomputer,which will keep the
old anti startingcode. Whenthevehicle is providedwith RF remote control forblocking/unlocking
the doors,the performingof the resynchronisationof the keys with the decoder is imposed,after
its mounting.
If further to the diagnosticof the anti starting system, using the CLIP tester, the replacement of
the decoder is imposed, proceed as follows:
- disconnectthe front wiring connector from the E.C.U. decoder( the contactbeing off);
- dismountthe attachmentscrews of the E. C. U. decoder on the front left pillar;
- mount the new E.C.U. decoder;
- connect the front wiring to the new decoder.
Proceed then to theinsertionof the anti starting code using the contact key, then to itsmemorising
(validation)in the E.C.U. decoder,using the CLIP tester.For this purpose, perform the “E.C.U.
decoder replacement procedure and anti starting code memorising”. Check then the correct
operation of the anti starting system with both keys.
ATTENTION
Once the decoder has memorised the key codes, this code cannot be erased
or replaced with another one.
If it is necessary the replacement of the kit (E.C.U. decoder and two key heads), after that
realisethe “ Kit replacement procedure”.
82A - 7
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
ANTI STARTING BUSHING REPLACEMENT
If furtherto the diagnostic,it is establishedthe necessityof the replacementof the anti starting
bushing,proceed as follows:
- dismountthe attachmentscrewsof the steering wheelcasing;
- unlockthe steering wheeland bring it in low position;
- remove the steering wheelupper casing;
- disconnectthe anti starting bushingconnector from the front wiring;
- remove the bushing;
- mount the new bushing outsidethe starting contact(anti theft) system;
- connect the bushing connector to the front wiring;
- mountthe steering wheelcasing;
- check the operation of the indicatorand the anti starting systemwhen the contactis off,
then with the contact on and the engine started.
82A - 8
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
RF REMOTE CONTROL FOR BLOCKING/ UNLOCLING
THE DOORS
82A
The RF remote control has no influence on anti starting system. It has only the function of
blocking/ unlockingthe doors.The RF remote control with evolutionary code can use only two
keys as the decoder may manage only two different evolutionary codes.
The key heads have an identificationnumber formed by 8 alphanumeric characters (letters
and figures), beginning with letter E.
In case of loosing one key, a key head and a metal insertion will be ordered, then the
resynchronisation procedure of the RF remote control of the key with the decoder from the
vehiclemust be performed. If the vehicleis provided with RF remote control key and this one
has been replaced,then perform the “ Simple synchronised procedure “. When the vehiclehas
both keys with RF remote control, thenperform the “Specificsynchronisedprocedure “ afterthe
replacementof the second key.
NOTE
- In the case only one key head is replaced, usually there is no need for
resynchronisation of the other RF remote control.
- If both RF remote controls are desynchronised, one procedure of resynchronisation
will be performed with each remote control: perform the “Simple synchronisation
procedure for the first RF remote control” and the “Specific synchronisation procedure”
for the second RF remote control.
Check then the operation of blocking/ unlocking of the doors with both RF remote
controls.
82A - 9
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
ELECTRIC CONTROL UNIT INJECTION REPLACEMENT
If further to the diagnostic, it is necessary the replacement of the E.C.U. injection, for its
dismounting, proceedas follows:
- disconnectthe battery (the contactbeing off);
- dismountthe screw from the battery attachmentclip;
- remove the battery;
- disconnectthe injectioncomputer from the engine wiring;
- dismountthe two attachmentnuts of the injectioncomputer.
For mounting, perform in the reverse order the dismountingoperations.
The injection computer is delivered not coded. It is necessary the memorising of an anti
starting code in the computer,after this has been mounted was mounted.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the contacton, without starting the engine, for a few seconds.
2. Take off the contact;after10 seconds,the anti starting function is activated,and the anti
starting indicatorwillblink rarely( one blink per second).
3. Set the contact on. The anti starting indicatormust turn off and the engine canbe started.
In order to disconnectthe injectioncomputer (E.C.U. injection)act upon the blocking lever
(picture9, positionA) of the connector in the directionof the B arrow, then the connectorwillbe
lifted in the direction of the C arrow.
In case the vehicle is blocked on the road further to serious damages of the anti starting
system,the “ Procedure repairing code introduction” may be used, which allowsthe moving of
the vehicleto the nearestDACIA service center for complete repairing. In order to perform this
procedure it is necessary the CLIP testerand the specific repairing code of that vehicle.
C
A
pict. 9
B
82A - 10
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
82A
A. ECU DECODER REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE AND ANTI STARTING
CODE MEMORISING
The new E.C.U. decoder is alwaysnot coded. After its mounting on the vehicleit is necessary
that this one is memorising the anti starting code in order to be operational.
NOTE
If only the E.C.U. decoder is replaced, there is no need of an intervention to the
E.C.U. injection (injection computer), which will keep the old anti starting code.
ATTENTION
After the E.C.U. decoder memorised the anti starting code, this code cannot be erased
or replaced with another one.
In order to perform this procedure, one of the keys of the vehicle and the CLIP tester are
needed. Perform as follows:
1. Connect the CLIP tester to the diagnostic socket and to the battery (or the lighter
socket)of the vehicle.
2. Readthe configuration of theold E.C.U.decoder in the followingway, beforedismounting
it from the vehicle:
- selectthe type “SUPERNOVA” and the “050” equipping level;
- enter the menu “ COMPUTER TEST” then choose “ ANTI STARTING”
- access “COMMAND MODE” then “CONFIGURATIONS READING”
- note the configurations found : petrol/diesel,programmingwith 1 or 2 keys,ceilingdelay,
the type of the doors’ blocking switch (CPE), etc.;
3. Get back to the menu “TEST COMPUTERS”
4. Remove the old E.C.U. decoder and replaceit with a new one, the contact being off.
5. Enter the menu “ANTISTARTING”,then select“ STATE LIST”. If the E.C.U. decoder
is new, you must find the following states:
18G FIRST CYCLE MEMORISING………………........................ ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING……………….. ACTIVE
19D UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING………………............. ACTIVE
OBSERVATION
If the states 19G and 19D are not “ACTIVE” this means the E.C.U. decoder has
been already used, so it isn’t new and cannot memorise another anti starting code.
Access the menu “COMMAND MODE” and then “CONFIGURATION”, where you will
configure the new E.C.U. decoder in the same way as the old one: petrol, 1 key, ceiling delay,
impulsion doors blocking switch,etc. selecting one by one these configurations, which you’ll
validatewith “CLICK” on the blue button on right top of the screen.
82A - 11
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
7. Get back to “ TEST COMPUTERS”
8. Set the contact on for 2 seconds in “M” position, without starting the engine. The anti
starting indicatorwillbeginto blink rapidly.
9. Access the menu “ STATE LIST”, where the followingstatesmust exist:
9D RECEIVED KEY CODE…………………………………………ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING…………………PASSIVE
10. Take the contact off. In the menu “COMMAND MODE” select “ACTUATORS”, then
validate“ FINISHED CALIBRATION”launchingthe commandon the blue rectangle situated
on the righttop of the screen.The message“COMMAND IN PROGRESS”willappear,followed
by “ FINISHED COMMAND”.
11. The anti startingindicatorwillblinkrarely.
12. Get back to the “STATE LIST”, which now, must be like that:
18G FIRST CYCLE MEMORISING ………………………………ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING...………………PASSIVE
19D UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING………………………. PASSIVE
13. Set the contact in “M” position for 2-3 seconds in order to send the code to the E.C.U.
injection.The anti starting indicatormust light for 3 seconds,thenturn off.
14. Take off the contact.After 10 seconds,the anti starting indicatorwillblink rarely.
15. Check the engine starting with both keys, and then take the contact off.
16. Check in the menu “ STATE LIST ” if the state 10G “ANTI STARTING” is “ACTIVE”.
Perform the synchronisationof the TRF remote control with the decoder (with 1 or 22 keys).
OBSERVATION
With the CLIP tester, a starting interdiction may be simulated, proceeding as follows:
- take the contact off; wait for 10 seconds, then the anti starting indicator will
blink;
- in the menu “COMMAND MODE” access “ ACTUATORS” then validate “
FORCED PROTECTION MODE” launching the command from the blue button
situated on the right topside of the screen. “COMMAND IN PROGRESS” will be
displayed and then “FINISHED COMMAND”.
- in the menu “STATE LIST” search for the state 10G ”ANTI STARTING”,
which must be “ ACTIVE”;
- set the contact on “M” position; the anti starting indicator will blink rapidly,
and the engine starting is impossible;
- remove the key from the contact and check then the engine starting with both
keys, so the procedure is finished.
82A - 12
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
82A
NOTE
For the RF remote control synchronisation, after the replacement of an E.C.U.
decoder, the synchronisation procedure must be performed taking into account the
following situations:
- for one RF remote control, perform the “SIMPLE SYNCHRONIS ED
PROCEDURE”;
- for the second RF remote control perform the “SPECIFIC SYNCHRONISED
PROCEDURE”.
B. KIT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
(E.C.U. decoder plus 2 key heads)
In caseof one kit replacementperform the followingsteps:
- memorising the anti starting code by the E.C.U. decoder
- memorising of the new anti starting code by the injectioncomputer; it is necessary the
repairing code (found out based on the old key heads code) and the CLIP tester.
Perform the actionsin the following sequence:
1. Mount the metal insertions of the old keys to the new key heads.
2. Send to Tech Line the key heads code, written on the vehicle invoice, in order to get the
repairing code.
3. Connect the CLIP tester to the diagnostic socket and to the battery (or to the lighter
socket)of the vehicle.Read the configuration of the old E.C.U. decoder before dismounting off
the vehicle, as follows:
- selectvehicletype “SUPERNOVA” and the “050” equipping level;
- enter the menu “ COMPUTER TEST” then choose “ ANTI STARTING”;
- access “COMMAND MODE” then “READ CONFIGURATIONS”;
- note the configurations: petrol/diesel,programming with 1 or 2 keys, ceilingdelay, the
type of the doors’ blocking switch (CPE), etc.;
4. Get back to the menu “ANTI STARTING”;
5. Dismount the old E.C.U. decoder and replaceit with a new one, the contact beingoff.
6. Check the configuration of the new E.C.U. decoder selecting“ STATE LIST”; here you
must find the followingstates:
18G FIRST CYCLE MEMORISINGPASSIVE…………………INACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING ……………….ACTIVE
19D UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING………………………ACTIVE
NOTE
If the state 19G and 19D are not “ACTIVE” this means the E.C.U. decoder isn’t a
new one and cannot memorise another anti starting code.
82A - 13
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
7. Set the contactin “M” positionwith one of the keys (withoutstarting the engine),for about
2 secondsand then check the followingstates, which must be:
9D RECEIVED KEY CODE………………………………………. ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING ……………… ACTIVE
8. Set the contactwith the second key (withoutstarting the engine) for about 2 seconds.
Check then the followingstates:
-case (a)- the second key belongs to the vehicle;
9D RECEIVED KEY CODE………………………………………. ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING……………… PASSIVE
- case(b)- the second key does not belongto the vehicleor the firstkey wasused once again;
9D RECEIVED KEY CODE………………………………………PASSIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING……………… ACTIVE
9. The anti starting indicator blinks rapidly.
10. Take off the contact. In the menu “COMMAND MODE” select “ACTUATORS” and
validate“ FINISHEDCALIBRATION”launching the command on the blue rectangle situated
on the right top of the screen. The message “COMMAND IN PROGRESS” will appear,
followed by “ FINISHED COMMAND”.
11. The anti starting indicator willblink rarely.
12. Get back to the “STATE LIST”, which now must beas follows:
18G FIRST CYCLE MEMORISING……………………………... ACTIVE
19G NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING……………… PASSIVE
19D UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING………………………PASSIVE
13. In the menu “COMMAND MODE” choose “ ACTUATORS”. Select the command “
FORCED PROTECTION MODE” launching the command from the blue buttonsituatedon
the right topside of the screen. The display will show “COMMAND IN PROGRESS” and
then “FINISHED COMMAND”.
Get back to the “STATE LIST “ and check the state:
9G FORCED PROTECTION MODE …………………………….. ACTIVE
14. Set the contacton “M” position.The anti starting indicatorwillstart to blinkrapidly. Check
in the “ STATE LIST” if the state “ANTI STARTING” is “ACTIVE”.
15. In the menu“COMMAND MODE” access“ACTUATORS”, then selectthe command “
MANUAL INTRODUCTION CODE”.Type the fourfiguresof therepairing code, thenvalidate
with the key “ENTER”. On the screen the message “COMMAND IN PROGRESS” will
appear and then “FINISHED COMMAND”.
16. Take off and then set again thecontact, without starting the engine, in order to send the
new anti starting code to the injection computer.Theanti startingindicator willlight for 3 seconds,
and then it willturn off.
17. The procedureis finished.Check the engine starting with both keys.
82A - 14
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
82A
NOTE
For the RF remote control synchronisation, after the replacement of a kit, take into
account the following situations:
- for the first RF remote control, perform the “ simple synchronised procedure”;
- for the second RF remote control perform the “specific synchronised procedure” .
C. CODE REPAIRING INTRODUCTION PROCEDURE
The repairing code may be introduced only by the meansof the CLIP tester. This is possible
only if when settingthe contact on, the anti startingindicatorblinks rapidly, this being confirmed
by the state:
10G ANTI STARTING……………………………………………..ACTIVE
After getting from DACIA database the repairing code (based on the code from the vehicle’s
key head),perform the followingoperations.
1. Connect the CLIP tester to the diagnostic socket and to the battery (or to the lighter
socket)of the vehicle.
2. The anti start up indicatormust blink slowly, the contactbeing taken off.
3. Set the contactin “M” position. The indicatormust blink rapidly.
4. Selectvehicletype “SUPERNOVA” and “050” equipping level.
5. Selectthe menu “ COMPUTER TEST”then choose “ ANTI STARTING”.
6. In the menu “ STATE LIST” find the state 10G “ANTI STARTING” which must be
“ACTIVE”.
7. Access “COMMAND MODE” thenselect“ACTUATORS”.
8. Selectthe command “ MANUAL INTRODUCTION CODE” where you willwrite the
repairing code (formed of four figures), then validateit with the key “ENTER”. The message
“COMMAND IN PROGRESS” will be displayed followed by the message “FINISHED
COMMAND”.
9. Now the procedure is finishedand you may start the vehicleengine.
ATTENTION
You may perform three essays of introducing the repairing code; if after the third
essay the code is not yet valid, wait for 15 minutes, take off the contact and then put it
again, other three essays being allowed.
NOTE
This procedure does not decode the injection computer, but allows only the start of
the vehicle’s engine. After ten minutes have passed from the first introduction of the
repairing code or after the disconnection of the battery, the vehicle’s engine cannot be
started unless a new repairing code is introduced.
82A - 15
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
PROCEDURES
D. SIMPLE SYNCHRONISED PROCEDURE
This procedure allows the synchronisationof a RF remote control with E.C.U. decoder and
is to be applied in thefollowingsituations:
- the RF remote control code is no longer in the range of the E.C.U. decoder reception,
becauseof consecutive pushing over a 1000 time on the RF remote control button.;
- the replacement of the E.C.U. decoder with a new one;
- the replacementof the RF remote control if the E.C.U. decoder is new (E.C.U. decoder
replacementplus a RF key.)
The followingoperations willbe performed:
- take off the contact
- push and maintainlike that for about 5 seconds,the doors locking switchlocated on the
dashboard ; the doors actuators are performing a closing/openingcourse.
- during the next 10 seconds, confirmed by the permanent lightening of the anti starting
systemindicator,push twice the RF remote control button; the doorsactuators are performinga
closing/opening course.
- the procedureof synchronisationis finished; check the blocking/ unlocking by pushing
the RF remote control.
OBSERVATION
During those 10 seconds you can visualise by means of the CLIP tester the state 17G
“THE
PROGRAMMIN G
IN
PROGRESS
OR
THE
TIR/TRF
RESYNCHRONISATION” which must be ACTIVE.
E. SPECIFIC SYNCHRONISED PROCEDURE
This procedure is used for the synchronisation of the second RF key with E.C.U. decoder
and willbe performed as follows:
- connect the CLIP testerto the diagnosticsocketand the battery (or the lightersocket)of
the vehicle.
- selectthe vehicle type“SUPERNOVA” and the “050” equippinglevel;
- selectthe menu “ COMPUTERS TEST” then “ ANTI STARTING”
- enter the menu “COMMAND MODE” and select“CONFIGURATION”
- validate the command “ PROGRAMMING THE SECONDTIR / TRF KEY”launching
the command from the blue button situatedon the righttop of the screen; the doors actuators are
performing a closing/openingcourse.
- during the next 10 seconds, confirmed by the permanent lightening of the anti starting
system, push twice the RF remote control button; the doors will block and then unlock and the
anti starting indicatorwillturn off. The second remote control is now synchronised. Check the
blocking/ unlocking by pushing the RF remote control.
82A - 16
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
FIXING THE INCIDENT “UNRECOGNIZED KEY CODE BY
THE E.C.U. DECODER”
For solving the incident “unrecognised anti starting code of the electronic key head by the
E.C.U. decoder”,observe the followinginstructions regarding solving this incident:
I. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
When settingthe contacton, the anti starting LED indicatorwillstart to blink rapidly. Try to
start the engine with the secondkey. If the engine starts, the failure is obvious: the key headof the
firs key is damaged (or it has another anti starting code) and must be replaced.
If the engine doesn’t start, evenwith the second key, and when settingthe contacton, the anti
starting indicator blinks rapidly, connect the CLIP tester to the vehicle, select COMPUTER
TEST- ANTI STARTING- STATE LIST, set the contact on and check:
Case 1: If the followingstatesare as follows::
ANTI STARTING…………………………………………………..ACTIVE
RECEIVED KEY CODE…………………………………………...ACTIVE
ACCEPTED KEY CODE…………………………………………PASSIVE
then the E.C.U. decoder from the vehicle hasbeen coded with other electronic key heads and
must be replaced.
Case 2: If the followingstatesare as follows:
ANTI STARTING …………………………………………………ACTIVE
RECEIVED KEY CODE ………………………………………… PASSIVE
ACCEPTED KEY CODE …………………………………………PASSIVE
repeat checking with anotherelectronic key head(operatingon a third party vehicle)mounted in
the metalinsertionof the original key.
If the states changes, like in case 1, the reading system of the anti starting code from the
decoding bushing is functioning, sothekey heads of thevehicle aredamagedand must be replaced.
82A - 17
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
If the statesremain unchanged, checkthe following:
- electric connectionsof the decodingbushing
- the electric connections between the E.C.U. decoder and the decoding bushing
- the tension of the battery must have more than 8V when the starter is activated.
If all these are conformable, proceed to the replacement of the decoding bushing, and then
check again the a.m. states.
II. SOLVING MODE
When an electric key head (or both) is damaged, order (Info TECH LINE 0248/213766) a
new set of two electronic heads, subject to the vehicle type, as follows:
TRF key head set
– item no. 6001 543 684, 1 set, for DSN equipped with
anti intrusion (CLIMA or RAPSODIE)
TR-TRF key head set – item no. 6001 544 452, 1 set, for DSN without anti
intrusion (CLIMA or RAPSODIE)
TR key head set
– item no. 6001 543 683, 1 set, for DSN EUROPA
Send to Tech Line (0248 213766), the chassisseries no, the anti starting code of the damaged
key heads, the anti starting code of the new key heads, and they will sent at their turn, to the
service center, the repairing code (taking into account that this code has a specialregime).
Additionally, there are necessary the new key heads, the E.C.U.decoder (obligatory TRF, if
the vehicleis equipped with centrallocking), the repairing code of the computer;proceed then to
the replacement of these itemsperformingthe following operation:
A) Replacement- checking electronic key heads:
Replacethe damaged key heads with the new ones (the metalinsertions remain the same),
then by meansof the CLIP tester,selectingCOMPUTERTEST- ANTISTARTING-STATE
LIST, check followingstateswith both keys:
If the statesare in the followingconfiguration, whensettingthe contact on, consecutivelywith
both keys:
ANTI STARTING……………………………………………..........ACTIVE
RECEIVED KEY CODE………………………………………….. ACTIVE
ACCEPTED KEY CODE…………………………………………PASSIVE
82A - 18
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
then the new electronic key heads are functioning and pass to the next step. If the states are as
follows,with one of the key, then both keys must beagain replaced:
ANTI STARTING…………………………………………………..ACTIVE
RECEIVED KEY CODE………………………………………… PASSIVE
ACCEPTED KEY CODE…………………………………………PASSIVE
B) Replacement – checking of the E.C.U. decoder:
Proceed at the replacement of the vehicle E.C.U. decoder with the new one, then check by
means of the CLIP tester (with the contact taken off), selectingCOMPUTER TEST- ANTI
STARTING- STATE LIST, the followingstates:
FIRST CYCLE MEMORISING………………………………….. PASSIVE
NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING……………………..ACTIVE
UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING………………………..…...ACTIVE
If one of the states NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING or UNLOCKED
KEY PROGRAMMING is not ACTIVE, then the E.C.U. decoder was used before and
must be replaced.
C) E.C.U. decoder coding:
Further on, perform the followingoperations:
- with the contact taken off, in COMPUTER TEST- ANTI STARTING- STATE LIST,
launch the command FINISHED CALIBRATION.
- set the contacton for a few seconds, the anti starting LED indicator blinks rapidly;
- take the contact off and validate the command FINISHED CALIBRATION (by the
blue button from the right side of the screen), in this moment the E.C.U. decoder is coded.
- check in the STATE LIST the followingstates which obligatory must be:
FIRS CYCLE MEMORISING…………………………………......ACTIVE
NOT PERFORMED KEY PROGRAMMING…………………… PASSIVE
UNLOCKED KEY PROGRAMMING……………………………PASSIVE
82A - 19
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
D) Memorising of the new code of the injection computer
- in ACTUATORSlaunch the commandMANUALINTRODUCTION CODE; type
the repairing code of the old key kit, then validateit with the key ENTER.
- the message“COMMANDIN PROGRESS” willbe displayedfollowedby themessage
“FINISHED COMMAND”.
- set the contact on; the anti starting LED indicatorwill start blinking, then take off the
contact;
- set the contact on for 10 seconds ; take off the contact;
- check if the engine starts with the two keys.
If the engine doesn’t start, repeat thisoperation (point D).
E) Key resynchronisation (remote controls)
-if the vehicle is equipped with only one remote control, its resynchronisation will be
performedas follows(simpleresynchronisation);
- with the contact taken off, push continuously on the central locking button from the
dashboard,up to the moment the anti starting LED indicatorremainslighted(the doorsactuators
are performing a closing/opening course.) From this moment, the operator has 10 seconds to
perform the next operation;
- push twiceon the remote control (the doors actuators are performinga closing/opening
course.) and the anti starting LED indicatorturns off;
- if the vehicleis equipped withtwo remotes controls,perform the simple resynchronisation
procedure for the first key and a specific resynchronisation procedurefor the second key, with
the CLIP tester as follows:
- in COMPUTER TEST select ANTISTARTING with the contact taken off, then
COMMAND MODE, CONFIGURATION; launch the command PROGRAMMING OF
THE SECOND TIR/TIE KEY and validate (the doors actuators are performing a closing/
openingcourse.). Then within10 seconds,push twiceon the remote control (the doors actuators
are performinga closing/openingcourse).
82A - 20
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
DIAGNOSTIC – FAILURES AND STATES INTERPRETATION
1. FAILURE OF COMUNICATION CLIP TESTER/ E.C.U. DECODER
RECOMMENDATION
Check if the lines K and L are not disturbed by another computer
of the vehicle.
Check the fuse state F15 (vehicles up to 01.06.2001) or F07 (vehicles after 01.06.2001).
Replacethe fuse if necessary.
Check if the CLIP tester is not the cause ofthe failure; check if the tester communicates with
another computer of the samevehicle(injectioncomputer).
Measure the tension of the vehicle’sbattery (U> 10,5V). If necessary, charge the battery.
Check if the E.C.U. decoder is well connectedto the vehicle’swiring.
Check the right supply of the E.C.U. decoder:
- presence of the ground at pin A8 of the E.C.U. decoder
- supply + I.C. at pin A9 of the E.C.U. decoder
Be sure that the diagnostic socketis proper supplied,according to the circuit diagram.
Check the continuity and the isolationof the electric wiring on the corresponding pins layout.
E.C.U. decoder A3
7 diagnostic socket
A4
15
{
}
If the connectiontesterCLIP – E.C.U. decoder can’t be established,then replacethe decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
After establishingthe communicationwith the tester,fix the
possiblefailures.
Perform a conformitychecking.
82A - 21
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
2. 4D STATE: + 12 V (+DC) SUPPLY, EXISTENT.
RECOMMENDATION Observation :
- 4D state = ACTIVE when the contact ison “M” position
- 4D state = PASSIVE when the contact is not on “M ”position
Check the F03 fuse state.
Replacethe fuse if necessary.
Place the contact on “M” position and check the presence of +12V at the pin A7 of the
E.C.U. decoder. Is there +12V?
YES Replacethe E.C.U. decoderif it can not be realisedits communicationwith the tester.
NO
Repair the electric wiring on the supply layout to the pin A7 of E.C.U. decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 22
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
3. FAILURE : DOORS BLOCKING CONTACTOR
RECOMMENDATION Check if the contactordoes not remain permanentlypressed due
to a mechanicalblocking.
Check the isolation related to theground of thewiring
between the E.C.U. decoder doors’locking switch
No
B2 pin
pole 1
B5 pin
pole 3
Is there a correct isolation?
Repair the electric wiring.
Yes
Replace the doors’ locking switch.
AFTER REPAIRING
Remove the memorised failure by meansof the CLIP tester.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 23
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
4. FAILURE: MISSING SIGNAL ON THE CODED LINE E.C.U. DECODERCOMPUTER INJECTION
RECOMMENDATION
Check the continuity and the isolationrelatedto the ground and + 12 V of the wiring between
the E.C.U. decoder PinA6
pin58 injection computer.
Fix it if necessary.
Set the contact on and perform the detection test by the CLIP tester at pin A 6 of the ECU
decoder.
Are there any impulses?
YES Replacethe injectioncomputer.
NO
Replace the E.C.U. decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
Remove the memorised failure by meansof the CLIP tester.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 24
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
5. FAILURE : DEFECTIVE COMUNICATIONANTI STARTING SYSTEM - E.C.U.
DECODER
RECOMMENDATION
-
Check the continuityand the isolationrelatedto the ground and + 12 V voltage of the wiring
betweenthe anti starting system pin 4
pin A2 E.C.U. decoder
Fix it if necessary.
Check the anti starting bushing supply : + 12V to the pin 3 and the ground to pin2.
Disconnect the E.C.U. decoder and measure the presence of +12 V to the pin A2 ofthe
decoder,the contactbeing taken off. If there it isn’t +12 V, check the fuse stateF15 (vehicles
up to 01.06.2001) or F07 fuse (vehicles after 01.06.2001).
If the problempersists,replacethe anti starting bushing.
Set the contacton and perform the impulsedetectiontest at the pin A2 of the E.C.U. decoder.
Is there an impulse ?
YES Replacethe anti starting bushing.
NO
Replace the E.C.U. decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
Remove the memorised failure by meansof the CLIP tester.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 25
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
6. STATE 11G: ACTIVATE THE RF REMOTE CONTROL/ RECEIVED RF SIGNAL
INDICATION
If the 17D state is PASSIVE, do not apply the next diagnostic
because the E.C.U. decoder is unused (new).
RECOMMENDATION Perform first the remote control synchronisation
Do not accessthe next diagnosticif the state11G remains PASSIVE
when activatingthe RF remote control at theblocking and unlocking
of the doors.
Check the blocking and unlocking of the doors using the second RF remote control. If this
is one is operating, then the battery of the first RF remote control should be replaced.
Check the presence of +12 V(+DC) at the pin1 of the anti starting bushing.
Is there +12V ?
YES
NO
Perform using CLIP tester, the impulse detection testat the pin 1 of the anti
starting bushing, when using the RF remote control.
Are any impulseswhen using the remote control ?
YES
Replace the E.C.U. decoder.
NO
Replacethe anti starting bushing.
Check the isolationrelatedto the ground of the electric wiring between:
E.C.U. decoder
Pin B1
pole 1 anti starting bushing
Pin B2
pole
door locking switch
Pin B5
pole 3
Is the isolation related to the ground good?
YES
Fix the electricwiring.
NO
AFTER REPAIRING
Replace the E.C.U. decoder.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 26
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
7. 11 STATE: OPERATE THE RF REMOTE CONTROL / GOOD RF SIGNAL
INDICATION
RECOMMENDATION
Do not accessthe followingdiagnosticunlessthe state 11D
becomesACTIVE when operating the RF remote control.
Check if the keys belong to the vehiclein question.
There is a desynchronising between the code of the RF remote control and the E.C.U. decoder
if at the activation of the remote control, the 111D state remains PASSIVE and the state 11G
becomes ACTIVE for 3 seconds, then becomes PASSIVE. The blocking / unlocking of the
doors is not possible in this case.
Apply the corresponding procedure of resynchronisation (for one or two keys).
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 27
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
8. 14G STATE : BLOCKING/ UNLOCKING DOORS
RECOMMENDATION The state 10G (anti starting) must be ACTIVE.
Check the continuity and the isolation related to the +12 V and to the ground of the electric
wiring on theline
E.C.U. decoder Pin B2
pole 1 door lockingswitch.
Pin B5
pole 3
Fix the electric wiring if necessary or replacethe switch.
If the incidentpersists, replacethe E.C.U. decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
Remove the memorised failure by meansof the CLIP tester.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 28
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
FAILURES LOCATING BASED ON CLIENT CLAIM
(algorithm for damage locating)
ALP1. MISSING COMMUNICATION CLIP TESTER / E.C.U DECODER
RECOMMENDATION Check if the lines K and L are not perturbed by another computer
of the vehicle.
Check the situation of the F15 fuse ( up to 01.06.2001) or F7 (after 01.06.2001)
Replaceit if necessary.
Be sure the CLIP tester is not the cause of the failure, by trying the communication with
another computer of the vehicle.
Check the tension of the battery (U>10,5V). If it is necessary, charge the battery.
Check the correct connection of the E.C.U. decoder to the wiring.
Check the supply of the E.C.U. decoder : - ground at pin A8
- supply (+IC) at pin A9
Be sure that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied.
Check the continuity and the isolation of the electric wiring on the pins’ line corresponding to:
E.C.U. decoder
A3
7 diagnostic socket
A4
15
If the dialogue CLIP tester– E.C.U. decoder cannot be established, then replacethe decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
When the communicationwith the testeris established, solve
the failures displayedby CLIP.
Perform a conformitychecking.
82A - 29
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP2. CONTACT SET ON. THE ANTI STARTING INDICATOR BLINKS.
(THE ENGINE DOES NOT STARTS)
RECOMMENDATION
-
Set the contact on.
No
Connect the CLIP tester.
Is there anycommunicat
ionwiththeE.C.U. decoder
?
See ALP 1.
Yes
Check the fuse F15 ( up to 01.06.2001) or
F07 ( after 01.06.2001) for anti starting No
bushing supply.
Is it good?
Replacethe fuse.
Yes
Set the contact on and check if the state 4D
becomesACTIVE ?
No
Study « STA
TE 4D : SUPPLY +12 V»
from the chapter DIAGNOSTIC.
Yes
No
Is the state 19 D PASSIVE ?
Yes
Cut out the contact. The anti starting indicator
willstart to blink after 10 seconds.(ACTIVE
Yes
anti starting ).
Set again the contact and check: the failure
« Defective communication decoder bushing ».
Doesexist such a failure ?
Perform « Procedure replacement
E.C.U. decoder and memorising anti
starting code » if the starter is new ;
if it’s not new, replace it.
Study « DEFECTIVE
COMMUNICATION
BUSHING – DECODER » from
the chapter DIAGNOSTIC
No
Try the engine start with the second key.
Doesthe engine start ?
Yes
No
82A - 30
vnx.su
Replacethe first key.
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
No
Isthe antistarting bushings correctlyfixed on the No
steering column and is itcorrectlyconnected?
Positionthe bushingand fix its
connection.
Yes
Check the continuity and the isolation
relatedto the ground and the +12 V wiring.
No
Pin2
ground
Pin3
supply +IC
Pin4
pin A2 of the E.C.U. decoder.
Is the wiring in good condition?
Fix the electricwiring.
Yes
Disconnectthe E.C.U. decoder and check the
No
presence of +12 V at pin A2 of the wiring.
Is there any tension?
Replacethe anti starting bushing.
Yes
Connect the E.C.U. decoder. Perform the
impulse detection test with the tester CLIP No
branchedto the pinA2 of the E.C.U. decoder.
Set the contact on and check the presence of
an impulse.Is thereany impulse?
No
Replacethe key.
82A - 31
vnx.su
Replacethe anti starting bushing.
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82A
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP3. THE ANTI STARTING INDICATOR REMAINS PERMANENTLY LIGHTED
(even whenthe contact is takenoff) OR ITREMAINSPERMANENTLY SWITCHED OFF.
RECOMMENDATION Check if the “Procedure E.C.U. decoder replacement” was correctly
performed.
Check the fuse F15 ( up to 01.06.2001) or
F07 (after 01.06.2001).
Is the fuse good?
No
Replacethe fuse.
Yes
Is there the failure “DOORS’ LOCKING Yes
CONTACT”?
Analysethis failure and replace.
No
Check the continuity and the isolationrelated
to the ground, between the pin A 5 of the No
E.C.U. decoder and the dashboard.
Is the wiring good?
Fix thewiring.
Yes
Perform the following tests in order to find the
failure element:
- if the anti starting indicator is permanently
lighted, disconnect the connector of the E.C.U.
decoder and check if the indicator switches off;
- if the anti starting system is turned off,
connect the pin A5 of the wiring connector from
the E.C.U. decoder to an electric ground and
check if the indicator turns on.
Are the answers affirmatives?
No
Replacethe instrument panel.
Yes
Replace the E.C.U. decoder.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
Remove by meansof the CLIP testerthe possible memorisedfailures.
82A - 32
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
ALP4. CONTA CT ON. THE AN TI STARTI NG I NDI CATOR BLINKS
QUICKLY (the engine doesn’t start)
RECOMMENDATION
-
Set the contact on.
Connect the CLIP tester.
Is there any communication between the tester
and E.C.U. decoder ?
No
See ALP 1.
Yes
Yes
Is the state 19D is ACTIVE?
Check the correct memorisation of
the anti starting code by the E.C.U.
decoder ; if not, replacethe decoder.
No
Check the continuity and the isolationrelated
to the ground and to the + 12V of the wiring No
between A6 decoder pin and injection
computer pin 58.
Is the wiring good?
Fix the electricwiring.
Yes
Perform the impulse detectiontest by means
of the CLIP tester connected to the E.C.U.
decoder A6 pin.
Set the contact on and check impulses
presence.
Are there any impulses?
Yes
Replacethe injectioncomputer.
No
Replace E.C.U. decoder or see the “ Kit
replacementprocedure “.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
Remove by means of the CLIP testerthe possiblememorisedfailures.
82A - 33
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82A
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP5. THE VEHICLE DOES NOT START
RECOMMENDATION
-
Is there the failure “SIGNAL MISSING ON
THE CODED LINE E.C.U. DECODER –
COMPUTER INJECTION?”
No
There is an engine problem.
Yes
There is a problem at the shock sensor.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
Remove by means of the CLIP testerthe possiblememorisedfailures.
82A - 34
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82A
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP6. BLOCKING/UNLOCKING DOORS NOT OPERATING
RECOMMENDATION Check with the CLIP tester the absence of the failures.
If there are memorised failures, thesemust be removed.
Are the doors blocking mechanismscorrectly No
operating?
Repair the damaged mechanisms.
Yes
Check the continuity na d the isolation related to theground
of the wiring between :
E.C.U. decoder
pin B8
actuators
Pin B9
doors
Is the wiring in good condition?
No
Fix thewiring.
Yes
Disconnect the E.C.U. decoder,then supply
the wiring connector with +12 V atpin B9 and
the ground at the pin B8, than versa (+ 12 V at
pin B8 and the ground at pin B9).
Are the actuators blocking/unlocking the
doors?
No
Damagedactuators.
Replacethem.
Check the continuity and the isolation related
to the ground of the wiring between
E.C.U. pin B8
switch
decoder pin B9
blocking doors
Is the wiring in good condition?
Yes
Yes
No
Repair.
Replacethe E.C.U. decoder, thenperform the “E.C.U. decoderreplacement
procedure”.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 35
vnx.su
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP7. UNLOCKING DOORS NOT OPERATING BY RF REMOTE CONTROL
RECOMMENDATION Check the absence of failures with the CLIP tester.
If there are memorised failures, these must be repaired.
Are the states 11G and 11D ACTIVE when No
the RF remote control is activated?
See the treatment states 11G and
11D cf. Chapter “Diagnostic”.
Yes
Check the fuse F15 ( up to 01.06.2001) or
No
F07 (after 01.06.2001).
Is it good?
Replacethe fuse.
Yes
Activate thedoors’ locking switch from the No
dashboard.
Are the doors blocking/ unlocking?
See the treatment of the failure
“Doors blocking contact” and the
state14 G cf. Chapter“Diagnostic”.
Yes
See ALP 6.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 36
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82A
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP8. TURNING LIGHTS DO NOT SWITCH ON AT THE BLOCKING /
UNLOCKING OF THE DOORS
RECOMMENDATION
Check the absence of the failures with the CLIP tester.
If thereare failures,fix them first.
Check if the synchronisation of the RF remote control and the E.C.U. decoder has beenperformed.
Are the turning lights functioning normallyat the activationof the signallingswitch?
No
Yes
Check thecontinuityand theisolation relatedto
the ground and the +12V of the electriclayout:
E.C.U. decoder
FLASH relay
Pin B3
pole 2
Is it correct?
Repairthesignalling system.
Check the fuse F03 and F04.
No
Fix the electric layout.
Yes
Check the fuse F15 ( up to 01.06.2001) or
F07 (after 01.06.2001).
Is it good?
No
Replacethe fuse.
Yes
Disconnectthe FLASH relay. Supply with
+12, the pole 4 of the relay. Are the left
turning lights turning on? Supply with+12 V
the pole 5 of the signalrelay.
Are the right turninglights turning on?
No
Repair the electriclayout from
poles 4 and 5 of the FLASH relay.
Yes
Replacethe FLASH relay.
AFTER REPAIRING
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 37
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82A
DIAGNOSTIC
ALP9. THE CEILING LAMP DOES NOT SWITCH ON AT THE BLOCKING /
UNLOCKING OF THE DOORS OR IT REMAINS PERMANENTLY TURNED ON.
RECOMMENDATION
Check the absence of failures with the CLIP tester.
If thereare memorisedfailures, fix them first.
Check if the doors are locked? Yes The ceiling lamp wasin the Yes
position “permanently
Hasthe ceilinglamp turned on?
lighting”.
No
No
Unlock the doors with the RF remote control.
The ceiling is in the position“domelighting”
Hasthe ceilinglamp turned on?
Yes
No
Was the E.C.U. decoder configured “With No
domeceiling”?
Check the isolation of the wiring
relatedto the ground on the line pinA1.
decoder
ceiling
After15 seconds,the ceiling lampwill
turn off.
Normal operation.
Configure the E.C.U. decoder with
the CLIP tester.
Yes
Check the continuity on the line
E.C.U. decoder pin A1
ceiling
Is the line good?
No
Repair .
Yes
Check the ceilinglamp bulb.
AFTER REPAIRING
Normal
operation.
Perform a conformitychecking.
Check the operation of the anti starting system.
82A - 38
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
82A
THE CONFORMITY CHECKING
Next, the checking of different statesand configurationsof the anti starting systemis to be
performed.
RECOMMENDATION
Nr.
crt.
Function
In caseof finding some failures at the diagnosticby meansof
the CLIP tester,analyse them based on the diagnostic (ALP)
corresponding to the respectivefailure.
State / configuration
1. Conformity E.C.U decoder Computer identification
2. Remote control type
3.
4.
5.
6.
2G = remote control
configuration
Dome ceiling
Without dome ceiling or
with dome ceiling
Key programming
3G = configuration key
programming
Configuration petrol/ diesel 3D = configuration coded
diesel electric valve
Forced starting protection 9D = forced protecting mode
7. Anti starting state
10G = anti starting
8. Key presence
8D = key present
9. Code key receiving
9D = received key code
10. Correct key code
10D = right key code
82A - 39
vnx.su
Observations
Display of the E.C.U.
decoder item
IR = infrared
RF = radio frequency
Validation on the blue button
on CLIP screen
With one or 2 keys
Without = for petrol engine
With = for diesel engine
ACTIVE = only after
validation on the blue button
ACTIVE = with the contact
taken off or after 10 seconds
from the contact taken off
ACTIVE at the setting on the
contact if there is a coded key.
NOTE: the states 8D, 9D,
10 D must be ACTIVE at a
correct operation
ACTIVE at the setting on the
contact if the key is coded in
a good format
ACTIVE at the setting on the
contact if the key is coded in
a good format and has the
correct code.
NOTE: after the analyse of
the states 8D, 9D, 10 D the
contact will be set o when
the LED indicator blinks
(ACTIVE anti starting)
82A
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DIAGNOSTIC
11. Remote control signal reception
11G = activate the RF
remote control
Received signal indication
12. Remote control signal validation
11D = activate the RF
remote control
Good signal indication
13. Communication doors locking
switch E.C.U. decoder
14G = blocking/ unlocking
ACTIVE for 3 seconds
decoder receives the
the remote control
signal
ACTIVE for three sec.
if the signal received at
the decoder is good
ACTIVE when the
E.C.U. decoder receives
control from the
doors’ locking switch
14. Communication E.C.U .decoder - 14D =activation of the doors
ACTIVE doors when
doors actuators
actuators
the E.C.U. decoder
sends the command
blocking/unlocking to
the actuators of the
doors.
15. The state of the doors contact
16G = doors contact
ACTIVE when the
front doors are opened.
NOTE: the state
ACTIVE occurs also
if fronthoodor hatchback
are opened when the
vehicle is equipped
with antiintrusionsystem
16. Remote controls synchronisation in 17G =programming in progress ACTIVE when the
process
or resynchronisation TIR/ TRF remote control
resynchronisation
procedure is in process
17. RF remote controls synchronisation 17D = not performed TIR
ACTIVE when the
not performed
programming
remote control
synchronisation is not
performed.
18. Not performed key code programming 19G = unperformed key
ACTIVE when the
programming
key programming is
not performed
19. Validated key code programming
19D= unblockedkey programmi
ng ACTIVE when the
validation of the key
programming is not
performed
20. The programming of the first key 18G = the memorising of the
ACTIVE when the
first key
programming of the
first key is in process
82A - 40
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
82B
GENERALITIES
DESCRIPTION
The anti intrusion system has the purpose of peripheral protection of the vehicle and the
volumetricprotection of the passengerscompartment (cockpit)and has the following components:
1
3
6
4
2
5
7
The ECU anti intrusion (1) is locatedunder the central console, being attached under the
climatecontrol unit and receivesinformation from the volumetric sensors and from the contacts
of: front doors, engine hood and tail hatchback.
In case of an intrusion into the vehicle, when the system is activated, ECU will start the siren
combined with intermittent lightening of the turning lamps.
The volumetric sensors (2) are fixed on the upholstery of the left and right upper part of the
pillars. After the activation of the anti intrusion systemwith the remote control, the sensors can
supplyinformationto the ECU concerning theinterior volume of thecockpit, which,in caseof its
modificationwillproduce the siren starting and the intermittent lighteningof the turninglamps.
The siren (3) is fixed on a frame, beinglocatedin the climatecontrol unit and it is controlled by
the ECU anti intrusion.
The intrusionLED indicator (4) is locatedon the dashboard, on the left side and it indicatesif
the systemis activatedor not and in caseof an aggressionon the vehicle, the indicatorwillshow
the type of aggression.
The contacts of the front and rear doors (5), of the engine hood (6) and of the hatchback (7)
are supplying informationconcerning their opening, to the ECU antiintrusion,when the systemis
activated.
82B - 41
vnx.su
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
SYSTEM FUNCTIONNING
Theantiintrusion systemmay be activated or deactivated by pushing the button of theRF remote
controlof the vehicle key and it is achieving the peripheral protection of the vehicle and the volumetric
protection of the cockpit.The activation of the systemis indicatedon the instrument panel by the LED
indicator,whichwillstartto blink, and is confirmedby twoblinks of the turning lights. Deactivationis
confirmedby a blinkof the turninglightsand LED indicatorswitchingoff.
In caseof the vehicles equipped with centrallocking system,thedoorswilllock when the system
is activated and willunlock when deactivatingthe anti intrusion system.After 40 secondsfrom
remote control activation, the opening of a door,of the hood or the hatchbackwillcausethe siren
startingand turning lights blinking for 30 seconds; after30 seconds, the systemremainsactivated.
During those 40 seconds, the volumetric sensors will “read” the volume of the cockpit, this
“reading” being reinitialisedon every activationof the system,in order to take into account the
potentialvolume modifications.Any modificationsof the inner volume of the cockpit ( broken
window glass, intrusion in the cockpit or movement inside the cockpit) will perturb the ultrasoundemissionfield causing the siren starting.
The system does not normally operate unless all doors, the engine hood, the hatchbackand
the window glassesare properly closed.If one of the front doors,theengine hood or the hatchback
is not well closed, at the doors locking with the RF remote control, the turning lights will not
switch on at all. At the deactivationwith RF remote control, the traffic indicatorswillswitchon,
just once.
ATTENTION
In case of one door opening by key, while the anti intrusion system is
activated, the siren will start and it can be stopped by pressing the remote button or by
introducing the PIN code which is written on the vehicle invoice.
82B - 42
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
THE PIN CODE
82B
The PIN code is formed of four figures and it can be used only for deactivatingthe anti intrusion
system,if this operation can not be performed by pushing the deactivating button from the RF
remote control of the vehicle.
For introducing the PIN code, perform as follows:
- set on the contactkey in the M positionand take it off it for threetimesin seven seconds,
after which the anti intrusion LED indicatorwillswitch on for three seconds;
- set on the contact again on the M position and maintainit until thenumber of the LED
blinks is equal with the first figure of the PIN code, then take off the contact;
- set on the contact in theM positionand maintainit untilthe numberof LED blinks is equal
with the second figure of the PIN code, then take off the contact;
- perform the above mentioned methodin order to introduce the third and the fourth figure
of the PIN code;
- after that, the systemis deactivatedand the siren stops automatically;
- set on the contactagain – the anti LED indicatormust switch on, confirmingin this way
that the correct introduction of the PIN code.
ATTENTION
If it is necessary the checking of the PIN code, this will be performed
only after al least 20 seconds have passed, since the anti intrusion ECU has been
connected to the vehicle’s wiring or since the connecting of the vehicle’s battery.
The COBRA anti intrusion system can operate in three different modes (2,3 or 4).
For theSuper Nova vehicles,the systemhas been programmedto workin the second operation
mode. If by mistake the PIN code was introduced in less than 20 seconds since the battery
connectingor sinceconnecting the anti intrusion ECU, this caninvolve the change of the operation
way of the system,which willgenerate errorsduring the operation. Thereis,although, the possibility
of reprogramming the correct operation way (type 2) and in this purpose, perform the following
operations :
- disconnectand thenreconnect the anti intrusion ECU; when connecting the anti intrusion
ECU the anti intrusion LED indicatorwillswitch on once, confirming the correct connecting;
- after at least 5 secondsfrom the previous operation,but no more than 20 second from it,
perform the followingoperations:
- set on the contactkey in the M position for three times and then release it;
- the anti intrusion LED indicatorwillswitch on for threesecondsand then willswitchoff;
- set on againthe contact key in the “M” positionand maintainit,countingtwo blinks of the
anti intrusion LED indicator,then take off the contact;
- the LED indicator willblinkfor two timesin two series, confirmingin this way the proper
performanceof the previous operations;
press the doors locking button of the dashboard, in order to lock and unlock the doors; the anti
intrusion LED indicatormust not blink;
82B - 43
vnx.su
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
THE SYSTEM’S MEMORY
- get off the vehicle and press the button of the RF remote control – the doors of the vehicle
will lock and the anti intrusion indicator will start blinking, confirming that the anti intrusion system
is activated;
- press again the button of the RF remote – the doors will unlock and the anti intrusion LED
indicator must switch off.
THE SYSTEM’S MEMORY
If after the deactivatingcommand of the system,the turning lightswillblink four timesand a
sound willbe heard also four times,this proves that previous the deactivating,an activecycle of
the system has taken place and the reason for it will be shown by the LED indicatoras follows:
LED indicator
Cause
1 blink
Engine hood, door or hatchback opening
3 blinks
Volumetric detection
4 blinks
Starting attempt detected
8 blinks
Errant communication with the siren
This cycle indicatingthe aggressiontype, stopsafter settingon the contact.
TEMPORARY CANCELLING OF THE VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
In caseyou want to let a windowglasspartiallyopened or a passengerremainsin the vehicle,
it is possibleto temporary cancelthe volumetric protectionfunction,but the peripheralprotection
remainsactive.Proceed as follows:
- set on the contact key in the M position and then take it off, in no more than seven
seconds;
- get off the vehicle and press once the button of the remote control, in no more than 20
seconds.
The volumetric protectionis again activeafter the next locking of the doors using the remote
control.
82B - 44
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
FUNCTIONAL CHECKING OF THE SYSTEM
82B
Perform the followingcheckingstepsafter lockingusingthe RF remote control, the doors, the
engine hood and the hatchback.The operationsmust be performed in no more than 40 seconds
sincethe anti intrusion systemhas been activatedwith the RF remote control; if operating after
these40 seconds,the siren willstart and the turning lights willblink.
Volumetric protection checking.
Functional checking of the peripheral
protection.
Lower the rear windows with about 10
cm. Close the doors, the engine hood
and the hatchback.
Check out if there is any movement in
the cockpit.
Activate the system pressing the button
of the RF remote control.
Introduce a hand through the window,
inside the cockpit and move it.
The LED indicator will blink quickly,
showing there has been a volumetric
detection and that volumetric sensors are
functioning correctly.
Deactivate the system using the RF
remote control, then close all the
vehicle windows.
Close the doors, the engine hood and the
hatchback.
Activate the system pressing the button
of the RF remote.
The doors will lock and the LED indicator
will blink.
Open a door with the vehicle key.
The LED indicator will continuously beon,
and a sound signal (buzzer) will be heard.
Close the door. The sound signal (buzzer)
will stop.
Deactivate and reactivate the system
with the RF remote control.
Reactivate the system and then hit by
ha nd the windows surfa c e of the
vehicle. The LED indicator should
continue to normally blink and the siren
starting shall not occur.
Repeat a.m. operations for both front
doors, engine hood and hatchback.
Deactivate the system by pressing the
button of the RF remote control.
The doors will unlock and the LED
indicator will go off.
The proper operation of the anti intrusion system on different situations must be according to
those shown in Table 01.
For detecting the causes of possible incidents of the anti intrusion system, perform the checking
steps presented in Table 02.
82B - 45
vnx.su
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
FUNCTIONAL CHECKING OF THE SYSTEM
ATTENTION
Checking the wiring continuity between the components of the anti intrusion
system shall be performed only after disconnecting the anti intrusion ECU and the
siren.
CHARACTERISTICS
- nominal supply tension ……………………………………… 12 V after contact
- operation tension …………………………………………..9 –16 V after contact
- consumption at 12 V after contact:
- on deactivated state ………………………………………….< 8mA
- on activated state ……………………………………………...< 13mA
- operation temperature anti intrusion ECU …………………- 40
+85º C
- operation temperature of siren ………………………………- 40
+85º C
acousticpower …………………………………………………> 118 dB (A) from a distance
of 1 meter
82B - 46
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
TABLE 1
82B - 47
vnx.su
82B
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
TABLE 1
82B - 48
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
TABLE 2
82B - 49
vnx.su
82B
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
TABLE 2
82B - 50
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING
OF THE ANTI INTRUSION ECU
82B
If after a completechecking of the anti intrusion system,the replacementof the E.C.U. anti
intrusion is required,proceedas follows:
- remove from the central consolethe tape recorder’sframe and the tape recorder pulling
backward but withoutdisconnectingthe tape recorder from the vehicle’swiring;
- dismountby detachingthe aeration grilllocatedon the right side of the central console ;
- dismount the two screws attaching the ECU support in the right side of the climate
control unit;
- take off the anti intrusion ECU together with its support through the central zone of the
central console;
- disconnect the 24 ways connector from the anti intrusion ECU proceeding as follows:
remove towards exterior the two blocking clipsof the connector and then carefully pull out the
connector;
- dismountcarefully the two way connectorfrom the anti intrusion ECU;
- dismountthe two screw attachingthe anti intrusion ECU on its support;
- proceed the in reverse order of the dismounting;
- check the proper operation of the anti intrusion system.
82B - 51
vnx.su
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
SIREN DISMOUNTING –REMOUNTING
If siren dismounting is required, proceed as follows:
- dismountthe two attachmentnuts of the siren on its support;
- pull carefullythe blocking clip of the wire connector to the siren and thendisconnectthe
siren;
- connect to the siren the connector of the wiring, by pushing, until you hear a “click”
confirming the correct connecting, then mount the two attachment screws of the siren on the
support;
- check the proper operation of the anti intrusion system.
82B - 52
vnx.su
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING OF THE HOOD CONTACT
82B
The engine hood connector is dismounted as follows:
- easypull the blocking clipof the wiring connector and then disconnect the engine hood contact;
- press the blocking clips of the lateral sides of the contact;
- push upward the contactin order to remove it from its place.
Mountthe new contact in its support by downward pushing, until a “click” is heard, confirming
the correct connecting.
Connect the wires connector to the contact of the hood.
Check the proper operation of the hood contactand of the anti intrusion system.
82B - 53
vnx.su
82B
HORN - ENGINE IMMOBILISER
VOLUME SENSOR DISMOUNTING – REMOUNTING
NOTE
If the dismounting / remounting of the front doors or hatchback contacts,
check after that, the correct operation of the anti intrusion system.
LEFT SIDE VOLUME SENSOR REPLACEMENT
If sensorreplacementis required, proceed as follows:
- take out carefully the sensorfrom its support by detachingfrom clips;
- dismountthe attachmentscrew of the sensorsupport on the front left pillar upholstery.
- dismountthe three attachmentscrews of the upper upholstery of the front left pillar and
carefully remove the upholstery;
- carefullydisconnectthe sensorconnector from the vehicle’swiring;
- mount the new volume sensor and its support performing the above mentionedoperations
in reverse order, and then checking the proper operation of the anti intrusion system.
ATTENTION
Be sure that the volume sensor mounted on the left side has marked the
letter “T” on the red colour collar.
Mount the volume sensor in such way, to be oriented towards the back of the vehicle,
parallel with the side windows.
RIGHT SIDE VOLUME SENSOR REPLACEMENT
If sensorreplacementis required, proceed as follows:
- take out carefully the sensorfrom its support by detachingfrom clips;
- dismountthe attachmentscrew of the sensorsupport on the front right pillar upholstery.
- dismountthe three attachmentscrewsof the upper upholstery of the front right pillar and
carefully remove the upholstery;
- carefullydisconnectthe sensorconnector from the vehicle’swiring;
- mount the new volume sensor and its support performing the above mentionedoperations
in reverse order, and then checking the proper operation of the anti intrusion system.
ATTENTION
Be sure that the volume sensor mounted on the right side has marked the letter
“R” on the white colour collar.
Mount the volume sensor in such way, to be oriented towards the back of the vehicle,
parallel with the side windows.
82B - 54
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL ( until 01.06.2001)
A . INSTRUMENT PANEL – CONNECTORS DISPOSAL
( until 01.06.2001)
B
C
A
D
83-1
vnx.su
83
83
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONNECTORS ( until 01.06.2001)
The correspondence betweenthe positions from A,B,C,D connectors of the instrument panel
and the components of the vehicle electric equipmentis the following:
CONNECTOR C
CONNECTOR A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Free
Rear window defrosting indicator
RPM
Cooling fluidtemperature indicator
Oil pressure warning
Coolingfluid temperature warning
Left turning indicator
Left turning indicator
Hazard lights indicator
Instrument panel ground
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CONNECTOR D
CONNECTOR B
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Instrumentpanel lighting
Ground
Anti starting indicator
Supply (+ IC)
Free
Injection failureindicator
High beamindicator
Free
Free
Right turning indicator
Right turning indicator
Supply ()+DC)- after contact
Hand brake, braking systemfailure warning
Brake pads wear indicator
Free
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Battery charging circuitfailure indicator
Fuel minimum level warning
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
83-2
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL(after 01.06.2001)
B. INSTRUMENT PANEL – CONNECTORS DISPOSAL
(after 01.06.200
1)
83-3
vnx.su
83
INSTRUMENT PANEL
83
CONNECTORS(after 01.06.2001)
The instrument panel is provided with three connectors having the following plugs
correspondence:
CONNECTOR V
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Instrumentpanel lighting
Ground
Rear window defrosting indicator
High beamindicator
RPM
Supply (+DC) after contact
Free
Ground
Right turning indicator
Left turning indicator
CONNECTOR Z
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Hazard indicator
Water temperature warning
Supply (+DC) after contact
Ground
ICP and handbrake warning
Brake pads wear warning
Fuel level indicator
Fuel level minimum warning
Battery chargingindicator
CONNECTOR X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Low beam indicator
Anti starting indicator
Supply(+IC) anti starting indicator
Injection failureindicator
Oil pressure warning
Water temperature indicator
NOTE
In case of the interventions on the instrument panel, check the existence of the
rubber isolating elements on the windscreen lower cross bar, placed behind the
instrument panel.
For the vehicles corresponding to the pollution norm EURO 2000, at the X connector,
position 4 is “ OBD anti-pollution failure indicator”.
83-4
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL REPLACEMENT
83
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectingbattery.
Dismountingflexible shaft( speedometer cable)from the gearbox.
Dismountingcontrolcable from the recycling flap.
Dismountingsteering wheeland thesteering wheelcasing.
Dismounting dashboard lower fairing.
Dismounting documentscompartment.
Disconnectdocuments compartment lamp.
Dismounting central console.
Dismountingflapscontrol cables from the climatecontrolunit.
Disconnecting: cigarettelighter,climatecontrol lighting, ashtraylighting, climatecontrolswitch.
Dismountingheadlampsadjustmentcontrolfrom the dashboard.
Dismounting dashboard from the windscreen lower cross bar.
Disconnectingflexibleshaft (speedometercable) from the instrument panel.
Disconnecting airconductingducts to aerators.
Disconnectingfront wiring from the instrument panel and from the dashboard wiring.
Dismountinginstrument panel attachment clampsfrom the dashboard.
Dismounting clamps from theinstrument panel.
Mountingclampson the new instrument panel.
Mountinginstrument panel with clampson dashboard.
Connectingflexible shaft to the instrument panel.
Connecting front wiring to the instrument panel and to the dashboard wiring.
Positioningand fixing air conductingducts.
83-5
vnx.su
83
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL REPLACEMENT
Positioningand fixing flaps control cablesto the climatecontrol unit.
Connecting dashboard wiring to: cigarettelighter,climatecontrol lighting, climatecontrolswitch,
ashtraylighting.
Connecting documents compartment lamp.
Mounting documentscompartment.
Mountingcentralconsole.
Mountingdashboard lower fairing.
Mountingsteering wheelcasingand steering wheel.
Mountingflexible shaft to the gearbox.
Mounting control cable to the recycling flap.
Connecting battery.
Functionaltests.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
83-6
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISMOUNTING / REMOUNTING SPEEDOMETER CABLE
( FLEXIBLESHAFT )
83
NOTE
Dismounting / remounting of the speedo cable, may be performed only after
dismounting the instrument panel from the dashboard.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe battery;
Dismountthe dashboard lower fairing;
Disconnect the RPM sensor connector;
Dismount the speedo cable from the gearbox;
Dismountthe speedocablefrom instrument panel back part, by detaching itfrom clips, pushing
in the direction of theA and B arrows, then extract it acting in the direction of C arrow.
Remove the speedo cable under the dashboard.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
83-7
vnx.su
83
INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIAGNOSTIC
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT STILL ON
AFTER ENGINE STARTING
Check the oil pressure
The pressure is correct.
Replacethe oil pressure switch.
The pressure is not correct.
There is a failure in the oil circuit.
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT IS NOT ON
WHEN CONTACT SWITCH ON
Place the wire from the oil pressure switch to the ground.
Warning light is not on.
Warning light is on. Replace the oil pressure
switch.
Check if the bulb is not burnt.
Bulb is not burnt. Check the bulb
supplywiring and fix it.
Burnt bulb. Replaceit.
FUEL LEVEL INDICATORSHOWINGALWAYS FULL
Disconnect the connectionwire to the probe.
The indicatorcomesback
to zero. Replace theprobe.
The indicatordoes not come to zero.Is there
any ground short-circuit of the connection
wire to the probe?
Yes. Fix the wiring layout.
No. Replacethe indicator.
83-7
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIAGNOSTIC
83
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR NOT SHOWING CORRECTLY
Disconnect the connectionwire to the probe
Yes, Fix the
wire layout.
The indicator does not come to zero. Is
there a ground short-circuit of the
connectionwire to the probe ?
The indicatorcomes back to
zero.
Placeat ground, the wire connection
to the probe.
No. The indicatoris defect.
The indicatoris showing
full.Replace the probe.
Theindicator does not show full; the probe
wire is not connectedor broken.
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR NOT WORKING
Place at ground the connectionwire to the probe.
The indicatoris working. Replacethe
probe.
The indicatordoes not work.
Check the indicatorsupply and ground.
If correct, place atground the
connectionwire to the probe.
Not correct. Repair the ground or probe
supplywiring .
Indicator does not work. Fix the wiring between
the probe and indicator.
83-8
vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
83
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTERREPLACEMENT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe fuel tank-visitingcap, by acting upon the attachmentscrews.
Disconnect the transmitterconnector from the rear wiring / fuel tank cap.
Detach the clips of the hoses connectedto the fuel tank cap.
Rotate the probe attachmentflange from right to left, by about 1/3 rotation, until it is released
from the attachmentshoulders.
Pull out the assemblyfuel tank cap-fuel pump-level transmitter;
Dismountthe attachmentscrewsof the fuellevel transmitter.
REMOUNTING
Perform in the reverse order the dismountingoperations,checking carefully the condition of
the tank cap-sealing gasket.
ELECTRIC TESTS – FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
POSITION OF THE FUEL LEVEL
INDICATOR ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
4/4
3/4
1/2
1/4
0
minimallevel warning
83-10
vnx.su
R
transmitter
(W)
7+/-15 %
50+/- 5 %
97+/- 5 %
162+/- 3 %
280+/- 3 %
-
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
ANTI THEFT MECHANISM
84
(STARTING – IGNITION SWITCH)
The anti theft mechanismis placed on the right partof the steering column and has the purpose
to starter control when electric systemis connected,being provided in the sametime also with a
steering locking device, with anti theft lock.
NOTE
At the anti theft mechanism there is not any more marked G position (garage) because
it does not allow the taking out of the key in this position but helps in pin unblocking
for removing the mechanism from the steering column.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe steering wheelcasings.
Disconnecttheanti-starting bushing.
Removethe bushing off the steering column.
Disconnectthe switchconnectionwires.
Bring the key inthe intermediaryposition (exG).
Dismount the attachmentscrew (1).
Push the mobile pin(2) and pull backwards
the switch.
REMOUNTING
Mount the switchin its place.
Tightenthe attachmentscrew(1).
Connect :
- the switch
- the battery.
Positionand mountthe anti-starting bushing.
Connect the anti-starting bushing to the vehicle wiring.
Check the switch operation.
Mount the steering wheelcasings.
84 -1
vnx.su
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
84
ANTI THEFT MECHANISM
CONNECTING PLUGS REPLACEMENT
The operationsare to be performed after dismountingthe contact switch from the vehicle.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the attachment screws of the
blocking wedgeguiding.
Dismountthe connecting plugs.
REMOUNTING
Positionand mount theconnecting plugs.
Mount the blocking wedge guiding
Tightenthe attachmentscrewsof the blockingwedge guiding.
DISMOUNTING-REMOUNTING THE FIX AND MOBILE
HATCHBACKCONTACT (until 01.06.2001)
FIXCONTACT
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Disconnect the connections boxes from
the rear wiring.
Dismount the attachmentscrew(2) of the
guiding body.
Extract by detachingfrom clipsthe fix contact from the guidingbody.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
MOBILE CONTACT
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the contactattachment screw (1) on the hatchback.
Dismount the attachment screws of the obturator cap on the hatchback.
Disconnect the mobile contactconnectors from the consumers (license plate lamps,STOPS3 lamp, rear windowdefrosting).
Extract the mobile contact and its wiring.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operations in the reverse order, previouslychecking the contacts
base pins sliding.
84-2
vnx.su
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
UNDER WHEEL CONTROL MODULE
84
SIGNALIZING AND LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
DISMOUNTING-REMOUNTING
The lighting control switch equipping the SupeRNova vehicles includes also the turningsignalizing switch.
NOTE
The lighting control switch is not to be repaired.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe lower steering wheelcasing.
Cut the plasticcollar which is attachingthe wiring on the steering column.
Disconnectthe switchconnector from the front wiring.
Dismountthe switchattachmentscrew from thesteering column.
Dismountthe switch.
REMOUNTING
Tightenthe switchattachmentscrews.
Connect the switchconnector to the front wiring.
Positionthe plugs and fix with a new plasticcollar.
Connect the battery.
Check the switch operation.
Mount the steering wheellower casing.
84-3
vnx.su
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
84
UNDER WHEEL CONTROL MODULE
DISMOUNTING-REMOUNTING OF THE WINDSCREEN
WIPER-WASHING SWITCH
DISMOUNTING
Disconnect the battery.
Dismountthe steering wheelcasings.
Disconnectthe switch connector.
Dismount the windscreen wiper switchattachmentscrews(2).
Detachthe switch.
REMOUNTING
Fix the switch by tightening its attachmentscrews(2).
Connect the switchconnector to the front wiring.
Mount the steering wheelscasings.
Connect the battery.
Check the switch operation.
1
2
The SupeRNova vehicles are equipped with TAKOSAN type switches.
84-4
vnx.su
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
84
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
FOG PROJECTORSSWITCH
Pos
1
2
3
4
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
Pos
2
4
5
6
7
9
Destination
+ Parking lights
Fog lampsrelay control
+ Parking lights
Mass
84-5
vnx.su
Destination
Fog lamp
High beam, low beam
+ parking lights
Mass
Fog lamp
Fog lamp relay control
84
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH (impulsionaltype)
Pos
1
3
4
5
84-6
vnx.su
Destination
Relay control
+ Parking lights
Mass
Supply + after contact
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
HAZARD SWITCH
Pos
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
84-7
vnx.su
Destination
Supply + after contact
Supply+ permanently
Leftturning
Right turning
+ Parking lights
Mass
Hazard indicator
Turning switch
Supply+ turning relay
84
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
84
DOORS CLOSING SWITCH
5
1
2
4
Pos
1
2
3
4
5
3
84-8
vnx.su
Destination
Mass
Doors electric unlockingcontrol
+ Parking lights
Mass
Doors electric locking control
CONTROLS - SIGNALLING
AC STARTING BUTTON
2
4
Pos
1
2
3
4
1
3
84-9
vnx.su
Destination
Supply + after contact
Mass
+ Parking lights
AC control
84
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
85
DISMOUNTING-REMOUNTING OF THE WINDSCREEN
WIPER MECHANISM
The windscreen wiper mechanismis mounted into the climatecontrol box. This one, and his
componentstoo, are in the next detaileddrawing.
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe battery.
Release the protectors(A) from the axles.
Dismount the attachment nut (B) of the
windscreenwipermechanism’sarms and blades.
Dismountthe attachmentnut (C) of the axlesfrom the windscreen’slower frame; recuperate
the ruber gasketsand retainingwashers.
Disconnectthe wirring connectorsfrom the windscreen wiper electric motor.
Dismountthe mechanism’sattachmentscrew on the lower traverser windscreen.
Get off the mechanism.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
NOTE:
When mounting the windscreen wiper mechanism’s arms the windscreen wiper
electric motor will be aligned in“stopped at fix point”.
85-1
vnx.su
85
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
THE WINDSCREEN WIPER ELECTRIC MOTOR
The operationis to be performed after dismountingthe mechanismoff the vehicle.
DISMOUNTING
Dismount the attachmentnut of the control connectingrod (B) from the electric motoraxle.
Dismount the attachmentscrews of the electric motor on the mechanismsupport.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismountingoperationsin the reverse order.
NOTE
When remounting the connecting rods A and B shall be aligned the motor being
“stopped at fix point”.
REPARATION OF THE WINDSCREEN WIPER ELECTRIC MOTOR
Windscreen wiper electric motor(detaileddrawing).
85-2
vnx.su
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
85
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe electric motor off the mechanismsupport.
Reductordismounting :- dismount the cap attachment screws (B).
- loosen the adjustment screw of the rotor axial clearance.
Dismount : reductor cap and the gear.
Rotor dismounting : dismount the attachment screws(A) of the reductor casingon the electric
motor.
Dismount : reductor casing,rotor real gear and the rotor.
REMOUNTING
Clean the parts.
Check the parts condition (pinions, gears, and collector); replace the damaged or worn
parts.
Grease the parts with LiCaPb type II grease.
Mount : the rotor, rotor rear gear,reductor casing, pinion and the reductor cap.
Adjustthe rotor axial clearance; the screw (C) must slightly push on the rotor axle end.
Mount the electric motor on the mechanismsupport.
REPLACEMENT OF THE WIPER ELECTRIC MOTOR BRUSHES
The operationis to be performed after dismountingthe mechanismoff the vehicle.
85-3
vnx.su
85
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
WINDSCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
DISMOUNTING
Dismountthe electric motoroff the windscreen wipermechanism.
Dismount : the reductor and the rotor.
Unstuck the brushes A, B and E.
Remove the brushed.
REMOUNTING
Check the collectorcondition and its grooves.
Introduce the new brushesand check their freeslidingin the supports. Stickthenthe brushes.
Mount : the rotor and the reductor
Adjustthe rotor axial clearance, by means of the adjustmentscrew.
Mount the electric motor on the mechanism.
REPARATION OF THE WIPER ARM DRIVE AXLE
The operationis to be performed after dismountingthe mechanismoff the vehicle.
DISMOUNTING
Detachthe connecting rods (A) and (B) from axles.
Dismount the axles(1) off the mechanismsupport (2).
Depressthe splintedbushing
Dismount the axle; recover the bushing and the rubber gasket.
REMOUNTING
Check the rubber gasketscondition.
Clean the parts, to be free of oxides.
Grease the parts with LiCaPb type II grease.
Remount : the rubber gasketon the axle, axle, rubber gasket,and the bushing.
Pressthe splinted bushing.
Mount the axleson the mechanismsupport.
Greasethe joints withLiCaPb type II greaseand couple the connecting rods (A)and (B) on axles.
85-4
vnx.su
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
DIAGNOSTIC
85
THE WINDSCREEN WIPER IS WORKING
THE WASHER PUMP IS NOT WORKING
Place the pump plug (-) at the ground.
The pump is working. The groundwire
broken or not connected.
The pump is not working.
Perform a direct supply of the pump.
The pump is not working;
replacethe pump.
The pump is working.
Check if the connector exit is supplied
when acting the lever.
The contact end is voltage supplied; the
pump supply wire is broken or not
connected.
The contact exit is not voltage
supplied.Replacethe connector.
THE WINDSCREEN WIPER IS NOT WORKING
THE PUMP IS WORKING
Connect the motor casingat the ground.
The motor is working .
Repair the ground.
The motor is not working.
Check if the supply wires of the motor are
voltage suppliedat the contactexit.
+12V voltage existingat thecontact exit;motor
is not working. Check if the motoris supplied
The motor is supplied.
Replacethe motor.
The wires are not supplied; replace the
connector.
The motor is not supplied;motor
supplying wires broken or not connected.
85-5
vnx.su
85
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
DIAGNOSTIC
WINDSCREEN WIPER NOT WORKING AT HIGH SPEED; PUMP IS
WORKING
Check the gray wire supplying from the
wiring connector connected to the electric motor.
The wire is not voltage supplied;replace
the connector or fix the electric wiring to
the connector.
The wire is supplied.
Check the motor supplying.
The motor is not supplied;
the supply wireis broken or is connected.
The engineis voltage supplied; replacethe
motor.
WINDSCREEN WIPER NOT WORKING ATLOW SPEED; IT DOES NOT
STOP AT FIX POINT; PUMP IS WORKING
Check the green wire supplyingfrom the
wiring connector connected to the electric motor.
The wire is not voltage supplied; replace the
contactor fix the electric wiring to the connector.
The wire is voltage supplied
Check the electric motorsupplying.
The engine is voltage supplied; replacethe
motor.
The electric motor is not supplied;the supply
wire is broken. Fix it.
85-6
vnx.su
WINDSCREEN WIPERS
85
DIAGNOSTIC
WINDSCREEN WIPER WORKING ON BOTH SPEEDS, BUT IT
DOES NOT STOPAT FIX POINT; PUMP IS WORKING
Yes
Check existence of +12 V at the white
wire from the wiper
No
Fix the electricwiring
Check presenceof +12V at the
black wire on the return wiring No Replacethe wiper electric
motor
Yes
Correct operation. Check the electric
connections and fix it.
Check the correct operation of the switch
and timer.
Both are damaged.
Replace them.
85-7
vnx.su
R A D IO
86
GENERAL
1. ON / OFF
2. Keys < and > allowing configuration
changing
3. Keys + and – allowing adjustment
changing
4. Key “ source”.
4
1
The auto radio may be fitted in radiocassettes version with the possibilityof a CD
controlling.
2
3
The autoradio is ensuringthe followingfunctions:
- radio listening( on FM four geographicalareas may be programmed)
- displayingof the stationname in RDS on the best transmitter ( AF function).
- receiving of traffic information( TA function )
- receivingof short information and emergency announcements( PTYNEWS).
Radiofunction
- on FM four geographicalareas may be programmed
The radioreceiveris using threeselectionmodes that maybe seenon thescreenand approached
on the radio front side:
- manually( MANU )
- by pre-selection(PRESET )
- in alphabeticalorder (LIST)
Cassettes player
This functionis completelyautomatic,immediatelythe source has beenselected.
NOTE : only Dolby and both direction unwinding, with the blank searching( empty
spaces), are approachable by means of specific keys.
OBSERVATION: functionMUTEby vocal synthesisor telephone,is stoppingthe cassette
playing.
Thermal protection
If the radio temperature is too high for an optimal operation, the volume is automatically
reduced ( withoutmodificationof the volume on the display).
86 - 1
vnx.su
86
RADIO
GENERAL
Code protection
The radio is protected by means of a four digit code. This code is introduced by the
radio keys at each battery disconnection.
Code introduction by means of the radio keys : in order to valid one digit introduction,
push the next key ( see the operation technical book).
In caseof a wrong code, the instrument is getting blocked ( one minute for the first error, two
minutesfor the second error, four minutes for the third…)
After first code introduction, some configurations must be programmed ( see chapter”
configuration”).Theseare remaining programmedtill battery disconnection.
NOTE : the return to the “wave jammer” mode is possible by simultaneously pushing of the keys 2 and 5, putting the radio under tension. Wait then for two minutes.
Programming
OBSERVATION : in order to select the radio operation area, push simultaneously keys 2
and 5, putting the radio under tension.Wait then for about two minutes.Introduce the four digits
code, then:
- selectthe adequate area
-America
-Japab
-Asia
-Arabia
-Others (Europa, Africa, others…)
-Selectthe sound tonalitycurves:
- 0 : inactive adjustment
- 1 : Twingo
- 2 : Clio
- 3 : Mégane
- 4 : Laguna
- 5 : Top range
2
5
- speakers number configuration – with or
without rear speakers (REAR ON / OFF)
NOTE : it is not necessary to perform the configuration after radio code introduction,
further to a supply failure.
86 - 2
vnx.su
R A D IO
GENERAL
86
“ Expert “ operation mode.
In order to passin configuration( Expertmode), perform a long pushing (4 sec) on “source”
key until a beepis heard. This is allowingthe followingfunctionsadjustment:
- AF mode activation( automaticresetting)
- Volume modification subject to the vehicle speed (5 for maximal modification, 0 for
modification canceling)
- Loudnessmode activation
- Assisted radio receiver mode activation
- Number of speakers activation ( 2 or 4)
- Manualor dynamic listselection
NOTE: during configuration,one impulseon “source”key, is cancelingthe modifications.
Volume
The volume may be settledsubjectto vehiclespeed. For the activationof this function, select
the desired volume modification curve, by means of the “Expert “ mode ( push longer on the
“source”button, until a beep is heard): 5 for maximalmodification, 0 for modificationcanceling.
OBSERVATION : the auto radio is provided with a sound tonalitymodificationsubjectto
vehicletype.To modify that, see chapter “ configuration”.
Self-diagnostic
This mode is allowingsome main functionscontrolling:
- speakers testing
by simultaneouslypushing of 2 and 4 keys, the speakers are suppliedone by one. The displayis
enabling theirlocation.
- reception level testing ( after frequency displaying)
by simultaneouslypushingof 1 and 6 keys, the displayis showingthe radio receptioncriteria:
- 9 or letter = good reception
- 3 = defectivesignal
- 2 = stereo sound loosing
Keys testing
The introduction of this mode is performed by simultaneously pushing of 3 and ON/OFF
keys. Each key pushing may be seen on display. The exit from this checkingmode is automatic,
after all keys havebeen pushed.
86 - 3
vnx.su
RADIO
86
CONNECTORS
Connectors
Black connector (A)
Way
4
6
7
8
Denomination
Battery supply
Lighting supply
Operation supply
Mass
Brown connector (C)
Way
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
+
+
+
-
Denomination
Right rear speaker
Right rear speaker
Right front speaker
Right front speaker
Left front speaker
Left front speaker
Left rear speaker
Left rear speaker
OBSERVATION : the speakers are connectedin parallel on each exit.
86 - 4
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL ASSISANCE EQUIPEMENT
WINDSCREEN WASHING
87
WINDSCREEN WASHING ASSEMBLY
It is locatedin the leftpartof the climatecontrol box, being attachedwith an attachmentstrap (3)
and the windscreen washingelectric pump (2) is attachedon the reservoir (1) by meansof clips.
In the drawing, the following elements may be identified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Windscreen washingreservoir.
Electric pump
Attachmentstrap
Sustaining clip
Piping
Nozzles
T connector
DISMOUNTING
Disconnectthe battery;
Disconnect the electric connectors from the electric pump.
Disconnect the pipe connectedto the electric pump.
Dismountthe washingreservoir, releasingthe attachmentstrap.
REMOUNTING
Perform the dismounting operations in reverse order.
Check the nozzlesadjustment,in order to obtain correct windscreen washing.
87 - 1
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
89A
GENERALPRESENTATION
From the electric point of view, the electric diagrams of the vehiclehave been structured as
AppliedPrincipleSchemes(APS), which are presentedaccording to the function eachsystemof
thevehicle is having, from electricpoint of view. TheseAPSdiagramsalsocontaindetail concerning
the internal function of some simpleelectric components (contacts,relays), thus contributing to a
better understandingof the systemfunctioning and of the incident correct diagnosis.
The listof the functional diagrams is presented in chapter3, wherethevehicle AppliedPrinciple
Schemesmay be found. These are divided in: electric supply diagrams, massconnectiondiagrams
and systemfunctional diagrams.
The electric functional diagrams (APS), are presentedin chapter 8 and on these,the following
may be identified:
- electric components, marked by a 3-4 figures; their identification on the electricdiagrams
can be achievedby means of “index of components” – Chapter 4;
- couplings betweenthe electricwires, marked by the letterR followedby figures;they are
indicatedin the Chapter 5 list;
- mass connections,marked by the letterM followed by a figure or a letter,are indicated
in Chapter 5.
Each wire of the electric diagrams is marked by an alphanumeric code, representingthe wire
function,followed by figuresrepresentingthe wire sectioning.
The connectors and couplings betweenthe wires are presentedin chapter 12, where they are
drawn from the wires inlet to the connector/coupling. The wires entering each connector socket
are identified by meansof the above-mentioneddrawings.The Chapter 11 also includestables
with details about each wire entering the connector: wire locationin the connector socket,wire
sectioning,wire functioncode and its destination.
Abbreviation index- in chapter 2, the abbreviations used in the tables of chapter 12, are
detailedexplained.
Chapter11 includesthe index of wire functions in connectors and couplings, representingthe
listof all the connectors and couplings and helping to their easy identificationin Chapter 12.
The mass and coupling positionon the vehicleis presentedin chapter 6 and helps to identify
the electric mass fixing points on it and the locationof the couplings betweenits wires.
The electric componentspositionon the vehicleis presentedin chapter 7. The positionof the
various components with electric functions on the vehicle can beidentified by means of the
components list.
The cockpit fusebox is presentedin chapter 9 and containsinformation about its positioning,
the functionalpurpose of the fuse and their relays and the description of the wiring connectors
connectedto this one.
89A - 1
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
The fusebox from the engine compartment is presentedin chapter 10, that contains information
about its positioningon the vehicleand the functional purposeof the relaysand fuse placed on it.
The functionalcodes of the wires are detailedexplainedin chapter 13.
FUNCTIONALDIAGRAMS INTERPRETATIONS
The functionaldiagrams information included in Chapter 8 are to be interpreted taking into
considerationthe explanationreferring to the followingexample:
1 = vehicleclass
2 = manufacturingyear
3 = electric functional diagramdenomination
4 = criteria of equipment differentiation for identifying thefunctional diagram
5 = electric connector colour*
6 = connector graphical representation
7 = electric component index number
8 = fuses box number where the relay or the safety fuse are mounted.
9 = identificationof the safety fuse on the fusesbox
10 = safety fuse value
11 = identificationof wiring joints
12 = electric massidentification
13 = electric connectioncolour betweenwires*
14 = electric connectionidentification
15 = electric connectiongraphicalrepresentation
16 = symbol (sign) pages containingfunctional diagrams
17 = wire function code
18 = wire sectioning
19 = functionaldiagramnumber
The electric connectors (5) and the couplings(13) are symbolisedby the followingcolours:
BA = white
GR = grey
RG = red
NO = black
MA= brown
CY = white
BE = blue
VE = green
89A - 2
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
BLOWER COOLING
89A - 3
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
INTERPRETATION OF CONNECTORS WIRES FUNCTION INDEX
The informationconcerningthe function of the wires in connectorsand couplings included in
Chapter 12, are to be interpreted taking into account the explanationsbased upon the following
example:
1 = symbol (sign)of the pages containingconnectorsand couplings
2 = connector destination
3 = vehicleclass
4 = manufacturingyear
5 = name of the wiring on which the respectiveconnector is placed
6 = wire colour
7 = connector code
8 = component to whom the described connector is to be connected
9 = connector colour
10 = connector symbol
11 = indicationof the connector socket
12 = wire sectioning(mm˝)
13 = wire functionalcode
14 = wire destination
15 = chapter number and connectordrawing number
NOTE
Concerning position 6, please note that one X is marked, for one wire and two Xs for two
wires. The colour of the wire is to be symbolised only in case the electric track of the wire
representsone of the fundamentalstatuses: + permanent (+IC), + after contact(+DC), mass(-)
or controls.
The symbolsused for the wire colours are as follows:
A = white
AS= blue
GR= grey
N = black
G = yellow
V = green
M= brown
VI = violet
R = red
89A - 4
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
GENERALITIES
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
DETONATION SENSOR
1
11
CY2AE
12
MA
13
1
3DQ
2
3S
X
X
146
2 5
3
4
6
14
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
3DQ
3S
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATION INFO INJECTION
COMPUTER
ATMOSPHERIC PESSURE SENSOR
7
ZW3DT
A
8
147
9
VE
3GN
X
B
3F
X
88 - 07
89A - 5
vnx.su
C
10
3D
X
15
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
GENERALITIES
PARTICULARITIES REGARDING THE CONNECTORS
DISCONNECTING METHOD
Becausethis vehicleis equipped with electronics systems controlling and checking different
functions,it is necessary the execution of the electric connectionby meansof some connectors
provided with securing devices after coupling performing. Due to this reason, in case their
disconnectingis necessary, proceed observing the following observations:
pos. 1
pos. 3
pos. 2
pos. 6
pos. 5
pos. 4
pos. 7
- connectors for: ignition coil (pos.1), canister purging valve (pos.2), AC pressure sensor (pos.3),
atmospheric pressure sensor(pos.4), siren(pos.4), step-by-step engine (pos.5), valve potentiometer
(pos.6), cooling blower (pos.7) are to be disconnected after easy pulling the locking clamp in the
direction shown by the arrow.
A
A
pos. 8
pos. 9
- the connectors for: RPM sensor (pos.8), front hood contact(pos.9) are to be disconnected
after easy pullingthe locking clamp (A) in the arrow direction,for unlocking.
A
B
89A - 6
vnx.su
C
pos.10
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
89A
- the connector of the watertemperature sensor(pos.10) shallbe disconnectedas follows: push
the sensor connector in antipodes points, in the direction of the A and B arrows, achievingin this
way the unlocking of the ( C ) spur,then perform the disconnecting.
A
B
C
pos. 11
- the connectors of oil pressure contact (pos.11) and of the reverse driving contact shall be
disconnectedas follows:push in antipodes points in the direction of the (A)and ( B) arrows, achieving
in this way the unlocking of the connectorclaw,thenthe connector may be disconnectedby pulling
in the ( C) arrow direction.
A
pos. 12
- the connector of the choke sensor (pos.12) shallbe unlocked by pushing the clamp in the (A)
arrow direction, then the connector disconnectingmay be achieved.
C
A
B
pos.13
- the injectioncomputer (pos.13) – the unlocking is performed by acting upon the lockingclamp
(A) in the (B) arrowdirection, then liftthe connector in the (C) arrowdirection, achieving in this way
the computer disconnecting.Forreconnecting, perform the disconnectingoperationsin the reverse
order.
89A - 7
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
B
A
pos. 14
- the connector of the air temperature sensor (pos.14) and of the injectors (pos.14) – push the
locker (A) in the (B) arrow direction then the connector disconnecting may be achieved.
The reconnecting of thea.m. connectors shall be performed after their correct positioning, followed
by their pushing till aclick”
“
is heard, that will confirm thefirm and correct performing of theconnecting.
The connector of the oxygen sensor, the coupling connections of the rear wiring to the vehicle
doors wiring, the connections between the doors actuators and the doors wiring are attached to the
carriage body bymeans of clamps (pos.15). To unlock the clamps maintaining these connectors on the
carriage body,disconnect these connectors, easy push the clamp terminal (I) in the(A) arrow direction
and move the connector in the (B) arrow direction, parallel cu the attachment surface on the clamp.
The attachment of the connector on the clamp is achieved, proceeding in the reverse order, then
the disconnecting may be performed.
A
B
1
pos. 15
The connections between front wiring, dashboard, rear and engine are attached by sliding in the
supports. Next, the disconnecting/reconnecting procedure of the front wiring-dashboard (pos.16) is
presented, which are attached on a support placed under the dashboard, left side:
- remove the connection form the support (A), by pulling it in the (B) arrow direction.
- push the (C)-locking spur, then the connections disconnecting may be achieved.
- at reconnecting, push the two connectors till the correct connecting.
- position the connection in the (A) support guides, then push in the (D) arrow directions.
B
A
D
C
pos. 16
89A - 8
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
89A
In the sameway, shallbe proceed also foe thedisconnecting/reconnectingthe otherpreviously
mentioned connections.
The disconnectingof the UCE anti-intrusion (pos.17) shallbe performed as follows:
A
- push in the direction of the A and B
arrows, the two maintaining clamps of the
wiring connector;
- easy pull the 24-ways connector,
achieving in this way the disconnecting;
- disconnectthen, carefully, the two-ways
connector.
At reconnecting insertthe connector until a
“click” is heard, confirming the correct
connecting.
B
pos. 17
The disconnecting/reconnecting of the UCE decoder (pos.18 ) shallbe performed as follows:
A
B
- push the two clamps (A) and (B) in the
direction shown by the arrows;
- disconnectthen the connector;
- at reconnectingpush the connector until
a “click” is heard, confirming the correct
coupling.
pos. 18
The disconnecting of the two connectors of the radio unit (pos.19) shall be performed as
follows:
A
B
- push theconnectorslocking spur in thedirection
of the (A) and (B) arrows.
- disconnect the connector;
- at reconnecting position the connectors, then
push them until a ”click” is heard, confirming the
correct performingof the connection.
pos. 19
89A - 9
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
( until 01.06.2001)
NR.
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS DENOMINATION
AE1 AE2 AE3
1 ANTI-INTRUSION AE2(O), AE3
O
S
2 DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING
S
S
S
3 ANTI-STARTING
S
S
S
4 ELECTRICLIGHTER
S
S
S
5 CLIMATE CONTROL AE1, AE2
S
S
6 CLIMATE CONTROLANDAIR CONDITIONING AE1(O),AE2(O), AE3 O
O
S
7 TRUNK LIGHTING
S
S
S
8 CEILING LIGHTING
S
S
S
9 ASHTRAY AND DOCUMENT COMP.LIGHTING
S
S
S
10 CLOCK
S
S
S
11 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO AE1, AE2
S
S
12 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO AE3
S
13 STARTING CIRCUIT
S
S
S
14 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT AE1(series), AE2(series)
S
S
15 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT AE2(O), AE3
O
S
16 ELECTRONIC INJECTION AE1(series), AE2(series)
S
S
17 ELECTRONIC INJECTION AE3
S
18 ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT
S
S
S
19 MASS
S
S
S
20 MASS AE1
S
21 MASS AE2
S
22 MASS AE2(anti-intrusion), AE3
O
S
23 MASS AE1
S
O
24 MASS AE1(CA )
25 MASS AE2
S
O
S
26 MASS AE2(CA), AE3
27 MASS AE1, AE2
S
S
28 MASS AE2(anti-intrusion), AE3
O
S
29 MASS AE1, AE2
S
S
O
O
S
30 MASS AE1(AC), AE2(CA), AE3
31 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS AE1
S
O
32 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS AE1(CA)
33 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS AE2
S
O
S
34 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS AE2(CA), AE3
35 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS AE1
S
O
36 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS AE1(CA)
37 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS AE2
S
O
S
38 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS AE2(CA),AE3
89A - 10
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
HANDBRAKE INDICATORAND BRAKING SYSTEM FAILURE
FUELLEVEL INDICATOR CIRCUIT
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
INSTRUMENT PANEL AE1
INSTRUMENT PANEL AE2, AE3
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR CIRCUIT
VEHICLE SPEED
SOUND WARNING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING
REAR FOG LAMP
FOG HEADLIGHTS AE2, AE3
MEETING LIGHTS
REVERSEDRIVING LIGHTS
PARKING LIGHTS
ROAD LIGHTS
STOP LIGHTS AE1, AE2
STOP LIGHTS AE2(aileron)
STOP LIGHTS AE2(CA), AE3
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS AE1
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS AE2, AE3
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
Note : these electric diagrams are valid for vehiclemanufactured until 01.06.2001; AE1
( Confort), AE2 (Rapsodie), AE3 (Clima) representequipping levelsof the vehicle.
89A - 11
vnx.su
S
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS INDEX
(until 01.06.2001)
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
21
101
102
103
104
105
107
113
120
121
122
123
124
125
128
137
138
139
140
141
145
146
147
149
155
156
160
163
165
168
171
172
173
175
176
177
180
181
184
185
188
189
190
Right signalling anti-return diode
Electric lighter
Ashtray
Alternator
Anti-theft system
Acoustic alarm
Battery
Windscreen wiper timer
Injection computer (UCE)
Fog lights switch
Fog headlights switch
Door closing switch
Climate blower switch
Hazard switch
Rear window defrosting switch
Turning signalling relay
Right rear door actuator
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Right front door actuator
Windscreen wiper-washer switch
Detonation sensor
Atmospheric pressure sensor
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
Handbrake contact
Stop contact
Starter
Trunk lighting lamp
Documents compartment lighting lamp
AC compressor clutch
Right rear lamp
Left rear lamp
Left fog lamp
Right fog headlight
Left fog headlight
Left front door contact
Right front door contact
Right front parking lamp
Left front parking lamp
Cooling motor fan
Right rear loud speaker
Left rear loud speaker
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
216 Right front brake pad
217 Left front brake pad
221 Windscreen washing pump
222 Valve potentiometer
225 Diagnostic socket
226 Right headlamp
227 Left headlamp
230 Fog lamps relay
231 Fog headlights control relay
234 Cooling motor fan control relay
236 Fuel pump control relay
238 Actuators relay
244 Injection water temperature sensor
247 Instrument panel
250 Vehicle speed transducer
255 Right front turning lamp
256 Left front turning lamp
260 Cockpit fuse and relays box
261 Radio
262 Cooling motor fan and AC
267 Right side signalling lamp
268 Left side signalling lamp
272 Injection air temperature sensor
294 Rear window defrosting timer
298 Climate control lighting
319 AC starting button
321 Motor fan resistance ( for AC)
328 Left front ceiling lamp
329 Right front ceiling lamp
371 Canister purging valve
427 UCE anti-intrusion
438 Engine hood contact
442 Siren
454 Volumetric sensor
474 AC relay ( on board)
503 UCE decoder
560 Hatchback contact
584 AC compressor clutch control relay
597 Engine compartment fuse and relays box
600 Climate control blower
639 STOP-S3 lamp
649 Step-by-step engine
654 Anti-starting bushing
89A - 12
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS INDEX
191
192
193
194
195
196
199
205
209
210
212
Right front door loud speaker
Left front door loud speaker
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Fuel level transmitter and electric pump
Oil pressure contact
Lights, turning lights and horn switch
Electronic clock
Windscreen wiper motor
700
778
857
871
887
927
993
1091
1202
1335
1428
89A - 13
vnx.su
89A
Cooling blower low speed control relay
Ignition coil
FLASH relay
Hatchback contact separation diode
Upstream oxygen sensor
Chock sensor
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Braking system ICP
AC pressure sensor (pressure controller)
Front ashtray lighting
Climate control blower control relay
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
COUPLINGS LIST. MASS INDEX
( until 01.06.2001)
COUPLINGLIST
R53
R89
R107
R153
R154
R155
R156
R212
R265
R318
=BATTERYMASS WIRING/MASS STRIPE (J) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR (K) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD (A) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR (B) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT FRONT DOOR (C) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFT REAR DOOR(D) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT REAR DOOR(E) COUPLING]
= FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE (F) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/REAR (G) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/DASHBOARD(H) COUPLING
MASS LIST
M6
MA
MB
ME
MH
ML
MM
MZ
= REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING MASS
= RIGHT FRONT BODY MASS
= LEFT FRONT BODY MASS
= ELECTRIC MASS ATWINDSCREEN WIPER ATTACHMENT
= ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
= LEFT FRONT LONGITUDINAL GIRDER ELECTRIC MASS
= ELECTRIC MASS AT THE STEERING COLUMN
= LEFT REAR BODY MASS
89A - 14
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
89A - 15
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
( until 01.06.2001)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Detonation sensor
Starter
Injection air temperature sensor
Valve potentiometer
Step-by step engine
Alternator
Ignition coil
Canister purging valve
AC pressure sensor(pressure controller)
Diagnostic socket
AC compressor clutch
Upstream oxygen sensor
Cooling blower and AC
Blower resistance for AC
Oil pressure contact
Injection computer
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
AC compressor clutch control relay (E)
Water temperature sensor
Blower lower speed control relay (B)
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Motor fan control relay ( C)
Fog headlamps control relay(A)
Fuel pump control relay (H)
Actuators relay(D)
Chock sensor
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
89A - 16
vnx.su
Windscreen wiper timer
FLASH relay
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
AC relay ( on board)
Right front door actuator
Right rear door actuator
Right front door loud speaker
Right rear loudspeaker
Fuel level transmitt
er and electric pump
Trunk lighting lamp
Left rear loud speaker
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Left front door loud speaker
Right front door contact
Right volumetric sensor
Left volumetric sensor
Right front ceiling lamp
Hatchback contacts
Handbrake contact
Anti-starting bushing
Left front ceiling lamp
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Left front door contact
UCE decoder
Siren
Vehicle speed transducer
Engine hood contact
Doors closing switch
UCE anti-intrusion
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
89A - 17
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
( until 01.06.2001)
The cockpit fuse box is placed left side under dashboard, being attachedon the interior side
of the door(1). To access the fuses, turn the knob (2), then open up the door towards exterior.
1
2
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
F04
7,5A
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, lighter, ashtray, radio.
F06
15A
Lighter, clock, instrument panel ( anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti-intrusion, nati-intrusionindicator, diagnostic socket.
F07
15A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch, windscreen wiper timer
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
Reverse driving contact
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti-intrusion
Hazard and turning signaling lights
Left fog lamp
89A - 18
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
89A
On the fuse box, 6 fusiblefuse modulesare attached,protectingthe followingconsumers:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left road lights
F12
10A
Right road lights, road lights indicator
F13
10A
Left meeting lights
F14
10A
Right meeting lights, meeting lights indicator
F15
15A
F16
10A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti-starting
bushing
Radio, windscreen wiper motor
89A - 19
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Connector C0
1. Fog lamp switch ♦fog lamp relay control
2. Parking lights ♦inlet fuse F 1
3. Outlet fuse F10 ♦ left fog lamp
Connector C1
1. Outlet fuse F01 ♦ climate blower relay control
2. Outlet F09 ♦ climate blower
Connector C2
A1. Rear windowdefrosting switch ♦ rear windowdefrosting timer control
A2. Mass
A3. Outletfuse F06
B1. Outlet fuse F09 ♦ rear window defrosting
B2. Free
B3. Outlet fuse 07 ♦ windscreen wiper-washing, siren
Connector C3
A1. Lights switch ( + parking) ♦ inlet fuse F05
A2. Outlet fuse F05 ♦ + parking
A3. Free
A4. Free
B1. Mass
B2. Mass
B3. Turning lights switch( signaling relaycontrol )
B4. Free
89A - 20
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
Connector C4
A1. Anti-theft mechanism ( positionM) ♦ inlet fuse F03)
A2. Outletfuse F01
A3. Hazard switch ♦ inlet fuse F04, supply of the rear windowdefrosting timer
B1. Outlet fuse F03
B2. Anti-theft mechanism(positionM) ♦ inlet fuse F02
B3. Outlet fuse F02 ♦ reverse driving contact
I = DC ( after contact )
J = IC ( before contact)
R1 = fog lamp control relay
R2 = climateblower control relay
RT = rear window defrosting timer
RS = turning signaling relay.
89A - 21
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
A. for equipping E1, E2
( until 01.06.2001)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shock absorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
25A
Cooling blower ( vehicles without AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F02
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
C
D
H
15A
30A
30A
30A
Cooling blower
CONTROLLED Fog
CIRCUIT
headlamps (vehicle without
AC)
Injectors, canister purging valve, Fuel pump
Ignition coil
oxygen sensor heating
resistance, injection computer.
89A - 22
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
89A
B. For equipping E2(0), E3
( until 01.06.2001)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shockabsorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
F02
40A
Cooling blower ( vehicles with AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F06
7,5A
AC compressor
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
B
C
D
E
H
15A
40A
30A
30A
30A
30A
CONTROLLED Fog
Cooling
Cooling
CIRCUIT headlamps blower- 1/st blower- 2/
speed(vehicles nd speed
with AC)
(vehicle
with AC)
Injectors, canister purging
valve, oxygen sensor
heating resistance,
injection computer.
89A - 23
vnx.su
AC
Fuel
compressor pump
Ignition
coil
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
(until 01.06.2001)
Connect.
Denomination
101
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
103 HA ALTERNATOR
103 HB ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
104
ANTI-THEFT MECHANISM
105
ACOUSTIC WARNING
113
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles without AC)
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles with AC)
121
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
122
FOG HEADLAMPS SWITCH
123
LOCKING DOORS SWITCH
124
BLOWER SWITCH
125
HAZARD SWITCH
128
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
138
RIGHT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
139
LEFT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
140
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
141
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
145
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING SWITCH
146
DETONATION SENSOR
147
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
149
RPM SENSOR
155
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
156
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
160
STOP CONTACT
163 GA STARTER
163 AB STARTER EXCITATION
166
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
167
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
168
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
171
AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
172
RIGHT REAR LAMP
173
LEFT REAR LAMP
175
LEFT FOG LAMP
176
RIGHT FOG HEADLIGHT
177
LEFT FOG HEADLIGHT
180
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
181
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
184
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
185
LEFT FRONT PARKING LAMP
188
COOLING FAN MOTOR ( for vehicles without AC)
189
RIGHT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
190
LEFT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
191
RIGHT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
192
LEFT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
193
INJECTOR 1
194
INJECTOR 2
195
INJECTOR 3
89A - 24
vnx.su
Page
89-138
89-109
89-109
89-117
89-125
89-113
89-89
89-91
89-132
89-132
89-134
89-130
89-134
89-133
89-140
89-140
89-139
89-139
89-113
89-101
89-102
89-99
89-98
89-148
89-123
89-109
89-110
89-150
89-150
89-138
89-107
89-145
89-145
89-148
89-123
89-124
89-148
89-148
89-124
89-124
89-108
89-144
89-144
89-141
89-141
89-104
89-105
89-105
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
196
199
200
205
209
210
212
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
298
319
321
328
329
371
427
438
442
454
454
474
503
560
597
597
600
639
639
649
654
778
857
887
927
993
INJECTOR 4
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
OIL PRESSURE CONTACT
CLIGHTS, TURNING LIGHTS, HORN SWITCH
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PAD
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PAD
WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
RIGHT HEADLAMP
LEFT HEADLAMP
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPEED TRANSDUCER
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LAMP
LEFT FRONT TURNING LAMP
COCKPIT FUSE AND RELAYS BOX
RADIO
COOLING MOTOR FAN (for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
LEFT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
INJECTION AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
AC STARTING BUTTON
MOTOR FAN RESISTANCE ( for vehicles with AC)
LEFT FRONT CEILING LAMP
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
SIREN
RIGHT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR(Rx)
LEFT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR (Tx)
AC RELAY (on board)
UCE DECODER
HATCHBACK CONTACT
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles without AC)
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles with AC)
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
STOP-S3 LAMP (on roof)
STOP[ -S3 LAMP (in aileron)
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
IGNITION COIL
FLASH RELAY
SUPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
CHOCK SENSOR
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
89A - 25
vnx.su
89-106
89-146
89-149
89-98
89-114
89-128
89-112
89-127
89-127
89-125
89-104
89-135
89-125
89-125
89-99
89-135
89-117
89-126
89-126
89-119
89-128
89-107
89-126
89-127
89-103
89-131
89-131
89-108
89-149
89-149
89-101
89-143
89-118
89-118
89-142
89-142
89-129
89-115
89-146
89-94
89-96
89-130
89-150
89-150
89-103
89-116
89-100
89-116
89-100
89-102
89-142
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
1033CA BATTERY PLUS PLUG
1091
ICP BRAKING SYSTEM
1202
AC PRESSURE SENSOR
1335
FRONT ASHTRAY LIGHTING
MH 121 ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
MOTOR FAN MASS
89-111
89-127
89-106
89-138
89-110
89-110
R 89
R 107
R 153
R 154
R 155
R 156
R 212
R 265
R 318
89-163
89-153
89-160
89-159
89-161
89-162
89-157
89-155
89-151
FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ LEFT REAR DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT REAR DOOR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ REAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
OBSERVATIONS:
-Connectors and couplings are representedbackwards (from wires forward)
-Some electric components are not connectedto the vehicle wiring by means of multiple-way
connectors, but by means of protectedindividualplugs. For illustrating the type of the respective
plug, the followingsymbols are to be used:
Plug mother 6 mm
Plug father 6 mm
Plug mother broachΦ 3mm
Plug father broachΦ 3mm
Plug mother8mm
Plug mother flag6,3mm
89A - 26
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
(before June 1st 2001)
89A - 27
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
1
3
4
8
9
12
13
15
16
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
39
41
42
43
45
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
77
78
79
80
89
90
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
1,0
1,0
B41
01
Destination
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GK
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
3CU
3CS
CONTROL- CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CONTROL- BLOWERRELAY
CONTROL -WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ASS
M
ATMOSPHERICPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
CONTROL- CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL –INJECTIONFAILURE INDICA
TOR
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITIONPOTENTIOMETER
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSORSIGNAL
SIGNAL+AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
INJECTIONCODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSORSUPPL
>
Y+
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CONTROL- INJECTOR4
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
89A - 28
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A - 29
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
B41
01
Destination
1
3
4
8
9
10
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
38K
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
77
78
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
38X
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3JP
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GK
38AS
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3JQ
3D
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
CONTROL - BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL - WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM STOPPING CONTROL >
INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 1
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F04
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL – INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
CONTROL – BLOWER RELAY TR.2
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 2
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 3
SIGNAL +VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
SIGNAL +AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE K
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL – INJECTOR 1
CONTROL – INJECTOR 3
CONTROL - UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
+INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 4
- WATER TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL + VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR > SUPPLY +
89A - 30
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
79
80
82
83
89
90
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
Destination
3DQ
3GH
38U
38Y
3CU
3CS
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL - INJECTOR 4
CONTROL – INJECTOR 2
89A - 31
vnx.su
B41
01
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP1 7
R
R
B
D5
3NR
A-VI
D1
BP17
D4
3GT
R-N
AS-R
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
D2
D3
BP17
R
S3
G
G
AP29
H1
AP29
G
3NA
A-V
A
H4
H2
3AC
M-G
H3
BP17
A
R
R
E3
597
2
8D P
R
BPR1
V
A1
8A
A4
M
A
N
A2
B
BPR1
R
R
1
S2
49B
R-V
A
BP7
C1
3NR
C4
3JN
A-V
OR
B
R
E2
89A - 32
vnx.su
BP7
R-V
C2
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89A
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
1,5
1,5
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
INJECTIONCOMPUTER> ACTUATORSRELAYCONTROL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
1,5
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINESAFETYRUNNINGRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
89A - 33
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM EQU
IPPED VEHICLE
S)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP17
3NR
R
R
A-VI
B
E4
G
V-M
G
3NA
A-V
A
H4
H2
3AC
M-G
A
BP17
R
E3
S6
2
A
R
BPR1
BPR1
B
B
A-R
R
E6
1
S2
BP7
R
8DP
V
A1
8A
A4
A
N
B1
3NR
B4
A
OR
R
49B
A
B2
3JN
C1
3NR
C4
A-V
M- R
B3
C3
BP7
R-G
R-V
R
89A - 34
vnx.su
A2
M
BPR1
49L
R-G
R-G
R-V
E2
R
H1
AP29
A
B
AS-R
D2
3 GT
BP17
E2
38K
E3
BPR1
597
R-N
S3
G
G
AP29
E5
38R
V
E4
D4
B
R
R
E1
R
E1
3NR
D1
BP17
C2
3JP
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89A
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
B1
B2
B3
B5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
E1
E2
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
4,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,5
0,5
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49L
3NR
3JP
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
3NR
38K
E3
E5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
2,0
BPR1
38R
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
S2
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
E6
S6
4,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
BP7
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
B
BPR1
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
- BLOWERRELAY, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
BLOWERCOOLING RESISTANCECONTROL
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.2
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL, IN
JECTIONCOMPUTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
AIR CONDITION
ING SYSTEM STOPPING CONT
ROL >
INJECTIONCOMPUTER
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINERUNNINGSAFETYRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
89A - 35
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
Destination
1
0,60
AP11
2
0,60
H66P
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, REVERSEDRIVING
LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLETF02
OIL TRANSMITTER CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,35
Destination
28A
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
89A - 36
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B1
B2
0,35
0,60
0,60
Destination
42A
3JK
3C
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
RPM SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BG
3BL
ENGINERPM SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
ENGINERPM -SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
3BG
A
149
X
3BL
B
89A - 37
vnx.su
X
89A
B41
01
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
Pos.
Sectioning
A
B
C
D
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3GF
3GK
3GH
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
NO
A
887
3NR
A
B
C
3GF 3GK
SA
V
D
3GH
A-VI
IGNITION COIL
Pos.
A
B
C
Sectioning
2,0
2,0
2,0
Destination
3CV
3CW
3NA
CONTROL– CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITIONCOIL
CONTROL– CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITIONCOIL
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOK
E3 SENSOR > FUELPUMP
RELAY
89A - 38
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3BB
+ INJECTORS >ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CY13C
NO
371
1
3NR 3BB 2
X
X
DETONATION SENSOR
Pos.
1
2
4
Sectioning
0,50
0,50
0,50
Destination
3S
3DQ
TB1
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
CY2AE
146
89A - 39
vnx.su
89A
MA
1
2
3S
X
3DQ
X
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CHOKE SENSOR
Pos.
1
3
Sectioning
1,40
1,40
Destination
3NA1
3NA
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE
SENSOR
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR >FUEL PUMP
RELAY
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
3GN
3F
3D
Atmospheric pressure sensormass
Atmospheric pressure sensorsignal
Atmospheric pressure sensor > Supply +
89A - 40
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3B
3JQ
SIGNAL +AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MASS
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
D
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BV
3BU
3BW
3BX
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
CM1PE
NO
A
B
3BV
3BU
C
D
3BW 3BX
649
X
X
X
89A - 41
vnx.su
X
89A
B41
01
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
Destination
0,60
0,60
0,60
3JL
3AQ
3AJ
VALVE POTENTIOMETERMASS
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
CM1PE
NO
222
A
B
3JL
3AQ
C
3AJ
X
X
X
INJECTOR 1
Pos.
1
2
Sectioning
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CR
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CY2AE
BA
1
193
2
3NR 3CR
X
X
89A - 42
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
INJECTOR 2
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
CY2AE
BA
1
194
2
3NR 3CS
X
X
INJECTOR 3
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CT
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CY2AE
BA
1
195
2
3NR 3CT
X
X
89A - 43
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
INJECTOR 4
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CU
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 4
CY2AE
BA
1
2
3NR 3CU
X
X
196
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
38U
38Y
38X
FREONPRESSURE SENSORMASS
+ FREONPRESSURESENSOR
FREONPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
NO
38X
X
38Y
X
1202
89A - 44
vnx.su
38U
X
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
Pos. Sectioning
1
1,0
Destination
38R
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSORCLUTCH
NO
171
38R
X
AIR CONDITIONING AND BLOWER COOLING
(FORAIRCONDITIONINGEQUIPPEDVEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
2
2,0
5,0
5,0
Destination
49B
49B
M
CONTROL+ BLOWER COOLING> BLOWER RESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
MASS
89A - 45
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
BLOWER COOLING
(FOR VEHICLE
S WITHOUT AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,5
1,5
Destination
M
49B
MASS
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
BLOWERRESISTANCE
(FORAIRCONDITIONINGEQUIPPEDVEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
2
2
Destination
49L
49B
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLINGRESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
89A - 46
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89A
B41
01
ALTERNATOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
5,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F02
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
B
R
R
103 HA
ALTERNATOREXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,6
Destination
2JD
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
CA13E
2JD
X
103 HB
STARTER
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
16,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY>+ ALTERNATOR
SL8C
B
R
R
163 GA
89A - 47
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
STARTER EXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
3,0
Destination
D
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
CS6PI
6,3 MM
D
163 AB
A
BLOWER MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
5,0
Destination
M
MASS
M
N
ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
4,0
Destination
ML
INJECTION COMPUTER MASS (PINS 3, 28AND 33)
SR 8L
ML
N
MH - 121
89A - 48
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
BATTERY TERMINAL + (PLUS)
Pos Sectioning
1
1
1
16,0
5,0
1,0
Destination
B
B
B
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF01, F04
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F06
RG
1033CA
B
R, R
A-R
89A - 49
vnx.su
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
Pos
Destination
Sectioning
1
2
3
4
1,0
0,75
0,75
0,75
14K
14E
14L
BP11
4
0,5
BP11
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
+ BATTERY PROTECTED WINDSCREEN WIPER
STOPPING ON PRESET POSITION
+ BATTERY PROTECTED STOPPING ON PRESET POSITION> SIREN
BA
3
14
212
X
4
BP1 1
A
R
1
14K
2
14E
X
X
89A - 50
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER – WASHING SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
0,5
0,75
0,75
1,0
1,0
16A
AP10
14D
14K
BP2
6
7
0,75
0,5
14L
14C
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, , OUTLETFUSE F01
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER OW
L SPEED
+AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
STOPPING ON PRESET POSITION.
CONTROL+ WINDSCREEN WIPERHIGHSPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
BA
1
16A
145
V-A
2
3
4
AP1 0 1 4 D 1 4 K
M
X
X
5
BP2
6
14L
7
14C
R
X
X
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0,5
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
M
16A
14D
14E
AP10
14C
MASS
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL + WIN
DSCREEN WIPER TIMER
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, , OUTLETFUSE F01
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
NO
5
AP10
A
113
1
M
4
14E
2
16A
N
X
V
6
14C
3
14D
X
X
89A - 51
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
HORN, TURNING AND LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,5
1,0
64C
64B
64D
B
9M
67A
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ BATTERY
SHUNT > FOGLIGHTS SWITCH
CONTROL +ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
209
3
67A
2
9M
X
X
64D
64B
64C
X
X
X
0,75
3,0
0,75
0,75
B
M-AS
A
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
B1
B2
1
B
L
B
C
R
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
+ BATTERY
+ LOW BEAMLIGHTS
+ HIGHBEAMLIGHTS
BA
209
2
R
1
C
X
X
B
M
89A - 52
vnx.su
B
L
X
A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
U.C.E. DECODER
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
13C
80X
HK
HL
80T
H17
AP15
M
BP3
20F
20D
80BD
13A
20C
CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
ANTI-STARTER RECEPTOR SIGNAL
TRACK (TR)
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
ANTI-STARTING CONTROL-INDICATOR
INJECTION CODEDSIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUT
LET F15
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
0,5
0,5
20C
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
GR
20D
20C
20C
1 3 A 80BD
20D
20F
X
X
N-A
X
8 0 X 13C
NO
B
503
A
X
X
BP3
M
AP1 5
H1 7
80T
HL
HK
R
N
A
X
G
X
X
X
X
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
89A - 53
vnx.su
X
CY
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
20F
M
BP3
80X
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
MASS
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSEOUTLET F15
ANTI-STARTING RECEPT
OR SIGNALTRACK (TR)
GR
654
1
20F
2
M
X
N
3
BP3
4
80X
R
X
FLASH RELAY
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F15
2
0,35
80BD
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F15
3
0,5
BP3
+ SHUNT > FUSE OUT
LET F15
4
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
5
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
* For anti-intrusion system equipped vehicles
5
0,5
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS >U.C.E. ANTI-IN
TRUSION
SYSTEM> DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING/ UNLOCKING
INFO
NO
5
64D
X
1
BP3
4
64C
2
80BD
R-A
X
N-A
3
BP3
857
R-A
R-A
89A - 54
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
VEHICLE SPEED TRANSDUCER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
47F
M
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
MASS
BA
AP15
A
1
47F
X
250
2
M
N
3
INTRUSION SYSTEM
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
1,5
4,0
S
A
B1
B2
4,0
3,0
B
D
+ ACCESSORIES > COCKPIT FUSES INLE
T F01
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT > COCKPITFUSES INLET
F02, F03AND ENGINE FUSEINLET F03
+ BATTERY
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
104
D
B
A
M
A
S
R
M-V
2
89A - 55
vnx.su
1
B
A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
A
B
0,35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> ENGINE
HOOD CONTACT
CA 13E
NO
M
A
N
13A
B
438
X
SIREN
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
BP2
2
3
0,5
0,35
M
80FC
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY WIPER STOPPING ON
PRESET
POSITION > SIREN
MASS
SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
CM1PE
442
NO
3
80FC
2
M
1
BP2
G-AS
N
R
89A - 56
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
FRONT WIRING
89A
B41
01
COCKPIT RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
3
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
9B
L
9DP
9DP
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS> FOGLAMPSWITCH
BA
260
3
9B
X
X
2
L
1
B P11
VI
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
1,5
AP10
SP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
CESSORIES> CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED AC
BA
260
2
SP3
R
89A - 57
vnx.su
1
AP10
A-G
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A3
B1
B1
B2
B3
0,35
0,5
0,5
1,5
2,0
0,35
15LP
M
BCP3
BCP3
15B
15A
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
MASS
+ CEILINGPROTECTED BATTERY
+ CEILINGPROTECTEDBATTERY>FUSE OUTLETF06
CONTROL + REARWINDOW DEFROSTING
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
1,0
BP3
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY >FUSE OUTLET F07
* For Anti-intrusion equipped vehicles
B3
1,0
BP3
+ WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON PRESET
POSITIONPROTECTEDBATTERY>SIREN
BA
260
BP3
15B
R
X
X
BCP3
M
15LP
R-AS
AS
N
M-V
2
1
3
B2
B3
A
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B
0,75
0,50
0,75
L
L
L
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
0,5
0,5
M
M
MASS
MASS > FOG LAMPS RELA
Y, CLIMATE CONTROL
BLOWERRELAY, REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGTIMER
1,0
64B
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
BA
64B
M
B
V
L
260
L
A
X
4
3
2
89A - 58
vnx.su
1
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,5
1,5
1,0
1,5
0,5
0,5
89A
Destination
A
AP10
64AP
AP15
A
AP11
SUPPLY+ D.C. > FUSE INTLE
T F03
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS,FUSEINLETF04
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SUPPLY + D.C. > COCKPIT FUSE INLE
T F02
+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
BA
260
AP1 1
A
AP1 5
V
R
A
6 4 AP
AP1 0
A
X
R-G
R-A
3
2
89A - 59
vnx.su
1
B
A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
0.75
R
0,75
R
F11
BA
R
X
X
+ HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
INLET F11
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE N
I LET F12
R
X
F12
F12
F11
0,75
R
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUS
E INLET F12
RPD
X
X
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
0,35 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
RPG
X
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS >FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F14
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F13
0,75 CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F13
C
X
X
C
F13
X
CPG
F14
0,75 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
F15
1,5
B
F15
1,5
BP3
F16
0,75
B
F16
0,75
X
CPD
X
B
R
+ BATTERY
BP3
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F15
R
B
+ BATTERY
AS-A
BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F16
260
BP11
AS-A
89A - 60
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
3,0
B
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF06, F07, F08, F09
NO
B
260
AS
Position Sectioning
1,5
Destination
S
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F01 COCKPIT
BA
S
M-V
260
STOP CONTACT
BA
AP1 0
Destination
GR
1
1,0
AP10 +PROTECTED D.C.> FUSEOUTLETF01
65A
2
1,0
65A CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
160
X
RIGHT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0.75
8B
2
0,75 M
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
M
176
MASS
89A - 61
vnx.su
N
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0,75 8B
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
2
0,75
MASS
M
M
N
177
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0,5
L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
184
LEFT FRONT PARKING LIGHT
BA
Destination
L
X
1
2
0,5
0,5
L
M
+PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSEOUTLETF05
MASS
M
N
185
89A - 62
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
67A
Destination
X
1
1,0
67A
CONTROL +ACOUSTIC WARNING
105
WINDSCREEN WIPER PUMP
BA
Destination
M
N
1
0,5
16A
2
0,35
M
CONTROL +WINDSCREENWASHING
PUMP
MASS
16A
221
X
RIGHTHEADLIGHT
CD8F
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPD + PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
226
BA
1
M
N
2
CPD
X
3
RPD
X
LEFTHEADLIGHT
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW BEAM LIGHTS
> FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
89A - 63
vnx.su
CD8F
227
BA
2
CPG
X
1
3
M
RPG
N
X
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
M
MASS
N
255
LEFT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
256
RIGHT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
2
0,5
64D RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
M
MASS
N
267
89A - 64
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
2
0,5
M
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
268
I.C.P. BRAKING SYSTEM
BA
Destination
1
0,35
H1
CONTROL –ICP, HAND BRAKE
INDICATOR
H1
1091
X
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35
H12 CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
216
INDICATOR
H12
X
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35
H12 CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
89A - 65
vnx.su
217
H12
X
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
L
AP10
BCP3
4
5
6
0,35
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT . FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ CEILINGLAMPSPROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F06
MASS
BA
6
5
4
3
2
1
N
AS
R
X
210
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
34D
34C
34E
34F
34G
34H
34A
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
BA
261
1
34D
3
34E
5
34G
7
34A
X
X
X
X
2
34C
4
34F
6
34H
8
34B
X
X
X
X
89A - 66
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
RADIO
Position Sectioning
4
6
7
8
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
BP11
L
AP10
M
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > COCKPITFUSE BOX
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F01
MASS
NO
1
3
5
7
AP10
2
4
BP1 1
6
L
8
M
A-AS
X
N
AS-A
261
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY(ON BOARD)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1
2
3
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
38DH
38DH
38AH
38DH
38AS
CONTROL+AIRCONDITIONING
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
NO
5
38AS
X
1
38DH
4
V
V
X
3
38DH
474
V
89A - 67
vnx.su
2
38AH
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
1,5
1,0
1,5
1,5
Destination
SP3
38AH
38AJ
38AK
ACCESSORIESPROTECTED CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED1
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED2
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED3
BA
2
38A H
600
1
SP3
X
R
4
38AK
3
38AJ
X
X
BLOWERSWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1*
1,0
0,5
38AH
38AH
2
3
4
5
1,5
1,5
0,35
1,5
38AJ
38AK
L
M
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER, SPEED 1>
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMRELAYCOIL(ONBOARD)
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
2
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
3
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
MASS
1* - for air conditioning systemequippedvehicles
BA
X
124
X
X
89A - 68
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
89A
B41
01
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,35
0,5
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
298
2
M
1
L
N
X
AIR CONDITIONING STARTING BUTTON
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
AP15
M
L
38DH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
BA
2
M
319
1
AP15
N
AS
4
38D H
3
L
V
X
89A - 69
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
FOG LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
2
4
5
6
7
9
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
9DP
9DP
9M
L
M
9DP
9B
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REAR FOGLIGHTS > FOGLIGHT SWITCH
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > + PROTECTEDREAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REARFOG LIGHT
NO
9
9B
121
2
9DP
4
9M
X
X
X
5
L
X
7
9DP
Vi
X
6
M
N
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
Destination
L
8A
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
122
1
L
2
8A
X
R-A
4
M
N
3
L
X
89A - 70
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
(Pulsetype)
Position Sectioning
1
3
4
5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
Destination
15LP
L
M
15LP
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
+PARKING LIGHT
S > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
NO
4
M
5
1
15LP 15LP
128
R
V
N
3
L
X
89A - 71
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
HAZARD SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1,0
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
Destination
AP15
B
64C
64D
L
M
64F
64B
64AP
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
+PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLETF04
NO
1
AP15
R
2
B
3
64D
AS
X
9
6 4 AP
125
4
64D
X
8
64B
GR
V
5
L
X
7
64F
X
6
M
N
DOORS LOCKING SWITCH
Position Sectioning
5
1
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
Destination
20D
M
M
20C
L
M
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
SHUNT > MASS
NO
123
5
20D
1
M
X
2
20C
X
4
M
N
3
L
X
89A - 72
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DIAGNOSIS SOCKET
Position Sectioning
1
4
5
7
15
16
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
M
N
HK
HL
BP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
MASS
ELECTRONICMASS
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINEL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F15
NO
8
7
HK
6
X
225
16
BP3
15
HL
R
X
5
N
N
14
13
4
M
3
2
11
10
N
1
AP15
G
12
9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
10
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
15A
H7
42A
28A
31A
64C
M
M
64F
M
M
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
SIGNAL+WATERTEMPERATURE
CONTROL- OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR
CONTROL -WATER PRESSURE INDICA
TOR
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
SHUNT > MASS
SHUNT > MASS
BA
247
10
M
N
N
9
64F
X
8
M
N
N
7
64C
6
31A
5
28A
4
3
42A
2
H7
X
X
X
X
X
X
89A - 73
vnx.su
1
15A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Destination
0,35
RPD
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
64D
M
AP15
H1
H12
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
BRAKE PADSWEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL
BA
9
247
8
H1 2
7
H1
6
AP1 5
5
M
4
64D
X
X
VI
N
X
2
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
L
M
M
80T
BCP3
0,35
3FH
X
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
SHUNT > MASS
SHUNT > MASS
ANTI-STARTING INDICA
TOR - CONTROL
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY> FUSEOUTLETF06
INJECTIONFAILURE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
BA
247
1
RPD
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
3
6
3FH
X
5
4
3
BCP3 8 0 T
AS
89A - 74
vnx.su
X
2
M
N
N
1
L
X
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0.6
0.35
0,35
89A
2JD
47A
41A
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
- FUELLEVEL WARNINGSIGNAL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
BA
8
7
6
247
89A - 75
vnx.su
5
4
3
41A
2
47A
1
2JD
X
X
X
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0.35
L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
168
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
ELECTRICLIGHTER
BA
L
Destination
X
M
1
2
3
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
0,5 M
MASS
0,75 BCP3 + CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED
BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
N
BCP3
101
AS
FRONTASHTRAY LIGHTING
BA
L
Destination
X
1
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
2
0,5
MASS
M
1335
M
N
89A - 76
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
89A
B41
01
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
141
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
140
20C
X
89A - 77
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
B41
01
LEFT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING >ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
139
X
RIGHT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
138
20C
X
89A - 78
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34E
34F
SIGNAL +RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER(RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
191
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34G
34H
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
192
X
89A - 79
vnx.su
89A
B41
01
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
RIGHT VOLUME SENSOR (RX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80CA
N
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80CA
N
X
LEFT VOLUME SENSOR (TX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80DA
N
LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80DA
N
X
ANTI INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
BCP3
80E
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY>OUTLETFUSE F06
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
NO
993
2
80E
X
89A - 80
vnx.su
1
BCP3
R
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
REAR WIRING
U.C.E. ANTI-INTRUSION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
2
5
6
6
7
8
9
12
14
15
18
23
24
24
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION >
DOORSLOCKING/UNLOCKINGINFO
M
MASS
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
BCP3 + CEILING LAMPPROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLETF06
BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
80E
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
13A
CEILING LAMP LIGHTING –CONTROL> CONTACTS
AP15 + PLUSAFTER PROTECTED CONTACT> FUSEOUTLETF03
20D
CONTROL + DOORS LOCKING
> ACTUATORS
20C
CONTROL + DOORS UNL
OCKING >ACTUATORS
80FC SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
80DA LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
N
ELECTRONICMASS
N
MASS
BA
24
N
N
N
12
AP1 5
427
23
80D A
22
21
20
19
10
G
9
13A
8
M
7
6
64C BCP3
X
X
X
R
R
0,35
0,35
16
5
64D
4
15
20C
14
20D
X
X
3
2
M
1
64D
V-A
X
R
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
17
GR-VI
X
11
18
80FC
80CA
N
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
427
1
80CA
2
N
X
N
89A - 81
vnx.su
13
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34A
34B
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
190
X
RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34D
34C
SIGNAL +RIGHT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT REARSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
189
X
89A - 82
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR LAMP
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
65A
64C
H66P
H66P
M
L
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F02
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > RIGHT REARLAMP
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
BA
173
6
L
5
M
X
N
4
H66P
X
X
3
64C
2
65A
X
X
1
RIGHTREAR LAMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
L
M
H66P
64D
65A
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLETF02
CONTROL +EVERSE
R
DRI
VING LIGHTSRIGHT
>
TURNING LAMP
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
BA
6
172
5
65A
X
4
64D
X
89A - 83
vnx.su
3
H66P
X
2
M
1
L
N
X
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
1.5
0,35
1,5
47A
3NA1
41A
M
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE
SENSOR
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
MASS
NO
199
3
4
X
N
1
47A
2
3NA1
X
A-R
HATCHBACK CONTACT
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0,35
Destination
13A
M
CEILING LIGHTINGCONTROL> HATCHBACKCONTACT
MASS
1 DBD1
BA
M
A
13A
560
X
89A - 84
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
3
4
0,5
2,0
L
15B
+ PARKING LIGHTS> OUTLET FUSE F05
CONTROL+ REARWINDSCREEN DEFROSTING
NO
560
X
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
5
6
0,5
0,5
65A
M
CONTROL+ STOP LIGHTS
MASS
NO
560
N
89A - 85
vnx.su
X
89A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
Destination
BA
H1
X
1
0.35
H1
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR CONTROL
156
LEFTFOG LIGHT
NO
Destination
9DP
1
2
0.5
0,5
9DP
M
X
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
MASS
175
M
N
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35
13A CEILINGLAMPLIGHTING CONTROL
180
> DOORS CONT
ACTS
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35 13A
CEILING LAMPLIGHTING
CONTROL > DOORS CONT
ACTS
89A - 86
vnx.su
181
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
89A
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
BA
Destination
BCP3
1
2
V-A
0.35 BCP3 + BATTERY PROTECTED CEILING LAMPS
0,5 13C CONTROL – CEILING LAMPS
329
13C
X
LEFT FRONT CEILING LAMP
BA
Destination
BCP3
1
2
V-A
0.35 BCP3 + BATTERY PROTECTED CEILING LAMPS
0,5 13C
CONTROL – CEILING LAMPS
328
13C
X
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
Destination
BA
15B
1
2,0
15B
CONTROL + HA
TCHBACK REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTING
89A - 87
vnx.su
200
X
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35
L
PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSEOUTLETF05
166
LEFT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35
L
+ PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSEOUTLETF05
1
0,35
L
+ PARKING LIGHTS FUS
> E OUTLET F05
167
STOP LAMP S3
(ONROOF)
Destination
BA
65A
X
1
0.5
65A
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
639
STOP LAMP S3
(INAILERON)
BA
65A
Destination
X
1
2
0.5
0,5
65A
M
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
MASS
M
639
89A - 88
vnx.su
N
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
0,35
1,5
0,50
34D
BCP3
8A
SIGNAL + RIGHTREAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
FUSE BOX > FUSE U
OTLET F06(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELA
Y
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
BP3
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLET F04
CONTROL+TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL -RIGHT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
LEFTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGHT
S – FUSE OUTLET F05
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES
SIGNAL - RIGHTFRONT SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE OUT
LETF16
CONTROL+ PROTECTEDREARWINDOW DEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLETF03
MASS
+ BATTERY
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F15
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICLOCKING > UCEDECODER
CONTROL + REAR FOGAMP
L
+ PROTECTEDREARFOG LIGHTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
MA
D
C
B
R 318
A
34A
CPD
X
X
20C
X
20D
9B
9DP
34B
X
VI
X
X
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
X
AS-A
M-V
R
N
AS
X
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
X
X
X
X
X
R
X
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
X
AS
A
GR
X
X
1
2
3
5
6
7
89A - 89
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,0
0,50
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,5
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
BP3
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SUPPLY(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
+ PROTECTED TURNINGLIGHTS
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > FOG LAMP SWITCH
+ PARKINGLIGHTS
SORIES > CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED ACCES
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY> RADIO
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
MASS
+ BATTERY > HAZARD SWITC
H
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY >DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
MA
34B
9DP
9B
20D
20C
BP3
34A
X
X
VI
X
X
R
X
34H
B
M
BP11
34G
X
AS
N
SP3
L
43F
R 318
AP15
R
9M
X
V
64D
X
R
34C
64B
X
X
GR
R-A
7
6
5
3
64A P
89A - 90
vnx.su
X
15LP
AS-A
64C
X
D
C
34E
X
X
X
8A
BCP3
34D
AS
X
2
1
B
A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C5
C6
C6
C7
0,5
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
WATER TEMPERATURE WARNING
OIL PRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64D
38AS
H1
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HK
HL
HL
M
WATERTEMPERATURE SIGNAL
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
PROTECTEDRIGHTHIGHBEAM
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
ICP INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
INJECTION FAILUREINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS SIGNALLINE K> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK > UCEDECODER
DIAGNOSIS SIGNA
L LINE L> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEL > UCE DECODER
MASS
MA
47A
C
X
AP10
B R-G
R 107
A
41A
X
3FH
80T
X
X
RPD
64D
38AS
X
X
X
HK
HL
M
N-G
H1
H1 2
2JD
X
X
H7
15A
64D
31A
28A
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
5
6
7
89A - 91
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNINGLIGHTSCONTROL> INDICATOR
INSTRUMENTPANEL> WATER TEMPERATUREWARNING
INSTRUMENT PANEL > OILPRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64D
38AS
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HL
M
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
RPM-METERSIGNAL
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAM> INDICATOR
RIGHTTURNINGLIGHTSCONTROL> INDICATOR
AIR-COND
ITIONINGCOMPRESSO
R CON
NECTIONSIGNAL > RELA
Y
ICP HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
INJECTION FAILUREINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINE L
MASS
MA
M
HL
HK
80T
3FH
41A
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
64D
RPD
AP10
X
X
R-G B
2JD
R 107
H1 2
X
X
15A
H7
H1
X
42A
38AS
X
31A
64D
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
2
1
89A - 92
vnx.su
28A
47A
C
A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2*
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D6*
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > TURNING SWITCH
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
34G
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL +REVERSE DRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE SENSOR
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
FLASH RELAY DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CEILING LAMPS CONTROL
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > DOORS CONT
ACTS
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPSLIGHTING > HOOD CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
A2*, D2* - for vehicles without Anti-intrus ion System
D4, D6*- for Anti-intrusion System provided vehicles
MA
34B
X
34A
X
R 265
13A
X
20D
X
34H
15B
X
X
13C
X
80FC
AP1 5
G-AS
G
64D
X
20C
BCP3
3NA 1
X
R-AS
A-R
H6 6 P
9DP
H1
47A
X
X
41A
X
X
X
34G
64C
65A
L
64D
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
89A - 93
vnx.su
35C
X
D
34D
X
C
34F
X
B
34E
X
X
2
1
A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A6*
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTSCONTROL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
64C
34G
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL> UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING
HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
RIGHT CEILING LAMP CONTROL
CEILIN G LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK DOORS CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER
D2, D3, D4, A2*, A6* - for anti-intrusion system provided vehicles
MA
D
C
B
R 265
A
34C
64D
AP1 5
80FC
13C
13A
X
X
X
GR-VI
X
X
34D
41A
3NA 1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
X
X
A-R
R-A
X
X
X
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H6 6 P
15B
X
X
X
X
X
X
34E
64D
L
65A
X
X
3
5
X
1
2
89A - 94
vnx.su
64C
34B
X
34H
X
34G
X
6
7
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
MA
D
AP1 1
R
R 212
28A
H1 7
47F
X
X
X
X
HL
HK
42A
X
X
X
X
X
X
38AS
2JD
A
3NA 1
D
VI
R
A-R
A
3
2
1
6
5
89A - 95
vnx.su
H7
31A
H6 6 P
X
7
3FH
C
B
A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP>SHOKE SENSOR
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
C1
C2
C3
C4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED
CONTACT > CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
A6 - For air-conditioning system provided vehicles
MA
D
31A
C
B
R 212
A
X
47F
X
H1 7
X
3FH
X
HK
HL
H7
42A
H6 6 P
28A
AP1 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
D
3NA 1
A
2JD
38AS
A
A-R
R
VI
X
1
2
3
89A - 96
vnx.su
5
6
7
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
2DED1
BA
20D
B
20C
34F
X
X
X
34E
R 154
A
X
1
3
RIGHT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
34F
BA
20C
X
X
20D
X
34E
R 154
X
3
89A - 97
vnx.su
1
B
A
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
2DE D1
BA
20D
B
X
20C
34H
X
X
34G
R 153
A
X
1
3
LEFT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Destination
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
BA
34H
20C
X
X
20D
X
34G
X
R 153
3
89A - 98
vnx.su
1
B
A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
X
R 155
20C
X
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 155
20C
X
89A - 99
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT REAR DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
20D
X
20C
R 156
X
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 156
20C
X
89A - 100
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89A
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
BRAKE PADS WEAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
0,35
Destination
H12
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR - CONTROL
BA
H12
R 89
X
BRAKE PADS WEAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
0,35
0,35
H12
H12
BRAKE PADS WEARINDICATOR – CONTROL > RIGHT PAD
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL > LEFT PAD
BA
H12
X
X
R 89
89A - 101
vnx.su
89A
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
(until 01.06.2001)
LINK
CODES
A
AP10
AP11
AP15
AP29
B
BCP3
BP11
BP17
BP2
BP3
BP37
BP7
BP76
BPR1
C
CPD
CPG
D
H1
H12
H17
H66P
H7
HK
HL
L
LPD
LPG
M
ML
N
NF
R
RPD
RPG
S
SP3
TB1
2JD
3AC
3AJ
3AQ
3B
3BB
3BG
3BL
3BU
3BV
3BW
3BX
3C
WIRE FUNCTIONS
SUPPLY + AFTER CONTACT
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT>OUTLET FUSE F01
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03 ENGINE RUNNING
+ BATTERY
+ PROTECTED BATTERY, CEILING LAMPS
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > COCKPIT 1
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F01
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY> WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING IN A FIXED POSITION
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F15
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F04
+ PROTECTED BATTERY FUSE 1 MOTOR FAN
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > LIGHTING CONTROL
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > OUTLET FUSE F17> RELAY
+ MEETING LIGHTS(LOW BEAM)
+ MEETING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ MEETING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL- HANDBRAKE INDICATOR, BRAKING CIRCUIT ICP
CONTROL-BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
CONTROL+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
RPM METER SIGNAL
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE L
+ PARKING LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ PARKING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
ELECTRIC MASS
BATTERY ELECTRIC MASS
ELECTRONIC MASS
MASS: WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR, AIR, POTENTIOMETER
+ ROAD LIGHTS( HIGH BEAM)
+ ROAD LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ ROAD LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ ACCESORIES
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES > CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
SIGNAL+ VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
ENGINE RPM SIGNAL > RPM SENSOR
SIGNAL - RPM ENGINE > RPM SENSOR
CONTROL 1 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 2 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 3 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 4 IDLING REGULATOR
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
89A - 102
vnx.su
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
3CR
3CS
3CT
3CU
3CV
3CW
3D
3DQ
3F
3FH
3FN
3GF
3GH
3GK
3GN
3GT
3JK
3JL
3JN
3JP
3JQ
3NA
3NA1
3NR
3S
8A
8B
8DP
9A
9B
9C
9DP
9M
11A
13A
13C
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
14K
14L
15A
15B
15LP
16A
20C
20D
20F
28A
CONTROL- INJECTOR 1
CONTROL- INJECTOR 2
CONTROL- INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- INJECTOR 4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 1-4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 2-3
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR> SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL-INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
RPM SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL- UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
MASS UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ACTUATORS RELAY MASS
- WATER TEMPERATURE
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
CONTROL - STEP 1 MOTOR FAN RELAY
CONTROL- STEP 2 MOTOR FAN RELAY
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
+ IGNITION COIL, CHOCK SENSOR> PETROL PUMP RELAY
+ PETROL PUMP
+ INJECTORS> ACTUATORS RELAY OUTPUT
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
+ FOG HEADLAMPS RELAY
+ FOG HEADLAMPS > RELAY
+ PROTECTED FOG HEADLAMPS
+ REAR FOG LAMPS RELAY CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LAMPS
SHUNT> FOG LAMPS SWITCH
CONTROL + ROAD LIGHTS
CONTROL - CEILING LAMPS> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL> CEILING LAMPS
CONTROL + LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + HIGH SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER FIX POINT STOPPING
CONTROL LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING INDICATOR CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + PROTECTED REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
RADIO-FREQUENCY RECEPTION SIGNAL
CONTROL - OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
89A - 103
vnx.su
89A
89A
31A
34A
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
34G
34H
38AH
38AJ
38AK
38AL
38AS
38DH
38K
38N
38R
38U
38X
38Y
41A
42A
47A
47F
49B
49C
49F
49L
64A
64AP
64B
64C
64D
64E
64F
64P
65A
67A
67C
80BC
80BD
80CA
80DA
80E
80FC
80T
80X
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
CONTROL –WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 2
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 3
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 4
AC CONTROL
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
AC CONTROL RELAY > UCE INJECTION
CONTROL + AC CLUTCH RELAY> AC PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL + AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
- MINIMUM LEVEL FUEL WARNING
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER LOW SPEED RESISTANCE
SUPPLY + TURNING
+ PROTECTED TURNING LIGHTS
CONTROL + TURNING RELAY
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL + TURNING INDICATOR
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED SIGNALING
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING FUSE
+ INERTIA CONTACT
FLASH RELAY CONTROL
RIGHT FRONT ULTRASONIC EMISSION
LEFT FRONT ULTRASONIC DETECTION INFORMATION
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR CONTROL
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CONTROL – ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING RECEIVER SIGNAL ROUTE
89A - 104
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
89B
( After 01.06.2001)
NR.
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS DENOMINATION
1 ANTI-INTRUSION E2(O), E3
2 DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING E1, E2, E3
3 ANTI-STARTING
4 ELECTRIC LIGHTER E1, E2, E3
5 CLIMATE CONTROL E0, E1(series), E2(series)
6 CLIMATECONTROL AND AIR CONDITIONING E1(O), E2(O), E3
7 CEILING LIGHTING
8 ASHTRAY LIGHTING E0
9 ASHTRAY AND DOCUMENT COMP.LIGHTING E1, E2, E3
1 0 CLOCK
11 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E0
1 2 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E1, E2
1 3 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E3
1 4 STARTING CIRCUIT
1 5 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E0, E1(series), E2(series)
1 6 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E2(AC), E3
1 7 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E0
1 8 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(series), E2(series)
1 9 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(CA), E2 (CA), E3
2 0 ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT
2 1 MASS
2 2 MASS 2 E0
2 3 MASS 2 E1(series)
2 4 MASS 2 E1(CA)
2 5 MASS 2 E2 (serie)
2 6 MASS 2 E2(CA), E3
2 7 MASS 3 E0, E1, E2 (series)
2 8 MASS 3 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
2 9 MASS 4 E0, E1, E2 (serie)
3 0 MASS 4 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
3 1 MASS 5 E0, E1(series), E2(series)
3 2 MASS 5 E1(AC), E2(CA), E3
3 3 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E0
3 4 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(series)
3 5 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(CA)
3 6 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E2 (series)
3 7 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(CA), E3
3 8 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E0, E1(serie)
3 9 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E1(CA)
4 0 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(serie)
4 1 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(CA), E3
4 2 HANDBRAKE INDICATOR AND BRAKING SYSTEM FAILURE
89B - 1
vnx.su
E0 E1 E2 E3
O S
S S S
S S S S
S S S
S S S
O O S
S S S S
S
S S S
S S S
S
S S
S
S S S S
S S S
O S
S
S S
O O S
S S S S
S S S S
S
S
O
S
O S
S S S
O S
S S S
O S
S S S
O O S
S
S
O
S
O S
S S
O
S
O S
S S S S
89B
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR CIRCUIT
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
INSTRUMENT PANEL E0
INSTRUMENT PANEL E1, E2, E3
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E0
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E1, E2, E3
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR CIRCUIT
VEHICLE SPEED
SOUND WARNING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING
REAR FOG LAMP
FOG HEADLIGHTS
MEETING LIGHTS
REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
PARKING LIGHTS
ROAD LIGHTS
STOP LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (aileron)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (anti-intrusion), E3
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS E2(anti-intrusion), E3
S
S
S
S
S S
S S
S S
S
S
S
S S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S S
S S S
S S S
S S S
S S
O
O S
S S
O S
Note : these electric diagrams are valid for vehicle manufactured after 01.06.2001; E0
(Europa), E1 (Confort), E2 (Rapsodie), E3 (Clima) representequipping levelsof the vehicle.
89B - 2
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS INDEX
89B
(After 01.06.2001)
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
21
101
102
103
104
105
107
113
120
121
122
123
124
125
128
137
138
139
140
141
145
146
147
149
155
156
160
163
168
171
172
173
175
176
177
180
181
184
185
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
199
205
209
210
212
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
Right signalling anti-return diode
Electric lighter
Ashtray
Alternator
Anti-theft system
Acoustic alarm
Battery
Windscreen wiper timer
Injection computer (UCE)
Fog lights switch
Fog headlights switch
Door closing switch
Climate blower switch
Hazard switch
Rear window defrosting switch
Turning signalling relay
Right rear door actuator
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Right front door actuator
Windscreen wiper-washer switch
Detonation sensor
Atmospheric pressure sensor
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
Handbrake contact
Stop contact
Starter
Documents compartment lighting lamp
AC compressor clutch
Right rear lamp
Left rear lamp
Left fog lamp
Right fog headlight
Left fog headlight
Left front door contact
Right front door contact
Right front parking lamp
Left front parking lamp
Cooling motor fan
Right rear loud speaker
Left rear loud speaker
Right front door loud speaker
Left front door loud speaker
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Fuel level transmitter and electric pump
Oil pressure contact
Lights, turning lights and horn switch
Electronic clock
Windscreen wiper motor
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
230
231
234
236
238
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
294
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
474
503
584
597
600
639
649
654
700
778
857
887
927
993
1091
1202
1335
1428
89B - 3
vnx.su
Right front brake pad
Left front brake pad
Windscreen washing pump
Valve potentiometer
Diagnostic socket
Right headlamp
Left headlamp
Fog lamps relay
Fog headlights control relay
Cooling motor fan control relay
Fuel pump control relay
Actuators relay
Injection water temperature sensor
Instrument panel
Vehicle speed transducer
Right front turning lamp
Left front turning lamp
Cockpit fuse and relays box
Radio
Cooling motor fan and AC
Right side signalling lamp
Left side signalling lamp
Injection air temperature sensor
Rear window defrosting timer
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
Motor fan resistance ( for AC)
Right front ceiling lamp
Canister purging valve
UCE anti-intrusion
Engine hood contact
Siren
Volumetric sensor
AC relay ( on board)
UCE decoder
AC compressor clutch control relay
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Climate control blower
STOP-S3 lamp
Step-by-step engine
Anti-starting bushing
Cooling blower low speed control relay
Ignition coil
FLASH relay
Upstream oxygen sensor
Chock sensor
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Braking system ICP
AC pressure sensor (pressure controller)
Front ashtray lighting
Climate control blower control relay
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COUPLINGS LIST. MASS INDEX
( after 01.06.2001)
COUPLINGLIST
R53
R89
R107
R153
R154
R155
R156
R157
R212
R265
R318
=BATTERYMASS WIRING/MASS STRIPE (A) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR (B) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD (C) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR (D) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT FRONT DOOR (E) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFTREAR DOOR(F) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT REAR DOOR(G) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/HATCHBACK(H) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE (J) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/REAR (K) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/DASHBOARD(M) COUPLING
MASS LIST
M6 = REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING MASS
MA = RIGHT FRONT BODY MASS
MB = LEFT FRONT BODY MASS
ME = ELECTRIC MASS ATWINDSCREEN WIPER ATTACHMENT
MH = ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
ML = LEFT FRONT LONGITUDINAL GIRDER ELECTRIC MASS
M M = ELECTRIC MASS AT THE STEERING COLUMN
MZ = LEFT REAR BODY MASS
MYH= LEFT HATCHBACK MASS
89B - 4
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
89B - 5
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
( after 01.06.2001)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Detonation sensor
Starter
Injection air temperature sensor
Valve potentiometer
Step-by step engine
Alternator
Ignition coil
Canister purging valve
AC pressure sensor(pressure controller)
Diagnostic socket
AC compressor clutch
Upstream oxygen sensor
Cooling blower and AC
Blower resistance for AC
Oil pressure contact
Injection computer
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
AC compressor clutch control relay (E)
Water temperature sensor
Blower lower speed control relay (B)
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Motor fan control relay ( C)
Fog headlamps control relay(A)
Fuel pump control relay (H)
Actuators relay(D)
Chock sensor
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
89B - 6
vnx.su
Windscreen wiper timer
FLASH relay
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
AC relay ( on board)
Right front door actuator
Right rear door actuator
Right front door loud speaker
Right rear loudspeaker
Fuel level transmitt
er and electric pump
Trunk lighting lamp
Left rear loud speaker
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Left front door loud speaker
Right front door contact
Right volumetric sensor
Left volumetric sensor
Right front ceiling lamp
Handbrake contact
Anti-starting bushing
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Left front door contact
UCE decoder
Siren
Vehicle speed transducer
Engine hood contact
Doors closing switch
UCE anti-intrusion
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
89B - 7
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
( after 01.06.2001)
The cockpit fuse box is placed left side under dashboard, being attachedon the interior side
of the door(1). To access the fuses, turn the knob (2), then open up the door towards exterior.
1
2
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
F04
7,5A
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, lighter, ashtray, radio.
F06
15A
Lighter, clock, instrument panel ( anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti-intrusion, nati-intrusionindicator, diagnostic socket.
F07
15A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti-starting bushing
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
Reverse driving contact
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti-intrusion
Hazard and turning signaling lights
Left fog lamp
89B - 8
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
89B
On the fuse box, 6 fusiblefuse modulesare attached,protectingthe followingconsumers:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left road lights
F12
10A
Right road lights, road lights indicator
F13
10A
Left meeting lights
F14
10A
Right meeting lights, meeting lights indicator
F15
15A
F16
10A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch,
windscreen wiper timer
Radio, windscreen wiper motor
89B - 9
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Connector C0
1. Fog lamp switch ♦fog lamp relay control
2. Parking lights ♦inlet fuse F 1
3. Outlet fuse F10 ♦ left fog lamp
Connector C1
1. Outlet fuse F01 ♦ climate blower relay control
2. Outlet F09 ♦ climate blower
Connector C2
A1. Rear windowdefrosting switch ♦ rear windowdefrosting timer control
A2. Mass
A3. Outletfuse F06
B1. Outlet fuse F09 ♦ rear window defrosting
B2. Free
B3. Outlet fuse 07 ♦ UCE decoder, anti-starting bushing, FLASH relay
Connector C3
A1. Lights switch ( + parking) ♦ inlet fuse F05
A2. Outlet fuse F05 ♦ + parking
A3. Free
A4. Free
B1. Mass
B2. Mass
B3. Turning lights switch( signaling relaycontrol )
B4. Free
89B - 10
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
Connector C4
A1. Anti-theft mechanism( position M) ♦ inlet fuse F03)
A2. Outletfuse F01
A3. Hazard switch ♦ inlet fuse F04, supply of the rear windowdefrosting timer
B1. Outlet fuse F03
B2. Anti-theft mechanism(positionM) ♦ inlet fuse F02
B3. Outlet fuse F02 ♦ reverse driving contact
I = DC ( after contact )
J = IC ( before contact)
R1 = fog lamp control relay
R2 = climateblower control relay
RT = rear window defrosting timer
RS = turning signaling relay.
89B - 11
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
A. for equipping E0, E1, E2
( after 01.06.2001)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shock absorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
25A
Cooling blower ( vehicles without AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F02
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
C
D
H
15A
30A
30A
30A
Cooling blower
CONTROLLED Fog
CIRCUIT
headlamps (vehicle without
AC)
Injectors, canister purging valve, Fuel pump
Ignition coil
oxygen sensor heating
resistance, injection computer.
89B - 12
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
89B
B. For equipping E2(0), E3
( after 01.06.2001)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shockabsorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
F02
40A
F03
7,5A
F04
5A
F17
15A
F06
7,5A
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
Cooling blower ( vehicles with AC)
Injection computer ( + DC)
Injection computer( (+IC)
Fog headlights
AC compressor
A
B
C
D
E
H
15A
40A
30A
30A
30A
30A
CONTROLLED Fog
Cooling
Cooling
CIRCUIT headlamps blower- 1/st blower- 2/
speed(vehicles nd speed
with AC)
(vehicle
with AC)
Injectors, canister purging
valve, oxygen sensor
heating resistance,
injection computer.
89B - 13
vnx.su
AC
Fuel
compressor pump
Ignition
coil
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
(after 01.06.2001)
Connect.
Denomination
101
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
103 HA ALTERNATOR
103 HB ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
104
ANTI-THEFT MECHANISM
105
ACOUSTIC WARNING
113
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles without AC)
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles with AC)
121
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
122
FOG HEADLAMPS SWITCH
123
LOCKING DOORS SWITCH
124
BLOWER SWITCH
125
HAZARD SWITCH
128
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
138
RIGHT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
139
LEFT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
140
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
141
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
145
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING SWITCH
146
DETONATION SENSOR
147
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
149
RPM SENSOR
155
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
156
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
160
STOP CONTACT
163 GA STARTER
163 AB STARTER EXCITATION
166
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
167
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
168
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
171
AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
172
RIGHT REAR LAMP
173
LEFT REAR LAMP
175
LEFT FOG LAMP
176
RIGHT FOG HEADLIGHT
177
LEFT FOG HEADLIGHT
180
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
181
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
184
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
185
LEFT FRONT PARKING LAMP
188
COOLING FAN MOTOR ( for vehicles without AC)
189
RIGHT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
190
LEFT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
191
RIGHT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
192
LEFT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
193
INJECTOR 1
194
INJECTOR 2
195
INJECTOR 3
89B - 14
vnx.su
Page
89-129
89-102
89-102
89-109
89-117
89-105
89-82
89-84
89-124
89-124
89-126
89-122
89-126
89-125
89-131
89-131
89-130
89-130
89-105
89-94
89-95
89-92
89-91
89-138
89-115
89-102
89-103
89-139
89-139
89-129
89-100
89-136
89-136
89-138
89-115
89-116
89-138
89-138
89-116
89-116
89-101
89-135
89-135
89-132
89-132
89-97
89-98
89-98
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
196
199
200
205
209
210
212
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
454
474
503
560
597
597
600
639
639
649
654
778
857
887
927
993
INJECTOR 4
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
OIL PRESSURE CONTACT
CLIGHTS, TURNING LIGHTS, HORN SWITCH
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PAD
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PAD
WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
RIGHT HEADLAMP
LEFT HEADLAMP
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPEED TRANSDUCER
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LAMP
LEFT FRONT TURNING LAMP
COCKPIT FUSE AND RELAYS BOX
RADIO
COOLING MOTOR FAN (for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
LEFT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
INJECTION AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
AC STARTING BUTTON
MOTOR FAN RESISTANCE ( for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
SIREN
RIGHT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR(Rx)
LEFT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR (Tx)
AC RELAY (on board)
UCE DECODER
HATCHBACK CONTACT
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles without AC)
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles with AC)
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
STOP-S3 LAMP (on roof)
STOP[ -S3 LAMP (in aileron)
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
IGNITION COIL
FLASH RELAY
SUPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
CHOCK SENSOR
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
89B - 15
vnx.su
89-99
89-137
89-140
89-97
89-106
89-120
89-115
89-119
89-119
89-117
89-97
89-127
89-117
89-117
89-92
89-127
89-109
89-118
89-118
89-111
89-121
89-100
89-118
89-119
89-96
89-123
89-123
89-101
89-137
89-94
89-134
89-110
89-110
89-133
89-133
89-121
89-107
89-140
89-87
89-89
89-122
89-139
89-139
89-96
89-108
89-93
89-108
89-93
89-95
89-133
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
1033CA BATTERY PLUS PLUG
1091
ICP BRAKING SYSTEM
1202
AC PRESSURE SENSOR
1335
FRONT ASHTRAY LIGHTING
MH 121 ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
MOTOR FAN MASS
89-104
89-119
89-99
89-129
89-103
89-103
R 89
R 107
R 153
R 154
R 155
R 156
R 157
R 212
R 265
R 318
89-154
89-143
89-150
89-149
89-151
89-152
89-153
89-147
89-145
89-141
FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ LEFT REAR DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT REAR DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ HATCHBACK COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ REAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
OBSERVATIONS:
-Connectors and couplings are representedbackwards (from wires forward).
-Some electric components are not connectedto the vehicle wiring by means of multiple-way
connectors, but by means of protectedindividualplugs. For illustrating the type of the respective
plug, the followingsymbols are to be used:
Plug mother 6 mm
Plug father 6 mm
Plug mother broachΦ 3mm
Plug father broachΦ 3mm
Plug mother8mm
Plug mother flag6,3mm
89B - 16
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
(After June 1st 2001)
89B - 17
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
1
3
4
8
9
12
13
15
16
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
39
41
42
43
45
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
77
78
79
80
89
90
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
1,0
1,0
B41
01
Destination
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GK
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
3CU
3CS
CONTROL- CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CONTROL- BLOWERRELAY
CONTROL -WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ASS
M
ATMOSPHERICPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
CONTROL- CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL –INJECTIONFAILURE INDICA
TOR
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITIONPOTENTIOMETER
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSORSIGNAL
SIGNAL+AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
INJECTIONCODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSORSUPPL
>
Y+
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CONTROL- INJECTOR4
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
89B - 18
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B - 19
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
B41
01
Destination
1
3
4
8
9
10
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
38K
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
38
39
41
42
43
45
46
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
77
78
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
38X
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3JP
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GK
38AS
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3JQ
3D
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
CONTROL - BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL - WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM STOPPING CONTROL >
INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 1
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F04
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL – INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
CONTROL – BLOWER RELAY TR.2
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 2
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 3
SIGNAL +VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
SIGNAL +AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE K
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL – INJECTOR 1
CONTROL – INJECTOR 3
CONTROL - UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
+INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 4
- WATER TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL + VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR > SUPPLY +
89B - 20
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
79
80
82
83
89
90
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
Destination
3DQ
3GH
38U
38Y
3CU
3CS
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL - INJECTOR 4
CONTROL – INJECTOR 2
89B - 21
vnx.su
B41
01
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP1 7
R
R
D5
3NR
A-VI
D1
BP1 7
D4
R-N
B
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
D2
3 GT
AS-R
D3
BP17
R
S3
G
G
AP29
H1
AP29
3NA
A-V
A
H4
G
H2
3AC
M-G
H3
BP17
A
R
R
E3
597
2
8D P
R
BPR1
V
A1
8A
A4
A
A2
M
N
B
BPR1
R
R
1
S2
49B
R-V
BP7
A
C1
3NR
C4
A-V
OR
B
R
E2
89B - 22
vnx.su
C2
3JN
BP7
R-V
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89B
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
1,5
1,5
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
INJECTIONCOMPUTER> ACTUATORSRELAYCONTROL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
1,5
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINESAFETYRUNNINGRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
89B - 23
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM EQU
IPPED VEHICLE
S)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP17
3NR
R
R
A-VI
D1
BP17
D4
R-N
B
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
E1
3NR
E4
G
R
H1
AP29
E2
38K
3NA
A-V
A
H4
G
V-M
M-G
BP17
R
A
E3
S6
2
A
R
BPR1
BPR1
R
8DP
V
A1
8A
A4
A
B
B
A-R
R
E6
1
S2
BP7
B1
3NR
B4
A
E2
N
R
49B
A
B2
3JN
C1
3NR
OR
A-V
C4
C3
BP7
R-G
R-V
89B - 24
vnx.su
C2
3JP
M- R
B3
R
A2
M
BPR1
49L
R-G
R-G
R-V
B
H2
3AC
A
E3
BPR1
597
AS-R
BP17
S3
G
G
AP29
E5
38R
V
D2
3 GT
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89B
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
B1
B2
B3
B5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
E1
E2
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
4,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,5
0,5
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49L
3NR
3JP
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
3NR
38K
E3
E5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
2,0
BPR1
38R
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
S2
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
E6
S6
4,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
BP7
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
B
BPR1
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
- BLOWERRELAY, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
BLOWERCOOLING RESISTANCECONTROL
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.2
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL, IN
JECTIONCOMPUTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
AIR CONDITION
ING SYSTEM STOPPING CONT
ROL >
INJECTIONCOMPUTER
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINERUNNINGSAFETYRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
89B - 25
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
Destination
1
0,60
AP11
2
0,60
H66P
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, REVERSEDRIVING
LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLETF02
OIL TRANSMITTER CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,35
Destination
28A
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
89B - 26
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B1
B2
0,35
0,60
0,60
Destination
42A
3JK
3C
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
RPM SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BG
3BL
ENGINERPM SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
ENGINERPM -SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
3BG
A
149
X
3BL
B
89B - 27
vnx.su
X
89B
B41
01
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
Pos.
Sectioning
A
B
C
D
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3GF
3GK
3GH
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
NO
A
3NR
B
C
3GF 3GK
887
D
3GH
A-VI
IGNITION COIL
Pos.
A
B
C
Sectioning
2,0
2,0
2,0
Destination
3CV
3CW
3NA
CONTROL– CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITIONCOIL
CONTROL– CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITIONCOIL
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOK
E3 SENSOR > FUELPUMP
RELAY
89B - 28
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3BB
+ INJECTORS >ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CY13C
NO
371
1
3NR 3BB 2
X
X
DETONATION SENSOR
Pos.
1
2
4
Sectioning
0,50
0,50
0,50
Destination
3S
3DQ
TB1
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
CY2AE
146
MA
1
2
3S
X
3DQ
X
89B - 29
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CHOKE SENSOR
Pos.
1
3
Sectioning
1,40
1,40
Destination
3NA1
3NA
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE
SENSOR
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR >FUEL PUMP
RELAY
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
3GN
3F
3D
Atmospheric pressure sensormass
Atmospheric pressure sensorsignal
Atmospheric pressure sensor > Supply +
89B - 30
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3B
3JQ
SIGNAL +AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MASS
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
D
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BV
3BU
3BW
3BX
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
CM1PE
NO
A
B
3BV
3BU
C
D
3BW 3BX
649
X
X
X
89B - 31
vnx.su
X
89B
B41
01
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
Destination
0,60
0,60
0,60
3JL
3AQ
3AJ
VALVE POTENTIOMETERMASS
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
CM1PE
NO
222
A
B
3JL
3AQ
C
3AJ
X
X
X
INJECTOR 1
Pos.
1
2
Sectioning
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CR
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CY2AE
BA
1
193
2
3NR 3CR
X
X
89B - 32
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
INJECTOR 2
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
CY2AE
BA
1
194
2
3NR 3CS
X
X
INJECTOR 3
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CT
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CY2AE
BA
1
195
2
3NR 3CT
X
X
89B - 33
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
INJECTOR 4
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CU
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 4
CY2AE
BA
1
2
3NR 3CU
X
X
196
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
38U
38Y
38X
FREONPRESSURE SENSORMASS
+ FREONPRESSURESENSOR
FREONPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
NO
38X
X
38Y
X
1202
89B - 34
vnx.su
38U
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89B
B41
01
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
Pos. Sectioning
1
1,0
Destination
38R
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSORCLUTCH
NO
171
38R
X
AIR CONDITIONING AND BLOWER COOLING
(FOR AIRCONDITIONING EQUIPPED VEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
2
2,0
5,0
5,0
Destination
49B
49B
M
CONTROL+ BLOWER COOLING> BLOWER RESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
MASS
89B - 35
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
BLOWER COOLING
(FOR VEHICLE
S WITHOUT AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,5
1,5
Destination
M
49B
MASS
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
BLOWERRESISTANCE
(FORAIRCONDITIONINGEQUIPPEDVEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
2
2
Destination
49L
49B
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLINGRESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
89B - 36
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89B
B41
01
ALTERNATOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
5,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F02
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
B
R
R
103 HA
ALTERNATOREXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,6
Destination
2JD
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
CA13E
2JD
X
103 HB
STARTER
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
16,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY>+ ALTERNATOR
SL8C
B
R
R
163 GA
89B - 37
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
STARTER EXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
3,0
Destination
D
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
CS6PI
6,3 MM
D
163 AB
A
BLOWER MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
5,0
Destination
M
MASS
M
N
ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
4,0
Destination
ML
INJECTION COMPUTER MASS (PINS 3, 28AND 33)
SR 8L
MH - 121
ML
N
89B - 38
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
BATTERY TERMINAL + (PLUS)
Pos Sectioning
1
1
1
16,0
5,0
1,0
Destination
B
B
B
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF01, F04
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F06
RG
1033CA
B
R, R
A-R
89B - 39
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER – WASHING SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0,5
0,75
0,75
1,0
1,0
0,75
0,5
16A
AP7
14D
14K
AP7
14L
14C
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER OW
L SPEED
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL+ WINDSCREEN WIPERHIGHSPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
BA
145
1
16A
2
AP7
3
14D
V-A
M
X
4
14K
X
5
6
AP7 14L
7
14C
R
X
X
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0,5
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
M
16A
14D
14E
AP7
14C
MASS
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL + WIN
DSCREEN WIPER TIMER
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
NO
5
AP7
A
113
1
M
4
14E
2
16A
N
X
V
6
14C
3
14D
X
X
89B - 40
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
HORN, TURNING AND LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,5
1,0
64C
64B
64D
B
9M
67A
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ BATTERY
SHUNT > FOGLIGHTS SWITCH
CONTROL +ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
209
3
67A
2
9M
X
X
64D
64B
64C
X
X
X
A1
A2
B1
B2
0,75
3,0
0,75
0,75
1
B
B
M-AS
A
Destination
Position Sectioning
L
B
C
R
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
+ BATTERY
+ LOW BEAMLIGHTS
+ HIGHBEAMLIGHTS
BA
209
2
R
1
C
X
X
B
L
M
89B - 41
vnx.su
89B
X
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
U.C.E. DECODER
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
13C
80X
HK
HL
80T
H17
AP15
M
BP3
20F
20D
80BD
13A
20C
CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
ANTI-STARTER RECEPTOR SIGNAL
TRACK (TR)
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
ANTI-STARTING CONTROL-INDICATOR
INJECTION CODEDSIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUT
LET F07
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
0,5
0,5
20C
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
GR
20D
20C
20C
1 3 A 80BD
20D
20F
X
X
N-A
X
HK
8 0 X 13C
NO
B
503
A
X
X
BP3
M
AP1 5
H1 7
80T
HL
R
N
A
X
G
X
X
X
X
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
89B - 42
vnx.su
X
CY
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
20F
M
BP3
80X
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
MASS
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSEOUTLET F07
ANTI-STARTING RECEPT
OR SIGNALTRACK (TR)
GR
654
1
20F
X
2
M
N
3
BP3
4
80X
R
X
FLASH RELAY
Position Sectioning
Destination
1
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
2
0,35
80BD
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FLASHRELAY
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
4
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
5
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
* For Anti-intrusion System equipped vehicles
5
0,5
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS >U.C.E. ANTI-IN
TRUSION
SYSTEM> DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING/ UNLOCKING
INFO
NO
5
64D
X
1
BP3
4
64C
2
80BD
R-A
X
N-A
3
BP3
857
R-A
R-A
89B - 43
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
VEHICLE SPEED TRANSDUCER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
47F
M
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
MASS
BA
AP15
A
1
47F
X
250
2
M
N
3
INTRUSION SYSTEM
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
1,5
4,0
S
A
B1
B2
4,0
3,0
B
D
+ ACCESSORIES > COCKPIT FUSES INLET
F01,F15
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT > COCKPITFUSES INLET
F02, F03AND ENGINE FUSEINLET F03
+ BATTERY
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
104
D
B
A
M
A
S
R
M-V
2
89B - 44
vnx.su
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
A
B
0,35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> ENGINE
HOOD CONTACT
CA 13E
NO
M
A
N
13A
B
438
X
SIREN
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,5
0,5
0,35
BP11
M
80FC
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY > SIREN
MASS
SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
CM1PE
442
NO
3
80FC
2
M
1
BP11
G-AS
N
R
89B - 45
vnx.su
89B
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
FRONT WIRING
B41
01
COCKPIT RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
3
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
9B
L
9DP
9DP
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS> FOGLAMPSWITCH
BA
260
3
9B
X
X
2
L
1
B P11
VI
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
1,5
AP10
SP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
CESSORIES> CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED AC
BA
260
2
SP3
R
89B - 46
vnx.su
1
AP10
A-G
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A3
B1
B1
B2
B3
89B
0,35
0,5
0,5
1,5
2,0
0,35
15LP
M
BCP3
BCP3
15B
15A
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
MASS
+ CEILINGPROTECTED BATTERY
+ CEILINGPROTECTEDBATTERY>FUSE OUTLETF06
CONTROL + REARWINDOW DEFROSTING
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
1,0
BP3
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY >FUSE OUTLET F07
* For Anti-intrusion equipped vehicles
B3
1,0
BP3
+ WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON PRESET
POSITIONPROTECTEDBATTERY>SIREN
BA
260
BP3
15B
R
X
X
BCP3
M
15LP
R-AS
AS
N
M-V
3
1
B2
B3
A
2
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B
0,75
0,50
0,75
L
L
L
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
0,5
0,5
M
M
MASS
MASS > FOG LAMPS RELA
Y, CLIMATE CONTROL
BLOWERRELAY, REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGTIMER
1,0
64B
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
BA
64B
M
B
V
L
260
L
A
X
4
3
89B - 47
vnx.su
2
1
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,5
1,5
1,0
1,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
A
AP10
64AP
AP15
A
AP11
SUPPLY + D.C.
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS,FUSEINLETF04
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SUPPLY + D.C. > COCKPIT FUSE INLE
T F02
+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
BA
260
AP1 1
A
AP1 5
V
R
A
6 4 AP
AP1 0
A
X
R-G
R-A
3
2
Position Sectioning
3,0
B
A
1
Destination
B
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF06, F07, F08, F09
NO
B
260
AS
Position Sectioning
1,5
1,5
Destination
S
S
260
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F01 COCKPIT
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F15 COCKPIT
BA
S
M-V
R
89B - 48
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
0.75
R
0,75
R
F11
89B
BA
R
X
X
+ HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
INLET F11
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE N
I LET F12
R
X
F12
F12
F11
0,75
R
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUS
E INLET F12
RPD
X
X
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
0,35 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
RPG
X
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS >FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F14
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F13
0,75 CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F13
F14
0,75 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,35 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
C
X
X
C
F13
X
CPG
X
CPD
X
X
S
R
AP7
F15
1,5
F15
1,0
F16
0,75
0,75
F16
0,75
S
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET F01
R
B
AP7 + WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTED D.C.
B
+ BATTERY
AS-A
260
BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F16
BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
89B - 49
vnx.su
BP11
AS-A
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
Pos
Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
1,0
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
14K
14E
14L
BP11
BP11
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F16
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
BA
3
14
212
X
4
BP1 1
A
R
1
14K
2
14E
X
X
STOP CONTACT
BA
AP10
Destination
GR
1
1,0
AP10 +PROTECTED D.C.> FUSEOUTLETF01
65A
2
1,0
65A CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
160
X
RIGHT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
2
0.75
0,75
8B
M
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
M
176
MASS
89B - 50
vnx.su
N
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0,75 8B
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
2
0,75
MASS
M
M
N
177
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0,5
L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
184
LEFT FRONT PARKING LIGHT
BA
Destination
L
X
1
2
0,5
0,5
L
M
+PARKINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
M
N
185
89B - 51
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
67A
Destination
X
1
1,0
67A CONTROL +ACOUSTIC W
ARNING
105
WINDSCREEN WIPER PUMP
BA
Destination
M
N
1
0,5
16A CONTROL +WINDSCREENWASHING
2
0,35
M
PUMP
MASS
16A
221
X
RIGHTHEADLIGHT
CD8F
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPD + PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
226
BA
1
M
N
2
CPD
X
3
RPD
X
LEFTHEADLIGHT
CD8F
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW BEAM LIGHTS
> FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
89B - 52
vnx.su
227
BA
2
CPG
X
1
3
M
RPG
N
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
M
MASS
N
255
LEFT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
256
RIGHT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D
2
0,5
M
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
267
89B - 53
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
2
0,5
M
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
268
I.C.P. BRAKING SYSTEM
BA
Destination
1
0,35 H1
H1
CONTROL –ICP, HAND BRAKE
INDICATOR
1091
X
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
216
H12
X
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
89B - 54
vnx.su
217
H12
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
L
AP10
BCP3
4
5
6
0,35
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT . FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ CEILINGLAMPSPROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F06
MASS
BA
6
5
4
3
2
1
210
N
AS
R
X
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
34D
34C
34E
34F
34G
34H
34A
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
BA
261
1
34D
3
34E
5
34G
7
34A
X
X
X
X
4
34F
6
34H
8
34B
X
X
X
2
34C
X
89B - 55
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
4
6
7
8
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
BP11
L
AP10
M
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > COCKPITFUSE BOX
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F01
MASS
NO
1
3
2
4
BP11
5
7
AP10
AS-A
261
6
L
A-AS
8
M
X
N
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY(ON BOARD)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1
2
3
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
38DH
38DH
38AH
38DH
38AS
CONTROL+AIRCONDITIONING
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
NO
5
38AS
X
1
38DH
4
V
V
X
3
38DH
474
V
89B - 56
vnx.su
2
38AH
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
1,5
1,0
1,5
1,5
Destination
SP3
38AH
38AJ
38AK
ACCESSORIESPROTECTED CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED1
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED2
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED3
BA
2
38A H
600
1
SP3
X
R
4
38AK
3
38AJ
X
X
BLOWERSWITCH
Position Sectioning
Destination
1
1*
1,0
0,5
38AH
38AH
2
3
4
5
1,5
1,5
0,35
1,5
38AJ
38AK
L
M
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER, SPEED 1>
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMRELAYCOIL(ONBOARD)
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
2
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
3
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
MASS
1* - for air conditioning systemequippedvehicles
BA
X
124
X
X
89B - 57
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
B41
01
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,35
0,5
Destination
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
298
2
M
1
L
N
X
AIR CONDITIONING STARTING BUTTON
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
AP15
M
L
38DH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
BA
2
M
319
1
AP15
N
AS
4
38D H
3
L
V
X
89B - 58
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
FOG LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
2
4
5
6
7
9
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
9DP
9DP
9M
L
M
9DP
9B
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REAR FOGLIGHTS > FOGLIGHT SWITCH
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > + PROTECTEDREAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REARFOG LIGHT
NO
9
9B
121
2
9DP
4
9M
X
X
X
5
L
X
7
9DP
Vi
X
6
M
N
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
Destination
L
8A
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
1
L
122
X
2
8A
R-A
4
M
N
3
L
X
89B - 59
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
B41
01
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
(Pulsetype)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
AP15
15LP
15LP
L
M
15LP
+ PROTECTED D.C. > FUSE
OUTLET F03
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
+ PROTECTEDREAR WINDOWDEFROSTING
+PARKING LIGHT
S > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
NO
4
M
5
15LP
128
A-R
1
2
AP15 15 LP
V
R A-R
N
3
L
X
89B - 60
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
HAZARD SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1,0
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
Destination
AP15
B
64C
64D
L
M
64F
64B
64AP
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
+PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLETF04
NO
1
AP15
2
B
R
AS
3
64D
5
L
X
X
7
64F
6
M
X
N
X
9
6 4 AP
125
4
64D
8
64B
GR
V
DOORS LOCKING SWITCH
Position Sectioning
5
1
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
Destination
20D
M
M
20C
L
M
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
SHUNT > MASS
NO
123
5
20D
1
M
X
2
20C
X
4
M
N
3
L
X
89B - 61
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DIAGNOSIS SOCKET
Position Sectioning
1
4
5
7
15
16
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
M
N
HK
HL
BCP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
MASS
ELECTRONICMASS
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINEL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F06
NO
8
7
HK
6
5
N
X
225
16
BCP3
15
HL
R
X
N
14
13
4
M
3
2
N
1
AP15
G
12
11
10
9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
8
9
10
0.35
0,75
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
L
M
M
15A
RPD
H7
AP15
AP15
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
M
M
64D
64C
SHUNT > MASS
SHUNT > MASS
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
BA
247
10
64C
9
64D
X
X
8
M
N
N
7
6
AP15
Vi
R
89B - 62
vnx.su
5
H7
4
RPD
X
X
3
15A
X
2
M
N
N
1
L
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0.35
0.6
89B
Destination
64F
31A
AP15
M
H1
H12
41A
47A
2JD
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR – CONTROL
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
SHUNT > MASS
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
BRAKE PADSWEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
- FUELLEVEL WARNINGSIGNAL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
BA
9
2J D
247
8
47A
7
41A
X
X
6
H12
VI
0.35
0.35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
4
M
3
AP15
N
X
CPD
80T
BCP3
3FH
28A
42A
1
64F
X
PROTECTED RIGHTLOWBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING INDICA
TOR - CONTROL
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY> FUSEOUTLETF06
INJECTIONFAILURE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
BA
247
2
31A
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
H1
6
42A
5
28A
4
3FH
3
2
BCP3 80T
X
X
X
AS
89B - 63
vnx.su
X
1
CPD
X
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0.35
L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
168
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
ELECTRICLIGHTER
BA
L
Destination
X
M
1
2
3
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
0,5 M
MASS
0,75 BCP3 + CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED
BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
N
BCP3
101
AS
FRONTASHTRAY LIGHTING
BA
L
Destination
X
1
0.35
L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
1335
M
N
89B - 64
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
89B
B41
01
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
141
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
140
20C
X
89B - 65
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
B41
01
LEFT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING >ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
139
X
RIGHT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
138
20C
X
89B - 66
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
Destination
34E
34F
SIGNAL +RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER(RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
191
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34G
34H
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
192
X
89B - 67
vnx.su
89B
B41
01
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
RIGHT VOLUME SENSOR (RX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80CA
N
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80CA
N
X
LEFT VOLUME SENSOR (TX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80DA
N
LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80DA
N
X
ANTI INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
BCP3
80E
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY>OUTLETFUSE F06
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
NO
993
2
80E
1
BCP3
X
R
89B - 68
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
REAR WIRING
U.C.E. ANTI-INTRUSION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
2
5
6
6
7
8
9
12
14
15
18
23
24
24
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION >
DOORSLOCKING/UNLOCKINGINFO
M
MASS
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
BCP3 + CEILING LAMPPROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLETF06
BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
80E
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
13A
CEILING LAMP LIGHTING –CONTROL> CONTACTS
AP15 + PLUSAFTER PROTECTED CONTACT> FUSEOUTLETF03
20D
CONTROL + DOORS LOCKING
> ACTUATORS
20C
CONTROL + DOORS UNL
OCKING >ACTUATORS
80FC SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
80DA LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
N
ELECTRONICMASS
N
MASS
BA
24
N
N
N
12
AP1 5
427
23
80D A
22
21
20
19
18
80FC
10
G
9
13A
8
M
7
6
64C BCP3
X
X
X
R
R
0,35
0,35
5
64D
4
15
20C
80CA
N
427
1
80CA
X
2
N
N
89B - 69
vnx.su
13
X
3
2
M
1
64D
V-A
X
R
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
14
20D
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
16
GR-VI
X
11
17
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34A
34B
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
190
X
RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34D
34C
SIGNAL +RIGHT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT REARSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
189
X
89B - 70
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR LAMP
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
65A
64C
H66P
H66P
M
L
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F02
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > RIGHT REARLAMP
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
BA
173
6
L
5
M
X
N
4
H66P
X
X
3
64C
2
65A
X
X
1
RIGHTREAR LAMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
L
M
H66P
64D
65A
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLETF02
CONTROL +EVERSE
R
DRI
VING LIGHTSRIGHT
>
TURNING LAMP
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
BA
6
172
5
65A
X
4
64D
X
89B - 71
vnx.su
3
H66P
X
2
M
1
L
N
X
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
BA
Destination
BCP3
1
2
V-A
0.35 BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
0,5 13C CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
329
13C
X
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
1.5
0,35
1,5
Destination
47A
3NA1
41A
M
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE
SENSOR
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
MASS
NO
199
3
4
X
N
1
47A
2
3NA1
X
A-R
89B - 72
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
HANDBRAKE CONT
ACT
Destination
BA
H1
X
1
0.35
H1
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR CONTROL
156
LEFTFOG LIGHT
NO
Destination
9DP
1
2
0.5
0,5
9DP
M
X
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
MASS
175
M
N
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35 13A
CEILINGLAMPLIGHTING CONTROL
> DOORS CONT
ACTS
180
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35 13A
CEILING LAMPLIGHTING
CONTROL > DOORS CONT
ACTS
89B - 73
vnx.su
181
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
LEFTLICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
167
PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSEOUTLETF05
RIGHTLICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
+PARKING LIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET F05
1
0,35 L
+ PARKING LIGHTS> LEFT
LICENSE PLA
TE LAMP
166
STOP LAMP S3
(ONROOF)
Destination
BA
65A
X
1
0.5
65A
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
639
STOP LAMP S3
(INAILERON)
BA
65A
Destination
X
1
2
0.5
0,5
65A
M
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
MASS
M
639
89B - 74
vnx.su
N
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89B
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
Destination
BA
15B
1
2,0
15B
CONTROL + HA
TCHBACK REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTING
200
X
HATCHBACK CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CEILING LIGHTINGCONTROL> HATCHBACKCONTACT
ANTI-INTRUSION UCE > HA
TCHBACK CONTACT
1 DBD1
BA
M
A
560
13A
X
89B - 75
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,5
0,50
34D
BCP3
8A
SIGNAL + RIGHTREAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
FUSE BOX > FUSE U
OTLET F06(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELA
Y
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLET F04
CONTROL+TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL -RIGHT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
LEFTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGHT
S – FUSE OUTLET F05
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES
SIGNAL - RIGHTFRONT SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE OUT
LETF16
CONTROL+ PROTECTEDREARWINDOW DEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLETF03
MASS
+ BATTERY
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
RIGHTPROTECTED MEETING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICLOCKING > UCEDECODER
CONTROL REAR FOGLAMP
+ PROTECTED+ REAR FOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
MA
D
C
B
R 318
A
34A
CPD
X
X
20C
X
34G
BP11
15LP
X
20D
9B
9DP
X
VI
X
34B
X
AP15
M
B
34H
AS-A
M-V
R
N
AS
X
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
X
X
X
X
X
R
X
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
X
AS
A
GR
X
X
1
2
3
5
6
7
89B - 76
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,0
0,50
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,5
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SUPPLY(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
+ PROTECTED TURNINGLIGHTS
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > FOG LAMP SWITCH
+ PARKINGLIGHTS
SORIES > CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED ACCES
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY> RADIO
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
MASS
+ BATTERY > HAZARD SWITC
H
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
RIGHTPROTECTEDMEETING LIGHTS> INDICATOR
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
MA
R 318
34B
9DP
9B
20D
20C
CPD
34A
X
X
VI
X
X
X
X
34H
B
M
AP15
15LP
BP11
X
AS
N
43F
SP3
L
R
9M
X
X
R
34C
64B
X
X
GR
R-A
7
6
5
3
64AP
89B - 77
vnx.su
X
V
64D
AS-A
64C
D
34G
X
C
34E
X
X
X
8A
BCP3
34D
AS
X
2
1
B
A
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C5
C6
C6
C7
Destination
0,5
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
WATER TEMPERATURE WARNING
OIL PRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HK
HL
HL
M
WATERTEMPERATURE SIGNAL
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
PROTECTEDRIGHTHIGHBEAM
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
ICP INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
INJECTION FAILUREINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS SIGNALLINE K> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK > UCEDECODER
DIAGNOSIS SIGNA
L LINE L> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEL > UCE DECODER
MASS
MA
47A
C
X
AP10
B R-G
R 107
3FH
80T
X
X
RPD
64C
38AS
X
HK
HL
M
N-G
H1
H1 2
2JD
X
X
31A
28A
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
5
6
7
64D
A
41A
X
89B - 78
vnx.su
X
X
H7
15A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNINGLIGHTSCONTROL> INDICATOR
INSTRUMENTPANEL> WATER TEMPERATUREWARNING
INSTRUMENT PANEL > OILPRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HL
M
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
RPM-METERSIGNAL
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAM> INDICATOR
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > INDICA
TOR
AIR-COND
ITIONINGCOMPRESSO
R CON
NECTIONSIGNAL > RELA
Y
ICP HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
- FUELMINIMALLEVEL WARNING
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
INJECTION FAILUREINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINE L
MASS
MA
R 107
M
HL
HK
80T
3FH
41A
N
X
X
X
X
X
2JD
H1 2
H1
X
X
X
15A
H7
42A
X
X
X
7
6
5
89B - 79
vnx.su
38AS
X
64C
RPD
47A
X
C
AP10
X
X
R-G B
28A
31A
64D
X
X
X
3
2
1
A
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2*
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D6*
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > TURNING SWITCH
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
34G
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL +REVERSE DRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE SENSOR
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
FLASH RELAY DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CEILING LAMPS CONTROL
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > DOORS CONT
ACTS
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPSLIGHTING > HOOD CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
A2*, D2* - for vehicles without Anti-intrus ion System
D4, D6*- for Anti-intrusion System provided vehicles
MA
34B
X
R 265
13A
X
13C
X
80FC
AP1 5
G-AS
G
34A
20D
20C
BCP3
3NA 1
X
X
X
R-AS
A-R
H6 6 P
9DP
34H
15B
X
X
X
X
H1
64D
X
41A
35C
X
34D
X
X
47A
34F
X
X
34G
64C
65A
L
64D
34E
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
2
1
89B - 80
vnx.su
D
X
C
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A6*
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Destination
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTSCONTROL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
64C
34G
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL> UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
RIGHT CEILING LAMP CONTROL
CEILIN G LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK DOORS CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER
D2, D3, D4, A2*, A6* - for anti-intrusion system provided vehicles
MA
D
C
B
R 265
A
34C
64D
AP1 5
80FC
13C
13A
X
X
X
GR-VI
X
X
34D
41A
3NA 1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
X
X
A-R
R-A
X
X
X
34F
47A
H1
9DP
H6 6 P
15B
X
X
X
X
X
X
34E
64D
L
65A
X
X
2
3
5
X
1
89B - 81
vnx.su
64C
34B
X
34H
X
34G
X
6
7
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
MA
D
3FH
X
AP1 1
R
R 212
28A
47F
X
X
X
HL
HK
42A
H7
X
31A
X
X
X
X
X
38AS
2JD
A
3NA 1
D
VI
R
A-R
A
3
2
1
X
7
H6 6 P
H1 7
6
5
89B - 82
vnx.su
C
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
C1
C2
C3
C4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED
CONTACT > CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
A6 - For air-conditioning system provided vehicles
MA
D
31A
C
B
R 212
A
X
47F
H1 7
X
X
3FH
X
HK
HL
H7
42A
H6 6 P
28A
AP1 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
D
3NA 1
A
2JD
38AS
A
A-R
R
VI
X
1
2
3
89B - 83
vnx.su
5
6
7
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
2DED1
B
BA
20D
X
20C
34F
X
X
34E
R 154
A
X
1
3
RIGHT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Destination
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
34F
X
BA
20C
X
20D
X
34E
R 154
X
3
89B - 84
vnx.su
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
2DE D1
BA
20D
B
X
20C
34H
X
X
34G
R 153
A
X
1
3
LEFT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Destination
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
BA
34H
X
20C
X
20D
X
34G
X
R 153
3
89B - 85
vnx.su
1
B
A
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
X
R 155
20C
X
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 155
20C
X
89B - 86
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT REAR DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORSELECTRICLOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING >UCE DECODER
20D
X
20C
R 156
X
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 156
20C
X
89B - 87
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
HATCHBACK / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
13A
2
3
4
0,5
0,35
2,0
65A
L
15B
CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK CONTACT
UCE ANTI-INT RUSION CONTROL > HATCHBACK CONTACT
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
R 157
1
2
13A 6 5 A
3
L
4
15B
X
X
X
X
HATCHBACK WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
2,0
Destination
13A
65A
65A
L
15B
CONTROL + CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > HATCHBACK CONTACT
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON HOOD)
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON AILERON)
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
4
15B
R 157
X
3
2
1
L 65A 13A
X
X X X
89B - 88
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89B
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
BRAKE PADS WEAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,35
H12
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR - CONTROL
BA
H12
R 89
X
BRAKE PADS WEAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
0,35
0,35
H12
H12
BRAKE PADS WEARINDICATOR – CONTROL > RIGHT PAD
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL > LEFT PAD
BA
H12
X
X
R 89
89B - 89
vnx.su
89B
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
(after 01.06.2001)
LINK
CODES
A
AP10
AP11
AP15
AP29
B
BCP3
BP11
BP17
BP2
BP3
BP37
BP7
BP76
BPR1
C
CPD
CPG
D
H1
H12
H17
H66P
H7
HK
HL
L
LPD
LPG
M
ML
N
NF
R
RPD
RPG
S
SP3
TB1
2JD
3AC
3AJ
3AQ
3B
3BB
3BG
3BL
3BU
3BV
3BW
3BX
3C
WIRE FUNCTIONS
SUPPLY + AFTER CONTACT
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT>OUTLET FUSE F01
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03 ENGINE RUNNING
+ BATTERY
+ PROTECTED BATTERY, CEILING LAMPS
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > COCKPIT 1
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F01
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY> WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING IN A FIXED POSITION
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F15
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F04
+ PROTECTED BATTERY FUSE 1 MOTOR FAN
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > LIGHTING CONTROL
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > OUTLET FUSE F17> RELAY
+ MEETING LIGHTS(LOW BEAM)
+ MEETING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ MEETING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL- HANDBRAKE INDICATOR, BRAKING CIRCUIT ICP
CONTROL-BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
CONTROL+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
RPM METER SIGNAL
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE L
+ PARKING LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ PARKING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
ELECTRIC MASS
BATTERY ELECTRIC MASS
ELECTRONIC MASS
MASS: WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR, AIR, POTENTIOMETER
+ ROAD LIGHTS( HIGH BEAM)
+ ROAD LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ ROAD LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ ACCESORIES
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES > CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
SIGNAL+ VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
ENGINE RPM SIGNAL > RPM SENSOR
SIGNAL - RPM ENGINE > RPM SENSOR
CONTROL 1 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 2 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 3 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 4 IDLING REGULATOR
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
89B - 90
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
3CR
3CS
3CT
3CU
3CV
3CW
3D
3DQ
3F
3FH
3FN
3GF
3GH
3GK
3GN
3GT
3JK
3JL
3JN
3JP
3JQ
3NA
3NA1
3NR
3S
8A
8B
8DP
9A
9B
9C
9DP
9M
11A
13A
13C
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
14K
14L
15A
15B
15LP
16A
20C
20D
20F
28A
CONTROL- INJECTOR 1
CONTROL- INJECTOR 2
CONTROL- INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- INJECTOR 4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 1-4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 2-3
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR> SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL-INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
RPM SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL- UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
MASS UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ACTUATORS RELAY MASS
- WATER TEMPERATURE
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
CONTROL - STEP 1 MOTOR FAN RELAY
CONTROL- STEP 2 MOTOR FAN RELAY
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
+ IGNITION COIL, CHOCK SENSOR> PETROL PUMP RELAY
+ PETROL PUMP
+ INJECTORS> ACTUATORS RELAY OUTPUT
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
+ FOG HEADLAMPS RELAY
+ FOG HEADLAMPS > RELAY
+ PROTECTED FOG HEADLAMPS
+ REAR FOG LAMPS RELAY CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LAMPS
SHUNT> FOG LAMPS SWITCH
CONTROL + ROAD LIGHTS
CONTROL - CEILING LAMPS> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL> CEILING LAMPS
CONTROL + LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + HIGH SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER FIX POINT STOPPING
CONTROL LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING INDICATOR CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + PROTECTED REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
RADIO-FREQUENCY RECEPTION SIGNAL
CONTROL - OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
89B - 91
vnx.su
89B
89B
31A
34A
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
34G
34H
38AH
38AJ
38AK
38AL
38AS
38DH
38K
38N
38R
38U
38X
38Y
41A
42A
47A
47F
49B
49C
49F
49L
64A
64AP
64B
64C
64D
64E
64F
64P
65A
67A
67C
80BC
80BD
80CA
80DA
80E
80FC
80T
80X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
CONTROL –WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 2
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 3
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 4
AC CONTROL
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
AC CONTROL RELAY > UCE INJECTION
CONTROL + AC CLUTCH RELAY> AC PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL + AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
- MINIMUM LEVEL FUEL WARNING
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER LOW SPEED RESISTANCE
SUPPLY + TURNING
+ PROTECTED TURNING LIGHTS
CONTROL + TURNING RELAY
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL + TURNING INDICATOR
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED SIGNALING
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING FUSE
+ INERTIA CONTACT
FLASH RELAY CONTROL
RIGHT FRONT ULTRASONIC EMISSION
LEFT FRONT ULTRASONIC DETECTION INFORMATION
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR CONTROL
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CONTROL – ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING RECEIVER SIGNAL ROUTE
89B - 92
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
89C
( EURO 2000)
NR.
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS DENOMINATION
1 ANTI-INTRUSION E2(O), E3
2 DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING E1, E2, E3
3 ANTI-STARTING
4 ELECTRIC LIGHTER E1, E2, E3
5 CLIMATE CONTROL E0, E1, E2(series)
6 CLIMATECONTROL AND AIR CONDITIONING E1(O), E2(O), E3
7 CEILING LIGHTING
8 ASHTRAY LIGHTING E0
9 ASHTRAY AND DOCUMENT COMP.LIGHTING E1, E2, E3
1 0 CLOCK
11 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E0
1 2 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E1, E2
1 3 PRE-EQUIPPING RADIO E3
1 4 STARTING CIRCUIT
1 5 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E0, E1(series), E2(series)
1 6 ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E2(CA), E3
1 7 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E0
1 8 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(series), E2(series)
1 9 ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(CA), E2 (CA), E3
2 0 ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT
2 1 MASS
2 2 MASS 2 E0
2 3 MASS 2 E1(series)
2 4 MASS 2 E1(CA)
2 5 MASS 2 E2 (serie)
2 6 MASS 2 E2(CA), E3
2 7 MASS 3 E0, E1, E2 (series)
2 8 MASS 3 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
2 9 MASS 4 E0, E1, E2 (serie)
3 0 MASS 4 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
3 1 MASS 5 E0, E1(series), E2(series)
3 2 MASS 5 E1(CA), E2(CA), E3
3 3 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E0
3 4 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(series)
3 5 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(CA)
3 6 FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E2 (series)
3 7 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(CA), E3
3 8 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E0, E1(serie)
3 9 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E1(CA)
4 0 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(serie)
4 1 FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(CA), E3
4 2 HANDBRAKE INDICATOR AND BRAKING SYSTEM FAILURE
89C - 1
vnx.su
E0 E1 E2 E3
O S
S S S
S S S S
S S S
S S S
O O S
S S S S
S
S S S
S S S
S
S S
S
S S S S
S S S
O O S
S
S S
O O S
S S S S
S S S S
S
S
O
S
O S
S S S
O S
S S S
O S
S S S
O O S
S
S
O
S
O S
S S
O
S
O S
S S S S
89C
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR CIRCUIT
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
INSTRUMENT PANEL E0
INSTRUMENT PANEL E1, E2, E3
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E0
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E1, E2, E3
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR CIRCUIT
VEHICLE SPEED
SOUND WARNING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING
REAR FOG LAMP
FOG HEADLIGHTS
MEETING LIGHTS
REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
PARKING LIGHTS
ROAD LIGHTS
STOP LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (aileron)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (anti-intrusion), E3
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS E2(anti-intrusion), E3
S
S
S
S
S S
S S
S S
S
S
S
S S
S
S
S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Note : these electric diagrams are valid for vehicles who respect depollution norms EURO
2000; E0 (Europa), E1 (Confort), E2 (Rapsodie), E3 (Clima) representequipping levelsof the
vehicle.
89C - 2
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS INDEX
89C
(EURO 2000)
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
21
101
102
103
104
105
107
113
120
121
122
123
124
125
128
137
138
139
140
141
145
146
147
149
155
156
160
163
168
171
172
173
175
176
177
180
181
184
185
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
199
205
209
210
212
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
Right signalling anti-return diode
Electric lighter
Ashtray
Alternator
Anti-theft system
Acoustic alarm
Battery
Windscreen wiper timer
Injection computer (UCE)
Fog lights switch
Fog headlights switch
Door closing switch
Climate blower switch
Hazard switch
Rear window defrosting switch
Turning signalling relay
Right rear door actuator
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Right front door actuator
Windscreen wiper-washer switch
Detonation sensor
Atmospheric pressure sensor
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
Handbrake contact
Stop contact
Starter
Documents compartment lighting lamp
AC compressor clutch
Right rear lamp
Left rear lamp
Left fog lamp
Right fog headlight
Left fog headlight
Left front door contact
Right front door contact
Right front parking lamp
Left front parking lamp
Cooling motor fan
Right rear loud speaker
Left rear loud speaker
Right front door loud speaker
Left front door loud speaker
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Fuel level transmitter and electric pump
Oil pressure contact
Lights, turning lights and horn switch
Electronic clock
Windscreen wiper motor
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
230
231
234
236
238
242
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
294
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
474
503
584
597
600
639
649
654
700
778
857
887
927
993
1091
1202
1335
1428
89C - 3
vnx.su
Right front brake pad
Left front brake pad
Windscreen washing pump
Valve potentiometer
Diagnostic socket
Right headlamp
Left headlamp
Fog lamps relay
Fog headlights control relay
Cooling motor fan control relay
Fuel pump control relay
Actuators relay
Downstream oxygen sensor
Injection water temperature sensor
Instrument panel
Vehicle speed transducer
Right front turning lamp
Left front turning lamp
Cockpit fuse and relays box
Radio
Cooling motor fan and AC
Right side signalling lamp
Left side signalling lamp
Injection air temperature sensor
Rear window defrosting timer
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
Motor fan resistance ( for AC)
Right front ceiling lamp
Canister purging valve
UCE anti-intrusion
Engine hood contact
Siren
Volumetric sensor
AC relay ( on board)
UCE decoder
AC compressor clutch control relay
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Climate control blower
STOP-S3 lamp
Step-by-step engine
Anti-starting bushing
Cooling blower low speed control relay
Ignition coil
FLASH relay
Upstream oxygen sensor
Chock sensor
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Braking system ICP
AC pressure sensor (pressure controller)
Front ashtray lighting
Climate control blower control relay
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COUPLINGS LIST. MASS INDEX
( EURO 2000)
COUPLINGLIST
R53
R89
R107
R153
R154
R155
R156
R157
R212
R265
R318
=BATTERYMASS WIRING/MASS STRIPE (A) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR (B) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD (C) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR (D) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT FRONT DOOR (E) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/LEFTREAR DOOR(F) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/RIGHT REAR DOOR(G) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/HATCHBACK(H) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE (J) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/REAR (K) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/DASHBOARD(M) COUPLING
MASS LIST
M6 = REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING MASS
MA = RIGHT FRONT BODY MASS
MB = LEFT FRONT BODY MASS
ME = ELECTRIC MASS ATWINDSCREEN WIPER ATTACHMENT
MH = ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
ML = LEFT FRONT LONGITUDINAL GIRDER ELECTRIC MASS
M M = ELECTRIC MASS AT THE STEERING COLUMN
MZ = LEFT REAR BODY MASS
MYH= LEFT HATCHBACK MASS
89C - 4
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
89C
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
89C - 5
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
( EURO 2000)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Detonation sensor
Starter
Injection air temperature sensor
Valve potentiometer
Step-by step engine
Alternator
Ignition coil
Canister purging valve
AC pressure sensor(pressure controller)
Diagnostic socket
AC compressor clutch
Upstream oxygen sensor
Cooling blower and AC
Blower resistance for AC
Oil pressure contact
Injection computer
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
AC compressor clutch control relay (E)
Water temperature sensor
Blower lower speed control relay (B)
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Motor fan control relay ( C)
Fog headlamps control relay(A)
Fuel pump control relay (H)
Actuators relay(D)
Chock sensor
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
89C - 6
vnx.su
Windscreen wiper timer
FLASH relay
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
AC relay ( on board)
Right front door actuator
Right rear door actuator
Right front door loud speaker
Right rear loudspeaker
Fuel level transmitt
er and electric pump
Trunk lighting lamp
Left rear loud speaker
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Left front door loud speaker
Right front door contact
Right volumetric sensor
Left volumetric sensor
Right front ceiling lamp
Handbrake contact
Anti-starting bushing
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Left front door contact
UCE decoder
Siren
Vehicle speed transducer
Engine hood contact
Doors closing switch
UCE anti-intrusion
Downstream oxygen sensor
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
89C - 7
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
( EURO 2000)
The cockpit fuse box is placed left side under dashboard, being attachedon the interior side
of the door(1). To access the fuses, turn the knob (2), then open up the door towards exterior.
1
2
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
F04
7,5A
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, lighter, ashtray, radio.
F06
15A
Lighter, clock, instrument panel ( anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti-intrusion, nati-intrusionindicator, diagnostic socket.
F07
15A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti-starting bushing
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
Reverse driving contact
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti-intrusion
Hazard and turning signaling lights
Left fog lamp
89C - 8
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
89C
On the fuse box, 6 fusiblefuse modulesare attached,protectingthe followingconsumers:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left road lights
F12
10A
Right road lights, road lights indicator
F13
10A
Left meeting lights
F14
10A
Right meeting lights, meeting lights indicator
F15
15A
F16
10A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch,
windscreen wiper timer
Radio, windscreen wiper motor
89C - 9
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Connector C0
1. Fog lamp switch ♦fog lamp relay control
2. Parking lights ♦inlet fuse F 1
3. Outlet fuse F10 ♦ left fog lamp
Connector C1
1. Outlet fuse F01 ♦ climate blower relay control
2. Outlet F09 ♦ climate blower
Connector C2
A1. Rear windowdefrosting switch ♦ rear windowdefrosting timer control
A2. Mass
A3. Outletfuse F06
B1. Outlet fuse F09 ♦ rear window defrosting
B2. Free
B3. Outlet fuse 07 ♦ UCE decoder, anti-starting bushing, FLASH relay
Connector C3
A1. Lights switch ( + parking) ♦ inlet fuse F05
A2. Outlet fuse F05 ♦ + parking
A3. Free
A4. Free
B1. Mass
B2. Mass
B3. Turning lights switch( signaling relaycontrol )
B4. Free
89C - 10
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
Connector C4
A1. Anti-theft mechanism( position M) ♦ inlet fuse F03)
A2. Outletfuse F01
A3. Hazard switch ♦ inlet fuse F04, supply of the rear windowdefrosting timer
B1. Outlet fuse F03
B2. Anti-theft mechanism(positionM) ♦ inlet fuse F02
B3. Outlet fuse F02 ♦ reverse driving contact
I = DC ( after contact )
J = IC ( before contact)
R1 = fog lamp control relay
R2 = climateblower control relay
RT = rear window defrosting timer
RS = turning signaling relay.
89C - 11
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
A. for equipping E0, E1, E2
( EURO 2000)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shock absorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
25A
Cooling blower ( vehicles without AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F02
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
C
D
H
15A
30A
30A
30A
Cooling blower
CONTROLLED Fog
CIRCUIT
headlamps (vehicle without
AC)
Injectors, canister purging valve, Fuel pump
Ignition coil
oxygen sensor heating
resistance, injection computer.
89C - 12
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
B. For equipping E2(0), E3
( EURO 2000)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shockabsorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
F02
40A
F03
7,5A
F04
5A
F17
15A
F06
7,5A
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
Cooling blower ( vehicles with AC)
Injection computer ( + DC)
Injection computer( (+IC)
Fog headlights
AC compressor
A
B
C
D
E
H
15A
40A
30A
30A
30A
30A
CONTROLLED Fog
Cooling
Cooling
CIRCUIT headlamps blower- 1/st blower- 2/
speed(vehicles nd speed
with AC)
(vehicle
with AC)
Injectors, canister purging
valve, oxygen sensor
heating resistance,
injection computer.
89C - 13
vnx.su
AC
Fuel
compressor pump
Ignition
coil
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
(EURO 2000)
Connect.
Denomination
101
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
103 HA ALTERNATOR
103 HB ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
104
ANTI-THEFT MECHANISM
105
ACOUSTIC WARNING
113
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles without AC)
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles with AC)
121
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
122
FOG HEADLAMPS SWITCH
123
LOCKING DOORS SWITCH
124
BLOWER SWITCH
125
HAZARD SWITCH
128
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
138
RIGHT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
139
LEFT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
140
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
141
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
145
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING SWITCH
146
DETONATION SENSOR
147
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
149
RPM SENSOR
155
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
156
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
160
STOP CONTACT
163 GA STARTER
163 AB STARTER EXCITATION
166
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
167
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
168
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
171
AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
172
RIGHT REAR LAMP
173
LEFT REAR LAMP
175
LEFT FOG LAMP
176
RIGHT FOG HEADLIGHT
177
LEFT FOG HEADLIGHT
180
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
181
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
184
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
185
LEFT FRONT PARKING LAMP
188
COOLING FAN MOTOR ( for vehicles without AC)
189
RIGHT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
190
LEFT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
191
RIGHT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
192
LEFT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
193
INJECTOR 1
194
INJECTOR 2
195
INJECTOR 3
89C - 14
vnx.su
Page
89-129
89-102
89-102
89-109
89-117
89-105
89-82
89-84
89-124
89-124
89-126
89-122
89-126
89-125
89-131
89-131
89-130
89-130
89-105
89-94
89-95
89-92
89-91
89-138
89-115
89-102
89-103
89-139
89-139
89-129
89-100
89-136
89-136
89-138
89-115
89-116
89-138
89-138
89-116
89-116
89-101
89-135
89-135
89-132
89-132
89-97
89-98
89-98
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
196
199
200
205
209
210
212
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
242
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
454
474
503
560
597
597
600
639
639
649
654
778
857
887
927
993
INJECTOR 4
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
OIL PRESSURE CONTACT
CLIGHTS, TURNING LIGHTS, HORN SWITCH
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PAD
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PAD
WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
RIGHT HEADLAMP
LEFT HEADLAMP
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPEED TRANSDUCER
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LAMP
LEFT FRONT TURNING LAMP
COCKPIT FUSE AND RELAYS BOX
RADIO
COOLING MOTOR FAN (for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
LEFT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
INJECTION AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
AC STARTING BUTTON
MOTOR FAN RESISTANCE ( for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
SIREN
RIGHT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR(Rx)
LEFT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR (Tx)
AC RELAY (on board)
UCE DECODER
HATCHBACK CONTACT
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles without AC)
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles with AC)
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
STOP-S3 LAMP (on roof)
STOP[ -S3 LAMP (in aileron)
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
IGNITION COIL
FLASH RELAY
SUPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
CHOCK SENSOR
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
89C - 15
vnx.su
89-99
89-137
89-140
89-97
89-106
89-120
89-115
89-119
89-119
89-117
89-97
89-127
89-117
89-117
89-104
89-92
89-127
89-109
89-118
89-118
89-111
89-120
89-100
89-118
89-119
89-96
89-123
89-123
89-101
89-137
89-94
89-134
89-110
89-110
89-133
89-133
89-121
89-107
89-140
89-87
89-89
89-122
89-139
89-139
89-96
89-108
89-93
89-108
89-93
89-95
89-133
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
1033CA BATTERY PLUS PLUG
1091
ICP BRAKING SYSTEM
1202
AC PRESSURE SENSOR
1335
FRONT ASHTRAY LIGHTING
MH 121 ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
MOTOR FAN MASS
89-104
89-119
89-99
89-129
89-103
89-103
R 89
R 107
R 153
R 154
R 155
R 156
R 157
R 212
R 265
R 318
89-154
89-143
89-150
89-149
89-151
89-152
89-153
89-147
89-145
89-141
FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
REAR WIRING/LEFT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT FRONT DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ LEFT REAR DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ RIGHT REAR DOOR COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ HATCHBACK COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ REAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
OBSERVATIONS:
-Connectors and couplings are representedbackwards (from wires forward).
-Some electric components are not connectedto the vehicle wiring by means of multiple-way
connectors, but by means of protectedindividualplugs. For illustrating the type of the respective
plug, the followingsymbols are to be used:
Plug mother 6 mm
Plug father 6 mm
Plug mother broachΦ 3mm
Plug father broachΦ 3mm
Plug mother8mm
Plug mother flag6,3mm
89C - 16
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
(EURO 2000)
89C - 17
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
1
3
4
8
9
12
13
15
16
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
39
41
42
43
44
45
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
65
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
89
90
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
1,0
1,0
B41
01
Destination
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GL
3GK
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3GG
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3GJ
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
3CU
3CS
CONTROL- CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CONTROL- BLOWERRELAY
CONTROL -WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ASS
M
ATMOSPHERICPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
CONTROL- CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL –ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITIONPOTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORSIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSORSIGNAL
SIGNAL+AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
INJECTIONCODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
CONTROL-DOWNSTREAM OXYG
EN SENSOR HEA
TING
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSORSUPPL
>
Y+
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CONTROL- INJECTOR4
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
89C - 18
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C - 19
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
B41
01
Destination
1
3
4
8
9
10
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
38K
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
65
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
76
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
38X
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3JP
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GL
3GK
38AS
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3GG
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3GJ
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
CONTROL - BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL - WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM STOPPING CONTROL >
INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 1
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F04
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL – ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR
CONTROL – BLOWER RELAY TR.2
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 2
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 3
SIGNAL +VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
SIGNAL +AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE K
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL – INJECTOR 1
CONTROL – INJECTOR 3
CONTROL - UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
CONTROL - DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
+INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 4
- WATER TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL + VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
89C - 20
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
77
78
79
80
82
83
89
90
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
Destination
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
38U
38Y
3CU
3CS
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR > SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL - INJECTOR 4
CONTROL – INJECTOR 2
89C - 21
vnx.su
89C
B41
01
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP1 7
R
R
D5
3NR
A-VI
D1
BP1 7
D4
R-N
B
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
D2
3 GT
AS-R
D3
BP17
R
S3
G
G
AP29
H1
AP29
3NA
A-V
A
H4
G
H2
3AC
M-G
H3
BP17
A
R
R
E3
597
2
8D P
R
BPR1
V
A1
8A
A4
A
A2
M
N
B
BPR1
R
R
1
S2
49B
R-V
BP7
A
C1
3NR
C4
A-V
OR
B
R
E2
89C - 22
vnx.su
C2
3JN
BP7
R-V
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89C
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
1,5
1,5
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
INJECTIONCOMPUTER> ACTUATORSRELAYCONTROL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
1,5
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINESAFETYRUNNINGRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
89C - 23
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM EQU
IPPED VEHICLE
S)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP17
3NR
R
R
A-VI
D1
BP17
D4
R-N
B
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
E1
3NR
E4
G
R
H1
AP29
E2
38K
3NA
A-V
A
H4
G
V-M
M-G
BP17
R
A
E3
S6
2
A
R
BPR1
BPR1
R
8DP
V
A1
8A
A4
A
B
B
A-R
R
E6
1
S2
BP7
B1
3NR
B4
A
E2
N
R
49B
A
B2
3JN
C1
3NR
OR
A-V
C4
C3
BP7
R-G
R-V
89C - 24
vnx.su
C2
3JP
M- R
B3
R
A2
M
BPR1
49L
R-G
R-G
R-V
B
H2
3AC
A
E3
BPR1
597
AS-R
BP17
S3
G
G
AP29
E5
38R
V
D2
3 GT
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89C
B41
01
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
B1
B2
B3
B5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
E1
E2
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
4,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,5
0,5
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49L
3NR
3JP
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
3NR
38K
E3
E5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
2,0
BPR1
38R
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
S2
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
E6
S6
4,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
BP7
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
B
BPR1
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
- BLOWERRELAY, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
BLOWERCOOLING RESISTANCECONTROL
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.2
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL, IN
JECTIONCOMPUTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
AIR CONDITION
ING SYSTEM STOPPING CONT
ROL >
INJECTIONCOMPUTER
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINERUNNINGSAFETYRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
89C - 25
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
Destination
1
0,60
AP11
2
0,60
H66P
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, REVERSEDRIVING
LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLETF02
OIL TRANSMITTER CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,35
Destination
28A
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
89C - 26
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B1
B2
0,35
0,60
0,60
Destination
42A
3JK
3C
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
RPM SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BG
3BL
ENGINERPM SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
ENGINERPM -SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
3BG
A
149
X
3BL
B
89C - 27
vnx.su
X
89C
B41
01
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
Pos.
Sectioning
A
B
C
D
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3GF
3GK
3GH
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
NO
A
887
3NR
A
B
C
3GF 3GK
SA
V
D
3GH
A-VI
IGNITION COIL
Pos.
A
B
C
Sectioning
2,0
2,0
2,0
Destination
3CV
3CW
3NA
CONTROL– CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITIONCOIL
CONTROL– CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITIONCOIL
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOK
E3 SENSOR > FUELPUMP
RELAY
89C - 28
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3BB
+ INJECTORS >ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CY13C
NO
371
1
3NR 3BB 2
X
X
DETONATION SENSOR
Pos.
1
2
4
Sectioning
0,50
0,50
0,50
Destination
3S
3DQ
TB1
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
CY2AE
146
MA
1
2
3S
X
3DQ
X
89C - 29
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
CHOKE SENSOR
Pos.
1
3
Sectioning
1,40
1,40
Destination
3NA1
3NA
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE
SENSOR
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR >FUEL PUMP
RELAY
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
3GN
3F
3D
Atmospheric pressure sensormass
Atmospheric pressure sensorsignal
Atmospheric pressure sensor > Supply +
89C - 30
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3B
3JQ
SIGNAL +AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MASS
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
D
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BV
3BU
3BW
3BX
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
CM1PE
NO
A
B
3BV
3BU
C
D
3BW 3BX
649
X
X
X
89C - 31
vnx.su
X
89C
B41
01
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
Destination
0,60
0,60
0,60
3JL
3AQ
3AJ
VALVE POTENTIOMETERMASS
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
CM1PE
NO
222
A
B
3JL
3AQ
C
3AJ
X
X
X
INJECTOR 1
Pos.
1
2
Sectioning
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CR
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CY2AE
BA
1
193
2
3NR 3CR
X
X
89C - 32
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
INJECTOR 2
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
CY2AE
BA
1
194
2
3NR 3CS
X
X
INJECTOR 3
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CT
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CY2AE
BA
1
195
2
3NR 3CT
X
X
89C - 33
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
INJECTOR 4
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CU
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 4
CY2AE
BA
1
2
3NR 3CU
X
X
196
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
38U
38Y
38X
FREONPRESSURE SENSORMASS
+ FREONPRESSURESENSOR
FREONPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
NO
38X
X
38Y
X
1202
89C - 34
vnx.su
38U
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89C
B41
01
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
Pos. Sectioning
1
1,0
Destination
38R
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSORCLUTCH
NO
171
38R
X
AIR CONDITIONING AND BLOWER COOLING
(FOR AIRCONDITIONING EQUIPPED VEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
2
2,0
5,0
5,0
Destination
49B
49B
M
CONTROL+ BLOWER COOLING> BLOWER RESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
MASS
89C - 35
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
BLOWER COOLING
(FOR VEHICLE
S WITHOUT AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,5
1,5
Destination
M
49B
MASS
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
BLOWERRESISTANCE
(FORAIRCONDITIONINGEQUIPPEDVEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
2
2
Destination
49L
49B
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLINGRESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
89C - 36
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89C
B41
01
ALTERNATOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
5,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F02
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
B
R
R
103 HA
ALTERNATOREXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,6
Destination
2JD
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
CA13E
2JD
X
103 HB
STARTER
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
16,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY>+ ALTERNATOR
SL8C
B
R
R
163 GA
89C - 37
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
01
STARTER EXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
3,0
Destination
D
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
CS6PI
6,3 MM
D
163 AB
A
BLOWER MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
5,0
Destination
M
MASS
M
N
ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
4,0
Destination
ML
INJECTION COMPUTER MASS (PINS 3, 28AND 33)
SR 8L
MH - 121
ML
N
89C - 38
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
ENGINE WIRING
BATTERY TERMINAL + (PLUS)
Pos Sectioning
1
1
1
Destination
16,0
5,0
1,0
B
B
B
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF01, F04
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F06
RG
B
R, R
A-R
1033CA
DOWNSTREAM OXYGENE SENSOR
Position Sectioning
A
B
C
D
Destination
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
3NR
3GG
3GL
3GJ
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
DOWNSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORSIGNAL
DOWNSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
242
NO
A
3NR
B
3GG
C
3GL
D
3GJ
X
X
X
X
89C - 39
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER – WASHING SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0,5
0,75
0,75
1,0
1,0
0,75
0,5
16A
AP7
14D
14K
AP7
14L
14C
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER OW
L SPEED
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL+ WINDSCREEN WIPERHIGHSPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
BA
145
1
16A
2
AP7
3
14D
4
14K
V-A
M
X
X
5
AP7
6
14L
7
14C
R
X
X
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0,5
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
M
16A
14D
14E
AP7
14C
MASS
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL + WIN
DSCREEN WIPER TIMER
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
NO
5
AP7
A
113
1
M
4
14E
2
16A
N
X
V
6
14C
3
14D
X
X
89C - 40
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
HORN, TURNING AND LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,5
1,0
64C
64B
64D
B
9M
67A
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ BATTERY
SHUNT > FOGLIGHTS SWITCH
CONTROL +ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
209
3
67A
2
9M
X
X
64D
64B
64C
X
X
X
A1
A2
B1
B2
0,75
3,0
0,75
0,75
1
B
B
M-AS
A
Destination
Position Sectioning
L
B
C
R
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
+ BATTERY
+ LOW BEAMLIGHTS
+ HIGHBEAMLIGHTS
BA
209
2
R
1
C
X
X
B
L
M
89C - 41
vnx.su
89C
X
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
U.C.E. DECODER
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
13C
80X
HK
HL
80T
H17
AP15
M
BP3
20F
20D
80BD
13A
20C
CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
ANTI-STARTER RECEPTOR SIGNAL
TRACK (TR)
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
ANTI-STARTING CONTROL-INDICATOR
INJECTION CODEDSIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUT
LET F07
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
0,5
0,5
20C
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
GR
20D
20C
20C
1 3 A 80BD
20D
20F
X
X
N-A
X
HK
8 0 X 13C
NO
B
503
A
X
X
BP3
M
AP1 5
H1 7
80T
HL
R
N
A
X
G
X
X
X
X
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
89C - 42
vnx.su
X
CY
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
20F
M
BP3
80X
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
MASS
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSEOUTLET F07
ANTI-STARTING RECEPT
OR SIGNALTRACK (TR)
GR
654
1
20F
X
2
M
N
3
BP3
4
80X
R
X
FLASH RELAY
Position Sectioning
Destination
1
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
2
0,35
80BD
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FLASHRELAY
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
4
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
5
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
* For Anti-intrusion System equipped vehicles
5
0,5
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS >U.C.E. ANTI-IN
TRUSION
SYSTEM> DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING/ UNLOCKING
INFO
NO
5
64D
X
1
BP3
4
64C
2
80BD
R-A
X
N-A
3
BP3
857
R-A
R-A
89C - 43
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
VEHICLE SPEED TRANSDUCER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
47F
M
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
MASS
BA
AP15
A
1
47F
X
250
2
M
N
3
INTRUSION SYSTEM
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
1,5
4,0
S
A
B1
B2
4,0
3,0
B
D
+ ACCESSORIES > COCKPIT FUSES INLET
F01,F15
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT > COCKPITFUSES INLET
F02, F03AND ENGINE FUSEINLET F03
+ BATTERY
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
104
D
B
A
M
A
S
R
M-V
2
89C - 44
vnx.su
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
A
B
0,35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> ENGINE
HOOD CONTACT
CA 13E
NO
M
A
N
13A
B
438
X
SIREN
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,5
0,5
0,35
BP11
M
80FC
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY > SIREN
MASS
SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
CM1PE
442
NO
3
80FC
2
M
1
BP11
G-AS
N
R
89C - 45
vnx.su
89C
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
FRONT WIRING
B41
01
COCKPIT RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
3
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
9B
L
9DP
9DP
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS> FOGLAMPSWITCH
BA
260
3
9B
X
X
2
L
1
B P11
VI
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
1,5
AP10
SP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
CESSORIES> CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED AC
BA
260
2
SP3
R
89C - 46
vnx.su
1
AP10
A-G
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A3
B1
B1
B2
B3
89C
0,35
0,5
0,5
1,5
2,0
0,35
15LP
M
BCP3
BCP3
15B
15A
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
MASS
+ CEILINGPROTECTED BATTERY
+ CEILINGPROTECTEDBATTERY>FUSE OUTLETF06
CONTROL + REARWINDOW DEFROSTING
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
1,0
BP3
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY >FUSE OUTLET F07
* For Anti-intrusion equipped vehicles
B3
1,0
BP3
+ WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON PRESET
POSITIONPROTECTEDBATTERY>SIREN
BA
260
BP3
15B
R
X
X
BCP3
M
15LP
R-AS
AS
N
M-V
3
2
B2
B3
A
1
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B
0,75
0,50
0,75
L
L
L
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
0,5
0,5
M
M
MASS
MASS > FOG LAMPS RELA
Y, CLIMATE CONTROL
BLOWERRELAY, REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGTIMER
1,0
64B
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
BA
64B
M
B
V
L
260
L
A
X
4
3
89C - 47
vnx.su
2
1
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,5
1,5
1,0
1,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
A
AP10
64AP
AP15
A
AP11
SUPPLY + D.C.
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS,FUSEINLETF04
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SUPPLY + D.C. > COCKPIT FUSE INLE
T F02
+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
BA
260
AP1 1
A
AP1 5
V
R
A
6 4 AP
AP1 0
A
X
R-G
R-A
3
2
Position Sectioning
3,0
B
A
1
Destination
B
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF06, F07, F08, F09
NO
B
260
AS
Position Sectioning
1,5
1,5
Destination
S
S
260
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F01 COCKPIT
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F15 COCKPIT
BA
S
M-V
R
89C - 48
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
Destination
0.75
R
0,75
R
F11
89C
BA
R
X
X
+ HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
INLET F11
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE N
I LET F12
R
X
F12
F12
F11
0,75
R
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUS
E INLET F12
RPD
X
X
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
0,35 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
RPG
X
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS >FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F14
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F13
0,75 CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F13
F14
0,75 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,35 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
C
X
X
C
F13
X
CPG
X
CPD
X
X
S
R
AP7
F15
1,5
F15
1,0
F16
0,75
0,75
F16
0,75
S
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET F01
R
B
AP7 + WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTED D.C.
B
+ BATTERY
AS-A
260
BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F16
BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
89C - 49
vnx.su
BP11
AS-A
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
Pos
Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
1,0
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
14K
14E
14L
BP11
BP11
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F16
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
BA
3
14
212
X
4
BP1 1
A
R
1
14K
2
14E
X
X
STOP CONTACT
BA
AP10
Destination
GR
1
1,0
AP10 +PROTECTED D.C.> FUSEOUTLETF01
65A
2
1,0
65A CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
160
X
RIGHT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
2
0.75
0,75
8B
M
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
M
176
MASS
89C - 50
vnx.su
N
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0,75 8B
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
2
0,75
MASS
M
M
N
177
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0,5
L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
184
LEFT FRONT PARKING LIGHT
BA
Destination
L
X
1
2
0,5
0,5
L
M
+PARKINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
M
N
185
89C - 51
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
67A
Destination
X
1
1,0
67A CONTROL +ACOUSTIC W
ARNING
105
WINDSCREEN WIPER PUMP
BA
Destination
M
N
1
0,5
16A CONTROL +WINDSCREENWASHING
2
0,35
M
PUMP
MASS
16A
221
X
RIGHTHEADLIGHT
CD8F
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPD + PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
226
BA
1
M
N
2
CPD
X
3
RPD
X
LEFTHEADLIGHT
CD8F
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW BEAM LIGHTS
> FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
89C - 52
vnx.su
227
BA
2
CPG
X
1
3
M
RPG
N
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
255
LEFT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
256
RIGHT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D
2
0,5
M
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
267
89C - 53
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
2
0,5
M
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
268
I.C.P. BRAKING SYSTEM
BA
Destination
1
0,35 H1
H1
CONTROL –ICP, HAND BRAKE
INDICATOR
1091
X
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
216
H12
X
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
89C - 54
vnx.su
217
H12
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
L
AP10
BCP3
4
5
6
0,35
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT . FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ CEILINGLAMPSPROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F06
MASS
BA
6
5
4
3
2
1
AS
R
X
210
N
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
34D
34C
34E
34F
34G
34H
34A
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
BA
261
1
34D
3
34E
5
34G
7
34A
X
X
X
X
4
34F
6
34H
8
34B
X
X
X
2
34C
X
89C - 55
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
4
6
7
8
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
BP11
L
AP10
M
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > COCKPITFUSE BOX
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F01
MASS
NO
1
3
2
4
BP11
5
7
AP10
AS-A
261
6
L
A-AS
8
M
X
N
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY(ON BOARD)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1
2
3
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
38DH
38DH
38AH
38DH
38AS
CONTROL+AIRCONDITIONING
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
NO
5
38AS
X
1
38DH
4
V
V
X
3
38DH
474
V
89C - 56
vnx.su
2
38AH
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
1,5
1,0
1,5
1,5
Destination
SP3
38AH
38AJ
38AK
ACCESSORIESPROTECTED CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED1
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED2
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED3
BA
2
38A H
600
1
SP3
X
R
4
38AK
3
38AJ
X
X
BLOWERSWITCH
Position Sectioning
Destination
1
1*
1,0
0,5
38AH
38AH
2
3
4
5
1,5
1,5
0,35
1,5
38AJ
38AK
L
M
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER, SPEED 1>
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMRELAYCOIL(ONBOARD)
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
2
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
3
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
MASS
1* - for air conditioning systemequippedvehicles
BA
X
124
X
X
89C - 57
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
B41
01
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,35
0,5
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
298
2
M
1
L
N
X
AIR CONDITIONING STARTING BUTTON
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
AP15
M
L
38DH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
BA
319
2
M
1
AP15
N
AS
4
38D H
3
L
V
X
89C - 58
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
FOG LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
2
4
5
6
7
9
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
9DP
9DP
9M
L
M
9DP
9B
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REAR FOGLIGHTS > FOGLIGHT SWITCH
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > + PROTECTEDREAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REARFOG LIGHT
NO
9
9B
121
2
9DP
4
9M
X
X
X
5
L
X
7
9DP
Vi
X
6
M
N
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
Destination
L
8A
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
122
1
L
2
8A
X
R-A
4
M
N
3
L
X
89C - 59
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
B41
01
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
(Pulsetype)
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
Destination
AP15
15LP
15LP
L
M
15LP
+ PROTECTED D.C. > FUSE
OUTLET F03
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
+ PROTECTEDREAR WINDOWDEFROSTING
+PARKING LIGHT
S > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
NO
4
M
5
15LP
128
A-R
1
AP15
R
2
15LP
V
A-R
N
3
L
X
89C - 60
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
HAZARD SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1,0
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
Destination
AP15
B
64C
64D
L
M
64F
64B
64AP
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
+PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLETF04
NO
1
AP15
2
B
3
64D
R
AS
X X
9
6 4 AP
125
4
64D
8
64B
GR
5
L
X
7
64F
6
M
V X N
DOORS LOCKING SWITCH
Position Sectioning
5
1
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
Destination
20D
M
M
20C
L
M
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
SHUNT > MASS
NO
123
5
20D
1
M
X
2
20C
X
4
M
N
3
L
X
89C - 61
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DIAGNOSIS SOCKET
Position Sectioning
1
4
5
7
15
16
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
AP15
M
N
HK
HL
BCP3
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
MASS
ELECTRONICMASS
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINEL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F06
NO
8
7
HK
6
5
N
X
225
16
BCP3
15
HL
R
X
N
14
4
M
3
2
N
13
1
AP15
G
12
11
10
9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
8
9
10
0.35
0,75
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
L
M
M
15A
RPD
H7
AP15
AP15
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
M
M
64D
64C
SHUNT > MASS
SHUNT > MASS
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
BA
247
10
64C
9
64D
X
X
8
M
N
N
7
6
AP15
Vi
R
89C - 62
vnx.su
5
H7
4
RPD
X
X
3
15A
X
2
M
N
N
1
L
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0.35
0.6
89C
Destination
64F
31A
AP15
M
H1
H12
41A
M
2JD
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR – CONTROL
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
SHUNT > MASS
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
BRAKE PADSWEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
FUELLEVELWARNINGSIGNAL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
BA
247
9
2JD
8
M
7
41A
6
H1 2
5
H1
4
M
3
AP1 5
2
31A
1
64F
X
X
X
X
X
N
R
X
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0.35
0.35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
CPD
80T
BCP3
3FH
28A
42A
PROTECTED RIGHTLOWBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING INDICA
TOR - CONTROL
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY> FUSEOUTLETF06
ANTI-POLLUTION FAILURE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
BA
247
6
42A
5
28A
4
3FH
3
BCP3
X
X
X
AS
89C - 63
vnx.su
2
80T
X
1
CPD
X
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
DASHBOARD WIRING
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
168
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
ELECTRICLIGHTER
BA
L
Destination
X
M
1
2
3
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
0,5 M
MASS
0,75 BCP3 + CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED
BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
N
BCP3
101
AS
FRONTASHTRAY LIGHTING
BA
L
Destination
X
1
0.35
L
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
1335
M
N
89C - 64
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
89C
B41
01
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
141
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
140
20C
X
89C - 65
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
B41
01
LEFT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING >ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
139
X
RIGHT REAR DOORACTUATOR
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
138
20C
X
89C - 66
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
Destination
34E
34F
SIGNAL +RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER(RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
191
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
Destination
34G
34H
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
192
X
89C - 67
vnx.su
89C
B41
01
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
RIGHT VOLUME SENSOR (RX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80CA
N
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80CA
N
X
LEFT VOLUME SENSOR (TX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80DA
N
LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
454
2
N
1
80DA
N
X
ANTI INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
BCP3
80E
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY>OUTLETFUSE F06
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
NO
993
2
80E
X
89C - 68
vnx.su
1
BCP3
R
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
REAR WIRING
U.C.E. ANTI-INTRUSION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
2
5
6
6
7
8
9
12
14
15
18
23
24
24
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION >
DOORSLOCKING/UNLOCKINGINFO
M
MASS
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
BCP3 + CEILING LAMPPROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLETF06
BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
80E
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
13A
CEILING LAMP LIGHTING –CONTROL> CONTACTS
AP15 + PLUSAFTER PROTECTED CONTACT> FUSEOUTLETF03
20D
CONTROL + DOORS LOCKING
> ACTUATORS
20C
CONTROL + DOORS UNL
OCKING >ACTUATORS
80FC SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
80DA LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
N
ELECTRONICMASS
N
MASS
BA
24
N
N
N
12
AP1 5
427
23
80D A
22
21
20
19
18
80FC
10
G
9
13A
8
M
7
6
64C BCP3
X
X
X
R
R
0,35
0,35
5
64D
4
15
20C
80CA
N
427
1
80CA
X
2
N
N
89C - 69
vnx.su
13
X
3
2
M
1
64D
V-A
X
R
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
14
20D
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
16
GR-VI
X
11
17
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34A
34B
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
190
X
RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
Destination
34D
34C
SIGNAL +RIGHT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT REARSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
189
X
89C - 70
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR LAMP
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
65A
64C
H66P
H66P
M
L
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F02
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > RIGHT REARLAMP
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
BA
173
6
L
5
M
X
N
4
H66P
X
X
3
64C
2
65A
X
X
1
RIGHTREAR LAMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
L
M
H66P
64D
65A
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLETF02
CONTROL +EVERSE
R
DRI
VING LIGHTSRIGHT
>
TURNING LAMP
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
BA
6
172
5
65A
X
4
64D
X
89C - 71
vnx.su
3
H66P
X
2
M
1
L
N
X
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
BA
Destination
BCP3
1
2
V-A
0.35 BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
0,5 13C CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
329
13C
X
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
B1
C1
C2
C2
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
1,5
0,35
M
M
41A
3NA1
M
M
MASS > SHUNT
MASS > INSTRUM
ENT PANEL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
MASS
MASS > SHUNT
BA
M
N
GR-V
41A
A
B
X
3NA1
199
A-R
1
M
N C
N
2
89C - 72
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
REAR WIRING
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
Destination
BA
H1
X
1
0.35
H1
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR CONTROL
156
LEFTFOG LIGHT
NO
Destination
9DP
1
2
0.5
0,5
9DP
M
X
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
MASS
175
M
N
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35
13A CEILINGLAMPLIGHTING CONTROL
180
> DOORS CONT
ACTS
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35
13A CEILING LAMPLIGHTING
CONTROL > DOORS CONT
ACTS
89C - 73
vnx.su
181
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
LEFTLICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
167
PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSEOUTLETF05
RIGHTLICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
+PARKING LIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET F05
1
0,35 L
+ PARKING LIGHTS> LEFT
LICENSE PLA
TE LAMP
166
STOP LAMP S3
(ONROOF)
Destination
BA
65A
X
1
0.5
65A
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
639
STOP LAMP S3
(INAILERON)
BA
65A
Destination
X
1
2
0.5
0,5
65A
M
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
MASS
M
639
89C - 74
vnx.su
N
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
Destination
BA
15B
1
2,0
15B
CONTROL + HA
TCHBACK REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTING
200
X
HATCHBACK CONTACT
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0,35
Destination
M
13A
MASS
CEILING LIGHTINGCONTROL> HATCHBACKCONTACT
ANTI-INTRUSION UCE > HA
TCHBACK CONTACT
1 DBD1
BA
M
A
560
13A
X
89C - 75
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,5
0,50
34D
BCP3
8A
SIGNAL + RIGHTREAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
FUSE BOX > FUSE U
OTLET F06(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELA
Y
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLET F04
CONTROL+TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL -RIGHT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
LEFTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGHT
S – FUSE OUTLET F05
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES
SIGNAL - RIGHTFRONT SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE OUT
LETF16
CONTROL+ PROTECTEDREARWINDOW DEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLETF03
MASS
+ BATTERY
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
RIGHTPROTECTED MEETING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICLOCKING > UCEDECODER
CONTROL REAR FOGLAMP
+ PROTECTED+ REAR FOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
MA
D
C
B
R 318
A
34A
CPD
X
X
20C
X
20D
9B
9DP
34B
X
VI
X
X
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
X
AS-A
M-V
R
N
AS
X
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
X
X
X
X
X
R
X
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
X
AS
A
1
2
3
89C - 76
vnx.su
GR
5
X
6
X
7
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,0
0,50
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,5
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SUPPLY(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
+ PROTECTED TURNINGLIGHTS
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > FOG LAMP SWITCH
+ PARKINGLIGHTS
SORIES > CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED ACCES
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY> RADIO
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
MASS
+ BATTERY > HAZARD SWITC
H
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
RIGHTPROTECTEDMEETING LIGHTS> INDICATOR
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
MA
R 318
34B
9DP
9B
20D
20C
CPD
34A
X
X
VI
X
X
X
X
34H
B
M
AP15
15LP
BP11
X
AS
N
43F
SP3
L
R
9M
X
X
R
34C
64B
X
X
GR
R-A
7
6
5
3
64AP
89C - 77
vnx.su
X
V
64D
AS-A
64C
D
34G
X
C
34E
X
X
X
8A
BCP3
34D
AS
X
2
1
B
A
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C5
C6
C6
C7
Destination
0,5
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
WATER TEMPERATURE WARNING
OIL PRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HK
HL
HL
M
WATERTEMPERATURE SIGNAL
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
PROTECTEDRIGHTHIGHBEAM
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
ICP INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
- FUELMINIMALLEVELWARNING SIGNAL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS SIGNALLINE K> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK > UCEDECODER
DIAGNOSIS SIGNA
L LINE L> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEL > UCE DECODER
MASS
MA
M
C
X
AP10
B R-G
R 107
3FH
80T
X
X
RPD
64C
38AS
X
X
X
31A
28A
X
X
X
1
2
3
64D
A
41A
X
89C - 78
vnx.su
HK
HL
M
N-G
H1
H1 2
2JD
X
X
H7
15A
X
X
X
5
6
7
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNINGLIGHTSCONTROL> INDICATOR
INSTRUMENTPANEL> WATER TEMPERATUREWARNING
INSTRUMENT PANEL > OILPRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H12
2JD
M
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HL
M
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
RPM-METERSIGNAL
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAM> INDICATOR
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > INDICA
TOR
AIR-COND
ITIONINGCOMPRESSO
R CON
NECTIONSIGNAL > RELA
Y
ICP HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
- FUELMINIMALLEVELWARNING SIGNAL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINE L
MASS
MA
M
N
2JD
R 107
HL
HK
X
X
H1 2
H1
X
X
X
15A
H7
42A
X
X
X
7
6
5
89C - 79
vnx.su
80T
X
38AS
X
3FH
41A
M
X
X
X
RPD
AP10
64C
C
X
X
R-G B
28A
31A
64D
X
3
X
2
X
1
A
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2*
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D6*
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > TURNING SWITCH
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
34G
34F
M
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING SIGNAL
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL +REVERSE DRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE SENSOR
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
FLASH RELAY DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CEILING LAMPS CONTROL
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > DOORS CONT
ACTS
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPSLIGHTING > HOOD CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
A2*, D2* - for vehicles without Anti-intrus ion System
D4, D6*- for Anti-intrusion System provided vehicles
MA
34B
X
34A
X
R 265
13A
X
20D
X
34H
15B
13C
X
80FC
AP1 5
G-AS
G
X
20C
BCP3
X
R-AS
A-R
H6 6 P
9DP
H1
M
X
X
3NA 1
64D
41A
X
35C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
64C
65A
L
64D
34E
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
vnx.su
C
34F
34G
89C - 80
D
34D
X
X
2
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A6*
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTSCONTROL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
64C
34G
34F
M
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL> UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING SIGNAL
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
RIGHT CEILING LAMP CONTROL
CEILIN G LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK DOORS CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER
D2, D3, D4, A2*, A6* - for anti-intrus ion sy stem provided vehicles
MA
D
C
B
R 265
A
34C
64D
AP1 5
80FC
13C
13A
X
X
X
GR-VI
X
X
X
34D
41A
3NA 1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
X
X
A-R
R-A
X
X
X
34F
M
H1
9DP
H6 6 P
15B
X
X
X
X
X
X
34E
64D
L
65A
X
X
3
5
X
1
2
89C - 81
vnx.su
64C
34B
34H
X
34G
X
6
7
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR-CONTROL
MA
D
3FH
X
AP1 1
R
R 212
7
28A
H6 6 P
42A
47F
X
X
X
HL
HK
H7
31A
X
X
X
X
X
38AS
2JD
A
3NA 1
D
X
VI
R
A-R
A
3
2
1
6
X
H1 7
5
89C - 82
vnx.su
C
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
C1
C2
C3
C4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED
CONTACT > CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR-CONTROL
A6 - For air-conditioning system provided vehicles
MA
D
31A
C
B
R 212
A
X
47F
H1 7
X
X
3FH
X
HK
HL
H7
42A
H6 6 P
28A
AP1 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
D
3NA 1
A
2JD
38AS
A
A-R
R
VI
X
1
2
3
89C - 83
vnx.su
5
6
7
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
2DED1
BA
20D
B
20C
34F
X
X
X
34E
R 154
A
X
1
3
RIGHT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34E
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34F
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
34F
X
BA
20C
X
20D
X
34E
R 154
X
3
89C - 84
vnx.su
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
2DE D1
BA
20D
B
20C
34H
X
X
X
34G
R 153
A
X
1
3
LEFT FRONT DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Destination
0,35
34G
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
0,5
0,5
0,35
20D
20C
34H
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
1YE D1
BA
34H
20C
X
X
20D
X
34G
X
R 153
3
89C - 85
vnx.su
1
B
A
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
LEFT FRONT DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
X
R 155
20C
X
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 155
20C
X
89C - 86
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
RIGHT REAR DOOR / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > UCE DECODER
20D
X
20C
R 156
X
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
20D
X
R 156
20C
X
89C - 87
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
HATCHBACK / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
13A
2
3
4
0,5
0,35
2,0
65A
L
15B
CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK CONTACT
UCE ANTI-INT RUSION CONTROL > HATCHBACK CONTACT
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
R 157
1
2
13A 6 5 A
3
L
4
15B
X
X
X
X
HATCHBACK WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
2,0
Destination
13A
65A
65A
L
15B
CONTROL + CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > HATCHBACK CONTACT
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON HOOD)
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON AILERON)
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
4
15B
R 157
X
3
2
1
L 65A 13A
X
X X X
89C - 88
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89C
B41
01
CONNECTIONS
BRAKE PADS WEAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,35
H12
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR - CONTROL
BA
H12
R 89
X
BRAKE PADS WEAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
0,35
0,35
H12
H12
BRAKE PADS WEARINDICATOR – CONTROL > RIGHT PAD
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL > LEFT PAD
BA
H12
X
X
R 89
89C - 89
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
(EURO 2000)
LINK
CODES
A
AP10
AP11
AP15
AP29
B
BCP3
BP11
BP17
BP2
BP3
BP37
BP7
BP76
BPR1
C
CPD
CPG
D
H1
H12
H17
H66P
H7
HK
HL
L
LPD
LPG
M
ML
N
NF
R
RPD
RPG
S
SP3
TB1
2JD
3AC
3AJ
3AQ
3B
3BB
3BG
3BL
3BU
3BV
3BW
3BX
3C
WIRE FUNCTIONS
SUPPLY + AFTER CONTACT
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT>OUTLET FUSE F01
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03 ENGINE RUNNING
+ BATTERY
+ PROTECTED BATTERY, CEILING LAMPS
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > COCKPIT 1
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F01
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY> WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING IN A FIXED POSITION
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F15
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F04
+ PROTECTED BATTERY FUSE 1 MOTOR FAN
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > LIGHTING CONTROL
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > OUTLET FUSE F17> RELAY
+ MEETING LIGHTS(LOW BEAM)
+ MEETING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ MEETING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL- HANDBRAKE INDICATOR, BRAKING CIRCUIT ICP
CONTROL-BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
CONTROL+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
RPM METER SIGNAL
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE L
+ PARKING LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ PARKING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
ELECTRIC MASS
BATTERY ELECTRIC MASS
ELECTRONIC MASS
MASS: WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR, AIR, POTENTIOMETER
+ ROAD LIGHTS( HIGH BEAM)
+ ROAD LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ ROAD LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ ACCESORIES
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES > CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
SIGNAL+ VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
ENGINE RPM SIGNAL > RPM SENSOR
SIGNAL - RPM ENGINE > RPM SENSOR
CONTROL 1 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 2 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 3 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 4 IDLING REGULATOR
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
89C - 90
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
3CR
3CS
3CT
3CU
3CV
3CW
3D
3DQ
3F
3FH
3FN
3GF
3GG
3GH
3GJ
3GK
3GL
3GN
3GT
3JK
3JL
3JN
3JP
3JQ
3NA
3NA1
3NR
3S
8A
8B
8DP
9A
9B
9C
9DP
9M
11A
13A
13C
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
14K
14L
15A
15B
15LP
16A
20C
CONTROL- INJECTOR 1
CONTROL- INJECTOR 2
CONTROL- INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- INJECTOR 4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 1-4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 2-3
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR> SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL-INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
RPM SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL- UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
CONTROL- DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
MASS UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
MASS DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ACTUATORS RELAY MASS
- WATER TEMPERATURE
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
CONTROL - STEP 1 MOTOR FAN RELAY
CONTROL- STEP 2 MOTOR FAN RELAY
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
+ IGNITION COIL, CHOCK SENSOR> PETROL PUMP RELAY
+ PETROL PUMP
+ INJECTORS> ACTUATORS RELAY OUTPUT
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
+ FOG HEADLAMPS RELAY
+ FOG HEADLAMPS > RELAY
+ PROTECTED FOG HEADLAMPS
+ REAR FOG LAMPS RELAY CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LAMPS
SHUNT> FOG LAMPS SWITCH
CONTROL + ROAD LIGHTS
CONTROL - CEILING LAMPS> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL> CEILING LAMPS
CONTROL + LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + HIGH SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER FIX POINT STOPPING
CONTROL LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING INDICATOR CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + PROTECTED REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING
89C - 91
vnx.su
89C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89C
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
20D
20F
28A
31A
34A
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
34G
34H
38AH
38AJ
38AK
38AL
38AS
38DH
38K
38N
38R
38U
38X
38Y
41A
42A
47A
47F
49B
49C
49F
49L
64A
64AP
64B
64C
64D
64E
64F
64P
65A
67A
67C
80BC
80BD
80CA
80DA
80E
80FC
80T
80X
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
RADIO-FREQUENCY RECEPTION SIGNAL
CONTROL - OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
CONTROL –WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 2
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 3
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 4
AC CONTROL
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
AC CONTROL RELAY > UCE INJECTION
CONTROL + AC CLUTCH RELAY> AC PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL + AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
- MINIMUM LEVEL FUEL WARNING
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER LOW SPEED RESISTANCE
SUPPLY + TURNING
+ PROTECTED TURNING LIGHTS
CONTROL + TURNING RELAY
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL + TURNING INDICATOR
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED SIGNALING
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING FUSE
+ INERTIA CONTACT
FLASH RELAY CONTROL
RIGHT FRONT ULTRASONIC EMISSION
LEFT FRONT ULTRASONIC DETECTION INFORMATION
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR CONTROL
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CONTROL – ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING RECEIVER SIGNAL ROUTE
89C - 92
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
89D
GENERALPRESENTATION
From the electric point of view, the electric diagrams of the vehiclehave been structured as
AppliedPrincipleSchemes(APS), which are presentedaccording to the function eachsystemof
thevehicle is having, from electricpoint of view. TheseAPSdiagramsalsocontaindetail concerning
the internal function of some simpleelectric components (contacts,relays), thus contributing to a
better understandingof the systemfunctioning and of the incident correct diagnosis.
The list of thefunctionaldiagrams is presentedin Chapter 2, where the vehicle AppliedPrinciple
Schemesmay be found. These are divided in: electric supply diagrams, massconnectiondiagrams
and systemfunctional diagrams.
The electric functional diagrams (APS), arepresentedin Chapter7 and on these,thefollowing
may be identified:
- electric components, marked by a 3-4 figures; their identification on the electricdiagrams
can be achievedby means of “index of components” – Chapter 3;
- couplings betweenthe electricwires, marked by the letterR followedby figures;they are
indicatedin the Chapter 4 list;
- mass connections,marked by the letterM followed by a figure or a letter,are indicated
in Chapter 4.
Each wire of the electric diagrams is marked by an alphanumeric code, representingthe wire
function,followed by figuresrepresentingthe wire sectioning.
The connectors and couplings betweenthe wires are presentedin Chapter 11, where they are
drawn from the wires inlet to the connector/coupling. The wires entering each connector socket
are identified by meansof the above-mentioneddrawings.The Chapter 11 also includestables
with details about each wire entering the connector: wire locationin the connector socket,wire
sectioning,wire functioncode and its destination.
Chapter10 includes the indexof wire functions in connectors and couplings, representingthe
listof all the connectors and couplings and helping to their easy identificationin Chapter 12.
The massand coupling positionon the vehicleis presentedin Chapter 5 and helps to identify
the electric mass fixing points on it and the locationof the couplings betweenits wires.
The electric components positionon the vehicleis presentedin Chapter 6. The positionof the
various components with electric functions on the vehicle can beidentified by means of the
components list.
The cockpit fuse box is presentedin Chapter 8 and containsinformation about its positioning,
the functionalpurpose of the fuse and their relays and the description of the wiring connectors
connectedto this one.
89D -1
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
The fuse box from the engine compartment is presentedin Chapter9, that contains information
about its positioningon the vehicleand the functional purposeof the relaysand fuse placed on it.
The functionalcodes of the wires are detailedexplainedin Chapter 12.
FUNCTIONALDIAGRAMS INTERPRETATIONS
The functionaldiagrams information included in Chapter 7 are to be interpreted taking into
considerationthe explanationreferring to the followingexample:
1 = vehicleclass
2 = manufacturingyear
3 = electric functional diagramdenomination
4 = criteria of equipment differentiation for identifying thefunctional diagram
5 = electric connector colour*
6 = connector graphical representation
7 = electric component index number
8 = fuses box number where the relay or the safety fuse are mounted.
9 = identificationof the safety fuse on the fusesbox
10 = safety fuse value
11 = identificationof wiring joints
12 = electric massidentification
13 = electric connectioncolour betweenwires*
14 = electric connectionidentification
15 = electric connectiongraphicalrepresentation
16 = symbol (sign) pages containingfunctional diagrams
17 = wire function code
18 = wire sectioning
19 = functionaldiagramnumber
1.
The electric connectors (5) and the couplings(13) are symbolisedby the followingcolours:
BA = white
GR = grey
RG = red
NO = black
MA= brown
CY= white
BE = blue
VE = green
89D -2
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
BLOWER COOLING
89D -3
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
GENERALITIES
INTERPRETATION OF CONNECTORS WIRES FUNCTION INDEX
The informationconcerningthe function of the wires in connectorsand couplings included in
Chapter 11, are to be interpretedtaking into account the explanationsbased upon the following
example:
1 = symbol (sign)of the pages containingconnectorsand couplings
2 = connector destination
3 = vehicleclass
4 = manufacturingyear
5 = name of the wiring on which the respectiveconnector is placed
6 = wire colour
7 = connector code
8 = component to whom the described connector is to be connected
9 = connector colour
10 = connector symbol
11 = indicationof the connector socket
12 = wire sectioning(mm˝)
13 = wire functionalcode
14 = wire destination
15 = chapter number and connectordrawing number
NOTE
Concerning position 6, please note that one X is marked, for one wire and two Xs for two
wires. The colour of the wire is to be symbolised only in case the electric track of the wire
representsone of the fundamentalstatuses: + permanent (+IC), + after contact(+DC), mass(-)
or controls.
The symbolsused for the wire colours are as follows:
A = white
AS= blue
GR= grey
N = black
G = yellow
V = green
M= brown
VI = violet
R = red
89D -4
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
GENERALITIES
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
DETONATION SENSOR
1
11
CY2AE
12
MA
1
3DQ
13
X
146
2 5
3
2
3S
X
6
14
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,5
0,5
Destination
3DQ
3S
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATION INFO INJECTION
COMPUTER
ATMOSPHERIC PESSURE SENSOR
7
ZW3DT
A
8
147
9
VE
B
3GN
X
3F
X
88 - 07
89D -5
vnx.su
C
10
3D
X
15
4
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
( after 15.02.2002)
NR.
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS DENOMINATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
ANTI-INTRUSION E2(O), E3
DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING E1, E2, E3
ANTI-STARTING
S
ELECTRIC LIGHTER E1, E2, E3
S
CLIMATE CONTROL E0, E1, E2(serie)
S
CLIMATECONTROL AND AIR CONDITIONING E1(O), E2(O), E3
CEILING LIGHTING
S
ASHTRAY LIGHTING E0
S
ASHTRAY AND DOCUMENT COMP.LIGHTING E1, E2, E3
CLOCK
PRE-EQUIPPING E0
S
PRE-EQUIPPING E1, E2
PRE-EQUIPPING E3
STARTING CIRCUIT
S
ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E0, E1(series), E2(series)
S
ENGINE COOLING CIRCUIT E1(AC), E2(AC), E3
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E0
S
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E0
S
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(series), E2(series)
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(series), E2(series)
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(AC), E2 (AC), E3
ELECTRONIC INJECTION E1(AC), E2 (AC), E3
ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT
S
MASS
S
MASS 2 E0
S
MASS 2 E1(series)
MASS 2 E1(AC)
MASS 2 E2 (series)
MASS 2 E2(AC), E3
MASS 3 E0, E1, E2 (series)
S
MASS 3 E0, E1, E2 (series)
S
MASS 3 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
MASS 3 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
MASS 4 E0, E1, E2 (series)
S
MASS 4 E2(anti-intrusion), E3
MASS 5 E0, E1(series), E2(series)
S
MASS 5 E1(AC), E2(AC), E3
FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E0
S
FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(series)
89D -6
vnx.su
E0 E1 E2 E3
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
X
S
S
S S
S S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S S
S
O S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
O
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS LIST
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E1(AC)
FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E2 (series)
FUSE BOX AND COCKPIT RELAYS E2(AC), E3
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E0, E1(series)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E0, E1(series)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E1(AC)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E1(AC)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(series)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(series)
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(AC), E3
FUSE BOX AND ENGINE RELAYS E2(AC), E3
HANDBRAKEINDICATOR ANDBRAKING SYSTEM FAILURE
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR CIRCUIT
FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR CIRCUIT
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
INSTRUMENT PANEL E0
INSTRUMENT PANEL E1, E2, E3
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E0
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT E1, E2, E3
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR CIRCUIT
VEHICLE SPEED
SOUND WARNING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING
REAR FOG LAMP
FOG HEADLIGHTS
MEETING LIGHTS
REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
PARKING LIGHTS
ROAD LIGHTS
STOP LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (aileron)
STOP LIGHTS E2 (anti-intrusion), E3
TURNING AND HAZARD LIGHTS E0, E1, E2(series)
O
X
S
X
O S X
S
X
S
O
X
O
S
X
S
O S X
O S
S S S X
S S S X
S S S
S S S X
S S S X
X
S S S X
S
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Note : theseelectric diagrams are valid for vehicleswho respectdepollutionnorms EURO96
and EURO 2000 manufactured after15.02.2002; E0 (Europa), E1 (Confort), E2 (Rapsodie),
E3 (Clima) representequipping levelsof the vehicle.
89D -7
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS INDEX
(after 15.02.2002)
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
21
101
102
103
104
105
107
113
120
121
122
123
124
125
128
137
138
139
140
141
145
146
147
149
155
156
160
163
168
171
172
173
175
176
177
180
181
184
185
188
189
190
a191
192
193
194
195
196
199
205
209
210
212
Right signalling anti-return diode
Electric lighter
Ashtray
Alternator
Anti-theft system
Acoustic alarm
Battery
Windscreen wiper timer
Injection computer (UCE)
Fog lights switch
Fog headlights switch
Door closing switch
Climate blower switch
Hazard switch
Rear window defrosting switch
Turning signalling relay
Right rear door actuator
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Right front door actuator
Windscreen wiper-washer switch
Detonation sensor
Atmospheric pressure sensor
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
Handbrake contact
Stop contact
Starter
Documents compartment lighting lamp
AC compressor clutch
Right rear lamp
Left rear lamp
Left fog lamp
Right fog headlight
Left fog headlight
Left front door contact
Right front door contact
Right front parking lamp
Left front parking lamp
Cooling motor fan
Right rear loud speaker
Left rear loud speaker
Right front door loud speaker
Left front door loud speaker
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Fuel level transmitter and electric pump
Oil pressure contact
Lights, turning lights and horn switch
Electronic clock
Windscreen wiper motor
CODE COMPONENT DENOMINATION
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
230
231
234
236
238
242
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
294
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
474
503
584
597
600
639
649
654
700
778
857
887
927
993
1091
1202
1335
1428
Right front brake pad
Left front brake pad
Windscreen washing pump
Valve potentiometer
Diagnostic socket
Right headlamp
Left headlamp
Fog lamps relay
Fog headlights control relay
Cooling motor fan control relay
Fuel pump control relay
Actuators relay
Downstream oxygen sensor
Injection water temperature sensor
Instrument panel
Vehicle speed transducer
Right front turning lamp
Left front turning lamp
Cockpit fuse and relays box
Radio
Cooling motor fan and AC
Right side signalling lamp
Left side signalling lamp
Injection air temperature sensor
Rear window defrosting timer
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
Motor fan resistance ( for AC)
Right front ceiling lamp
Canister purging valve
UCE anti-intrusion
Engine hood contact
Siren
Volumetric sensor
AC relay ( on board)
UCE decoder
AC compressor clutch control relay
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Climate control blower
STOP-S3 lamp
Step-by-step engine
Anti-starting bushing
Cooling blower low speed control relay
Ignition coil
FLASH relay
Upstream oxygen sensor
Chock sensor
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Braking system ICP
AC pressure sensor (pressure controller)
Front ashtray lighting
Climate control blower control relay
89D -8
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COUPLINGS LIST. MASS INDEX
89D
( after 15.02.2002)
COUPLINGLIST
R53
R89
R107
R157
R212
R265
R318
=BATTERYMASS WIRING/MASS STRIPE (A) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR (B) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD (C) COUPLING
= REAR WIRING/HATCHBACK(H) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE (J) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/REAR (K) COUPLING
= FRONT WIRING/DASHBOARD(M) COUPLING
MASS LIST
M6 = REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING MASS
MA = RIGHT FRONT BODY MASS
MB = LEFT FRONT BODY MASS
ME = ELECTRIC MASS ATWINDSCREEN WIPER ATTACHMENT
MH = ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
ML = LEFT FRONT LONGITUDINAL GIRDER ELECTRIC MASS
M M = ELECTRIC MASS AT THE STEERING COLUMN
MZ = LEFT REAR BODY MASS
MYH= LEFT HATCHBACK MASS
89D -9
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
MASS ATTACHMENTS ON THE VEHICLE
89D -10
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
89D
(after 15.02.2002)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Injector 1
Injector 2
Injector 3
Injector 4
Atmospheric pressure sensor
Detonation sensor
Starter
Injection air temperature sensor
Valve potentiometer
Step-by step engine
Alternator
Ignition coil
Canister purging valve
AC pressure sensor(pressure controller)
Diagnostic socket
AC compressor clutch
Upstream oxygen sensor
Cooling blower and AC
Blower resistance for AC
Oil pressure contact
Injection computer
RPM sensor
Reverse driving contact
AC compressor clutch control relay (E)
Water temperature sensor
Blower lower speed control relay (B)
Engine compartment fuse and relays box
Motor fan control relay ( C)
Fog headlamps control relay(A)
Fuel pump control relay (H)
Actuators relay(D)
Chock sensor
89D -11
vnx.su
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Windscreen wiper timer
FLASH relay
Climate control lighting
AC starting button
AC relay ( on board)
Right front door actuator
Right rear door actuator
Right front door loud speaker
Right rear loudspeaker
Fuel level transmitt
er and electric pump
Trunk lighting lamp
Left rear loud speaker
Left rear door actuator
Left front door actuator
Left front door loud speaker
Right front door contact
Right volumetric sensor
Left volumetric sensor
Right front ceiling lamp
Handbrake contact
Anti-starting bushing
Anti-intrusion indicator LED
Left front door contact
UCE decoder
Siren
Vehicle speed transducer
Engine hood contact
Doors closing switch
UCE anti-intrusion
Downstream oxygen sensor
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
LOCATION OF ELECTRIC COUPLING ON THE VEHICLE
89D -12
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
89D
( EURO 2000)
The cockpit fuse box is placed left side under dashboard, being attachedon the interior side
of the door(1). To access the fuses, turn the knob (2), then open up the door towards exterior.
1
2
The fusesare protectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Clock, radio, STOP contact, climate blower relay control
F01
15A
F02
5A
F03
15A
F04
7,5A
F05
5A
Front/rear parking lights, lighting: switches, instrument panel, climate
control, documents compartment, lighter, ashtray, radio.
F06
15A
Lighter, clock, instrument panel ( anti-starting indicator), front right
ceiling lamp, UCE anti-intrusion, nati-intrusionindicator, diagnostic socket.
F07
15A
UCE decoder, FLASH relay, anti-starting bushing
F08
20A
Rear window defrosting
F09
15A
Climate blower
F10
5A
Reverse driving contact
UCE decoder, speed transducer, instrument panel supply, diagnostic
socket, AC starting button, UCE anti-intrusion
Hazard and turning signaling lights
Left fog lamp
89D -13
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
On the fuse box, 6 fusiblefuse modulesare attached,protectingthe followingconsumers:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE TYPE
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
F11
10A
Left road lights
F12
10A
Right road lights, road lights indicator
F13
10A
Left meeting lights
F14
10A
Right meeting lights, meeting lights indicator
F15
15A
F16
10A
Windscreen wiper-washing switch,
windscreen wiper timer
Radio, windscreen wiper motor
89D -14
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Connector C0
1. Fog lamp switch ♦fog lamp relay control
2. Parking lights ♦inlet fuse F 1
3. Outlet fuse F10 ♦ left fog lamp
Connector C1
1. Outlet fuse F01 ♦ climate blower relay control
2. Outlet F09 ♦ climate blower
Connector C2
A1. Rear windowdefrosting switch ♦ rear windowdefrosting timer control
A2. Mass
A3. Outletfuse F06
B1. Outlet fuse F09 ♦ rear window defrosting
B2. Free
B3. Outlet fuse 07 ♦ UCE decoder, anti-starting bushing, FLASH relay
Connector C3
A1. Lights switch ( + parking) ♦ inlet fuse F05
A2. Outlet fuse F05 ♦ + parking
A3. Free
A4. Free
B1. Mass
B2. Mass
B3. Turning lights switch( signaling relaycontrol )
B4. Free
89D -15
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
COCKPIT FUSE BOX
Connector C4
A1. Anti-theft mechanism( position M) ♦ inlet fuse F03)
A2. Outletfuse F01
A3. Hazard switch ♦inlet fuse F04
B1. Outlet fuse F03
B2. Anti-theft mechanism(positionM) ♦ inlet fuse F02
B3. Outlet fuse F02 ♦ reverse driving contact
I = DC ( after contact )
J = IC ( before contact)
R1 = fog lamp control relay
R2 = climateblower control relay
RT = rear window defrosting timer
RS = turning signaling relay.
89D -16
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
A. for equipping E0, E1, E2
( after 15.02.2002)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shock absorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
25A
Cooling blower ( vehicles without AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F02
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
C
D
H
15A
30A
30A
30A
Cooling blower
CONTROLLED Fog
CIRCUIT
headlamps (vehicle without
AC)
Injectors, canister purging valve, Fuel pump
Ignition coil
oxygen sensor heating
resistance, injection computer.
89D -17
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
FUSE BOX FROM ENGINE COMPARTMENT
B. For equipping E2(0), E3
( after 15.02.2002)
The fuse box placed in the engine compartment is attachedin front of the left shockabsorber
columnand containsrelays and fusibleprotectingthe followingelectriccircuits:
FUSE
NUMBER
FUSE
TYPE
F01
30A
PROTECTED CIRCUIT
Injectors, oxygen sensor resistance heating, canister
purging valve, injection computer, fuel pump, ignition coil.
F02
40A
Cooling blower ( vehicles with AC)
F03
7,5A
Injection computer ( + DC)
F04
5A
Injection computer( (+IC)
F17
15A
Fog headlights
F06
7,5A
AC compressor
RELAY
RELAYTYPE
A
B
C
D
E
H
15A
40A
30A
30A
30A
30A
CONTROLLED Fog
Cooling
Cooling
CIRCUIT headlamps blower- 1/st blower- 2/
speed(vehicles nd speed
with AC)
(vehicle
with AC)
Injectors, canister purging
valve, oxygen sensor
heating resistance,
injection computer.
89D -18
vnx.su
AC
Fuel
compressor pump
Ignition
coil
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
(after 15.02.2002)
Connect.
Denomination
101
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
103 HA ALTERNATOR
103 HB ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
104
ANTI-THEFT MECHANISM
105
ACOUSTIC WARNING
113
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles without AC)
120
UCE INJECTION( for vehicles with AC)
121
FOG LAMPS SWITCH
122
FOG HEADLAMPS SWITCH
123
LOCKING DOORS SWITCH
124
BLOWER SWITCH
125
HAZARD SWITCH
128
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
138
RIGHT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
139
LEFT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
140
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
141
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
145
WINDSCREEN WIPER-WASHING SWITCH
146
DETONATION SENSOR
147
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
149
RPM SENSOR
155
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
156
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
160
STOP CONTACT
163 GA STARTER
163 AB STARTER EXCITATION
166
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
167
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
168
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
171
AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
172
RIGHT REAR LAMP
173
LEFT REAR LAMP
175
LEFT FOG LAMP
176
RIGHT FOG HEADLIGHT
177
LEFT FOG HEADLIGHT
180
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
181
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
184
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
185
LEFT FRONT PARKING LAMP
188
COOLING FAN MOTOR ( for vehicles without AC)
189
RIGHT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
190
LEFT REAR LOUD SPEAKER
191
RIGHT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
192
LEFT FRONT DOOR LOUD SPEAKER
193
INJECTOR 1
194
INJECTOR 2
195
INJECTOR 3
89D -19
vnx.su
Page
89-145
89-118
89-118
89-125
89-133
89-121
89-98
89-100
89-140
89-140
89-142
89-138
89-142
89-141
89-147
89-147
89-146
89-146
89-121
89-110
89-111
89-108
89-107
89-154
89-131
89-118
89-119
89-155
89-155
89-145
89-116
89-152
89-152
89-154
89-131
89-132
89-154
89-154
89-132
89-132
89-117
89-151
89-151
89-148
89-148
89-113
89-114
89-114
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
196
199
200
205
209
210
212
216
217
221
222
225
226
227
242
244
247
250
255
256
260
261
262
267
268
272
298
319
321
329
371
427
438
442
454
454
474
503
560
597
597
600
639
639
649
654
778
857
887
927
993
INJECTOR 4
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
OIL PRESSURE CONTACT
CLIGHTS, TURNING LIGHTS, HORN SWITCH
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PAD
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PAD
WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DIAGNOSTIC SOCKET
RIGHT HEADLAMP
LEFT HEADLAMP
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SPEED TRANSDUCER
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LAMP
LEFT FRONT TURNING LAMP
COCKPIT FUSE AND RELAYS BOX
RADIO
COOLING MOTOR FAN (for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
LEFT SIDE SIGNALING LAMP
INJECTION AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
AC STARTING BUTTON
MOTOR FAN RESISTANCE ( for vehicles with AC)
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
SIREN
RIGHT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR(Rx)
LEFT VOLUMETRIC SENSOR (Tx)
AC RELAY (on board)
UCE DECODER
HATCHBACK CONTACT
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles without AC)
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX ( for vehicles with AC)
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
STOP-S3 LAMP (on roof)
STOP[ -S3 LAMP (in aileron)
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
IGNITION COIL
FLASH RELAY
SUPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
CHOCK SENSOR
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
89D -20
vnx.su
89-115
89-153
89-156
89-107
89-122
89-136
89-131
89-135
89-135
89-133
89-113
89-143
89-133
89-133
89-120
89-108
89-143
89-125
89-134
89-134
89-127
89-136
89-116
89-134
89-135
89-112
89-139
89-139
89-117
89-153
89-110
89-150
89-126
89-126
89-149
89-149
89-137
89-123
89-156
89-103
89-105
89-138
89-155
89-155
89-112
89-124
89-109
89-124
89-109
89-111
89-149
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
WIRE FUNCTIONS INDEX IN CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS
1033CA BATTERY PLUS PLUG
1091
ICP BRAKING SYSTEM
1202
AC PRESSURE SENSOR
1335
FRONT ASHTRAY LIGHTING
MH 121 ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
MOTOR FAN MASS
89-120
89-135
89-115
89-145
89-119
89-119
R 89
R 107
R 157
R 212
R 265
R 318
89-166
89-159
89-165
89-163
89-161
89-157
FRONT WIRING/ BRAKE PADS WEAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
REAR WIRING/ HATCHBACK COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ ENGINE COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ REAR COUPLING
FRONT WIRING/ DASHBOARD COUPLING
OBSERVATIONS:
-Connectors and couplings are representedbackwards (from wires forward).
-Some electric components are not connectedto the vehicle wiring by means of multiple-way
connectors, but by means of protectedindividualplugs. For illustrating the type of the respective
plug, the followingsymbols are to be used:
Plug mother 6 mm
Plug father 6 mm
Plug mother broachΦ 3mm
Plug father broachΦ 3mm
Plug mother8mm
Plug mother flag6,3mm
89D -21
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
(After February 15th 2002)
89D -22
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
1
3
4
8
9
12
13
15
16
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
39
41
42
43
44
45
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
65
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
89
90
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
1,0
1,0
89D
B41
02
Destination
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GL
3GK
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3GG
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3GJ
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
3CU
3CS
CONTROL- CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CONTROL- BLOWERRELAY
CONTROL -WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ASS
M
ATMOSPHERICPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGN
AL -LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
CONTROL- CYLINDERS1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL –ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITIONPOTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORSIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSORSIGNAL
SIGNAL+AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLESPEEDSIGNAL
SIGNAL -ENGINERPM >RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL-LINEK
INJECTIONCODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
CONTROL-DOWNSTREAM OXYG
EN SENSOR HEA
TING
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
- AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSORSUPPL
>
Y+
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CONTROL- INJECTOR4
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
89D -23
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D -24
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
89D
B41
02
Destination
1
3
4
8
9
10
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,5
3CW
M
3BB
3JN
31A
38K
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
24
26
28
29
30
32
33
34
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
53
54
56
58
59
60
63
65
66
68
70
72
73
74
75
76
0,6
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,5
0,5
0,6
0,35
2,0
0,35
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
0,6
3BU
3C
3GN
3F
38X
TB1
3S
3BL
HL
M
AP29
BP37
3CV
M
3FH
3JP
3GT
3BV
3BW
3AJ
3GL
3GK
38AS
3B
47F
3BG
HK
H17
3CR
3CT
3GF
3GG
3NR
3AC
H7
3BX
3JK
3AQ
3JL
3GJ
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 2-3 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
CONTROL - BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL - WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM STOPPING CONTROL >
INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 1
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE L
MASS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F04
CONTROL - CYLINDERS 1-4 IGNITION COIL
MASS
CONTROL – ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR
CONTROL – BLOWER RELAY TR.2
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 2
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 3
SIGNAL +VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
SIGNAL +AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
SIGNAL - ENGINE RPM > RPM SENSOR
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE K
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTER
CONTROL – INJECTOR 1
CONTROL – INJECTOR 3
CONTROL - UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
CONTROL - DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
+INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - FUEL PUMP RELAY
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
IDLE RUNNING REGULATOR CONTROL 4
- WATER TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL + VALVE POTENTIOMETER
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
89D -25
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
77
78
79
80
82
83
89
90
0,6
0,35
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
Destination
3JQ
3D
3DQ
3GH
38U
38Y
3CU
3CS
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR > SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR MASS
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL - INJECTOR 4
CONTROL – INJECTOR 2
89D -26
vnx.su
B41
02
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP17
R
R
D5
3NR
A-VI
D1
BP17
D4
D2
3GT
R-N
B
R
E4
B
R
R
E1
AS-R
D3
BP17
R
S3
G
G
AP29
H1
AP29
3NA
A-V
A
H4
H2
3AC
G
M-G
H3
BP17
A
R
R
E3
597
2
8DP
R
BPR1
V
A1
8A
A4
A2
M
A
N
B
BPR1
R
R
1
S2
49B
R-V
A
BP7
C1
3NR
C4
C2
3JN
A-V
OR
B
R
BP7
E2
R-V
89D -27
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
B41
02
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
1,5
1,5
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
INJECTIONCOMPUTER> ACTUATORSRELAYCONTROL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
1,5
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINESAFETYRUNNINGRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
89D -28
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
(FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM EQUIPPED VEHICLES)
NO
S4
BP37
S1
BP17
3NR
R
R
A-VI
D1
BP17
D4
D2
3GT
R-N
B
B
R
R
E1
R
E4
E1
3NR
E4
R
H1
AP29
E2
38K
G
597
BP17
S3
G
G
AP29
E5
38R
V
AS-R
3NA
A-V
A
H4
H2
3AC
G
V-M
M-G
A
E3
BPR1
R
A
E3
S6
2
A
R
BPR1
BPR1
BP17
R
8DP
V
A1
8A
A4
A2
M
A
B
B
A-R
R
E6
1
S2
BP7
BPR1
R
49B
A
49L
R-G
R-G
R-V
B1
3NR
B4
A
B2
3JN
OR
C1
3NR
C4
C2
3JP
A-V
M- R
B3
C3
BP7
R-G
R-V
B
R
E2
N
89D -29
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
Pos. Sectioning
B41
02
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A5
B1
B2
B3
B5
C1
C2
C3
C5
D1
D2
D3
D5
E1
E2
0,5
0,5
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
2,0
2,0
0,6
0,6
4,0
5,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
5,0
0,5
0,5
8A
M
BPR1
8DP
3NR
3JN
BP7
49L
3NR
3JP
BP7
49B
BP17
3GT
BP17
3NR
3NR
38K
E3
E5
H1
H2
H3
H5
H5
E1
E1
S1
E2
S2
1,0
1,0
0,6
0,6
5,0
2,0
1,4
5,0
0,6
5,0
5,0
2,0
BPR1
38R
AP29
3AC
BP17
3NA
3NA
B
B
BP17
B
BP7
S2
E3
S3
S3
E4
S4
1
2
E6
S6
4,0
1,0
0,6
0,35
0,6
0,6
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
BP7
A
AP29
AP29
B
BP37
B
BPR1
B
BPR1
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
MASS
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F17> RELAY
+ PROTECTED FUSE > FOG
LAMPS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
- BLOWERRELAY, TR.1
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
BLOWERCOOLING RESISTANCECONTROL
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL– BLOWER RELA
Y, TR.2
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
ACTUATORS RELAY CONTROL, IN
JECTIONCOMPUTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
AIR CONDITION
ING SYSTEM STOPPING CONT
ROL >
INJECTIONCOMPUTER
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR > FUELPUMP RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F04
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F01
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF02,BLOWER
COOLING
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F02
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT
+PROTECTEDD.C.> ENGINERUNNINGSAFETYRELAY
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F01
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F04
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE O
UTLETF17>RELAY
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY > FUSE OUT
LET F06> RELAY
89D -30
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
02
REVERSE DRIVING CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,60
DRIVING
2
0,60
OUTLET F02
Destination
AP11
H66P
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT, REVERSE
LIGHTS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING
LIGHTS > FUSE
OIL TRANSMITTER CONTACT
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,35
Destination
28A
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR – CONTROL
89D -31
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B1
B2
0,35
0,60
0,60
Destination
42A
3JK
3C
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
- WATERTEMPERATURE
SIGNAL +WATERTEMPERATURE SENSOR
RPM SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BG
3BL
ENGINERPM SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
ENGINERPM -SIGNAL >RPM SENSOR
3BG
A
149
X
3BL
B
89D -32
vnx.su
X
B41
02
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
Pos.
Sectioning
A
B
C
D
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3GF
3GK
3GH
+ INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL- UPSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORHEATING
UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL
UPSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
NO
A
887
3NR
A
B
C
3GF 3GK
SA
V
D
3GH
A-VI
IGNITION COIL
Pos.
A
B
C
Sectioning
2,0
2,0
2,0
Destination
3CV
3CW
3NA
CONTROL – CYLINDERS 1-4 IGNITION COIL
CONTROL– CYLINDERS2-3 IGNITIONCOIL
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOK
E3 SENSOR > FUELPUMP
RELAY
89D -33
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
CANISTER PURGING VALVE
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3NR
3BB
+ INJECTORS >ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CANISTER PURGINGVALVE CONTROL
CY13C
NO
371
1
3NR 3BB 2
X
X
DETONATION SENSOR
Pos.
1
2
4
Sectioning
0,50
0,50
0,50
Destination
3S
3DQ
TB1
SIGNAL+ DETONATION SENSOR
DETONATION SENSOR MASS
DETONATIONSENSORSCREENING
CY2AE
146
MA
1
2
3S
X
3DQ
X
89D -34
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
CHOKE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
3
1,40
1,40
Destination
3NA1
3NA
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE SENSOR
+ IGNITIONCOIL, CHOKESENSOR >FUEL PUMP
RELAY
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,35
0,35
0,35
Destination
3GN
3F
3D
Atmospheric pressure sensor mass
Atmospheric pressure sensorsignal
Atmospheric pressure sensor > Supply +
89D -35
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
0,60
0,60
Destination
3B
3JQ
SIGNAL +AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MASS
STEP-BY-STEP ENGINE
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
D
0,60
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
3BV
3BU
3BW
3BX
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL2
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL1
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL3
IDLERUNNING REGULATORCONTROL4
CM1PE
NO
A
3BV
B
C
3BU
3BW 3BX
D
649
X
X
X
89D -36
vnx.su
X
B41
02
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
VALVE POTENTIOMETER
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
Destination
0,60
0,60
0,60
3JL
3AQ
3AJ
VALVE POTENTIOMETER MASS
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
CM1PE
NO
222
A
B
C
3JL
3AQ
3AJ
X
X
X
INJECTOR 1
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CR
+ INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 1
CY2AE
193
BA
1
2
3NR
X
3CR
X
89D -37
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
02
INJECTOR 2
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CS
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 2
CY2AE
BA
1
194
2
3NR 3CS
X
X
INJECTOR 3
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CT
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 3
CY2AE
BA
1
195
2
3NR 3CT
X
X
89D -38
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
INJECTOR 4
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,0
1,0
Destination
3NR
3CU
+ INJECTORS > ACTUATORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL –INJECTOR 4
CY2AE
BA
196
1
2
3NR
X
3CU
X
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Pos. Sectioning
A
B
C
0,60
0,60
0,60
Destination
38U
38Y
38X
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
+ FREONPRESSURESENSOR
FREONPRESSURESENSORSIGNAL
NO
38X
X
38Y
X
1202
89D -39
vnx.su
89D
38U
X
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
Pos. Sectioning
1
1,0
Destination
38R
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSORCLUTCH
NO
171
38R
X
AIR CONDITIONING AND BLOWER COOLING
(FOR AIRCONDITIONING EQUIPPED VEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
2
2,0
5,0
5,0
Destination
49B
49B
M
CONTROL+ BLOWER COOLING> BLOWER RESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
MASS
89D -40
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89D
B41
02
BLOWER COOLING
(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
1,5
1,5
Destination
M
49B
MASS
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
BLOWER RESISTANCE
(FOR AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPPED VEHICLES)
Pos. Sectioning
1
2
2
2
Destination
49L
49B
CONTROL + BLOWER COOLING RESISTANCE
CONTROL+ BLOWERCOOLING
89D -41
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
B41
02
ALTERNATOR
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
5,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F02
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
B
R
R
103 HA
ALTERNATOREXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
0,6
Destination
2JD
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
CA13E
2JD
X
103 HB
STARTER
Pos. Sectioning
1
1
16,0
16,0
Destination
B
B
+ BATTERY
+ BATTERY>+ ALTERNATOR
SL8C
163 GA
B
R
R
89D -42
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
ENGINE WIRING
89D
B41
02
STARTER EXCITATION
Pos. Sectioning
1
3,0
Destination
D
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
CS6PI
6,3 MM
D
163 AB
A
BLOWER MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
5,0
Destination
M
MASS
M
N
ENGINE ELECTRIC MASS
Pos. Sectioning
1
4,0
Destination
ML
INJECTION COMPUTER MASS (PINS 3, 28 AND 33)
SR 8L
ML
N
MH - 121
89D -43
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
ENGINE WIRING
BATTERY TERMINAL + (PLUS)
Pos Sectioning
1
1
1
Destination
16,0
5,0
1,0
B
B
B
+ BATTERY> + STARTER
+ BATTERY > FUSES INLETF01, F04
+ BATTERY > FUSE INLE
T F06
RG
B
R, R
A-R
1033CA
DOWNSTREAM OXYGENE SENSOR
Position Sectioning
A
B
C
D
Destination
1,0
1,0
0,60
0,60
3NR
3GG
3GL
3GJ
+ INJECTORS > ACTUA
TORS RELAY OUTLET
CONTROL - DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
DOWNSTREAMOXYGEN SENSORSIGNAL
DOWNSTREAMOXYGENSENSOR MASS
CM1PE
242
NO
A
3NR
B
3GG
C
3GL
D
3GJ
X
X
X
X
89D -44
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER – WASHING SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
WIPER
3
CONTROL
4
5
WIPER
6
7
0,5
0,75
16A
AP7
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT, WINDSCREEN
0,75
14D
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER LOW SPEED
1,0
1,0
14K
AP7
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT, WINDSC
REEN
0,75
0,5
14L
14C
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING ON
PRESET POSITION
BA
145
1
16A
2
AP7
V-A
M
3 4
5
6
14D 14K AP7 14L
X
X
R
7
14C
X
X
WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0,5
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
M
16A
14D
14E
AP7
14C
MASS
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
WINDSCREEN WIPER IMER
T
LOW SPEEDCONTROL
CONTROL + WIN
DSCREEN WIPER TIMER
+ AFTERPROTECTEDCONTACT, WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON
PRESETPOSITION
NO
5
AP7
A
1
M
N
113
4
14E
X
6
14C
3
14D
X
X
89D -45
vnx.su
2
16A
V
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
HORN, TURNING AND LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,0
0,5
1,0
64C
64B
64D
B
9M
67A
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ BATTERY
SHUNT > FOGLIGHTS SWITCH
CONTROL +ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
209
3
67A
2
9M
X
X
64D
64B
64C
X
X
X
0,75
3,0
0,75
0,75
B
M-AS
A
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
B1
B2
1
B
L
B
C
R
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
+ BATTERY
+ LOW BEAMLIGHTS
+ HIGHBEAMLIGHTS
BA
209
2
R
1
C
X
X
B
M
89D -46
vnx.su
B
L
X
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
U.C.E. DECODER
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
F03
A8
A9
B1
B2
SWITCH
B3
B4
B5
SWITCH
B6
B7
B8
B9
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
13C
80X
HK
HL
80T
H17
AP15
CEILING LAMP CONTROL
ANTI-STARTER RECEPTOR SIGNAL TRACK (TR)
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL - LINE L
ANTI-STARTING CONTROL-INDICATOR
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET
0,35
1,0
0,35
0,35
M MASS
BP3
+ PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F07
20F
RADIO FREQUENCY RECEPTION SIGNAL
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING >
0,35
0,35
0,35
80BD
13A
20C
0,5
0,5
20C
20D
FLASH RELAY CONTROL
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING> DOORSCONTACTS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING >
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
GR
20D20C 20C
13A
80BD
20D
20F
NO
B
503
A
X
X
BP3
M
AP15
R
N
8
9
X
X
H17
80T
HL
HK
A
X
G
X
7
6
5
4
89D -47
vnx.su
N-A
X
X
80X
13C
X
X
X
3
2
1
CY
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
ANTI-STARTING BUSHING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
20F
M
BP3
80X
RADIOFREQUENCYRECEPTIONSIGNAL
MASS
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSEOUTLET F07
ANTI-STARTING RECEPT
OR SIGNALTRACK (TR)
GR
654
1
20F
X
2
M
N
3
BP3
4
80X
R
X
FLASH RELAY
Position Sectioning
Destination
1
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
2
0,35
80BD
FLASHRELAYCONTROL
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FLASHRELAY
3
0,5
BP3
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F07
4
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
5
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
* For Anti-intrusion System equipped vehicles
5
0,5
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS >U.C.E. ANTI-IN
TRUSION
SYSTEM> DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING/ UNLOCKING
INFO
NO
5
64D
X
857
1
BP3
4
64C
2
80BD
R-A
X
N-A
3
BP3
R-A
R-A
89D -48
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
VEHICLE SPEED TRANSDUCER
Position Sectioning
1
F03
2
3
Destination
0,35
AP15
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET
0,35
0,35
47F
M
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
MASS
BA
AP15
A
1
47F
X
250
2
M
N
3
INTRUSION SYSTEM
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
1,5
4,0
S
A
B1
B2
4,0
3,0
B
D
+ ACCESSORIES > COCKPIT FUSES INLET F01, F15
SUPPLY+AFTER CONTACT > COCKPITFUSES INLET
F02, F03AND ENGINE FUSEINLET F03
+ BATTERY
+ STARTER CONTROL
BA
104
D
B
A
M
A
S
R
M-V
2
89D -49
vnx.su
1
B
A
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
ENGINE HOOD CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
A
B
0,35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CONTROL– CEILINGLAMPS LIGHTING> ENGINE
HOOD CONTACT
CA 13E
NO
M
A
N
13A
B
438
X
SIREN
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,5
0,5
0,35
BP11
M
80FC
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY > SIREN
MASS
SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
CM1PE
442
NO
3
80FC
2
M
1
BP11
G-AS
N
R
89D -50
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
FRONT WIRING
89D
B41
02
COCKPIT RELAYS AND FUSE BOX
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
3
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
9B
L
9DP
9DP
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMP
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS> FOGLAMPSWITCH
BA
260
3
9B
X
X
2
L
1
B P11
VI
X
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
F01
2
0,5
AP10
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET
1,5
SP3
+ PROTECTEDACCESSORIES> CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
BA
260
2
SP3
R
1
AP10
A-G
89D -51
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A3
B1
B1
B2
B3
0,35
0,5
0,5
1,5
2,0
0,35
15LP
M
BCP3
BCP3
15B
15A
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
MASS
+ CEILINGPROTECTED BATTERY
+ CEILINGPROTECTEDBATTERY>FUSE OUTLETF06
CONTROL + REARWINDOW DEFROSTING
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
1,0
BP3
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY >FUSE OUTLET F07
* For Anti-intrusion equipped vehicles
B3
1,0
BP3
+ WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING
ON PRESET
POSITIONPROTECTEDBATTERY>SIREN
BA
260
BP3
15B
R
X
X
BCP3
M
15LP
R-AS
AS
N
M-V
3
2
B2
B3
A
1
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B
0,75
0,50
0,75
L
L
L
+ PARKING LIGHT
S > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
0,5
0,5
M
M
MASS
MASS > FOG LAMPS RELA
Y, CLIMATE CONTROL
BLOWERRELAY, REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGTIMER
1,0
64B
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
BA
64B
M
B
V
L
260
L
A
X
4
3
2
89D -52
vnx.su
1
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
1,5
1,5
1,0
1,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
A
AP10
64AP
AP15
A
AP11
SUPPLY + D.C.
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS,FUSEINLETF04
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SUPPLY + D.C. > COCKPIT FUSE INLE
T F02
+ REVERSEDRIVINGLIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
BA
260
AP11
A
AP15
V
R
A
64AP
AP10
A
X
R-G
R-A
3
2
B
A
1
Position Sectioning
3,0
Destination
B + BATTERY > FUSES INLET F06, F07, F08, F09
NO
B
260
AS
Position Sectioning
1,5
1,5
89D
Destination
S
S
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET F01 COCKPIT
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET
F15 COCKPIT
BA
S
M-V
R
260
89D -53
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
Destination
0.75
R
0,75
R
F11
BA
R
X
X
+ HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
INLET F11
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE N
I LET F12
R
X
F12
F12
F11
0,75
R
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS > FUS
E INLET F12
RPD
X
X
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
0,35 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
RPG
X
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS >FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F14
0,75
C
LOW BEAM LIGHTS > FUSE
OUTLET F14
F13
0,75 CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F13
F14
0,75 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,35 CPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > INDICATOR
C
X
X
C
F13
X
CPG
X
CPD
X
X
S
R
AP7
F15
1,5
S
+ ACCESSORIES > FUSE INLET F01
F15
1,0
F16
0,75
F16
0,75 BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F16
0,75 BP11 + PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
R
B
AP7 + WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTED D.C.
B
+ BATTERY
AS-A
260
89D -54
vnx.su
BP11
AS-A
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR
Pos
Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
1,0
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
14K
14E
14L
BP11
BP11
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL +WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F16
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > HORNS
BA
3
14
1
14K
4
BP11
A
R
2
14E
X
X
X
212
STOP CONTACT
BA
AP10
Destination
GR
1 1,0 AP10
D.C. > FUSE OUTLET F01
+ PROTECTED
65A
160
2
1,0
X
65A CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
RIGHT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0.75 8B
+ FOG LAMPS > RELAY
2
0,75 M
MASS
M
176
89D -55
vnx.su
N
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT FOG LAMP
BA
8B
Destination
X
1
0,75 8B
+ FOG LAMPS > RELA
Y
2
0,75
MASS
M
M
N
177
RIGHT FRONT PARKING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0,5
L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
184
LEFT FRONT PARKING LIGHT
BA
Destination
L
X
1
2
0,5
0,5
L
M
+PARKINGLIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
M
N
185
89D -56
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
ACOUSTIC WARNING
BA
67A
Destination
X
1
1,0
67A
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING
105
WINDSCREEN WIPER PUMP
BA
Destination
1
2
0,35
0,5
M
MASS
16A CONTROL + WINDSCREEN
WASHING
221
M
N
1
PUMP
16A 2
X
RIGHT HEADLIGHT
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPD + PROTECTED RIGHT LOW BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
0,75 RPD PROTECTED RIGHT HIGH BEAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F12
CD8F
226
BA
1
M
2
CPD
X
N
3
RPD
X
LEFT HEADLIGHT
Destination
1
2
3
1,0
0,75
M MASS
CPG PROTECTED LEFT LOW BEAM LIGHTS
> FUSE OUTLET F13
0,75 RPG PROTECTED LEFT HIGH B EAM
LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F11
89D -57
vnx.su
CD8F
227
BA
1
M
N
2
CPG
X
3
RPG
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
RIGHT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
255
LEFT FRONT TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
256
RIGHT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64D
Destination
X
1
0,5
64D
2
0,5
M
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
267
89D -58
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
FRONT WIRING
LEFT FRONT SIDE TURNING LIGHT
BA
64C
Destination
X
1
0,5
64C
2
0,5
M
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
M
MASS
N
268
I.C.P. BRAKING SYSTEM
BA
Destination
1
0,35
H1
CONTROL –ICP, HAND BRAKE
INDICATOR
H1
1091
X
RIGHT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
216
H12
X
LEFT FRONT BRAKE PADS
NO
Destination
1
0,35 H12
CONTROL – BRAKE ADS
P
WEAR
INDICATOR
89D -59
vnx.su
217
H12
X
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
ELECTRONIC CLOCK
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
0,35
0,35
0,35
L
AP10
BCP3
4
5
6
0,35
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT . FUSE OUTL
ET F01
+ CEILINGLAMPSPROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE
OUTLET F06
MASS
BA
6
5
4
M
210
N
3
2
1
BCP3
AP10
L
AS
R
X
RADIO
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
34D
34C
34E
34F
34G
34H
34A
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
BA
1
34D
X
261
2
34C
X
3
34E
5
34G
7
34A
X
X
X
4
34F
6
34H
8
34B
X
X
X
89D -60
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
RADIO
Position Sectioning
4
6
7
8
0,75
0,75
0,75
0,5
Destination
BP11
L
AP10
M
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > COCKPIT FUSE BOX
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F01
MASS
NO
1
3
5
7
AP10
AS-A
2
261
4
BP11
6
A-AS
X
8
M
L
N
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY (ON BOARD)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1
2
3
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
38DH
38DH
38AH
38DH
38AS
CONTROL +AIR CONDITIONING
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
SHUNT >CONTROL +AIR CONDI
TIONING
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
NO
5
38AS
X
1
38DH
38AH
V
4
2
X
V
3
38DH
474
V
89D -61
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
1,5
1,0
1,5
1,5
Destination
SP3
38AH
38AJ
38AK
ACCESSORIESPROTECTED CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED1
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED2
CONTROL +CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER SPEED3
BA
2
38A H
600
1
SP3
X
R
4
38AK
3
38AJ
X
X
BLOWERSWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
1*
1,0
0,5
38AH
38AH
2
3
4
5
1,5
1,5
0,35
1,5
38AJ
38AK
L
M
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER, SPEED 1>
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMRELAYCOIL(ONBOARD)
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
2
CONTROL+ CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER, SPEED
3
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEINLETF05
MASS
1* - for air conditioning systemequippedvehicles
BA
X
124
X
X
89D -62
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
89D
B41
02
CLIMATE CONTROL LIGHTING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0,35
0,5
L+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
M
MASS
NO
298
2
M
1
L
N
X
AIR CONDITIONING STARTING BUTTON
Position Sectioning
1
F03
2
3
4
Destination
0,5
AP15
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET
0,5
0,5
0,5
M
L
38DH
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ AIR CONDITIONING
BA
2
M
319
1
AP15
N
AS
4
38DH
L
V
X
3
89D -63
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
FOG LIGHTS SWITCH
Destination
Position Sectioning
2
4
5
6
7
9
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
9DP
9DP
9M
L
M
9DP
9B
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
+ PROTECTED REAR FOGLIGHTS > FOGLIGHT SWITCH
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > + PROTECTEDREAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL+ REARFOG LIGHT
NO
9
9B
121
2
9DP
4
9M
X
X
X
5
L
X
7
9DP
Vi
X
6
M
N
FOG LAMP SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
Destination
L
8A
L
M
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
CONTROL+ FOGLAMPS RELAY
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
NO
1
122
L
2
8A
X
R-A
4
M
N
3
L
X
89D -64
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
89D
B41
02
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING SWITCH
(Pulse type)
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
Destination
AP15
15LP
15LP
L
M
15LP
+ PROTECTED D.C. > FUSE OUTLET F03
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
+ PROTECTEDREAR WINDOWDEFROSTING
+PARKING LIGHT
S > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > PROTECTE
D REAR WINDO
W DEFROSTING
NO
4
M
5
15LP
128
A-R
1
2
AP15 15 LP
V
R A-R
N
3
L
X
89D -65
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
HAZARD SWITCH
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1,0
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,0
1,0
Destination
AP15
B
64C
64D
L
M
64F
64B
64AP
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F03
+ BATTERY
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
+PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLETF04
NO
1
AP15
R
2
B
3
64D
AS
X X
9
6 4 AP
125
4
64D
8
64B
GR
5
L
X
7
64F
6
M
V X N
DOORS LOCKING SWITCH
Position Sectioning
5
1
1
2
3
4
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
Destination
20D
M
M
20C
L
M
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
PARKING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F05
SHUNT > MASS
NO
123
5
20D
1
M
X
2
20C
X
4
M
N
3
L
X
89D -66
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
DIAGNOSIS SOCKET
Position Sectioning
1
F03
4
5
7
15
16
Destination
0,35
AP15
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
M
N
HK
HL
BCP3
MASS
ELECTRONICMASS
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL– LINEL
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE O
UTLET F06
NO
8
7 6
HK
5
4
N
X
N
16 15
14
BCP3
HL
225
R
13
3
M
2
1
AP15
N
12 11
G
10
9
X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
8
9
10
0.35
0,75
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
L
M
M
15A
RPD
H7
AP15
AP15
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
MASS
SHUNT > MASS
REARWINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR– CONTROL
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLE
T F03
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
M
M
64D
64C
SHUNT > MASS
SHUNT > MASS
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
BA
247
10
64C
X
9
8
64D M
N
X
N
7
6
5
4 3
2
AP15 H7
RPD 15A
M
Vi
X
X X
R
89D -67
vnx.su
1
L
N
N
X
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
DASHBOARD WIRING
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0.35
0.6
64F
31A
AP15
M
H1
H12
41A
M
2JD
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICA
TOR
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR – CONTROL
SHUNT > +AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
SHUNT > MASS
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
BRAKE PADSWEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
FUELLEVELWARNINGSIGNAL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
BA
247
9
2JD
8
M
X
X
7
41A
6
H1 2
5
H1
4
M
X
X
X
N
0.35
0.35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
R
CPD
80T
BCP3
3FH
28A
42A
X
PROTECTED RIGHTLOWBEAMLIGHTS> INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING INDICA
TOR - CONTROL
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY> FUSEOUTLETF06
ANTI-POLLUTION FAILURE INDICA
TOR – CONTROL
OIL PRESSURE INDICA
TOR –CONTROL
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
BA
247
X
1
64F
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
AP1 5 3 1 A
6
42A
5
28A
4
3FH
3
BCP3
X
X
X
AS
89D -68
vnx.su
2
80T
X
1
CPD
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DASHBOARD WIRING
89D
B41
02
DOCUMENTS COMPARTMENT LIGHTING LAMP
BA
Destination
L
X
1
0.35
L
PARKING LIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET 0F5
168
2
0,5
M
MASS
M
N
ELECTRIC LIGHTER
BA
L
Destination
X
M
1
20,5
3
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET 0F5
M
MASS
0,75 BCP3 + CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED
BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
N
BCP3
101
AS
FRONT ASHTRAY LIGHTING
BA
L
Destination
1
0.35 L
PARKING LIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET 0F5
2
0,5
MASS
M
X
1335
M
N
89D -69
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
B41
02
RIGHT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.5
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
141
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.
0.5
Destination
20D
20C
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC LOCKING>ACTUATORS
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICUNLOCKING> ACTUATORS
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
140
20C
X
89D -70
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
B41
02
LEFT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
Position Sectioning
1
0.5
>ACTUATORS
2
0.5
ACTUATORS
Destination
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
20C
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING>
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
20C
139
X
RIGHT REAR DOOR ACTUATOR
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0.5
>ACTUATORS
2
0.5
ACTUATORS
20D
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
20C
CONTROL + DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING >
1 DBD1
BA
20D
X
138
20C
X
89D -71
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
DOORS WIRING
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
Destination
34E
34F
SIGNAL +RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER(RADIO)
SIGNAL -RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
191
X
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34G
34H
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
192
X
89D -72
vnx.su
B41
02
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
REAR WIRING
RIGHT VOLUME SENSOR (RX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80CA RIGHT FRONT ULTRASONIC EMISSION
N
ELECTRONIC MASS
NO
2
N
454
1
80CA
N
X
LEFT VOLUME SENSOR (TX)
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
80DA LEFT FRONT ULTRASONIC DETECTION INFO
N
ELECTRONIC MASS
NO
2
N
454
1
80DA
N
X
ANTI INTRUSION INDICATOR LED
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
BCP3
80E
+ CEILINGLAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY>OUTLETFUSE F06
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR CONTROL
NO
993
2
80E
1
BCP3
X
R
89D -73
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
REAR WIRING
U.C.E. ANTI-INTRUSION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,5
2
5
6
6
7
8
9
12
14
15
18
23
24
24
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION >
DOORSLOCKING/UNLOCKINGINFO
M
MASS
64D
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
BCP3 + CEILING LAMPPROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLETF06
BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
64C
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
80E
ANTI-INTRUSIONNDICA
I
TOR CONTROL
13A
CEILING LAMP LIGHTING –CONTROL> CONTACTS
AP15 + PLUSAFTER PROTECTED CONTACT> FUSEOUTLETF03
20D
CONTROL + DOORS LOCKING
> ACTUATORS
20C
CONTROL + DOORS UNL
OCKING >ACTUATORS
80FC SIRENCONTROLSUPPLY
80DA LEFT FRONT UL
TRASONIC DETE
CTION INFO
N
ELECTRONICMASS
N
MASS
BA
24
N
N
N
12
AP1 5
427
23
80D A
22
21
20
19
18
80FC
10
G
9
13A
8
M
7
64C
X
X
X
6
BCP3
R
R
0,35
0,35
5
64D
4
15
20C
14
20D
X
X
3
R
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
16
GR-VI
X
11
17
80CA
N
RIGHT FRONTULTRASONIC EMISSION
ELECTRONICMASS
NO
427
1
80CA
2
N
X
N
89D -74
vnx.su
13
2
M
1
64D
V-A
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
REAR WIRING
LEFT REAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34A
34B
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
190
X
RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0.35
34D
34C
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
NO
X
189
X
89D -75
vnx.su
89D
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
REAR WIRING
LEFTREAR LAMP
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
Destination
65A
64C
H66P
H66P
M
L
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL+ REVERSEDRIVING LIGHTS > FUSEOUTLET F02
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > RIGHT REARLAMP
MASS
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
BA
173
6
L
5
M
X
N
4
H66P
X
X
3
64C
2
65A
X
X
1
RIGHTREAR LAMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
3
4
5
6
0,5
0.5
0,5
0,5
0,5
L
M
H66P
64D
65A
+ PARKING LIGH
TS > FUSEOUTLET F05
MASS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLETF02
CONTROL +EVERSE
R
DRI
VING LIGHTSRIGHT
>
TURNING LAMP
CONTROL +STOP LIGHTS
BA
6
172
5
65A
4
64D
3
H66P
2
M
1
L
X
X
X
N
X
89D -76
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
REAR WIRING
RIGHT FRONT CEILING LAMP
BA
Destination
BCP3
1
2
V-A
0.35 BCP3 + CEILINGLAMPPROTECTEDBATTERY
0,5 13C CEILINGLAMPCONTROL
329
13C
X
FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER AND ELECTRIC PUMP
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A1
B1
C1
C2
C2
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
1,5
0,35
M
M
41A
3NA1
M
M
MASS > SHUNT
MASS > INSTRUMENT PANEL
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
MASS
MASS > SHUNT
BA
M
N
GR-V
41A
A
B
X
3NA1
199
A-R
1
89D -77
vnx.su
M
N
N
2
C
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
REAR WIRING
HANDBRAKE CONTACT
Destination
BA
H1
X
1
0.35
H1
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICA
TOR CONTROL
156
LEFTFOG LIGHT
NO
Destination
9DP
1
2
0.5
0,5
9DP
M
X
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
MASS
175
M
N
LEFT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35 13A
CEILINGLAMPLIGHTING CONTROL
> DOORS CONT
ACTS
180
RIGHT FRONT DOOR CONTACT
Destination
BA
13A
X
1
0.35 13A
CEILING LAMPLIGHTING
CONTROL > DOORS CONT
ACTS
89D -78
vnx.su
181
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
HATCHBACK WIRING
LEFT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
167
PARKINGLIGHTS> FUSE OUTLET F05
RIGHT LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Destination
BA
L
X
1
0.35 L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET
F05
1
0,35 L
+ PARKING LIGHTS > LEFT
LICENSE
166
PLATE LAMP
STOP LAMP S3
(ONROOF)
Destination
BA
65A
X
1
0.5
65A
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
639
STOP LAMP S3
(INAILERON)
BA
65A
Destination
X
1
2
0.5
0,5
65A
M
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
MASS
M
639
89D -79
vnx.su
N
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
01
HATCHBACK WIRING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
Destination
BA
15B
1
2,0
15B
CONTROL + HA
TCHBACK REAR
WINDOW DEFROSTING
200
X
HATCHBACK CONTACT
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
2
0.35
0,35
M
13A
MASS
CEILING LIGHTINGCONTROL> HATCHBACKCONTACT
ANTI-INTRUSION UCE > HA
TCHBACK CONTACT
1 DBD1
BA
M
A
560
13A
X
89D -80
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,5
0,50
34D
BCP3
8A
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
FUSE BOX > FUSE U
OTLET F06(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELA
Y
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
+ PROTECTEDTURNINGLIGHTS > FUSEINLET F04
CONTROL+TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL -RIGHT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
LEFTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > LIGHTS SWITCH
+ PARKING LIGHT
S – FUSE OUTLET F05
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES
SIGNAL - RIGHTFRONT SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
PROTECTED BA
TTERY > FUSE OUT
LETF16
CONTROL+ PROTECTEDREARWINDOW DEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTLETF03
MASS
+ BATTERY
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONTSPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKE
R (RADIO)
RIGHTPROTECTED MEETING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F14
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRICLOCKING > UCEDECODER
CONTROL REAR FOGLAMP
+ PROTECTED+ REAR FOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAK
ER (RADIO)
MA
D
C
B
R 318
A
34A
CPD
X
X
20C
X
34G
BP11
15LP
X
20D
9B
9DP
X
VI
X
34B
X
AP15
M
B
34H
AS-A
M-V
R
N
AS
X
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
X
X
X
X
X
R
X
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
X
AS
A
GR
X
X
1
2
3
5
6
7
89D -81
vnx.su
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
1,0
0,50
1,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,5
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,5
1,5
2,0
1,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
34D
BCP3
8A
64AP
64B
34C
34E
64C
64D
9M
L
SP3
34F
34G
BP11
15LP
AP15
M
B
34H
34A
CPD
20C
20D
9B
9DP
34B
SIGNAL+ RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SUPPLY(+IC)
+ FOG LAMPS RELAY
+ PROTECTED TURNINGLIGHTS
CONTROL+ TURNINGRELAY
SIGNAL- RIGHTREAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL+ RIGHT FRONTSPEAKER
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHTTURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SHUNT > FOG LAMP SWITCH
+ PARKINGLIGHTS
SORIES > CLIMATE CONTROLBLOWER
+ PROTECTED ACCES
SIGNAL -RIGHTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTFRONT SPEAKER
+ PROTECTED BA
TTERY> RADIO
CONTROL+ PROTECTED REARWINDOWDEFROSTING
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
MASS
+ BATTERY > HAZARD SWITC
H
SIGNAL -LEFTFRONT SPEAKE
R
SIGNAL +LEFTREAR SPEAKER
RIGHTPROTECTEDMEETING LIGHTS> INDICATOR
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICUNLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL+ DOORS ELECTRICLOCKING> SWITCH
CONTROL + REAR FOG
LAMP
+ PROTECTED REARFOGLIGHTS
SIGNAL -LEFTREAR SPEAKE
R
MA
34B
9DP
9B
20D
20C
CPD
34A
X
X
VI
X
X
X
X
34H
B
M
15LP
BP11
34G
X
AS
N
SP3
L
43F
R 318
AP15
R
9M
X
64D
X
R
34C
64B
X
X
GR
R-A
7
6
5
3
64A P
89D -82
vnx.su
X
V
AS-A
64C
X
D
C
34E
X
X
X
8A
BCP3
34D
AS
X
2
1
B
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD/FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C5
C6
C6
C7
0,5
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
WATER TEMPERATURE WARNING
OIL PRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H1
H12
2JD
47A
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HK
HL
HL
M
WATERTEMPERATURE SIGNAL
RPM-METER SIGNAL> INJECTION COMPUTER
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT > FUSE OUTL
ET F01
PROTECTEDRIGHTHIGHBEAM
LEFTTURNINGLIGHTS CONTROL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
ICP INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
- FUELMINIMALLEVELWARNING SIGNAL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS SIGNALLINE K> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK > UCEDECODER
DIAGNOSIS SIGNA
L LINE L> INJECTIONCOMPUTER
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEL > UCE DECODER
MASS
MA
M
C
X
3FH
X
X
64C
38AS
B R-G
X
X
X
64D
31A
28A
X
X
X
1
2
3
A
X
80T
RPD
AP10
R 107
41A
89D -83
vnx.su
HK
HL
H1
H12
M
N-G
2JD
X
X
H7
15A
X
X
X
5
6
7
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
DASHBOARD WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
0,35
0,35
0,35
64D
31A
28A
RIGHTTURNINGLIGHTSCONTROL> INDICATOR
INSTRUMENTPANEL> WATER TEMPERATUREWARNING
INSTRUMENT PANEL > OILPRESSURE W
ARNING
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,75
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,6
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
42A
H7
15A
AP10
RPD
64C
38AS
H1
H12
2JD
M
41A
3FH
80T
HK
HL
M
SIGNAL +WATER TEMPERATURE
RPM-METERSIGNAL
REAR WINDOWDEFROSTINGINDICATOR-CONTROL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONT
ACT
PROTECTED RIGHTHIGHBEAM> INDICATOR
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > INDICA
TOR
AIR-COND
ITIONINGCOMPRESSO
R CON
NECTIONSIGNAL > RELA
Y
ICP HANDBRAKEINDICATOR-CONTROL
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICA
TOR-CONTROL
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITA
TION > INSTRUMENT PANEL
- FUELMINIMALLEVELWARNING SIGNAL
SIGNAL+ FUELLEVELTRANSMITTER
ANTI-POLLUTIONINDICATOR-CONTROL
ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR-CONTROL
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINEK
DIAGNOSISSIGNALLINE L
MASS
MA
M
HL
N
2JD
R 107
X
H1 2
HK
80T
3FH
41A
M
X
X
X
X
X
H1
X
X
X
15A
H7
42A
38AS
X
64C
RPD
AP10
X
X
R-G B
28A
31A
64D
X
X
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
2
1
89D -84
vnx.su
C
A
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
REAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2*
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D6*
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL > TURNING SWITCH
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
34G
34F
M
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING SIGNAL
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL +REVERSE DRIVINGLIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP > CHOKE SENSOR
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY > FUSE OUTLET F06
CONTROL+ DOORSELECTRIC UNLOCKING> UCEDECODER
CONTROL +DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > UCE DECODER
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SIGNAL - RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
SHUNT > RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
FLASH RELAY DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > FUSE OUTLET F03
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CEILING LAMPS CONTROL
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPS LIGHTING > DOORS CONT
ACTS
CONTROL– CEILING LAMPSLIGHTING > HOOD CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER (RADIO)
A2*, D2* - for vehicles without Anti-intrusion System
D4, D6*- for Anti-intrusion System provided vehicles
MA
34B
X
34A
X
R 265
13A
X
20D
X
34H
15B
13C
X
80FC
AP15
G-AS
G
X
20C
BCP3
X
R-AS
A-
H66P
9DP
H1
R
M
X
X
3NA1
64D
41A
X
35C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
64C
65A
L
64D
34E
X
X
X
X
7
6
5
3
vnx.su
C
34F
34G
89D -85
D
34D
X
X
2
1
B
A
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
A1
A2
A2*
A3
A4
A5
A6
A6*
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0,35
0,5
0,5
0,5
34E
64D
64D
L
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTSCONTROL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
1,0
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,5
2,0
0,35
0,35
0,35
1,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
65A
64C
64C
34G
34F
M
H1
9DP
H66P
15B
34H
34D
41A
3NA1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
34C
64D
AP15
80FC
13C
13A
34B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL> UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
- FUEL MINIMAL LEVEL WARNING SIGNAL
ICP HANDBRAKE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LIGHTS
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
SIGNAL - LEFT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
+ FUEL PUMP
+ CEILING LAMPS PROTECTED BATTERY
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING > ACTUATORS
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING > ACTUATORS
SIGNAL + LEFT REAR SPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING/UNLOCKING SIGNAL > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > UCE ANTI-INTRUSION
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
RIGHT CEILING LAMP CONTROL
CEILIN G LAMPS LIGHTING CONTROL > HATCHBACK DOORS CONTACTS
SIGNAL - LEFT REAR SPEAKER
D2, D3, D4, A2*, A6* - for anti-intrus ion sy stem provided vehicles
MA
D
C
B
R 265
A
34C
64D
AP1 5
80FC
13C
13A
X
X
X
GR-VI
X
X
34D
41A
3NA 1
BCP3
20C
20D
34A
X
X
A-R
R-A
X
X
X
34F
M
H1
9DP
H6 6 P
15B
X
X
X
X
X
X
34E
64D
L
65A
X
X
3
5
X
1
2
89D -86
vnx.su
64C
34B
X
34H
X
34G
X
6
7
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C1
C2
C3
C4
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR-CONTROL
MA
D
AP11
R
R 212
28A
H17
47F
X
X
X
X
HL
HK
42A
X
X
X
X
X
X
38AS
2JD
A
3NA1
D
VI
R
A-R
A
3
2
1
6
5
89D -87
vnx.su
H7
31A
H66P
X
7
3FH
C
B
A
89D
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
ENGINE WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
Destination
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
3,0
1,5
1.0
D
3NA1
A
+ STARTER CONTROL
+ FUEL PUMP
SUPPLY + AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT
0,6
0,35
2JD
38AS
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION >INSTRUMENT PANEL
AIR-CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR CONNECTION SIGNAL
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,5
0,35
0,5
HK
HL
H7
42A
H66P
28A
AP11
C1
C2
C3
C4
0,35
0,35
0,35
0,35
31A
47F
H17
3FH
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL LINE L
RPM-METER SIGNAL > INJECTION COMPUTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
CONTROL + REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F02
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS AFTER PROTECTED
CONTACT > CONTACT
WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR-CONTROL
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL > ANTI-STARTING
ANTI-POLLUTION INDICATOR-CONTROL
A6 - For air-conditioning system provided vehicles
MA
D
31A
C
B
R 212
A
X
47F
X
H1 7
X
3FH
X
HK
HL
H7
42A
H6 6 P
28A
AP1 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
D
3NA 1
A
2JD
38AS
A
A-R
R
VI
X
1
2
3
89D -88
vnx.su
5
6
7
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
89D
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
HATCHBACK / REAR WIRING CONNECTION
REAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
CONT ACT
0,5
13A
CE IL ING L AMPS LIGH T ING CON T ROL > HATCHBACK
U CE A N T I- I NT RU SI O N CO NT RO L > H ATCH BA CK
CO N TA CT
2
3
4
0,5
0,35
2,0
65A
L
15B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
12
3
13A 65A
R 157
X
X
4
L
15B
X
X
HATCHBACK WIRING CONNECTION
Position Sectioning
1
CONTACT
2
2
3
4
Destination
0,35
13A
CONTROL + CEILIN G LA MPS LIGHTING > HATCHBACK
0,35
0,35
0,35
2,0
65A
65A
L
15B
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON HOOD)
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS (ON AILERON)
+ PARKING LIGHTS > FUSE OUTLET F05
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
NO
4
15B
R 157
X
3
2
L 65A
X
X X
89D -89
vnx.su
1
13A
X
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
89D
CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS WIRES FUNCTION
B41
02
CONNECTIONS
BRAKE PADS WEAR / FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
FRONT WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
1
0,35
H12
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR - CONTROL
BA
H12
R 89
X
BRAKE PADS WEAR WIRING CONNECTION
Destination
Position Sectioning
0,35
0,35
H12
H12
BRAKE PADS WEARINDICATOR – CONTROL > RIGHT PAD
BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR – CONTROL > LEFT PAD
BA
H12
X
X
R 89
89D -90
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
89D
(after 15.02.2002)
LINK
CODES
A
AP10
AP11
AP15
AP29
B
BCP3
BP11
BP17
BP2
BP3
BP37
BP7
BP76
BPR1
C
CPD
CPG
D
H1
H12
H17
H66P
H7
HK
HL
L
LPD
LPG
M
ML
N
NF
R
RPD
RPG
S
SP3
TB1
2JD
3AC
3AJ
3AQ
3B
3BB
3BG
3BL
3BU
3BV
3BW
3BX
3C
WIRE FUNCTIONS
SUPPLY + AFTER CONTACT
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT>OUTLET FUSE F01
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03
+ AFTER PROTECTED CONTACT > OUTLET FUSE F03 ENGINE RUNNING
+ BATTERY
+ PROTECTED BATTERY, CEILING LAMPS
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > COCKPIT 1
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F01
+ PROTECTEDBATTERY> WINDSCREEN WIPER STOPPING IN A FIXED POSITION
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F15
+ PROTECTED BATTERY> OUTLET FUSE F04
+ PROTECTED BATTERY FUSE 1 MOTOR FAN
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > LIGHTING CONTROL
+ PROTECTED BATTERY > OUTLET FUSE F17> RELAY
+ MEETING LIGHTS(LOW BEAM)
+ MEETING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ MEETING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ STARTER CONTROL
CONTROL- HANDBRAKE INDICATOR, BRAKING CIRCUIT ICP
CONTROL-BRAKE PADS WEAR INDICATOR
INJECTION CODED SIGNAL>ANTI-STARTING
CONTROL+ REVERSE DRIVING LIGHTS
RPM METER SIGNAL
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE K
DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL LINE L
+ PARKING LIGHTS
+ PARKING LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ PARKING LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
ELECTRIC MASS
BATTERY ELECTRIC MASS
ELECTRONIC MASS
MASS: WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR, AIR, POTENTIOMETER
+ ROAD LIGHTS( HIGH BEAM)
+ ROAD LIGHTS RIGHT PROTECTED
+ ROAD LIGHTS LEFT PROTECTED
+ ACCESORIES
+ PROTECTED ACCESSORIES > CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER
DETONATION SENSOR SCREENING
+ ALTERNATOR EXCITATION
CONTROL- FUEL PUMP RELAY
SIGNAL+ VALVE POSITION POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ VALVE POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL+ AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CANISTER PURGING VALVE CONTROL
ENGINE RPM SIGNAL > RPM SENSOR
SIGNAL - RPM ENGINE > RPM SENSOR
CONTROL 1 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 2 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 3 IDLING REGULATOR
CONTROL 4 IDLING REGULATOR
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
89D -91
vnx.su
89D
3CR
3CS
3CT
3CU
3CV
3CW
3D
3DQ
3F
3FH
3FN
3GF
3GG
3GH
3GJ
3GK
3GL
3GN
3GT
3JK
3JL
3JN
3JP
3JQ
3NA
3NA1
3NR
3S
8A
8B
8DP
9A
9B
9C
9DP
9M
11A
13A
13C
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
14K
14L
15A
15B
15LP
16A
20C
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
CONTROL- INJECTOR 1
CONTROL- INJECTOR 2
CONTROL- INJECTOR 3
CONTROL- INJECTOR 4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 1-4
CONTROL- IGNITION COIL CYLINDERS 2-3
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR> SUPPLY +
- DETONATION SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL-INJECTION FAILURE INDICATOR
RPM SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL- UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
CONTROL- DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR HEATING
MASS UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
MASS DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL UPSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
SIGNAL DOWNSTREAM OXYGEN SENSOR
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR MASS
ACTUATORS RELAY MASS
- WATER TEMPERATURE
- VALVE POTENTIOMETER
CONTROL - STEP 1 MOTOR FAN RELAY
CONTROL- STEP 2 MOTOR FAN RELAY
- AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
+ IGNITION COIL, CHOCK SENSOR> PETROL PUMP RELAY
+ PETROL PUMP
+ INJECTORS> ACTUATORS RELAY OUTPUT
SIGNAL + DETONATION SENSOR
+ FOG HEADLAMPS RELAY
+ FOG HEADLAMPS > RELAY
+ PROTECTED FOG HEADLAMPS
+ REAR FOG LAMPS RELAY CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS
CONTROL + REAR FOG LAMPS INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED REAR FOG LAMPS
SHUNT> FOG LAMPS SWITCH
CONTROL + ROAD LIGHTS
CONTROL - CEILING LAMPS> DOORS CONTACTS
CONTROL> CEILING LAMPS
CONTROL + LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + HIGH SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER FIX POINT STOPPING
CONTROL LOW SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER TIMER
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING INDICATOR CONTROL
CONTROL + REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + PROTECTED REAR WINDOW DEFROSTING
CONTROL + WINDSCREEN WASHING PUMP
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC UNLOCKING
89D -92
vnx.su
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS
WIRE FUNCTIONS EXPLANATION
20D
20F
28A
31A
34A
34B
34C
34D
34E
34F
34G
34H
38AH
38AJ
38AK
38AL
38AS
38DH
38K
38N
38R
38U
38X
38Y
41A
42A
47A
47F
49B
49C
49F
49L
64A
64AP
64B
64C
64D
64E
64F
64P
65A
67A
67C
80BC
80BD
80CA
80DA
80E
80FC
80T
80X
CONTROL + DOORS ELECTRIC LOCKING
RADIO-FREQUENCY RECEPTION SIGNAL
CONTROL - OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
CONTROL –WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT REAR LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – RIGHT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL + LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
SIGNAL – LEFT FRONT LOUDSPEAKER
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 1
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 2
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 3
CONTROL + CLIMATE CONTROL BLOWER SPEED 4
AC CONTROL
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
AC CONTROL RELAY > UCE INJECTION
CONTROL + AC CLUTCH RELAY> AC PRESSURE SENSOR
CONTROL + AC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
- FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
FREON PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
+ FREON PRESSURE SENSOR
SIGNAL + FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL + WATER TEMPERATURE
- MINIMUM LEVEL FUEL WARNING
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER RELAY
CONTROL + AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL + COOLING BLOWER LOW SPEED RESISTANCE
SUPPLY + TURNING
+ PROTECTED TURNING LIGHTS
CONTROL + TURNING RELAY
LEFT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
RIGHT TURNING LIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROL + TURNING INDICATOR
CONTROL + HAZARD INDICATOR
+ PROTECTED SIGNALING
CONTROL + STOP LIGHTS
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING
CONTROL + ACOUSTIC WARNING FUSE
+ INERTIA CONTACT
FLASH RELAY CONTROL
RIGHT FRONT ULTRASONIC EMISSION
LEFT FRONT ULTRASONIC DETECTION INFORMATION
ANTI-INTRUSION INDICATOR CONTROL
SIREN CONTROL SUPPLY
CONTROL – ANTI-STARTING INDICATOR
ANTI-STARTING RECEIVER SIGNAL ROUTE
89D -93
vnx.su
89D
Download PDF